Canon NP6045

SERVICEMANUALREVISION 1

FY8-13EL-010MAR. 1997

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

IMPORTANT

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OFREFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.

SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROMACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTEDMATTER.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TOTHE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAININFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should be

strictly supervised to avoid

disclosure of confidential

information.

Prepared by

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146 Japan

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) i

This Service Manual provides basic facts and figures needed to service the plainpaper copier NP6045 in the field. The NP6045 is designed to enable automated copyingwork and may be configured with the following system components:

1. Stapler Sorter-E2, Stapler Sorter-G1, Sorter-E1, Sorter-G12. RDF-H1

For descriptions on the system components, see their respective service manuals.

This Service Manual covers the copier only, and consists of the following chapters:Chapter 1 General Description introduces the copier's features and specifications,

shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made.

Chapter 2 Basic Operation provides outlines of the copier's various operationalworkings.

Chapter 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for thecopier's lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timingat which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 4 Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images areformed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved inimage formation are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 5 Pick-Up/Feeding System explains the principles used from when copypaper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions ofelectrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation.It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled andadjusted.

Chapter 6 Fixing System explains the principles used to fuse toner images totransfer media in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical unitsand in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these unitsmay be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 7 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms shows the copier's external parts, andexplains the principles used for the copier's various control mechanismsin view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relationto their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 8 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and showshow the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

Chapter 9 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced partsand consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection,standards/adjustments, and problem identification (imagefault/malfunction).

Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

INTRODUCTION

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and therelationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to thetiming of operation.

In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive—where asignal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the directionof the electric signal.

The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing thefront door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machinewith power.

2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signalis "High," while '0' is used to indicate "Low." (The voltage value, however, differsfrom circuit to circuit.)

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot bechecked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in themachines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to theinput of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to theloads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice forproduct improvement or other reasons, and major changes will be communicated in theform of Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of thisService Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify andisolate faults in the machine.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)ii

System Configuration

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) iii

Stapler Sorter-G1In addition to the functions of a 20-bin sorter, automatically staples sorted copies.

Sorter-G1Is a 20-bin sorter capable of automatic sorting and grouping.

Sorter-E1Is a 20-bin sorter capable of automatic sorting and grouping.

Stapler Sorter-E2In addition to the functions of a 20-bin sorter, automatically staples sorted copies.Further, it swings out copies to the front for removal, and is equipped with a multiple stacking function, in which two or more sets of copies may be delivered to a single bin.

RDF-H1Feeds originals one by one from a stack to the copyboard for copying.

NP6045

iv

blank page

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) v

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES.........................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS..............................1-2

1. Type..........................................1-22. System .....................................1-23. Performance.............................1-34. Others.......................................1-6

III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-9A. External View.................................1-9B. Cross Section ................................1-11

1. Cross Section of the Body .......1-11IV. OPERATIONS ....................................1-12

A. Control Panel.................................1-12B. Special Features Mode .................1-13C. User Mode.....................................1-14

1. Types of User Modes ...............1-14V. ROUTINE WORK BY THE USER......1-18VI. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-19

A. Outline ...........................................1-19

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................2-1A. Functional Construction.................2-1B. Outline of the Electric Circuitry......2-2C. Basic Sequence of Operations......2-4

1. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (1/2).....................2-4

2. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (2/2).....................2-5

3. Basic Sequence of Operations during Copying .........................2-7

4. Basic Sequence of Operations for Page Separation .................2-9

D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuit ....2-111. Outline ......................................2-112. Operations................................2-113. Detecting an Error ....................2-12

E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-13F. Outputs from the DC Controller.....2-21G. Inputs to and Outputs from the

Options ..........................................2-33

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................3-1A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE MECHANISM ...............3-2A. Moving the Lens ............................3-2

1. Outline ......................................3-22. Moving the Lens.......................3-33. Controlling the Lens Motors .....3-34. Moving the Lens.......................3-4

III. SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM.......3-6A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-6

1. Outline ......................................3-62. Relationship between Scanner

Sensor and Signals ..................3-73. Basic Sequence of Operations

for Scanner Movement.............3-84. Sequence of Operations for

Scanner Movement (page separation) ...............................3-9

5. Scanner Motor (M3) Control Circuit .......................................3-11

IV. OTHERS.............................................3-13A. Detecting the Size of Originals......3-13

1. Outline ......................................3-132. Operation..................................3-143. Sizes of Originals .....................3-15

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-17A. Scanner Drive System...................3-17

1. Removing the Scanner DriveAssembly Motor........................3-17

2. Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-19

3. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-20

4. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive System .............3-22

5. Positioning the Mirror ...............3-23

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)vi

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1A. Controlling the Surface Potential

of the Drum....................................4-11. Outline ......................................4-12. Control Method.........................4-23. Potential Measurement Circuit .4-5

B. Controlling the Scanning Lamp Intensity .........................................4-61. Outline ......................................4-62. Operations................................4-63. Automatic Exposure Control

(AE) ..........................................4-74. Check Points ............................4-9

C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current..............................4-101. Outline ......................................4-102. Controlling the Primary

Corona Current.........................4-103. Controlling the Transfer

Corona Current.........................4-11D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-

Transfer Corona Current ...............4-131. Outline ......................................4-132. Turning ON and OFF the

Separation/ Pre-Transfer Corona Current.........................4-15

3. Separation Corona Current (DC component) .......................4-15

4. Pre-Transfer Corona Current (DC component) .......................4-15

5. Controlling the DC ComponentOvercurrent of the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona Current ...4-16

E. Controlling the Blank Exposure Lamp (LEDs) .................................4-171. Outline ......................................4-172. Controlling the Activation in

Reduce Mode ...........................4-173. Controlling the Activation in

Direct Mode ..............................4-174. Controlling the Activation in

Sheet Frame Erasing Mode .....4-175. Controlling the Activation in

Original Frame Erasing Mode ..4-18

6. Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erasing Mode ......4-18

7. Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erasing Mode........4-19

8. Controlling the Activation of AE Mode...................................4-19

F. Drum Heater Circuit.......................4-201. Outline ......................................4-202. Idle Rotation of the

Photosensitive Drum and theDeveloping Cylinder .................4-22

G. Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire ...............................................4-231. Outline ......................................4-232. Operation of the Primary

Charging Wire Cleaning Wire...4-23H. Cleaning the Pre-Transfer,

Transfer, and Separation Charging Wires Automatically .......4-24

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-26A. Outline ...........................................4-26B. Detecting the Toner Level and

Controlling the Supply Operation ..4-27C. Controlling the Developing

Bias/Roller Electrode.....................4-291. Outline ......................................4-292. Control Timing ..........................4-293. Developing Bias Control

Circuit .......................................4-324. Roller Electrode Bias Control

Circuit .......................................4-33D. Detecting the Locking of the

Waste Toner Feeding Screw .........4-35III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-36

A. Scanning Lamp .............................4-361. Removing the Scanning Lamp.4-362. Removing the Thermal Fuse....4-37

B. Standard White Plate Assembly....4-38C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ...............4-40

1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit .................................4-40

D. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly ..4-41

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

6. Adjusting the Position of the Scanner ....................................3-24

B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-251. Removing the Lens Y Direction

Drive Motor...............................3-252. Removing the Lens Stage

Temporarily ...............................3-273. Installing the Light-Blocking

Belt ...........................................3-28

4. Removing the Lens X Direction Drive Motor...............................3-29

5. Attaching the Lens X Direction Drive Belt..................................3-30

6. Attaching the Light-Blocking Belt ...........................................3-30

7. When Replacing the Light-Blocking Belt.............................3-31

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) vii

1. Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly........................4-41

E. Photosensitive Drum .....................4-421. Removing the Drum Unit..........4-422. Replacing the Drum Heater......4-443. Installing the Photosensitive

Drum.........................................4-44F. Potential Sensor Assembly ...........4-44

1. Removing the Potential Sensor Assembly .....................4-44

G. Primary Charging Assembly..........4-451. Removing the Primary

Charging Assembly ..................4-45H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..4-45

1. Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..................4-45

I. Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .......................................4-461. Removing the Transfer/

Separation Charging Assembly..................................4-46

2. Installing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly..................................4-47

J. Charging Wire ...............................4-491. Outline ......................................4-492. Removing the Primary

Charging Assembly Wire Cleaner .....................................4-49

3. Installing the Charging Wire .....4-494. Routing the Grid for the

Primary Charging Assembly.....4-51

5. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire ..........................4-53

6. Cleaning the Primary ChargingAssembly Anti-Stray Toner Sheet ........................................4-54

K. Developing Assembly....................4-551. Removing from the Developing

Assembly..................................4-552. Removing the Blade Unit .........4-563. Installing the Blade...................4-564. Removing the Developing

Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal ..........................................4-57

5. Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti-Stray Toner Sheet ........................................4-59

L. Hopper Assembly ..........................4-601. Removing the Hopper

Assembly..................................4-60M. Drum Cleaner ................................4-61

1. Construction .............................4-612. Removing the Cleaning Blade..4-613. Installing the Cleaning Blade....4-624. Installing the Side Seal.............4-635. Cleaning the Cleaning Side

Scraper .....................................4-63N. Separation Claw/Separation

Claw Drive Assembly ....................4-651. Removing the Separation

Claw/Separation Drive Assembly from the Drum Unit ..4-65

O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly....4-66

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE .....5-3A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-3

1. Outline ......................................5-42. Sequence of Pick-Up

Operations................................5-4B. Cassette Lifter Operations.............5-5C. Detecting the Size of Copy

Paper in the Cassette....................5-71. Outline ......................................5-72. Detecting the Size of Paper .....5-73. Markings on the Width Guide

Rail ...........................................5-84. Paper Sizes ..............................5-95. Registering Paper Width Basic

Value.........................................5-10III. PICK-UP FROM THE PAPER DECK....5-11

A. Outline ...........................................5-111. Pick-Up Operations ..................5-12

2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations................................5-12

B. Lifter Operations............................5-131. Operations................................5-132. Deck Limit Detection ................5-14

C. Detecting Paper for the Deck ........5-151. Detecting the Presence/

Absence of Paper.....................5-152. Detecting the Deck Size...........5-15

D. High-Speed Pick-Up......................5-15IV. PICK-UP FROM THE

MULTIFEEDER...................................5-16A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-16B. Detecting the Size of Paper in

the Multifeeder...............................5-17C. Sequence of Operations

(multifeeder) ..................................5-18V. CONTROLLING THE

REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-19VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY

COPIES (1st SIDE) ............................5-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)viii

A. Two-Sided/Overlay Copy Operation.......................................5-201. Sequence of Operations for

Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (1st side) ......................5-21

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-221. Sequence of Operations for

Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) .................................5-23

C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-241. Outline ......................................5-242. Outline of Operations ...............5-253. Sequence of Operations for

Overlay Copies (2nd side)........5-27D. Reversal Delivery ..........................5-28

1. Sequence of Reversal Delivery Operations..................5-29

E. Switching Paper Sizes for Two-Sided/Overlay/Reversal Delivery Copies ...........................................5-301. Movement of the Paper Size

Guide........................................5-302. Movement of the Paper

Jogging Plate and the Rear Guide Plate...............................5-31

3. Detecting Copy Paper ..............5-32F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding

Tray................................................5-33G. Skipping.........................................5-34

1. Outline ......................................5-342. Operation..................................5-343. Skip Mode (copying an even

number of originals) .................5-354. Skip Mode (copying an odd

number of originals) .................5-375. Reverse Delivery ......................5-39

VII. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-40A. Outline ...........................................5-40

1. Registration Roller Delay Jam..5-432. Registration Roller Stationary

Jam...........................................5-433. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

0/1 Delay Jam ..........................5-444. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

0/1 Stationary Jam ...................5-445. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

2–4 Delay Jam .........................5-456. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

2–4 Stationary Jam ..................5-457. Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay

Jam...........................................5-468. Fixing Assembly Outlet

Stationary Jam .........................5-469. External Delivery Delay Jam....5-4710.External Delivery Stationary

Jam...........................................5-4711.Internal Delivery Delay Jam .....5-48

12.Internal Delivery Paper Stationary Jam .........................5-48

13.Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam ...5-4914.Holding Tray Inlet Stationary

Jam...........................................5-4915.Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Delay

Jam...........................................5-5016.Holding Tray Registration

Delay Jam ................................5-5017.Holding Tray Registration

Stationary Jam .........................5-5118.Holding Tray Feeding 1/2

Delay Jam ................................5-5119.Holding Tray Feeding 1/2

Stationary Jam .........................5-5220.Fixing Assembly Separation

Claw Stationary Jam ................5-52VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-53

A. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-531. Removing the Multifeeder

Assembly..................................5-532. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-543. Installing the Pick-Up Roller .....5-544. Removing the Separation

Roller ........................................5-555. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-576. Removing the Multifeeder

Paper Sensor ...........................5-587. Attaching the Side Guide

Timing Belt for the MultifeederAssembly..................................5-60

8. Installing the Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder..........................5-60

9. Adjusting the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller Pressure (multifeeder) ...5-61

10.Positioning the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid (multifeeder) .............................5-61

B. Paper Deck Assembly ...................5-621. Removing the Paper Deck

Assembly from the Copier........5-622. Removing the Lifter Cable........5-633. Changing the Deck Paper

Size ..........................................5-684. Adjusting the Registration for

the Deck ...................................5-70C .Cassette/Paper Deck Pick-Up

Assembly .......................................5-711. Removing the Pick-Up

Assembly from the Copier........5-712. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-713. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-734. Removing the Separation

Roller ........................................5-735. Adjusting the Separation

Roller Pressure.........................5-756. Orientation of the Separation

Roller ........................................5-76

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) ix

7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up Assembly ....................5-76

8. Position of the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid of the Deck .........................................5-77

9. Position of the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid for the Cassette ...................................5-77

10.Adjusting Registration for theCassette ...................................5-77

D. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly .......................................5-781. Removing the Pick-Up Vertical

Path Roller Assembly...............5-78E. Registration Feeding Assembly.....5-79

1. Construction .............................5-792. Removing the Registration

Feeding Assembly....................5-793. Removing the Registration

Roller (upper rubber) ................5-80F. Feeding Assembly.........................5-82

1. Construction .............................5-822. Removing the Fixing/Feeding

Unit ...........................................5-823. Removing the Feeding Belt......5-83

G. Holding Tray Assembly..................5-861. Construction .............................5-862. Removing the Holding Tray

Assembly from the Copier........5-873. Removing the Holding Tray

Re-Pick Up Assembly ..............5-874. Removing the Holding Tray

Registration Paper Sensor .......5-885. Removing the Re-Pick Up

Roller ........................................5-896. Removing the Holding Tray

Driver PCB ...............................5-897. Removing the Holding Tray Y

Motor ........................................5-90

8. Removing the Y Motor HomePosition Sensor ........................5-92

9. Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly ..........................5-92

10.Removing the FeedingRoller/Separation Belt Assembly..................................5-94

11.Removing the Feeding Roller...5-9512.Removing the Separation Belt

Assembly..................................5-9613.Adjusting the Pressure of the

Separation Roller of the Holding Tray .............................5-96

14.Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid ...................................5-97

15.Removing the Side Guide Plate .........................................5-97

16.Removing the Holding Tray X Motor ........................................5-98

17.Removing the Holding Tray Re-Circulating Motor ................5-98

18.Removing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid ...........5-99

19.Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate Assembly..................................5-101

20.Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide PlateAssembly..................................5-101

21.Attaching the Timing Belt for the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging Guide Plate ......5-102

22.Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid ...........5-102

H. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly ...5-1031. Removing the Holding Tray

Feeding Assembly from the Copier .......................................5-103

2. Removing the Sensor from theHolding Tray .............................5-104

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................6-1A. Outline ...........................................6-1B. Fixing Drive Assembly...................6-2C. Controlling the Fixing

Temperature ..................................6-3D. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Main Thermistor (TH1) ............6-8E. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Upper Separation Claw ...........6-9F. Fixing Heater SSR Error

Detection Circuit ............................6-10G. Locking the Fixing/Feeding Unit ....6-12H. Error Detection Circuit ...................6-13

1. Outline ......................................6-132. Scanning Lamp Error

Activation Detection Circuit ......6-143. Fixing Heater Error Activation

Detection Circuit .......................6-15II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-16

A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-161. Construction .............................6-162. Locking Mechanism..................6-163. Removing the Fixing Cleaning

Belt ...........................................6-174. Installing the Fixing Cleaning

Belt ...........................................6-19

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)x

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. CONTROL PANEL .............................7-1A. Outline ...........................................7-1B. Operation.......................................7-1

1. Data Communication................7-12. LCD Processing .......................7-23. LCD Contrast Automatic

Adjustment ...............................7-34. Touch Switch Input ...................7-4

II. FANS ..................................................7-5III. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-8

A. Outline of Power Supply................7-8B. Power Supply Circuit .....................7-9C. Power Supply for Date/Time

Display...........................................7-11IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-12

A. External Covers.............................7-121. Removing the Front Door.........7-132. Removing the Inside Upper

Cover ........................................7-153. Removing the Fixing/Feeding

Unit Front Cover .......................7-154. Removing the Rear Cover........7-165. Sliding Out the Hopper

Assembly..................................7-166. Removing the Process Unit......7-177. Installing the Process Unit........7-19

B. Control Panel.................................7-201. Removing the Control Panel

from the Copier ........................7-202. Removing the Control Panel

PCB ..........................................7-243. Removing the Touch Panel ......7-244. Removing the Control Panel

CPU PCB .................................7-25C. Door Switch Assembly ..................7-26

1. Removing the Front Door Switch Assembly ......................7-26

2. Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly .............7-27

3. Installing the Drum Heater Switch.......................................7-27

D. Fan Unit .........................................7-281. Removing the Scanner

Cooling Fan ..............................7-282. Removing the Air Exhaust

Fan ...........................................7-283. Removing the Fixing Air

Exhaust Fan .............................7-294. Removing the Developing

Fan ...........................................7-295. Removing the Cleaner Fan ......7-306. Removing the Feeding Fan......7-31

E. Removing the Counter Assembly..7-31F. Main Motor Assembly....................7-32

1. Removing the Main Motor ........7-32G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive

Assembly .......................................7-321. Construction .............................7-322. Removing the Waste Toner

Bottle ........................................7-333. Removing the Fixing/Waste

Toner Drive Assembly ..............7-33H. Drive Assembly (drum/

developing assembly)....................7-351. Construction .............................7-352. Removing the Drive Assembly .7-35

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly ........7-361. Construction .............................7-362. Removing the Vertical Path

Drive Assembly ........................7-37

5. Removing the Upper Fixing Unit ...........................................6-20

6. Removing the Fixing Heater.....6-227. Installing the Fixing Heater.......6-248. Removing the Upper Fixing

Roller ........................................6-249. Installing the Upper Fixing

Roller ........................................6-2610.Removing the Thermal Switch .6-2711.Removing the Main Thermistor

(TH1) ........................................6-2712.Removing the Lower

Separation Claw Assembly ......6-2813.Removing the Lower Roller......6-2914.Removing the Upper

Separation Claw .......................6-3015.Adjusting the Nip (tightening

the pressure adjusting nut).......6-3016.Adjusting the Fixing Clutch.......6-31

17.Removing the Sub Thermistor (TH2) Unit.................................6-32

B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-331. Construction .............................6-332. Removing the Delivery Upper

Guide (fixing delivery assembly) .................................6-33

3. Removing the Fixing/FeedingLocking Assembly ....................6-34

4. Removing the External Delivery Roller ..........................6-34

5. Removing the External DeliverySensor and the Internal Delivery Sensor ........................6-36

6. Removing the Fixing Assembly Outlet Paper Sensor Assembly..................................6-36

7. Removing the Internal Delivery Roller ........................................6-37

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) xi

J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly................7-391. Construction .............................7-392. Removing the Pick-Up Drive

Assembly..................................7-39K. Duplexing Unit Drive 1 Assembly..7-40

1. Construction .............................7-402. Removing the Duplexing Unit

Drive 1 Assembly .....................7-40L. Lifter Drive Assembly ....................7-41

1. Construction .............................7-412. Removing the Lifter Assembly .7-42

M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly .......................................7-431. Construction .............................7-432. Removing the Cassette

Pick-Up Drive Assembly...........7-43

N. Attaching the Drive Belt.................7-45O. DC Controller PCB ........................7-46

1. Removing the DC Controller PCB ..........................................7-46

2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB.............7-46

P. DC Power Supply Assembly .........7-471. Removing the DC Power

Supply Assembly......................7-47Q. High-Voltage Transformer

Assembly .......................................7-481. Remove the High-Voltage

Transformer Assembly .............7-48R. Power Supply Input Assembly ......7-49

I. SELECTING THE SITE......................8-1II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION....8-3

A. Unpacking......................................8-4B. Installing the Scanner....................8-6C. Installing the Fixing Assembly.......8-7D. Installing the AP Kit and the

Charging Assembly .......................8-9E. Installing the Copy Tray.................8-15

1. Replacing the Delivery Gear ....8-152. Replacing the Leaf Springs of

the Delivery Roller ....................8-16

F. Checking the Developing Assembly .......................................8-17

G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly....8-19H. Supplying Toner.............................8-20I. Setting Images/Functions and

User Mode.....................................8-24III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE...........8-28IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL

CARD V ..............................................8-29

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ...9-1II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES...9-2

A. Copier ............................................9-2B. RDF-H1 .........................................9-3

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING.................9-4IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART ...9-6

A. Copier ............................................9-6B. RDF-H1 .........................................9-8

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ..10-3A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................10-3B. Points to Note for Scheduled

Servicing......................................10-4II. STANDARDS AND

ADJUSTMENTS...............................10-5A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5

1. Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin ....................................10-5

2. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width (registration) ...........................10-5

3. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (paper deck and cassette position) ...................10-5

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (holding tray position; 2nd side of a two-sided/overlay copy) ................10-7

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)xii

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin ....................................10-8

6. AE Auto Adjustment ...............10-87. Adjusting the AE Slope ..........10-9

B. Exposure System ........................10-101. Adjusting the Scanner Home

Position...................................10-102. Routing the Scanner Drive

Cable ......................................10-113. Adjusting the Tension of the

Scanner Cable .......................10-124. Adjusting the Mirror Position ..10-125. Cleaning the Mirror (No. 5

mirror).....................................10-136. Installing the Light-Blocking

Belts .......................................10-137. Installing the Lens X

Direction Drive Belt ................10-14C. Image Formation System ............10-15

1. Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly...10-15

2. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire ........................10-17

3. Adjusting the Blank Exposure Lamp ......................................10-18

4. Position of the Roller Electrode ................................10-19

5. Position of the Side Seal in the Cleaning Assembly ..........10-19

6. Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper...................................10-19

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............10-211. Orientation of the Pick-Up

Roller (cassette/deck) ............10-212. Orientation of the Separation

Roller (cassette/deck) ............10-223. Orientation of the Feeding

Roller (cassette/deck) ............10-224. Orientation of the Pick-Up

Roller (multifeeder).................10-235. Orientation of the Feeding

Roller (multifeeder).................10-246. Adjusting the Pressure of the

Separation Roller (cassette/deck) .......................10-24

7. Adjusting the Pressure of theSeparation Roller (holding tray) ..........................10-25

8. Adjusting the Pressure of the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller (multifeeder) ...........................10-25

9. Positioning the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid (cassette)................................10-26

10.Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (deck) ......................10-26

11.Adjusting the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid (multifeeder) ...........................10-27

12.Routing the Timing Belt for theMultifeeder Assembly Side Guide......................................10-27

13.Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Paper Deflecting Drive Solenoid........................10-28

14.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid...............10-28

15.Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Assembly................................10-29

16.Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Assembly................................10-29

17.Installing the Timing Belt for the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging Guide Plate ....10-30

18.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid .................................10-30

19.Installing the Drive Belt ..........10-31E. Fixing System..............................10-32

1. Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Heater ....10-32

2. Position of the Fixing Assembly Paper Guide ..........10-32

3. Adjusting the Pressure of the Lower Roller (nip)...................10-33

4. Adjusting the Fixing Clutch ....10-34F. Electrical System.........................10-35

1. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB .......................10-35

2. Checking the Surface Potential Control System........10-35

3. Checking the Potential Control System.......................10-39

4. Potential Control System Conversion Table ...................10-41

5. Checking the Environment Sensor ....................................10-46

6. Checking the Photointerrupters....................10-46

7. Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Value (]4]) ..................10-53

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS ............................................10-54A. Making Initial Checks ..................10-54

1. Site of Installation...................10-542. Checking the Originals ...........10-543. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard

Glass, and Standard White Plate .......................................10-54

4. Charging Assemblies .............10-54

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) xiii

5. Checking the DevelopingAssembly................................10-55

6. Checking the Paper................10-557. Checking the Periodically

Replaced Parts.......................10-558. Others.....................................10-55

B. Image Fault Samples ..................10-58C. Troubleshooting Image Faults.....10-59

1. The copy is too light. (halftone area only) ................10-59

2. The copy is too light. (solid black also) ..............................10-60

3. The copy is too light. (overall, considerably) ..........................10-60

4. The copy has uneven density. (darker at front) ......................10-62

5. The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front).......................10-62

6. The copy is foggy. (overall) ....10-637. The copy has vertical

fogging....................................10-648. The copy has black lines.

(vertical, fuzzy, thick)..............10-649. The copy has black lines.

(vertical, thin)..........................10-6510.The copy has white spots.

(vertical)..................................10-6611.The copy has white lines.

(vertical)..................................10-6612.The copy has white spots.

(horizontal) .............................10-6813.The back of the copy is

soiled. .....................................10-6914.The copy has fixing faults. .....10-7015., 16., 17. The copy has

leading edge displacement. ...10-7118.The copy has a blurred or

fuzzy image. ...........................10-7219.The copy has horizontal

fogging....................................10-7320.The copy has poor

sharpness...............................10-7321.The copy is blank. ..................10-7422.The copy is completely black...10-74

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-75A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .....10-75

1. E000 .......................................10-752. E001 .......................................10-763. E002 .......................................10-774. E003 .......................................10-775. E004 .......................................10-776. E005 .......................................10-787. E006 .......................................10-788. E010 .......................................10-789. E013 .......................................10-7910.E015 .......................................10-8011.E020 .......................................10-81

12.E030 (The total copy counter fails to operate.) .....................10-82

13.E031 (The option counter has an open circuit.)......................10-82

14.E050 .......................................10-8315.E051 .......................................10-8316.E202 (Locks the keys but

does not indicate a code.)......10-8317.E203 .......................................10-8418.E204 (Locks the keys but

does not indicate a code.)......10-8419.E210 (The lens X direction

drive system has an error.) ....10-8420.E212 (The lens Y direction

drive system has an error.) ....10-8421.E240 .......................................10-8522.E243 .......................................10-8523.E710/E711..............................10-8524.E712 .......................................10-8525.E713 .......................................10-8626.E800 .......................................10-8627 E802 .......................................10-8728.AC power is absent. ...............10-8829.DC power is absent................10-8930.Pick-up fails. ...........................10-9031.The deck lifter fails to move

up. ..........................................10-9132.Pick-up fails. (cassette

pick-up)...................................10-9233.The lifter fails to move up.

(cassette pick-up)...................10-9434.Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)......10-9535.The vertical path roller fails

to rotate. .................................10-9636.The registration roller fails

to rotate. .................................10-9637.The scanner fails to rotate

forward. ..................................10-9738.The scanner fails to move in

reverse. ..................................10-9739.The blank exposure lamp fails

to turn ON...............................10-9840.The pre-exposure lamp fails

to turn ON...............................10-9841.The pre-exposure lamp fails

to turn ON...............................10-9942.The hopper motor (M10) fails

to operate. ..............................10-10043.The hopper motor (M11) fails

to operate. ..............................10-10144.The drum heater fails to

operate ...................................10-10145.The lens fails to move. ...........10-10246.The Add Toner indicator fails

to turn ON...............................10-10347.The Add Toner message fails

to turn OFF. ............................10-10348.The Control Card Set

indicator fails to turn ON. .......10-104

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-2

1. Signals......................................A-22. Abbreviations............................A-3

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5

D. RDF-H1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM......................................A-7

E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV.1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)xiv

49.The Control Card Set indicator fails to turn OFF. ......10-104

50.Paper jams at the fixing assembly inlet. .......................10-104

51.The Add Paper indicator fails to turn OFF. ............................10-104

52.The fixing heater fails to turn ON. .........................................10-105

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS......................................10-106A. Copy Paper Jams........................10-106

1. Pick-up assembly ...................10-1072. Separation/feeding assembly.10-1083. Fixing/delivery assembly ........10-1094. Fixing/delivery assembly

(reversal delivery)...................10-1095. Cleaning assembly.................10-1106. Holding tray assembly

(copying on 1st side of two-sided/overlay copy) ................10-110

7. Holding tray assembly (re-pick up) .............................10-111

8. Holding tray assembly (overlay re-pick up) ................10-111

9. Holding tray feeding assembly ................................10-112

B. Feeding Failure ...........................10-1131. Double feeding .......................10-1132. Wrinkling.................................10-113

VI. ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL PARTS ..............10-114A. Sensors .......................................10-114B. Switches and Solenoids ..............10-118C. Motors and Fans .........................10-122

D. Clutches ......................................10-124E. Lamps, Heaters, and

Photosensors ..............................10-126F. PCBs ...........................................10-128G. Variable Resistors, Light-

Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ................................10-1301. DC Controls PCB ...................10-1302. AC Driver PCB .......................10-1333. DC Power Supply PCB ..........10-1334. Control CPU PCB...................10-1345. Holding Tray Driver PCB........10-1356. Potential Measurement PCB..10-1367. HVT1 PCB..............................10-1378. HVT2 PCB..............................10-1389. Inverter PCB...........................10-13810.Lamp Regulator PCB .............10-13911.Counter PCB ..........................10-139

VII. SERVICE MODE..............................10-140A. Outline .........................................10-140B. Using Service Mode ....................10-140C. Using Adjustment Mode and

Option Setting Mode ...................10-141D. Control Display Mode ( 1 ) ....10-142E. I/O Display Mode ( 2 ) ...........10-157F. Adjustment Mode ( 3 ) ...........10-193G. Function Mode ( 4 ) ...............10-211H. Options Mode ( 5 ) ................10-222I. Counter Mode ( 6 ) ................10-231

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...........................10-237A. Copier..........................................10-237B. RDF Self Diagnosis.....................10-242C. Sorter Self Diagnosis ..................10-243

]]

]]

]]

]]

]]

]]

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES.........................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS..............................1-2III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-9

A. External View.................................1-9B. Cross Section ................................1-11

IV. OPERATIONS ....................................1-12

A. Control Panel.................................1-12B. Special Features Mode .................1-13C. User Mode.....................................1-14

V. ROUTINE WORK BY THE USER......1-18VI. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-19

A. Outline ...........................................1-19

This chapter introduces the copier's features and specifications, shows how to operate the copier, andexplains how copies are made.

blank page

I. FEATURES

1. The NP6045 is capable of making as many as 45 copies (A4, horizontal) everyminute.

2. It uses newly designed pick-up and feeding mechanisms so that it not only helpssave space, but it also is less susceptible to jams.

3. It provides high durability and high image quality required of high-speed copying.The use of the Canon-unique A-Si (amorphous silicon) photosensitive drum ensureshigh durability while the single-component toner projection mechanism promiseshigh-quality images for a long time.

4. It is equipped with a large-size liquid crystal display, offering easy-to-understandinstructions.



1-1

II. SPECIFICATIONS

1. Type

2. System



1-2

Body

Copyboard

Light source

Lens

Photosensitivemedium

Console

Fixed

Halogen lamp (70 V, 265 W)

Zoom lens

Amorphous silicon (ø80)

Body

Copying

Charging

Exposure

Copy densityadjustment

Development

Pick-up Automatic

Manual

Transfer

Separation

Cleaning

Fixing

Front deck paper deck type

Indirect electrostatographic

Corona

Slit (moving light source)

Automatic or manual

Dry (toner projection)

2 front cassettes1 front paper deck

Multifeeder (5.5 mm deep; 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)

Corona

Corona (static separation)

Blade

Heating roller (790 W + 410 W; 120 V), (1200 W; 220/240 V)

3. Performance



1-3

Original type

Maximum original size

Direct

Reduce I

Reduce II

Reduce III

Copying Reduce IV

ratios Enlarge I

Enlarge II

Enlarge III

Enlarge IV

Zoom

Wait time

First copy

Continuous copying

Copy size

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

A3/11" × 17"

1:1

1:0.500

1:0.707

1:0.816

1:0.865

1:2.000

1:1.414

1:1.224

1:1.154

1:0.490 to 2.040 (1% increments)

5 min or less (at 20°C room temperature)

3.0 sec (A4, non-AE, top cassette/paper deck)

999 copies max.

One-sided Metric A3 max. A6 (vertical, postcard) min.Inch 11" × 17" max. STMT min.

Two-sided Metric A3 max. A5 (horizontal) min.Inch 11" × 17" max. STMT (horizontal) min.



1-4

Copypapertype

Cassette

Paper deck

Automatic

Automatic

Multifeeder

Automatic

Multifeeder

• Plain Paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, A5R, STMT, STMTR, Foolscap, GLTR, GLTR-R, KLGL,K-LGL-R, OFFICIO, E-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,A-LTR, ALTR-R, A-LGL

• Tracing Paper* (SM-1)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R

• Colored Paper (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Plain Paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A4, B5, LTR

• Colored Paper (Canon-recommended)A4

• Plain Paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R*, postcard

• Tracing Paper (SM-1)*A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R

• Transparency* (Canon-recommended)A4, LTR

• Colored Paper* (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Label Sheet (Canon-recommended)A4, LTR

• Thick Paper* (91 to 200 g/m2)

• Plain Paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, STMT

• Colored Paper (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Plain Paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R, A5, STMT


• Plain Paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, STMT


• Plain Paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R, A5, STMT


Two-sidedcopying

Overlaycopying

Tray

Non-image width

Auto Clear

Auto Power-Off

Accessory



1-5

Claw

Cassette

Paper deck

Copy tray

Leading edge

Trailing edge

A4 horizontal,B5 horizontal,B4, A3, LTRhorizontal

A4 horizontal,B5 horizontal,B4, A3, LTRhorizontal

Left/right(1st side)

Left/right(2nd side)

None

55 mm deep (500 sheets each of 80 g/m2 paper)

162 mm deep (about 1500 sheets each of 80 g/m2 paper)

250 sheets (approx.; A3, 80 g/m2)

4.5±1.5 mm in Direct (4.5±1.5 mm in non-Direct, Overlay, Two-sided)

2.0 ±1.0 mm (2.0 ±1.0 mm in non-Direct,Overlay, Two-sided)

2.75±2.5mm

2.75±2.5mm

Provided (2 min standard; may be changed from0 to 9 min in 1-min increments and from 0 to 50sec in 10-sec increments)

Provided (1 hr standard; may be changed from 0to 2 hr; in 10-min increments up to 1st 1 hr, in 1-hr increments up to 24 hr)

• Stapler Sorter-E2 • Sorter-E1• Stapler Sorter-G1 • Sorter-G1• CC-V • Cassette Heater

4. Others

Operatingenvironment

Power supply

Powerconsumption

Noise



1-6

Temperature

Humidity

Atmosphericpressure

120 V220/240 V(ITA)220/240 V(UK)220/240 V(FRN)220/240 V(GER)220/240 V(AMS)220/240 V(CA)220/240 V

Maximum

Standby

Continuous copying

Copying

Standby

Front paper deck

7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5° to 90.5°F

5 to 80% RH

810.6hPa to 1013.3hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)

NGQ XXXXXFGB XXXXXDGB XXXXXBGB XXXXXAGB XXXXXUBW XXXXX, CGB XXXXXRBJ XXXXXPCL XXXXX, EGB XXXXX

1.5 kW or less

0.3 kWh or less (reference only)

1.2 kWh or less (reference only)

71 dB or less (sound power level by ISO standards)

50 dB or less (as required)

0.05 ppm or lessOzone (avr over 8 hr)

Width

Dimensions Depth

Height

Weight

ConsumablesCopy paper

Toner

620 mm/24.4 in

725 mm/28.5 in

1136 mm/44.7 in

187 kg/412.2 lb (approx.; w/RDF)

Keep wrapped to protect against moisture.

Avoid direct sunshine, and store at 40°C, 85% or less.

Table 1-201 Copying Speed (copier only)



1-7

Ratio

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

I(50%)

II(70%)

III(81%)

IV(86%)

I(200%)

II(141%)

III(122%)

IV(115%)

Copies/min

24

45

30

45

35

39

44

35

39

45

35

30

45

23

24

29

45

30

24

45

Copy size

A3

A4

B4

B5

A4R

B5R

A5R

A4R

B5R

A5

A4R

B4

B5

A3

A3

B4

A4

B4

A3

A4

Size

A3(297 × 420mm)

A4(210 × 297mm)

B4(257 × 364mm)

B5(182 × 257mm)

A4R(297 × 210mm)

B5R(257 × 182mm)

A3 → 5R

A3 → 4R

B4 → B5R

A4 → A5

B4 → A4R

A3 → B4

A4 → B5

A5R → A3

A4R → A3

B5R → B4

A5 → A4

A4R → B4

B4 → A3

B5 → A4

Table 1-202 Copying Speed (copier only)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.



1-8

Ratio

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

I(50%)

II(64.7%)

III(73.3%)

I(200%)

II(129.4%)

III(121.4%)

Copies/min

45

24

30

37

45

43

37

30

24

24

24

Copy paper size

LTR

11” × 17”

LGL

LTRR

STMT/STMTR

STMTR

LTRR

LTRR

11” × 17”

11” × 17”

11” × 17”

Size

LTR

11” × 17”

LGL

LTRR

STMT/STMTR

11” × 17” → STMTR

11” × 17” → LTRR

11” × 15” → LTRR

STMR → 11” × 17”

LTRR → 11” × 17”

LGL → 11” × 17”

III. NAMES OF PARTS

A. External View

Figure 1-301

q w e r t y

uio!0!1!2



1-9

q Copy trayw RDFe Toner supply mouthr Power switcht Original tray/manual holdery Multifeeder

u Upper right doori Lower right dooro Paper deck!0 Cassette 3!1 Cassette 4!2 Front door

Figure 1-302

@1 @2 @3 @4

@5@6@7@8



1-10

@1 Fixing/feeding assembly@2 Fixing assembly knob@3 Fixing/feeding assembly releasing

lever@4 Toner hopper

@5 Holding tray feeding knob@6 Holding tray feeding assembly@7 Holding tray assembly@8 Holding tray knob

B. Cross Section

1. Cross Section of the Body

Figure 1-303

q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4!5 !6 !8!7

!9@0@1@2@3@4@5@6@7@8@9



1-11

q No. 3 mirrorw No. 2 mirrore Heat absorption

glassr Scanning lampt No. 1 mirrory Fixing assemblyu Copyboard glassi Fixing cleaner belto Lens!0 Drum cleaning

assembly!1 Pre-exposure lamp

!2 Primary chargingassembly

!3 Potential sensor!4 No. 6 mirror!5 Blank exposure lamp!6 Developing cylinder!7 No. 4 mirror!8 No. 5 mirror!9 Multifeeder pick-up

roller@0 Roller electrode@1 Pre-transfer charging

assembly

@2 Registration roller@3 Transfer/separation

assembly@4 Feeding belt@5 Duplexing unit

feeding assembly@6 Holding tray@7 Fixing roller@8 Holding tray pick-up

(crescent) roller@9 Delivery roller

IV. OPERATIONS

A. Control Panel

Figure 1-401

Figure 1-402

Ready to copy.

% LTRREDUCE DIRECT ENLARGE

LIGHT DARK

PAPERSELECT

FIT IMAGE ZOOM

SORTER 2-SIDED

SPECIAL FEATURESA

!4

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 0 C

?

C

q w r tyu i

o!0!1!2!3

START

STOP

e

RESET



1-12

q Touch panel displayw Guide keye Reset keyr Keypadt Display Contrast keyy Energy Saver keyu Stop key

i Toner supply moutho Pilot lamp!0 Copy Start key!1 Clear key!2 Interrupt key!3 User Mode key!4 Preferences key

B. Special Features Mode

Table 1-401



1-13

Mode

Auto Start

Pre-Heat

Bind Margin

Erase Frame

Two-Sided Copy

Overlay Copy

Auto Paper Select

Auto Ratio Select

Interrupt

Page Composition

ID

Description

Use it while the copier is in wait state so that it will start copyingoperation as soon as it becomes ready.

Use it to turn off all indications on the control panel including thePower indicator but excluding the Pre-Heat indicator.

Use it to select right binding, left binding, top binding, or bottombinding.

Use it to erase frame images of the original, sheet, holes, or book.

Use it to make two-sided copies of one-sided originals, two-sidedcopies of two-sided originals, or two-sided copies of two-sidedoriginals.

Use it to make overlay copies.

Use it so that the paper that is most appropriate to the originalsize and the copy ratio will automatically be selected.

Use it so that the copy ratio that is most appropriate to the originalsize and the copy size will automatically be selected.

Use it to interrupt an ongoing copying run to make copies of adifferent original.

Use it to make 2-on-1, 4-on-1, two-sided 2-on-1, or overlay 2-on-1copies.

Use it so that copying is possible only in response to an input ofan ID. (As many as 300 IDs may be registered.)

C. User Mode

1. Types of User ModesThe copier offers the following four user modes, in which the user may freely select

specific settings.1. Specifications2. Adjustment/cleaning3. Timer 4. Preferences function

1. Specifications

Table 1-402(a)



1-14

Item (on display)

auto sort ON/OFF

sorter front collection ON/OFF

skip modeON/OFF

feeder manualauto start ON/OFF

auto cassette change/APSON/OFF

manual size specificationON/OFF

Description

Use it to select or deselect automatic sorting whenusing the RDF and making copies of multipleoriginals (copy count 2 or higher).

Select ON when the sorter is connected so that thesorter will move the copies to the front for collection.Select OFF when the sorter is not connected sothat the sorter will not move the copies to the frontfor collection (no command will be issued).

Use it so that a distinguishing mark (holes forexample) on odd pages will not appear on the rightof even pages or vice versa.ON: Enables skip copying.OFF: Disables skip copying.

Use it to specify whether copying should start assoon as an original is pulled in manual mode usingthe RDF or whether copying should start inresponse to the Copy Start key, thereby allowingselection of copying mode.ON: Enables auto start copying.OFF: Disables auto start copying.

Use it to specify whether copying should continueby automatically switching to a different cassette ifthe selected cassette runs out of copy paper incontinuous copying mode.ON: Enables auto cassette change/APS.OFF: Disables auto cassette change/APS.

Use it to specify whether the Multifeeder Size Inputscreen should be displayed when the multifeeder isselected.ON: Display the screen.OFF: Do not display the screen.

Remarks

At shipment:ON

At shipment:ONCopy paper:A4, B5, LTR horizontal

At shipment:ON

Factory setting:ON

Factory setting:ON

Factory setting:OFF

Table 1-402(b)



1-15

Item (on display)

inch inputON/OFF

copy wait time display ON/OFF

buzzer ON/OFF

size fine-tune ratio

size fine-tuningcentering ON/OFF

size fine-tuningnon-imageON/OFF

pre-heat modechange

specificationsinitialization

standard modechange

Description

Use it to specify whether inch input should beenabled when in hole image erasing or zoomprogram size specification mode.ON: Enables inch input.OFF: Disables inch input.

Use it to specify whether the copy time should bedisplayed during copying.ON: Display.ON: Do not display.

Use it to specify whether the buzzer should besounded in response to inputs, warnings, standby,and copying end.ON: Enables the buzzer.OFF: Disables the buzzer.

Use it to specify the ratio to be used for size fine-tuning between 90% and 99% in 1% increments.

Use it to specify centering for size fine-tuning.ON: Enables centering.OFF: Disables centering.

Use it to specify whether a non-image width shouldbe created for size fine-tuning.ON: Create non-image width.OFF: Do not create non-image width.

Use it to enable/disable lowering of powerconsumption for the copier in pre-heat mode and bywhat %.10%: saving of 10%25%: saving of 25%50%: saving of 50%None: no saving (saving of 0%)

Use it to decide whether to initialize or not initializespecifications in user mode.

Use it to store the mode to be selected in responseto a press on the Reset key (or when auto clear isactivated). The user may choose factory setting aspart of initializing standard mode.

Remarks

Factory setting:OFFRef.: ON if USmodel

Factory setting:OFF

Factory setting:ON

Factory setting:93%

Factory setting:ON

Factory setting:OFF

Saving: Rate ofsaving in rela-tion to the totalcopier powerconsumption.Factory setting:None

Factory modeRatio: 100%Paper: Auto

selectionDensity: ManualCopy count: 1

2. Adjustment/Cleaning

Table 1-403

3. Timer

Table 1-404



1-16

Item (on display)

wire cleaning

feeder cleaning

zoom fineadjustment

Description

Use it so that the primary charging wire, pre-transfer charging wire, and transfer/separationcharging wire may be cleaned automatically.

Place ten sheets of blank paper on the feeder tray,and press the OK key.The blank sheets will be fed in 'one-sided to one-sided' copying mode, thereby cleaning theseparation belt and feeding roller.

Use it to fine-adjust the vertical and horizontalreproduction ratios in 0.2% increments.Width: -1.0% to +1.0%Unit: 0.2%

Remarks

Item (on display)

auto clear time

auto power-offtime

weakly timer

time/day

Description

Use it to set the auto clear time between 1 and 9min in 1-min increments or between 0 and 50 sec in10-sec increments. You may disable the auto clearmechanism by setting it to 0 sec.

Use it to set the auto power-off time between 10min and 2 hr in 10-min increments (up to 24st hr)and in 1-hr increments (from 1st to 2nd hr). Youmay disable the auto power-off mechanism.

Set it to 'none' for the time of the day of the week(Mon. through Sun.) if you do not want the copier toturn off. (Make sure that the current date and timeare correct to ensure that the copier turns off asset.)

Use it to set the built-in clock, thereby setting thetime and the day of the week.

Remarks

Factory setting:2 min

Factory setting:1 hr

The control panelwill not displaythe time or theday of the week;set it for theweekly timer.

4. Preferences

Table 1-405



1-17

Item (on display)

user customizedkey

Description

Use it to set mode setting keys of preferences onthe standard screen.

Remarks

Maximum: 2keys

V. ROUTINE WORK BY THE USER

Instruct the user to clean the following once a week without fail.1) Copyboard Glass

Wipe it with a moist cloth, and dry wipe it.2) RDF Feeding Belt

Wipe it with a cloth moistened with a solution of mild detergent, and dry wipe it.



1-18

VI. IMAGE FORMATION

A. Outline

Figure 1-701

The copier uses an electrostatographic method to produce images and is constructedas shown in Figure 1-701.

It is equipped with an automatic control mechanism to ensure stable reproduction ofhigh-quality images.

Figure 1-702 gives an outline of the steps taken to produce copies. (The automaticcontrol mechanism will be described later.)

Figure 1-702

2.Primary charging

1.Pre-exposure

4.Development

Delivery 8.Fixing

3.Image exposure

Flow of copy paper

Rotation of the drum

Multifeeder6.Transfer

Pick-up

Registration

Latent image formation block

5.Pre-transfer charging

7.Separation

9.Drum cleaning

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp

Lens

Fixing assembly

Cleaning assembly

Pre-exposure LED

Primary charging assembly

Blank exposure LED

Developing assembly

Roller electrode

Pre-transfer charging assembly

Pick-up (multifeeder)

Pick-up (cassette)Transfer charging assemblySeparation charging

assembly

Separation claw



1-19

1-20

BLANK PAGE


CHAPTER 2

BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................2-1A. Functional Construction.................2-1B. Outline of the Electric Circuitry......2-2C. Basic Sequence of Operations......2-4D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuit ....2-11

E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-13F. Outputs from the DC Controller ...2-21G. Inputs to and Outputs from the

Options ..........................................2-33

This chapter provides outlines of the copier's various operational workings. (Note that a single rotationof the drum takes about 0.79 sec.)

BLANK PAGE

I. BASIC OPERATIONS

A. Functional Construction

The copier can be roughly divided into four functional blocks: namely, pick-up/feedingsystem, exposure system, image formation system, and control system.

Figure 2-101

Control system

Copyboard

Original scanning system

Surface potential control

assembly

Primary charging

Photosensitive drum

Developing assembly

Drum cleaning assembly

Toner collection assembly

Feeding assembly Pick-up control

assembly

Multifeeder

Holding tray inlet assembly

Cassette/paper deck

Pick-up/feeding system

Delivery control

assembly

Tra

nsfe

r

Opt

ical

pa

th

Exposure system

Holding tray

Holding tray feeding assembly

Control panel

Image formation system

Copy tray

Control circuitry

Fixing assembly

Sep

arat

ion



2-1

B. Outline of the Electric Circuitry

The copier’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB.

• Copy sequence• High-voltage• Fixing temperature• Scanner drive• Pick-up/feeding• Lens motor (X, Y)• Blank exposure LEDs• Analog signal input

Thermistor signalPotential sensor signalRoom temperature signalManual size signal

The control panel is equipped with its own CPU (Q937) which controls its keys,LEDs, and LCD.

The communication with the RDF and the sorter is between the communications IC(IC) on the controller PCB of the option and the communication IC on the copier’s DCcontroller PCB. (IPC communication 2)

See Figure 2-102 for a block diagram of the relationships between the major circuitsof the copier.



2-2

Figure 2-102

Sensors/switches

Sensors/switches

IPC

IPC

Microprocessor

Microprocessor

RDF controller PCB

Sorter controller PCB

Stapler sorter

RDF

Holding tray driver PCB

Scanning lamp

HVT

Holding tray unit

Fans

Lamp regulator

Charging assemblies Developing

cylinderRoller electrode

LED

Lens motor

SolenoidsClutches

Heaters

Main motorScanner motor

Motor driver PCB

AC driver PCB

Sensors/switches

Control panel (CPU)

Q156(CPU)

Q160Q161

(ROM)

Q136Q137Q138Q162

(RAM)

Q158(IPC)

Loads

Control system

Sensors DC controller PCB

Pote

ntia

l sen

sor

Pote

ntia

l m

easu

rem

ent c

ircui

t



2-3

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

1. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (1/2)The following sequence applies when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is

75°C at power-on and, in addition, the ambient temperature is 17°C or more.

Figure 2-103

Primary, transfer, separation, pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor

INTR

Power switchON


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC

Pre-transfer charging assembly DC

Pre-transfer charging assembly AC

Transfer charging assembly

Separation charging assembly DC

Separation charging assembly AC

Pre-exposure LED

Blank exposure LED

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Surface potential control timing ......

* 1VD VL1 VL2

* 2

* 1

* 1

WMUP

195 C

CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY

About 10 sec after end of CMNTR2

Controlled to 200 C

* 3

Fixing main heater (H1)

Fixing sub heater (H2)

Main heater (M1)

*1. During potential control (CNTR1, CNTR2), blank exposure lamp LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor are turned OFF to measure VD and VL1.

*2. When the power switch is turned ON, the primary, pre-transfer, transfer, and separation charging wires are cleaned if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 C or less.

*3. Wait-up is executed in 10 sec after the end of potential control to speed up warm-up.



2-4

2. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (2/2)The following sequence applies when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is

75°C at power-on and, in addition, the ambient temperature is 17°C or more.

Figure 2-104

Charging wire cleaning motor

INTR

Power ON






Pre-exposure LED

Blank exposure LED



Main motor (M1)


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC

Surface potential control

Scanning lamp (LA1)

......VD VL1 VL2

WMUP

195 C(200 C)

CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY

200 C(205 C)

WMUPR

Controlled to 200 C (210 C)

The difference from the basic sequence of operations (1/2) is that WMUPR is executed until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 C (210 C) by not ending LSTR in 10 sec after the end of potential control (CNTR1, CNTR2).

The value within parentheses applies when the ambient temperature is 17 C or less and, in addition, the surface temperature of the fixing roller at power-on is 75 C or less.

The value outside the parentheses applies when the surface temperature is 75 C or more.



2-5

Table 2-101



2-6

WMUP (warm up)

INTR (initialrotation)

CNTR1 (controlrotation 1)


LSTR (last rotation)

STBY

Period

From when thepower switch isturned ON until thesurface temperatureof the fixing assem-bly upper rollerreaches 195°C.

From the end ofWMUP untilCNTGR1 startsafter the surfacetemperature of thefixing assemblyupper roller hasreached 195°C.

For about 5 secafter the end ofINTR.

For about 5 secafter the end ofCNTR1.

While the photosen-sitive drum makes asingle rotation.

Until the Copy Startkey is pressed orthe power switch isturned OFF afterthe end of LSTR.

Function

• Waits until thefixing assemblywarms.

• Evens out the sur-face temperatureof the fixingassembly roller.

• Discharges copypaper, if any.

Measures the drumsurface potentialVD.

Measures the drumsurface potentialVL.

Cleans the surfaceof the drum as post-treatment (removescharges).

• Waits for a presson the Copy Startkey or otheroperation key.

Remarks

• If the surface temper-ature of the fixingroller is 100°C or lesswhen the powerswitch is turned ON,the primary, pre-transfer, separation,and transfer chargingwires are cleaned.

• The lens moves toDirect position (A4width, 297 mm).

A bias value (DCcomponent) of thedeveloping bias forcopying is deter-mined according tothe measurementstaken of VL2.

• The indications onthe control panelswitch to standardmode 2 min afterthe end of LSTR.

• Copying will start ifthe Copy Start keywas pressed afterplacing an originalduring the waitperiod (auto start).

WAIT(wait)

3. Basic Sequence of Operations during Copying

Figure 2-105

Copy Start key ON


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC



Transfer assembly



Main motor (M1)

Pre-exposure LED

Blank exposure LED

STBY INTR CNTR1 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

CNTR2

* 1

Forward ReverseScanner motor (M3)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

Developing clutch (CL1)

*1 Turns OFF blank exposure LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor for potential measurement (VD, VL1, VL2).



2-7

Table 2-102



2-8

From when the CopyStart key is presseduntil CNTR1 starts.

For about 5 sec afterthe end of INTR.

For about 5 sec afterthe end of CNTR1.

Until the scannerreturns to homeposition after havingmoved forward about120 mm.

While the scanner ismoving forward.• The distance over

which the scannermoves forward variesaccording to the copypaper size and thereproduction ratio.

• The speed at which thescanner moves forwardvaries according to thereproduction ratio.

While the scanner ismoving in reverse.

From the end ofSCRV until the mainmotor stops.

Period Remarks

• Moves the lens. If thelens does not reach aspecific position withina specific period oftime, INTR is conti-nued until the lensreaches the position.

The scanner motor isrotated in reversebefore potential control,thereby returning thescanner to home posi-tion.

The value of the develop-ing bias (DC component)is determined for copyingaccording to the mea-surements taken of VL2.

• Control is executedonly in AE mode.

• The registration signalis generated, andcopy paper is movedto the transferassembly.

• The pick-up signal isgenerated, and thesecond sheet of copypaper is picked up.

Discharges the lastsheet of copy paper.

Function

Stabilizes the sensitivityof the drum inpreparation for copying.

Controls the drumsurface potential VD.

Controls the drumsurface potential VL.

Measures the density ofthe original while thescanner is moving inreverse.

The scanning lampexposes the original,and the reflected opticalimage is projected onthe photosensitive drumby way of mirrors andlenses.

• Returns the scannerto home position inpreparation for thenext copying run.

The surface of the drumis cleaned (by removingcharges).

INTR (initialrotation)



AER (AE rotation)

SCFW (scannerforward)

SCRV (scannerforward)

LSTR (lastrotation)

4. Basic Sequence of Operations for Page SeparationIn page separation mode, the original on the left side of the copyboard is copied

(CSFW1) and then the original on the right side of the copyboard is copied (SCFW2).If the copy count is set to ‘2’ or higher, the original on the left is copied for as many

copies as specified; then, the original on the right is copied as specified.The density of the original is measured in AE mode over a distance of 120 mm

starting at its leading edge. Using the measurements, the originals on both left and rightsides of the copyboard are copied.

Reference:If the conditions of measurement indicated on p. 4-1 exist, potential control rotation(CNTR1, 2) is executed after the end of INTR.

Figure 2-106

Copy Start key ON


Separation charging assembly

Blank exposure LED


Scanning lamp (LA)

Scanner movement

Main motor (M1)

INTR AER SCFW2

Forward Reverse

SCFW1 SCRV1 LSTR STBYSSCRV2

SCDP


Right deck pick-up clutch (CL14)



2-9

Note: For copy sequences other than the above, see Table 2-102.

Table 2-103



2-10


which the scannermoves forwardvaries according tothe copy paper sizeand the reproductionratio.

From when thescanner moves inreverse until copypaper is discharged.


which the scannermoves forwardvaries according tothe copy paper sizeand the reproductionratio.

From when thescanner moves inreverse until thedeveloping clutchturns OFF.

Period Remarks

• The registration signalis generated, and thecopy paper is movedto the transferassembly.

• The pick-up signal isgenerated, and thenext sheet of copypaper is picked up.

• The registration signalis generated using theSCDP signal so thatthe image leadingedge of the original onthe right and the copypaper match.

Function

The scanning lampexposes the original onthe left of the copy-board, and the reflectedoptical images are pro-jected to the photosen-sitive drum by way ofmirrors and lenses.

• The scanner isreturned to homeposition in preparationfor the next copyingrun.

• The toner on the drumis transferred to thecopy paper.

The scanning lampexposes the original onthe right side of thecopyboard, and thereflected optical imageis projected on thephotosensitive drumthrough mirrors andlenses.

• The scanner isreturned to the homeposition in preparationfor the next copyingrun.

• The toner on the drumis transferred to thecopy paper.

SCFW1 (scannerforward 1;copyingoriginal onleft)

SCRV1 (scannerreverse 1)

SCSW2 (scannerforward 2;copyingoriginal onthe right)

SCRV (scannerreverse 2)

D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuit

1. OutlineFigure 2-107 is a block diagram showing the main motor control circuit, which has

the following functions:q Turning on and off the main motor.w Controlling the main motor to a specific speed.

The main motor is a DC motor equipped with a built-in clock pulse generator. Whenthe motor rotates, the clock pulse generator generates clock pulses (MMCLK) accordingto the revolution of the motor.

The main motor control PCB uses these clock pulses to ensure that the motor rotatesat a specific speed.

The clock pulses (MMCLK) are frequency-divided to 1/4 and sent to the DC controlleras clock pulses (M1FG) for sequence control.

2. Operationsa. Turning ON and OFF the Main Motor

When the main motor drive signal (M1ON) goes ‘1’, the phase comparator circuit andthe frequency circuit shown in Figure 2-107 generate control signals.

The control signals generated by both circuits are mixed and sent to the motor drivecircuit, thereby turning on the motor drive circuit and ultimately rotating the main motor.

When M1ON goes ‘0’, the control signal output stops and the signal remains ‘0’,keeping the main motor from rotating.

Figure 2-107

DC controller PCB

Q156Master

Main motor control PCB

Main motor Rotor

Hall IC

V

W

Motor drive circuit

MMCLK

M1Frequency

comparison signal

Phase comparison signal

Mixing

Phase comparison

Frequency comparison

Reference signal

generator circuit

1/4 frequency division

-3 M1FG -2

-4 M1ON

-1

J602

U

J111B

Switchcircuit

Clock pulse generator



2-11

b. Controlling the Main Motor to a Specific SpeedThe copier’s main motor is controlled so that it rotates at a specific speed.The reference signal generator circuit on the motor control PCB generates reference

pulses, which are sent to the phase comparator circuit and the frequency comparatorcircuit.

The phase comparator circuit generates control signal (phase comparison signal) sothat the phase of the clock pulses (MMCLK) generated by the main motor and the phaseof the reference pulses match.

Likewise, the frequency comparator circuit generates control signals (frequencycomparison signal) so that the frequency of the clock pulses (MMCLK) generated by themain motor and the frequency of the reference pulses match.

Both phase comparison signal and frequency signal are mixed and sent to the motordrive circuit and used to control power to the main motor, thereby ensuring a specificrevolution of the motor at all times.

3. Detecting an ErrorIf an excess load is imposed on the motor for some reason, the DC controller PCB

detects an error in the clock pulses of the main motor; as a result, it will indicate ‘E010’on the control panel with a message to that effect.



2-12

E. Inputs to the DC Controller

Inputs to the DC Controller (1/8)

Figure 2-108

Scanner home position sensor

DC controller PCB

When the scanner is at home position,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS1.)

SCHP

J728-1

-2

-3

J727-3

-2

-1

+5V

PS1

J111A-1

-2

-3

Scanner originalleading edge 1sensor

When the scanning lamp is atimage leading edge 1,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS3.)

SCDP1

J729-1

-2

-3

J727-6

-5

-4

+5V

PS3

J111A-4

-5

-6

+5V

Copyboard coveropen/closed sensor

When the RDF is down, ’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS5.)CBCC

J776-1

-2

-3

J775-5

-4

-3PS5

J112A-5

-4

-3

Lens X homeposition sensor

When the lens is at X home position,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS6.)

LXHP

J2742-1

-2

-3

J736-9

-8

-7

+5V

PS6

J110A-9

-8

-7

Lens Y homeposition sensor

When the lens is at Y home position,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS7.)

LYHP

J744-1

-2

-3

J738-3

-2

-1

+5V

PS7

J110B-3

-2

-1

Holding tray feeding assembly 1paper sensor

When PS8 detects copy paper,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS8.)

PS8D

J869-1

-2

-3

J868-1

-2

-3

+5V

PS8

J119A-5

-4

-3

Holding tray feedingassembly 2paper sensor


PS9D

J7720-3

-2

-1

J771-1

-2

-3PS9

J113B-12

J739-9

-8

-7

J8671-1

-2

-3

J203-3

-2

-1



2-13


Figure 2-109

PS10

Holding tray control PCB



DC controller PCB

PS11

PS12

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS19

External delivery sensor

Fixing cleaningbelt length sensor

Internal delivery sensor

Holding tray registrationpaper sensor

Holding tray inlet paper sensor

Holding tray pick-up sensor

Holding tray recirculatinglever homeposition sensor


EXDPD

J2747-1

-2

-3

J2755-32

-33

-34

+5V

J108B-8

-7

-6

When the fixing cleaning belt is shorterthan a specific length,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS11.)

CBOP

J2743-1

-2

-3

J2755

-14

-13

-12

+5V

J108A-14

-13

-12


IDPD

J2751-1

-2

-3

J2755-27

-28

-29

+5V

J108B-13

-12

-11

When copy paper is over the registrationsensor on the holding tray,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS14.)

PS14D

J762-1

-2

-3

J204

-4

-5

-6

J113A

-3

When copy paper is at the holding tray inlet,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS15.)

PS15D

J761-1

-2

-3

J204

-7

-8

-9

J113B

-10

When copy paper is in the pick-up assemblyof the holding tray,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS17.)

PS17D

J763-1

-2

-3

J204

-1

-2

-3

J113B

-11

When PS19 detects the light-blocking plate,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS19.)

HPLPD

J2062-1

-2

-3

J207

-3

-2

-1

J113B

-6

J2757

-5

-4

-3

J742

-3

-2

-1

J758

-4

-5

-6

J758

-7

-8

-9

J758

-1

-2

-3

J2071

-3

-2

-1

J7581

-3

-2

-1

J875

-3

-2

-1

J7581

-6

-5

-4

J754

-3

-2

-1

J202A

-12

J202B

-4

J202B

-3



2-14


Figure 2-110

PS21

PS22

PS23

PS24

PS25

PS26

PS27

PS28

PS29

PS20

Holding tray Yhome position sensor

When the side guide is at PS20.’1’.(The side guide plates are on both sides.)

HTYHP

J752-1

-2

-3

J113A

-10

J2081

-3

-2

-1

DC controller PCB

Holding tray Xhome position sensor

When the rear partition plate is at PS21.’1’.(The partition plate is at the rear.)

HTXHP

J750-1

-2

-3

J113B

-1

Multifeeder paper sensor

When copy paper is in the multifeeder,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS22.)

MFS

J791-1

-2

-3

+5V

J115B-8

-7

-6

Registration papersensor


RGPD

J2741-1

-2

-3

+5V

J108A-8

-7

-6

J2738

-7

-6

-5

Pick-up verticalpath 0 sensor


PS24D

J786-1

-2

-3

+5V

J116B-8

-7

-6

Cassette 3 lifterposition sensor

When PS25 detects the lifter,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS25.)

C3LTP

J807-1

-2

-3

+5V

J117A-5

-4

-3

Cassette 3 paper sensor


C3PD

J808-1

-2

-3

+5V

J117A-8

-7

-6

Pick-up verticalpath 3 sensor


PS27D

J811-1

-2

-3

+5V

J117B-5

-4

-3

Cassette 4 lifter position sensor

When PS28 detects the lifter,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS28.)

C4LTP

J814-1

-2

-3

+5V

J130A-5

-4

-3

Cassette 4 paper sensor


C4PD

J815-1

-2

-3

+5V

J130B-8

-7

-6

J208-3

-2

-1

J210-3

-2

-1

J789-6

-5

-4

J2756-10

-9

-8

J797-3

-2

-1

J805-5

-4

-3

-8

-7

-6

J809-5

-4

-3

J812-5

-4

-3

-8

-7

-6

J202A

-5

J202B

-13




2-15


Figure 2-111

DC controller PCB

Pick-up vertical path 4sensor

PS30

J818-1

-2

-3

J816-5

-4

-3

+5V

PS30DWhen PS30 detects copy paper,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS30.)

J130B-5

-4

-3

Deck lifter position sensor

PS31

J795-1

-2

-3

J793-5

-4

-3

+5V

RDLTPWhen PS31 detects the lifter,’1’.(The light-blocking plate at PS31.)

J116A-5

-4

-3

Deck paper sensor PS32

J796-1

-2

-3

-8

-7

-6

+5V

RDPDWhen PS32 detects copy paper,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS32.)

J116A-8

-7

-6


PS33

J821-1

-2

-3

-3

-2

-1

J8211 +5V


J119A-8

-7

-6


PS36

J8491-1

-2

-3

-9

-8

-7

J8443 +5V


J121B-11

-10

-9

Deck limiter sensor PS37

J798-1

-2

-3

J797-9

-8

-7

+5V

RDELWhen the paper deck reaches the limiter,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS37.)

J116B-14

-13

-12

Deck open/closedsensor

PS38

J799-1

-2

-3

-6

-5

-4

+5V

RDEOP*When the paper deck is open,’0’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS38.)

J116B-11

-10

-9

J841-3

-2

-1

-3

-2

-1

J8444



2-16


Figure 2-112

J2755-35

-36

-37

DC controller PCB

Upper right door sensor PS41

J839-1

-2

-3

J838-5

-4

-3

+5V

RUPDOP*When the right door (upper) is open,’0’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS41.)

J119B-5

-4

-3

Lower right door sensor PS42

J840-1

-2

-3

-8

-7

-6

+5V

RLWDOP*When the right door (lower) is open,’0’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS42.)

J119B-8

-7

-6

Multifeeder door sensor PS46

J725-1

-2

-3

J7252-1

-2

-3

+5V

MFDCWhen the multifeeder door is closed,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS46.)

J105A-10

-9

-8

Fixing assembly outletpaper sensor PS47

J2748-1

-2

-3

+5V

FXDELWhen paper is at the fixing assembly outlet,’1’.(Copy paper is at PS47.)

J108B-5

-4

-3

PS50

+5V

Cassette 3 open/closedsensor

PS51

J1811-1

-2

-3

J809-8

-7

-6

+5V

C3SS When the grip of the cassette 3 is held,’1’.

J117B-8

-7

-6

Cassette 4 open/closedsensor

PS52

J1818-1

-2

-3

J816-8

-7

-6

+5V

C4SS When the grip of the cassette 4 is held,’1’.

J130B-8

-7

-6

Claw jam sensor

PS53

J957-1

-2

-3

J2755-20

-19

-18

+5V

PS52D

When the fixing/feeding uint (lever) is set,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is not at PS53.)

J108A-20

-19

-18

Potential measurementsensor

Sensor Potentialmeasure-ment PCB

POTONPOT

See p. 4-5.

J103B-7

-8

-9

-10

FFUS

When paper is over the sensor,’1’.(The light-blocking plate is at PS52.)

J7445-1

-2

-3

Fixing/feeding unitsensor

J2756-5

-4

-3

J108A-3

-2

J108B-20



2-17


Figure 2-113

J738-13

-12

-11

-10

Front door switch

SW2J714-2

-1

DC controller PCB

FDOD When the front door is open,’1’.J104A-4

-3

Original size detection 1 DS1

J745-3

-2

-1

J738-6

-5

-4

+5V

DSZ1 Varies according to the size of the original.

J110B-6

-5

-4


J746-3

-2

-1

J738-9

-8

-7

+5V

DSZ2 Varies according to the size of the original.

J110B-9

-8

-7


J747-4

-3

-2

-1

+5V

DSZ3BDSZ3A

Varies according to the size of the original.

J110B-13

-12

-11

-10

Service switch SW04J921-2

-1SSWON* When the service switch is pressed,’0’.

J106B-5

-6

Waste toner feedingscrew lock detection

MSW4J780-1

-3WTFL* When the waste toner feeding screw is locked,

’0’.(Indicares ’E013’.)

J114B-1

-2

High-voltage multifeederswitch detection

MSW5J7251-1

-2HV24VU

When 24 VU is supplied,’1’.J304-4

-5



2-18


Figure 2-114

Multifeeder paper width detection

Cassette 3 paper width detection

Cassette 4 paper width detection

Hopper toner sensor

Developing assemblytoner level detection

Holding tray unit detection

DC controller PCB

Varies acoording to the size of copy paper.



When the toner drops below a specific level,’0’.

When the toner drops below a specific level,’0’.

When the holding tray unit is pushed into thecopier,’0’.

MFPW

C3PW

C4PW

TEP*

DTEP*

HTCNT*

SVR1

SVR2

SVR3

TS1

TS2

J789-3

-2

-1

J115B-3

-4

-5

J826-1

-2

-3

J117B-11

-10

-9

J828-1

-2

-3

J117A-13

-12

-11

J721-1

-2

-3

J770-5

-6

-7

J105A-5

-6

-7

J722-1

-2

-3

J106B-7

-8

-9

J202-1 J113A-14

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

J792-1

-2

-3



2-19


Figure 2-115

Cassette 3 paperdetection

Cassette 4 paperdetection

Type identificationjumper wire(copier hamess)

Fixing assemblymain thermistor

Environment sensor

DC controller PC

Varies depending on the length of copy paper.

Varies depending on the length of copy paper.

When the configuration is the paper deck type.

When the temperature of the fixing roller increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

When the intemal temperature increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

When the intemal humidity increases, the voltage increases.(analog signal)

SV1

SV2

TH1

THHUM1

C3PL0C3PL1

C4PL0C4PL1

4CPDSW*

TH1

HUM2

HUM1

J827-4

-1

-2

-3

+5V

+5V

J122B-4

-1

-2

-3

J119B-2

-1

J2745-2

-1

J2757-6

-7

J8443-3

-2

-6

-5

-4

J8492-4

-5

-1

-2

-3

-5

-4

-3

J116B-2

-1

+5V

J829-4

-1

-2

-3

J122A-4

-1

-2

-3

J108A-15

-16

Fixing assemblysub thermistor

When the temperature of the fixing roller increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

TH2

TH2J7421-1

-2

J2757-8

-9

J108A-9

-17



2-20

F. Outputs from the DC Controller

Outputs from the DC Controller (1/11) (120V model)

Figure 2-116a

CB1

Scanning lampLA1

Themal fuseTP1

Themistor TH

Drum heaterH3

Themal fuseTP3

Drum heatercontrol PCB

Themal switchTP1

Fixing heater (main) H1

Fixing heater (sub) H2

Front door switchDrum heaterswitch

Power switchSW1

Power supply unit

FDOD

DC controller PCB

When ’1’, the frontdoor is open.

When ’0’, the powerswitch turns OFF.

PWOFF*

SW1ON*

RL401D*

24VA38VCHK*

0V

LAON

PWMCONCVRON

DHRD

MHOND

SHOND

SHRD

Lamp regulator

MHRD

AC driver PCB

LF1

SW2

SW3

J714-2

-1

J104A-3

-4

-7

-8

J716-2

-1

J5-4

-3

J5-1 J5-2

-5

-6

-2

-5

-6

J6-1

+12V

5V

When the power switch turns ON, ’0’.

When ’0’, the power supply unit internalrelay turns OFF.

When ’0’, 38V turns OFF.

See Chapter 3.

See Chapter 4.

See Chapter 6.

-3

-3

J302-1

-3

J301-1

J301-5

J311 -4

-5

-1

-2

-3

J102A -6

-5

-9

-8

-7

J503

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

J111BJ501-4

-6

-3

-1

J2-2

J2-1

J4-2

-1

J3-2

-1

J7-1

-2

J01-5

-6

-3

-1

J1-4

-2

-1

-3

J641-3

-4

-1

-2

-5

-1

-4

-6

-2

-3

J642 J102B

-2

-6

-3

-1

-4

-5



2-21

Outputs from the DC Controller (1/11)(220/240V model)

Figure 2-116b

CB1

Scanning lampLA1

Themal fuseTP1

Themistor TH

Drum heaterH3

Themal fuseTP3

Drum heatercontrol PCB

Themal switchTP1

Fixing heater (main) H1

Front door switchDrum heaterswitch

Power switchSW1

Power supply unit

FDOD

DC controller PCB

When ’1’, the frontdoor is open.

When ’0’, the powerswitch turns OFF.

PWOFF*

SW1ON*

RL401D*

24VA38VCHK*

0V

LAON

PWMCONCVRON

DHRD

MHOND

Lamp regulator

MHRD

AC driver PCB

LF1

SW2

SW3

J714-2

-1

J104A-4

-3

-7

-8

J716-2

-1

J5-4

-3

J5-1 J5-2

-5

-6

-2

-5

-6

J6-1

+12V

5V

When the power switch turns ON, "0".

When ’0’, the power supply unit internalrelay turns OFF.

When ’0’, 38V turns OFF.

See Chapter 3.

See Chapter 4.

See Chapter 6.

-3

-3

J302-1

-3

J301-1

J301-5

J311-4

J102A-6

-5

-9

-8

-7

-5

-1

-2

-3

J503

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

J111BJ501-4

-6

-3

-1

J2-2

J2-1

J4-2

-1

J3-2

-1

J7-1

-2

J01-5

-6

-3

-1

J1-2

-1

J641-3

-4

-1

-5

-1

J642 J102B

-2

-6

-1

-5

-6

-2



2-22

Outputs from the DC Controller (2/11)

Figure 2-117

M1

M3

J112B-2

-1

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-3

J778-3

-2

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-4

J632-11

-12

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

-12

M3FTM3CLM3BRKM3ONM3F/RM3MD2M3MD1M3MD0M3FGM3FS

J631-1

-2

38V

0V

From powersupply unit

Scanning motor

M2M2BRK

M2FG

M2H/L

M2ON

Pick-up motor

J612-1

-3

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-2

J114B-10

-12

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-11

5V

5V

5V

5V

M1FG

M1ON

J611-1

-2

38V

0V


J601-1

-2

38V

0V


DC controller PCB

J111B-2

-3

-4

-1

J602-12

-11

-14

-13

J733-3

-4

-5

-2

Main motor



2-23


Figure 2-118

M4

M741-1

-2

-3

-4

-5-6

Lens (X) motor

M5

M740-1

-2

-3

-4

-5-6

Lens (Y) motor

M6

J2737-1

-2Transfer/separation chargingwire cleaning motor

J739

DC controller PCB

J736

J110A-3

-6

-1

-2

-4

-5

M4_A

M4_A*

M4_B

M4_B*

X-HOLD

While M16 rotates, altematesbetween ’1’ and ’0’.(pulse signal)

J110A-12

-15

-10

-11

-13

-14

M5_A

M5_A*

M5_B

M5_B*

Y-HOLD

While M17 rotates, altematesbetween ’1’ and ’0’.(pulse signal)

J736

J2756

J108A-1

J108B-19

-1

-2TSCLM1

TSCLM2

When ’1’, M6 rotates CW (forward).

When ’1’, M6 rotates CCW (reverse).



2-24


Figure 2-119

Holding tray recirculating lever motor

Holding tray (X) motor

Holding tray (Y) motor

DC controller PCB

When ’1’ , M7 turns on.M7

M8

M8_A While in rotation, alternatesbetween ’1’ and ’0’.

While in rotation, alternatesbetween ’1’ and ’0’.





M9

M7ON

M8_HLD

M8_B

M9_A

M9_HLD

M9_B

J755-1

-2

-4

-5

J754

-4

-5

J2071

-4

-5

J207

J113A-9

J113A-13

-12

-11

J209-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

J208-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

J208-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

J113B-2

-3

-4

When ’1’, M9 stops.

When ’1’, M8 stops.

J751-1-2

-3

-4

-5-6

J753-1-2

-3

-4

-5-6



2-25


Figure 2-120

Hopper motor (for stirring)

Hopper motor (for supplying)

DC controller PCB

Primary charging wirecleaning motor

Pre-transfer charging wirecleaning motor

Cassette 3 lifter motor




When ’0’, M10 turns ON.




M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

J719-1

-2

-3

-4

J105A-1

-2

J720-1

-2

J105A-3

-4

24V

24V

M10ON*

M11ON*

PCLM1

PCLM2

C3LMD

C4LMD

PTRCLM1PTRCLM2

5V

0V

J713-1

-2

J103B-3

-4

J103A-1

-2

J709-1

-2

J841-4

-5

J119A-9

-10

J119A-11

-12

J842-1

-2

J843-1

-2

J201-1 -2

-3 -4

J842-1

-2

J781-2

-1

24V

0V

J770-1

-2

-6

-7

Deck lifter drive motorWhen ’1’, M18 turns ON.

M18RDLMDJ119B-11

-12

J825-2

-1

When ’1’, M12 rotates CW (forward).

When ’1’, M12 rotates CCW (reverse).

When ’1’, M13 rotates CCW (reverse).When ’1’, M13 rotates CW (forward).



2-26


Figure 2-121

DC controller PCB

Heat exhaust fan

Fixing heat exhaust fan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner cooling fan

At 12V, rotates at half speed; at 24V, rotates at full speed.

At 24V, rotates.

FM2D

FM3D

At 24V, rotates.FM5D


FM6D


FM7D


FM8D

FM2J704-1

-2

J117B-12

-13

FM3J710-1

-2

J104A-1

-2

FM5J784-1

-2

J115A-1

-2

FM6J109-1

-2

J109-1

-2

FM7J3774-1

-2

J114B-3

-4

FM8J715-2

-1

J104A-5

-6



2-27


Figure 2-122

Hollding tray feeding 1clutch

Hollding tray feeding 2clutch

Hollding tray registrationclutch

Hollding tray reversingclutch

Hollding tray forwardingclutch

Hollding tray separationclutch

Multifeeder pick-up clutch

Developing clutch

Registration roller driveclutch

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch

CL1

CL2

CL3

CL4

CL5

CL6

CL7

CL8

CL9

CL10

J765-1 -10 -10

-2 -9 -9 J113B-7

J870-2 J112A -6

-1 -7

J788-1 J115B-1

-2 -2

J782-1 -1 J112A-1

-2 -2 -2

J764 J205


J775

J2738 J2756 J2755

J805J806-1 -1 J117A -1

-2 -2 -2

24V

24V

24V

24V

24V

24V

HTF1CD*

HTF2CD*

HTRGCD*

HTRVCD*

HTFWCD*

HTSPCD*

MFPCD*

DEVCD*

RGCD*

C3PUCD*

DC controller PCB

When ’0’, CL1 turns ON.










J871-2 J112A -8

-1 -9

J768-1 -4 -4

-2 -3 -3 J113A-6

J766-1 -8 -8

-2 -7 -7 J113A-7

J767-1 -6 -6

-2 -7 -7 J113B-8

J2739-1 -3 -6 -4 J108A-4

-2 -4 -7 -5 -5



2-28


Figure 2-123

Pick-up vertical path roller3 drive clutch

DC controller PCB

When ’0’, CL11 turns ON.CL11D*

J810-1

-2

J809-1

-2

24V

CL11J117B-1

-2

Cassette 4 pick-up clutch When ’0’, CL12 turns ON.C4PUCD*

J813-1

-2

J812-1

-2

24V

CL12J130A-1

-2

Pick-up vertical path roller4 drive clutch When ’0’, CL13 turns ON.CL13D*

J817-1

-2

J816-1

-2

24V

CL13J130B-1

-2

Right deck pick-up clutch When ’0’, CL14 turns ON.RDPUCD*

J794-1

-2

J793-1

-2

24V

CL14J116A-1

-2


J819-1

-2

24V

CL15J117A-14

-15


J8461-1

-2

J8441-1

-2

24V

CL17J121B-7

-8


J787-1

-2

24V

CL18J115A-3

-4



2-29


Figure 2-124

DC controller PCB

When ’0’, SL10 turns ON (CW).When ’0’, SL10 turns ON(CCW).

SL10FD*SL10BD*

24V

When ’0’, SL2 turns ON.DPDSD*

24V

When ’0’, SL3 turns ON.FXDSD*

24V

When ’0’, SL4 turns ON.RDPURR*

24V

When ’1’, SL6 turns ON.HTDSD

When ’1’, SL6 turns ON.HTWSD

When ’1’, SL8 turns ON.HTFSD

When ’1’, SL9 turns ON.HTJSD

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid

Delivery paper deflecting solenoid

Fixing drive stop solenoid

Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid

Holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cut roller) solenoid

Holding tray weight solenoid

Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid

Holding tray swinging solenoid

SL10

SL2

SL3

SL4

SL6

SL7

SL8

SL9

J874-1

-2

-3

J115B-11

-12

-13

J2749-2

-1

J2755-31

-30

J108B-9

-10

J2753-2

-1

J2755-23

-22

J108B-9

-10

J866-1

-2

J121A-14

-15

J769-2

-1

J205-2

-1 J113A-5

J760-2

-1

J204-11

-10 J113A-4

J759-2

-1

-13

-11 J113B-9

J756-1

-2

J207-6

-7 J113B-5

J764-2

-1

J758-11

-10

-13

-11

J2071-6

-7





2-30


Figure 2-125

DC controller PCB

When ’0’, SL15 turns ON.MFRLSD*Multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid SL15

J865-1

-2

J789-2

-1

J805-9

-10

J812-9

-10

J115B-9

-10

J7891-1

-2

Cassette 3 pick up roller releasing solenoid When ’0’, SL11 turns ON.C3PURR*

J822-1

-2

24V

J117A-9

-10SL11

Cassette 4 pick-up roller releasing solenoid When ’0’, SL12 turns ON.C4PURR*

J823-1

-2

24V

J130A-9

-10SL12

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid When ’0’, SL13 turns ON.FFULSD*

J2754-1

-2

24V

J108B-1

-2SL13

Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid When ’0’, SL14 turns ON.FCBSD*

J2746-1

-2

24V

J108A-10

-11SL14

When ’0’, SL16 turns ON (CW).When ’1’, SL16 turns ON(CCW).

SL16FD*SL16BD

Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid SL16

J7444-1

-2

-3

J108B-16

-15

-14

J7444-3

-2

-1

24V

24V



2-31


Figure 2-126

DC controller PCB

When ’0’, the total counterturns ON.

When ’0’, the option counterturns ON.

Counter 1TCNTD*

CNT1

Counter 2 (Accessory) OPCNTD*

CNT2

Option counter PCB

J718-1

-2

24V

J104B-1

-2

24V

J104B-7

-6

J7181-1

-2

Pre-exposure LEDs When ’0’, the pre-exposure LEDs

turn ON.PEXP*

J712-1

-3

24V

J103B-1

-2

LED1

J711-1

-3

LED2

Blank exposure LEDs

J708-4

-8

-7

-6

-5

-3

J103A-9

-5

-6

-7

-8

-10

LED2DT*LED2CK*LED2LD*LED2ON*

24V

+5V

0V

See p. 4-17.

Power supply for the lamp.-2

-1

J312-1

-3

J706-5

-1

-2

-3

-4

-6

-7

-8

J706-9

-5

-6

-7

-8

-10

-11

-12

Connection to power supply unit



2-32

G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Options (1/1)

Figure 2-127

Connection to RDF

DC controller PCB

See the RDF Service Manual.

TXDGNDRXDGNDFGRFEDGE

-1

-2

-3

-4

-7

-8

-11

-12

-9

-10

-6

J7710-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

J887-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

J772J115A-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

10

Control card When ’0’, the CC-V turns ON.When ’0’, the card is detected.

CCNTD*CCNND*

J726-3

-1

-2

-4

+5V

CC-V

J106B-3

-1

-2

-4

24VU

0VU

24VA

0VA

24VU


Connection to sorterSee the Sorter Service Manual.

TXDGNDRXDGND

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

-11

-12

-9

10

J701-1

-2

-3

-4

J702-2

-1

-4

-3

J703J102-1

-2

-3

-4

24VU1

0VU

24VA

0VA




2-33

BLANK PAGE


CHAPTER 3

EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................3-1A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE MECHANISM ...............3-2A. Moving the Lens ............................3-2

III. SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM.......3-6A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-6

IV. OTHERS.............................................3-13A. Detecting the Size of Originals......3-13

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-17A. Scanner Drive System...................3-17B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-25

This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier's lens drive unit and scannerdrive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

BLANK PAGE

I. BASIC OPERATIONS

A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the drum is varied by the lens drivesystem, and the reproduction ratio in the drum peripheral direction is varied by thescanner drive system and the main drive system.

The lens drive system uses a zoom lens; as shown in Figure 3-101, the position ofthe lens and the focal distance are changed to vary the reproduction ratio in the axialdirection of the drum.

The scanner drive system moves the No. 1 mirror relatively faster (reduction) orslower (enlargement) than the peripheral speed of the drum to vary the reproductionratio in the peripheral direction of the drum.

Reference:In Direct mode, the relative speed of the No. 1 mirror and the peripheral speed ofthe drum are the same.

Figure 3-101

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

F2

F1

F

F2’

F1’

F’



3-1

II. LENS DRIVE MECHANISM

A. Moving the Lens

1. OutlineThe copier picks up and feeds copy paper using center reference; originals, on the

other hand, are placed using rear reference when the copyboard cover is used.As such, the lens is moved in Y direction (vertical) to suit the width of copy paper

even in Direct mode.

n Using the Copyboard

Figure 3-201 (top view)

The RDF installed to the copier uses center reference; for this reason, the lens is notmoved in Y direction (vertical) as long as the original and the copy paper are of the samesize and copies are made in Direct (Figure 3-202). However, if the size of the originaland the size of the copy paper are different, the lens is moved in Y direction (vertical) sothat the images on the copies will be processed in the same way as when using thecopyboard cover.

n With RDF in Use

Figure 3-202 (top view)

Original (small)

Original (large)

Copy paper (small)

LensCopy paper

(large)

Y d

irect

ion

Original (small)

Original (large)

Copy paper (small)

Lens position (Direct) for copy paper (small)

Lens position (Direct) for copy paper (large)

Copy paper (large)

Y d

irect

ion



3-2

2. Moving the Lensa. Moving the Lens in Y Direction (vertical)

The copier’s lens is installed to a mobile lens stage which moves in Y direction(vertical) by the rotation of the lens Y motor (M5).

b. Moving the Lens in X Direction (horizontal)The lens is moved in X direction (horizontal) by the rotation of the lens X motor (M4)

installed to the back of the lens stage.

3. Controlling the Lens MotorsBoth lens X motor (M4) and lens Y motor (M5) are 4-phase stepping motors. (Both

motors are controlled in the same way, and the descriptions that follow are on the lensX motor.)

The motor is controlled by four motor drive signals (M4A, M4A*, M4B, M4B*)generated by the DC controller PCB. Changing the output timing of these motor drivesignals, the direction in which the lens X motor rotates is changed.

While the lens X motor remains at rest, the lens X motor hold signal (X-HOLD) isgenerated, thereby applying the brakes using a voltage lower than the voltage used torotate the motor.

Figure 3-203

DC controller PCB

Q156

24V

24V

Lens X motor drive circuit

Lens Y motor drive circuit

J110A-3

-6

-1

-2

-4

-5

X-HOLD

M4A

M4A*

M4B

M4B*

J736

J736

J739

M4

M5

Lens (X) motor

Lens (Y) motor

J110A-12

-15

-10

-11

-13

-14

Y-HOLD

M5A

M5A*

M5B

M5B*

Micro-proces-

sor



3-3

4. Moving the Lensa. At Power-On

When the power switch is turned ON, the lens X motor (M4) rotates, thereby movingthe lens in the direction of the lens X home position sensor (PS6).

Then, the lens Y motor (M5) rotates to move the lens in the direction of the lens Yhome position sensor (PS7).

When the signal plate on the lens housing blocks the lens X home position sensor(PS6), the X motor starts to rotate in reverse; when the signal plate on the lens stageblocks the lens Y home position sensor (PS7), the lens Y motor (M5) starts to rotate inreverse.

Each motor stops when the lens reaches Direct position (A4 copy paper width). (Seeperiod I in Figure 3-204.)

b. While Making CopiesThe microprocessor slave (Q140) remembers the position of the lens representing

Direct mode (A4 copying). When the ratio changes, it sends drive pulses to the lens Xmotor (M4)/Y motor (M5) immediately to change the position of the lens accordingly.(See period II in Figure 3-204.)

The lens Y motor (M5) starts to move after the original size and the copy paper sizehave been determined in response to a press on the Copy Start key. (See period III inFigure 3-204.)

• Sequence of Operations Used to Move the Lens

Figure 3-204

Power switch ON

Lens X motor (M4)

Lens Y motor (M5)

WMUP/WMUPR

Ratio changed (in Reduce)

Lens X home position sensor (PS6) Lens Y home position sensor (PS7)

STBY INTR

Ratio changed (in Enlarge) Copy Start key ON

I II IIIII

Motor rotates CW/sensor ON

Motor rotates CCW

Motor rotates (in both directions depending on conditions)



3-4

Figure 3-205

ReduceEnlarge

DC controller PCB

Lens Y motor (M5)

Lens Y home position sensor (PS7)

Signal plate

Cam plate

Lens

Light-blocking belt

Lens stage

Cam groove

Signal plate

Y direction

Lens X motor (M4)

Lens X home position sensor(PS6)

Lens

Y h

ome

posi

tion

sign

al (

LYH

P)

Lens

Y m

otor

driv

e si

gnal

Lens

X m

otor

driv

e si

gnal

Lens

X h

ome

posi

tion

sign

al (

LXH

P)

Light-blocking belt

X direction



3-5

III. SCANNER DRIVE MECHANISM

A. Driving the Scanner

1. OutlineThe scanner is moved forward and in reverse by changing the direction in which the

scanner motor (M3) rotates.The speed at which the scanner motor rotates when the scanner moves forward

varies according to the selected reproduction ratio.The speed at which the scanner motor rotates when the scanner moves in reverse

remains the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio; it is 2.9 times the speedat which the motor rotates when the scanner moves forward in Direct.

The brakes are applied to the scanner as soon as the signal plate reaches thescanner original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3) to slow down the scanner; the brakes areapplied once again when the signal plate reaches the scanner home position sensor(PS1), thereby stopping the scanner at home position.

The distance over which the scanner moves varies according to the copy size andthe reproduction ratio.

Figure 3-301

Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3)

Signal plate

Scanner motor

DC controller PCB

No. 1 mirror mount

No. 2/No. 3 mirror mount

SC

HP

SC

DP

1

Sca

nner

hom

e po

sitio

n si

gnal

Orig

inal

lead

ing

edge

de

tect

ion

sign

al 1

M3

Forward



3-6

2. Relationship between Scanner Sensor and Signals

Table 3-301



3-7

Scanner sensor

Scanner homeposition sensor(PS1)

Originaldetectionleading edge 1sensor (PS3)

Signal

SCHP

SCDP1

Description

• The scanner is at homeposition.

• The scanner has reached homeposition.

• The registration clutch turnsON.

• The scanner is checked againstreference travel distance.

• The brakes are applied to thescanner to slow down.

Scanner

Forward Reverse

3. Basic Sequence of Operations for Scanner MovementThe distance over which the scanner moves forward is determined by the

microprocessor in relation to the copy paper size and the reproduction ratio as well ascopying mode.

The microprocessor computes the dimensions of an original that can be copied tothe selected copy paper size and reproduction ratio to determine the distance over whichthe scanner travels forward.

Figure 3-302

Ratio key ON

Scanner motor drive signal (M3ON)

Scanner forward signal (SCFW)

Scanner stop signal (M3BLK)

Blank exposure lamp


Lens drive motor (M4, M5)

Scanner motor (M3)

INTR AER SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY


Scanning lamp (LA1)

STBY

* 2 Brake * 2 Brake

* 1 :The lens is moved to suit the selected reproduction ratio and copy paper size.

Copy Start key ON

* 2 :The degree of braking may be varied in service mode (*3*).

* 1

Forward Reverse



3-8

4. Sequence of Operations for Scanner Movement (page separation)

I, II, and III in Figure 3-303 are all controlled by the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB with reference to the originalleading edge detection signal 1 (falling edge of SCDP1).

The microprocessor determines the distance over which the scanner moves forward in relation to the reproduction ratio,original size, or the size of the selected cassette.

I, II: The distance over which the scanner moves forward is determined in relation to the reproduction ratio and the originalsize or the size of the selected cassette.

III: If original size detection is executed, the microprocessor assumes the value obtained by dividing the detected originalsize as the center and, therefore, as the leading edge of the second page.

Control will be with reference to the size of the selected cassette for copying in page separation without detecting the sizeof the original.

If II shown in Figure 3-303 exceeds 220 mm, 220 mm (approximate) will be used as the leading edge of the second page.If the order of making copies (first page and second page) is reversed in special features mode (Chapter 1), the operations

will be the same except that the order of SCFW2/SCRV2 and SCFW1/SCRV1 is reversed.

Figure 3-303

Original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3)

Scanner motor (M3)

Scanning lamp (LA1)


INTR AER SCFW1 SCRV1 SCFW2 SCRV2 LSTR

Copy Start key ONLeading edge

of 1st pageLeading edge

of 1 pageLeading edge of 2nd page

Forward Reverse

I II III



3-9

Reference:If two or more modes are selected, the scanner is controlled using the lowest valuethat has been obtained by reading the size of the original.The microprocessor exerts control with reference to the size of the original whenthe following modes are selected:

Table 3-302



3-10

Mode

• RDF in use

• Original frameerasing mode

Reference original size

Original size detected by the feeder

Original size set by the user

5. Scanner Motor (M3) Control Circuita. Outline

Figure 3-304 shows the circuit that controls the scanner motor, and the circuit hasthe following functions:q Turning on and off the scanner motor.w Controlling the rotation direction of the scanner motor.e Controlling the rotation of the scanner motor to a specific speed.

b. Stopping the MotorWhen the scanner motor drive control signal (M3ON) goes ‘0’, the drive circuit turns

OFF and the motor remains stationary.

c. Controlling the Forward Movement of the ScannerWhen the scanner motor drive control signal (M3ON) goes ‘1’ and the scanner

forward signal (M3F/R) goes ‘0’, the drive signal turns ON and the scanner motor rotatesclockwise, thereby moving the scanner forward.

d. Controlling the Reverse Movement of the ScannerWhen the scanner motor drive signal (M3ON) goes ‘1’ and the scanner forward

signal (M3F/R) goes ‘1’, the drive circuit turns ON, thereby moving the scanner motorcounterclockwise.

e. Controlling the Rotation of the Scanner Motor to a Specific SpeedThe microprocessor on the DC controller PCB generates the scanner speed signal

(M3FS) to the scanner motor driver PCB according to the selected reproduction ratio.

Figure 3-304

Scanner motor (M3)

Rotor

Hall IC

U

W

SCMCLK

V

Scanner motor driver PCBDC controller PCB

Motor stop circuit

Motor drive circuit

Motor rotation speed control circuit

J632-8

J112B-5

J632-6

J112B-7

J632-7

J112B-6

J632-9

J112B-4

-5-8

-4-9

-3-10

-1

J632-2

J112B-11

M3BRK

M3F/R

M3ON

M3CL

M3MD2

M3MD1

M3MD0

M3FG

M3FS

J112B-12

Clockpulsegenerator



3-11

The rotation speed control circuit compares the scanner speed signal and the clockpulse (SCMCLK) generated by the scanner motor and sends control signals to the motordrive circuit according to the difference.

The motor drive circuit does not change the voltage applied to the motor but ratherturns ON and OFF the power to the motor at short intervals to control the speed ofrotation. (The voltage is maintained constant, but the ON/OFF periods are varied.)

Since the rotation speed of the scanner motor must be varied to suit the selectedreproduction ratio, the reproduction ratio selection signal (M3MD0, 1, 2) is generated bythe DC controller PCB as shown in Table 3-303.

Table 3-303

Figure 3-305

Copy Start key ON

Scanner forward signal

Scanner motor drive signal

Scanner speed control signal

Scanner stop signal

INTR SCFW SCRV

Scanner home position sensor

Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor

LSTR

*2

*1

*1:Scanner slow-down braking.*2:Scanner stop braking.



3-12

M3MD2

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

M3MD1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

M3MD0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

One-sidey copy

204~172

171~144

143~120

119~100

99~79

78~62

61~49

Scanner reversemovement

IV. OTHERS

A. Detecting the Size of Originals

1. OutlineThe copier is provided with an auto paper selection function and an auto

reproduction ratio selection function, which require identification of the size of originals.As many as four original detection circuits are located under the copyboard glass

(Figure 3-401), and the outputs of these sensors are measured by the DC controllerwhen the copyboard cover is closed, identifying the size of the original on the copyboardas being A3, B4, A4, or B5.

Each of the original detection circuit uses a LED to emit light and a phototransistorto detect the light reflected by the original for output to the DC controller.

Figure 3-401a

A4

B5

A4R

B5R

A3

B5 A4 B5R B4 A3

Phototransistor LEDPS5

Copyboard cover open/closed sensor

Original detection circuit 1


Original detection circuit 2Original detection circuit 3

Original detection signal 3Original detection signal 2

Original detection signal 0Original detection signal 1

Copyboard cover detection signal 1

DC controller PCB

AB size (European specification)

A4R



3-13

Figure 3-401b

2. OperationThe DC controller measures the outputs of the original detection circuits for 15 sec

after the closing copyboard cover turns on the copyboard cover open/closed sensor(PS5) or at intervals of 0.2 sec until the Copy Start key is pressed.

Figure 3-402

DC controller PCB

Out

put

Original detection circuit

PS5 ON

Original

Copyboard cover

30 (approx.)

(The thickness of the arrows indicating outputs represents the size of the level.)

Out

put

PS5 ON

DC controller PCB

Out

put (

vary

ing)

Out

put (

spec

ific)

LETTER LEGAL "11x17"

Phototransistor LED PS5

Originaldetection circuit 1



DC controller PCB

ST

MT

LET

TE

R

LET

TE

R-R

"11x

17"

LEG

AL

INCH size (North American specification)



3-14

If an original is over a sensor, the light reflected by the original is received by theoriginal detection circuit so that the output of the detection circuit is specific regardlessof the angle of the copyboard cover.

If no original is over the sensor, on the other hand, the output immediately after PS5turns on is small. The output increases thereafter when the copyboard cover is fullyclosed, since the detection circuit will receive the light reflected by the copyboard coversheet.

As such, the DC controller assumes the presence of an original at each point if theoutput of the detection circuit remains unchanged and assumes the absence of anoriginal in response to a change in the output.

This type of detection enables identification of the size of a black original as well.

Reference:1. If the original is thick and the copyboard cover cannot be closed fully even after

PS5 has turned ON, the output level of the sensor will not change. As such, if nochange occurs in the output levels of three sensors, the DC controller willcompare the measurements taken as soon as PS5 turns ON against the slicelevel to identify the size of the original.

2. If the copyboard cover is open, i.e., PS5 is OFF, the cassette containing paperof the largest size will be selected of all the cassettes set in the copier.

3. Sizes of OriginalsThe DC controller identifies the size of originals based on specific combinations of

original detection signals (DSITE0 through 3) as follows:

a. AB Configuration

Table 3-401



3-15

DS3

Sensor 3

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

DS2

Sensor 2

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Sensor 1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

Sensor 0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

Size

AB

None orA5, A5R

B5R

B5

A4

A4R

B4

A3

DS1

Original detection signal

b. Inch Configuration

Table 3-402



3-16

DS2

Sensor 2

0

0

0

1

1

Sensor 1

0

0

1

0

1

Sensor 0

0

1

1

0

1

Size

Inch

None

LTRR

LGR

LTR

11” × 17”

DS1

Original detection signal

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how todisassemble/assemble the machine.

Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the machine:

1. Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to

disassemble them.3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against

static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure

correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front

door switch or the power switch.

A. Scanner Drive System

1. Removing the Scanner Drive Assembly Motor1) Remove the RDF/copyboard plate.2) Remove the copier’s rear cover.3) Remove the three mounting screws, and remove the RDF/copyboard cover.

The mounting screws used for the RDF/copyboard cover are longer than othermounting screws.

4) Remove the upper rear cover.5) Remove the right rear cover.6) Remove the multifeeder assembly.7) Remove the five mounting screws q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then,

remove the RDF rear right mount e.

Figure 3-501

q

e

Caution:



3-17

!

Figure 3-502

8) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the RDF detecting assembly t.

Figure 3-503

9) Remove the three mounting screws y, and disconnect the two connectors u; then,remove the scanner drive motor i.

Figure 3-504

y yui

rt

qw



3-18

The gear on the motor shaft is in contact with the drive belt; remove the motor whiledetaching the belt from the gear.

When removing the scanner drive motor, be sure to mark the end of the motorassembly with a scriber for positioning later.The scanner drive motor assembly is fixed in position using a special jig so that thetension on the belt of the motor assembly is within a specific range of values.

2. Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable

Figure 3-505

Steel ball

Wind eight times.

Fix in place temporaily.

1

3

4

8

5

6

2

7

6

2



3-19

Caution:

Caution:

3. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable1) Remove the upper right cover, left cover, rear cover, and upper rear cover.2) Remove the copyboard glass.3) Remove the control panel.4) Remove the RDF rear right mount. (See p. 3-17.)5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the scanner locking disk w.

Figure 3-506

6) Disconnect the three connectors from the potential control PCB and the connectorfor the service switch.

7) Remove the five mounting screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, removethe cooling fan t.

Figure 3-507

er

t

q

w



3-20

8) Remove the two cable fixing screws (rear) y from the No. 1 mirror mount.

Figure 3-508

9) Remove the two cable fixing screws (front) u from the No. 1 mirror mount.

Figure 3-509

10) Loosen the tension screws i, and loosen the scanner cable.

Figure 3-510a

11) Remove the scanner cable.

i

u

y



3-21

4. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive SystemWhen you have installed the scanner drive cable, be sure to perform the following

steps to adjust the tension on the cable:1) Remove the five mounting screws, and remove the upper left cover.2) Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket.3) Turn the tension adjusting screw so that the value is as indicated below.

• Turn the tension adjusting screw A so that the reading on the spring gauge is 200±50g when the center of the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm.

Figure 3-510b

A

A

10 mm

10 mm

(rear)

(front)

Mirr

or m

ount



3-22

5. Positioning the MirrorWhen you have installed the scanner drive cable, be sure to perform the following

steps to adjust the mirror position:1) Move the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2/No. 3 mirror mount to the left.2) Set the mirror positioning tool (front, rear; FY9-3011) as indicated.

Figure 3-511

3) Tighten the two screws on the clamp used to fix the scanner drive cable to the No. 1mirror mount.

Figure 3-512

4) Remove the tool.



3-23

6. Adjusting the Position of the ScannerAfter making copies, remove the control panel, and check to make sure that the line

A of the electrode, i.e., the front of the No. 1 mirror mount, matches B of the hole in theglass support (front).

Otherwise, change the setting of ‘BRAKE_SC’ in service mode (*3*) so that the lineof A matches B.

Figure 3-513

B

No. 1 mirror mount

Electrode mount (front)

A (left) of wall

Glass support(front)

Hole



3-24

Caution:

B. Lens Drive Assembly

Take note of the following when handling the zoom lens or the lens stage drive motor;the gear of the output shaft may become damaged if you turn on the power withoutremoving the lens fixing or if you move the lens or the lens stage without disconnectingthe power plug.q At the time of installation of the machine, be sure to remove the lens fixing from the

lens stage before connecting the power plug.w Be sure to disconnect the power plug before moving the lens stage or the zoom lens

by hand.In addition, be sure to hold a section where it engages with the rail to avoid abruptmovement.

1. Removing the Lens Y Direction Drive Motor1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard glass.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left.3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the lens hood w.

Figure 3-514

When installing the lens hood, fit the bosses on the lens hood into the the rail at thefront; then, engage the hook at the rear while turning the lens hood to the right.

qw



3-25

4) Remove the two cable mounting screws e, and remove the two mounting screwsr; then, lift the lens Y direction drive motor together with its support t.

Figure 3-515

5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the two mounting screws u; then, removethe lens Y direction drive motor i.

Figure 3-516

y

u

i

e

r t



3-26

2. Removing the Lens Stage Temporarily1) Remove the copyboard cover.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left of the scanner rail.

Be sure to push the center of the No. 1 mirror mount.

3) Remove the lens hood.4) Remove the Y direction cable clamp, and fix the end of the Y direction cable in place

temporarily.5) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the light-blocking plate w (on the lens

mount).

Figure 3-517

6) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the light-blocking belt 2 (front) rtogether with its holder. (Tape the light-blocking belt you have removed in place onthe lens stage.)

Figure 3-518

r

e

q

w



3-27

Caution:

7) Lift the lens stage t, and remove the bushing y from the rail u.

Figure 3-519

3. Installing the Light-Blocking Belt1) Take up the light-blocking sheet w on the bobbin q, thereby removing the slack;

then, turn the bobbin mount e two to three times to the right, fit the boss on thebottom of the bobbin mount into the hole in the belt mount r to set the bobbin, andfix it in place with a mounting screw t.

Figure 3-520

q

w

e

r

t

t

y u



3-28

4. Removing the Lens X Direction Drive Motor1) Remove the lens stage.2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, remove the

motor mount e.

Figure 3-521

3) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the lens X direction drive motort from the motor mount.

Figure 3-522

r

t

q w e



3-29

5. Attaching the Lens X Direction Drive BeltAttach the belt with a mounting screw w when the lens X direction drive motor q

has lowered on its own weight.

Figure 3-523

6. Attaching the Light-Blocking Belt

q Light-blocking belt 1 e Light-blocking belt 3w Light-blocking belt 2 r Light-blocking belt 4

Figure 3-524

q

w

e

r

q

wOwn weight



3-30

7. When Replacing the Light-Blocking Belt1) Take up the belt q on the bobbin w by turning it clockwise, and tape it in place.

Figure 3-525

2) Fix the light-blocking belt mount in place on the lens mount.3) Turn the bobbin clockwise and counterclockwise by giving it several half turns; then,

release it so that the spring inside the bobbin is free.4) With the bobbin turned 2 to 2.5 times clockwise, detach the tape, and slide out the

end of the belt.5) Hook the end of the belt on the lens unit.

q

w

e



3-31

blank page


CHAPTER 4

IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the timing at whichthe various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1A. Controlling the Surface Potential

of the Drum....................................4-1B. Controlling the Scanning Lamp

Intensity .........................................4-6C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer

Corona Current..............................4-10D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-

Transfer Corona Current ...............4-13E. Controlling the Blank Exposure

Lamp (LEDs) .................................4-17F. Drum Heater Circuit.......................4-20G. Cleaning the Primary Charging

Wire ...............................................4-23H. Cleaning the Pre-Transfer,

Transfer, and Separation Charging Wires Automatically .......4-24

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-26A. Outline ...........................................4-26B. Detecting the Toner Level and

Controlling the Supply Operation ..4-27

C. Controlling the Developing Bias/Roller Electrode.....................4-29

D. Detecting the Locking of the Waste Toner Feeding Screw .........4-35

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-36A. Scanning Lamp .............................4-36B. Standard White Plate Assembly....4-38C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ...............4-40D. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly ..4-41E. Photosensitive Drum .....................4-42F. Potential Sensor Assembly ...........4-44G. Primary Charging Assembly..........4-45H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..4-45I. Transfer/Separation Charging

Assembly .......................................4-46J. Charging Wire ...............................4-49K. Developing Assembly....................4-55L. Hopper Assembly ..........................4-60M. Drum Cleaner ................................4-61N. Separation Claw/Separation

Claw Drive Assembly ....................4-65O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly....4-66

blank page

I. PROCESSES

A. Controlling the Surface Potential of the Drum

1. OutlineChanges in the latent static images affect the quality of copy images to a very high

degree, and such changes can be caused by any of the following:q changes in the sensitivity of the drum.w changes in the degree of charging by the primary corona assembly.e changes in the degree of exposure.

These changes, in turn, are caused by changes in the site of installation (e.g.,temperature, humidity) and deterioration or dirt in some parts.

The machine is equipped with a drum surface potential control mechanism to ensurestable formation of latent static images in the presence of such factors.

Figure 4-101

- -

----

--

---- - - - -

-

---

Pre-exposure lamp

++++

Lampregulator

Potentialmeasurement

PCB

Scanning lamp

Blank exposure lamp

Blade

Cleaning blade

Transfer coronaassembly

Separationcoronaassembly

Paper

Cleaning roller

Waste tonerfeeding screw

High-voltage transformer

DC controller PCB

Light area

Opticalimage

Pre-transfercorona assembly

++++++++++

++++

++++++++++

++++

Potentialsensor

Primary corona assembly

Dark area

Developingcylinder

Photosensitivedrum



4-1

2. Control MethodThe copier uses its internal potential sensor to measure the dark area potential (VD)

and the light area potential (VL1) of the drum surface, and uses the data to enable thetarget value through correction.

In addition, the copier measures the light area potential (VL2) for developing bias inrelation to the conditions it used for such correction when determining the DCcomponent of the developing bias.

See Tables 4-101 and -102 for the number of measurement corrections of potentialcontrol and the timing of potential control in each mode.

Table 4-101 Measurement Corrections for Potential Control

Table 4-102 Timing of Potential Control



4-2

Corrections Measurements

VD 8 (max.) 8 (max.)

VL1 8 (max.) 8 (max.)

VL2 0 1

Mode

Text mode

Photo mode

Timing

• Once at power-on.• Once during first copying

between 10 min an 60min after power-on.

• Once during first copyingafter 60 min.

• Once during first copyingin photo mode afterpower-on.

a. Primary Current ControlTo measure the dark area potential (VD) for the first time after power-on, a reference

current (setting stored in ROM) is sent to the primary charging assembly, and thepotential sensor is used to measure the drum surface potential.

The DC controller PCB compares the measurements taken of the drum surfacepotential and the target potential; if the drum surface potential differs from the targetvalue, the primary charging level control signal (HVTPC) generated by the DC controllerPCB is corrected.

In this way, the corrected current is applied to the primary charging assembly by thehigh-voltage transformer (HVT). The subsequent measurements are made using thepreviously corrected value as the reference current, thereby reducing the first copy time.

Such measurement and correction are repeated as many as eight times so that thedark area potential (VD) will be as close to the target value as possible. If the potential isnot within the allowance after the eighth measurement, the dark area potential will bedetermined using the eighth correction value.

If the potential is in excess of the control range of the target value after measuringthe potential eight times, the notation ‘1’ will be indicated for ‘PLMT’ (upper limit flagof the primary current value) in service mode (*1*).

Reference:Potential control may be disabled by ‘POCNT’ (display mode; *4*). When done, theprimary current value will be 1000 µA in text mode and 800 µA in photo mode.

b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning LampTo measure the light-area potential for the first time after power-on, the reference ON

voltage (setting stored in ROM) is applied to the scanning lamp.In response, the scanning lamp exposes the standard white plate so that the

reflected light is projected to the drum.The potential of the surface of the drum exposed to the light is measured by the

potential sensor, and the data is sent to the DC controller PCB.The DC controller PCB compares the measurement and the target value; if the

measurement differs from the target value, the intensity adjustment signal (LINT)generated by the DC controller is corrected.

The subsequent measurements are taken using the previously corrected value asthe reference voltage, thereby reducing the first copy time.

The corrected voltages are applied to the scanning lamp by the lamp regulator.Such measurement and correction are repeated as many as eight times so that the

light area potential (VL1) will be as close to the target value as possible. However, if themeasurement does not fall within the allowance after the eighth measurement, the eighthcorrection value will be used to determine the intensity of the scanning lamp.



4-3

Note:

If the measurement is in excess of the control range of the target value aftermeasuring the potential eight times, the notation ‘1’ will be indicated for ‘LLMT’(upper limit flag of the lamp ON voltage) in service mode (display mode; *1*).

c. Controlling the Developing BiasThe light area potential (VL2) for the developing bias is based on the measurements

taken of the drum surface potential occurring when the scanning lamp is turned ONusing the final intensity adjustment signal value obtained during VL1 control.

Using the measurement potential, the DC controller PCB controls the developingbias DC level control signal (DEVDC), ultimately controlling the DC bias to be applied tothe developing cylinder by the high-voltage transformer.

Figure 4-102

VL2 is determined in the following sequence:q The lamp is turned ON at 52.1 V, thereby exposing the standard white plate to

read the drum potential (VL1).w The lamp ON voltage is controlled so that VL1 is 170 V.e The ON voltage for the white background of the original is obtained by adding 5.1

V to the ON voltage of VL1.As such, the value 5.1 V is the result of converting the difference between the

intensity used to expose the standard white plate and the intensity representing the whitebackground of the original.

Copy Start key ON

Scanning lamp

Primary charging

Measurement by potential sensor

INTR CNTR1

VD VD VD VD VD VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL2

Reference voltage

Correction voltage

Final voltage

Reference current Correction current Final current

CNTR2

To SCFW or AER



4-4

Note:

3. Potential Measurement CircuitFigure 4-103 is a cross-sectional diagram of the potential sensor, and Figure 4-104

is a block diagram of the potential measuring circuit.The drive signal from the sensor drive circuit drives the chopper to detect the drum

surface potential with the electrode in the sensor unit.The measurement signalrepresenting the drum surface potential is amplified by the pre-amplifier circuit in thepotential sensor unit and is sent to the drum surface potential detecting circuit.The drumsurface potential detecting circuit, on the other hand, converts the AC signal into DCsignals then, sends the signals to the level shift circuit through the 1/300 transformercircuit.The output signal (analog) of the level shift circuit is sent to the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB.

a. Making Checksq LED1 ON

Normally, LED1 remains on while the main motor is rotating.If it fails to turn on, the potential measuring unit is likely to be faulty.

Reference:You may assume that the potential sensor is operating normally as long as LED1 ison normally.

Figure 4-103 Sensor Cross Section

Figure 4-104

Chopper

Electrode

Piezoelectric oscillator

Potential sensor

LED1

Sync adjustment

circuit

Sensor driver

Band path filter circuit

Amplifier circuit

Sync clamp circuit

DC circuit

Error amplifier

circuit

Photo-coupler

High-voltage generator

adjustment circuit

1/300 transformer

circuit

Level shift circuit M

icro

proc

esso

r

DC controller PCB

Potential measurement PCB

Pre-amplifier circuit

POT

POTONAmplifier circuit

Sensor cover

Electrode

Choppers2.5 mm (approx.)

--

+-

-



4-5

B. Controlling the Scanning Lamp Intensity

1. OutlineFigure 4-105 shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and

the circuit has the following functions:q Turning ON and OFF the scanning lamp.w Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp.

• Maintains the intensity to a specific level against changes in the voltage of thepower supply.

• Controls the intensity to suit the sensitivity of the drum.• Controls the intensity to suit the density of the originals (AE control).

e Checks the activation of the scanning lamp.

2. Operationsa. Turning ON and OFF the Scanning Lamp

When LAON (scanning lamp ON signal) is ‘0’, the output of the differentialamplification/potential control circuit goes ‘0’, keeping the arc circuit from turning ONand, thereby, not supplying power to the scanning lamp (LA1).

When LAON goes ‘1’, the output of the differential amplifier/phase control circuitgoes ‘1’, causing the arc circuit to turn ON and, thereby, supplying power to the scanninglamp (LA1).

b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning LampThe intensity of the scanning lamp is increased or decreased by controlling the

supply voltage to the scanning lamp according to the intensity adjustment signal (LINT)from the DC controller PCB.

Figure 4-105

Q156

D/A converter

Q159

Error detection

circuit

12V

PWOFF

J111-B6

J111-B7

J111-B8

CVRON

LINT

LAON

J503-4

J503-2

J503-2

Lamp ON detection

circuit

Power switchSW1

Scanning lamp

J501-1

Arc circuit

Lamp regulatorDC controller PCB

HIM1

Differential amplifier

phase control power voltage

circuit

J501-3

Mic

ropr

oces

sor

(mas

ter)

ThermalfuseTP2



4-6

The LINT signal varies the pulse duty between 10% and 57.6% according to thesetting of the Copy Density key or the density of the original, sensitivity of the drum andthe setting of the intensity control VR so that the supply voltage to the scanner variesbetween 45 and 65 V (effective value) by way of exerting phase control.

Figure 4-106

c. Detecting the Activation of the Scanning LampThe activation detection signal generates the ON detection signal (CVRON) at all

times as long as the scanning lamp remains ON. The CVRON signal is sent to the errordetection circuit of the DC controller PCB. If the lamp ON signal (LAON) goes ‘0’because of a short circuit or the like in the activation circuit and the scanning lamp turnsON, the DC controller PCB causes the PWOFF signal to go ‘0’. This condition turns OFFthe relay in the power switch to turn OFF the power switch (SW1), thereby cutting off theAC power to the lamp regulator.

3. Automatic Exposure Control (AE)The copier is equipped with an automatic exposure function that automatically con-

trols the intensity of the scanning lamp according to the density of the original.When copies are made in AE mode, copies free of fogging may be obtained without

having to adjust the copy density for different originals. The lamp intensity controlled inAE mode is indicated by the copy density indicator on the control panel.

a. Points of AE MeasurementDuring AE rotation (AER), the scanner is moved forward 120 mm while keeping the

scanning lamp ON; when the scanner moves in reverse, the drum surface potential cor-responding to the four points on the copyboard is measured, and the measurements aresent to the DC controller PCB.

The DC controller PCB computes the average from the surface potential measure-ments to determine the intensity of the scanning lamp for copying.

Figure 4-107

4 3 2 1

30 30 30 30 mm

120 mm

10% pulse duty

100% pulse duty



4-7

Figure 4-108 shows the changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp in relation todiffering densities of originals. If the density of an original is lower (darker) than that ofthe Test Sheet and higher (lighter) than that of a newspaper, the intensity of the scanninglamp varies between F5 and F9 with reference to the copy density indications. If theoriginal is lighter than the Test Sheet, the intensity will be equivalent to F5; if it is darkerthan a newspaper, the intensity will be equivalent to F9 for making copies.

Figure 4-108

Test Sheet Newspaper

Lighter

F9 equivalent

F5 equivalent

Density of original

Darker

Sca

nnin

g la

mp

inte

nsity



4-8

4. Check Pointsa. Checking the Voltage of J111B-8 (LAON)

Check to make sure that the voltage between J111B-8 and J111B-5 (GND) on the DCcontroller PCB is about 5 V while the scanner is moving forward and is 0 V during initialrotation, while the scanner is moving in reverse, and during last rotation.

b. Intensity/AE AdjustmentTable 4-103 is a list of items that may be adjusted using the scanning lamp intensity

control circuit.

Table 4-103



4-9

Service mode

LIGHT _ 5LIGHT 5P

GLEAM _ 5

AE _ SLOP]3]

]3]

]3]

Function

Adjusts theoptimum expo-sure for poten-tial control(intensityadjustment forcopy density 5)

Adjusts theoptimum expo-sure for non-potential con-trol (intensityadjustment forcopy density 5)

AE slope

Adjustment

Intensity

Copy density

1V 5V Input

q

w

Intensity

1 5 9

q

w

Copy density

Intensity

Copy density1 5 9

q

w

Remarks

q If the setting isincreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copyingincreases, decreasingthe copy density.

w If the setting isdecreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copyingdecreases, increasingthe copy density.

q If the setting isincreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copyingincreases, decreasingthe copy density.

w If the setting isdecreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copyingdecreases, increasingthe copy density.

q If the setting isincreased inadjustment mode,copies of a newspaperwill be darker.

w If the setting isdecreased inadjustment mode,copies of a newspaperwill be lighter.

C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current

1. OutlineFigure 4-109 shows the circuit that controls the primary/transfer corona, and the

circuit has the following functions:q Turning ON and OFF the primary corona current.w Controlling the primary corona current to a specific level.e Turning ON and OFF the transfer corona.r Controlling the transfer corona to a specific level.

2. Controlling the Primary Corona CurrentThe DC controller PCB compares the drum surface potential VD obtained by the

potential detection circuit against the target potential; if it is different from the targetpotential, the signal used to control the primary corona current generated by the DCcontroller PCB is corrected.

The corrected signal is converted to an analog value (HVTPC signal) by the D/Aconverter circuit and sent to the high-voltage transformer, thereby controlling the primarycorona current.

The primary corona current output is turned ON and OFF by the DCON signal. Theoutput of the primary corona current is controlled by the HVTPC signal.

If the HVTPC signal is about 3 to 11 V or less, the output of the primary coronacurrent turns ON; it turns OFF when the signal is about 12 V or more.

a. Primary Corona Current Output OFFHVTPC is about 12 V.DCON is ‘0’.

The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns OFF.The drive circuit turns OFF.

The primary high-voltage transformer turns OFF.

b. Primary Corona Current Output ONHVTPCB is less than about 11 V.DCON is ‘1’.

The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns ON.The comparator circuit turns ON.

The drive circuit turns ON.The primary high-voltage transformer turns ON.



4-10

Figuire 4-109

In this condition, the high-voltage transformer sends high voltage that suits the outputof the primary charging level control signal (HVTPC) to the primary charging assembly.

If an excess corona current flows from the primary charging assembly because ofchanges in the environment, the return current to the comparator circuit increases,causing the output to decrease. This in turn decreases the corona current from theprimary charging assembly so that the current is controlled to a specific level at all times.

In the photo mode, a target value lower than the dark area potential (VD) target valueused for normal copying mode by about 80 V is used. As such, potential control isexecuted during copying in photo mode for the first time after the power switch is turnedon to control the primary corona current.

3. Controlling the Transfer Corona CurrentThe transfer efficiency representing the transfer of toner from the photosensitive

drum to copy paper is affected by changes in the environment (temperature, humidity).To limit changes occurring in the density caused by changes in the environment, the

transfer current is varied according to the temperature and humidity measured by theenvironment sensor.

Figure 4-110

Humidity (%)

Tra

nsfe

r cu

rren

t (+

)

+--

+--

DC controller PCB

Q156

D/A converter

Switching circuit

Variable width pulse oscillator

circuit

Drive circuit

Primary high-voltage transformer

Transfer high-voltage transformer

HVTPC

HVTTC

DCON

Comparator circuit

HVT

T501

T502Primary charging

assembly

Photo-sensitive

drum


J202-6

J202-5

J202-1

J114-A5

J114-A6J114-A10

Variable width pulse oscillator

circuit

Drive circuit

Micro-processor



4-11

The transfer corona current output is turned ON and OFF by the high-voltage DCremote signal (DCON). Further, the output level of the transfer current is controlled bythe transfer charging level control signal (HVTTC).

When the HVTTC signal is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V, the output of thetransfer corona current turns ON; it turns OFF when the signal is about 12 V or more.

a. Transfer Corona Current OFFHVTTC is about 12 V.DCON is ‘0’.

The comparator circuit turns OFF.The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns OFF.

The drive circuit turns OFF.The primary high-voltage transformer turns OFF.

b. Transfer Corona Current Output ONHVTTC is less than about 11 V.DCON is ‘1’.

The comparator circuit turns ON.The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns ON.

The drive circuit turns ON.The primary high-voltage transformer turns ON.

In this condition, the high-voltage transformer sends high voltage that suits the outputof the transfer charging level control signal (HVTTC) to the transfer charging assembly.

If an excess corona current flows from the transfer charging assembly because ofchanges in the environment, the return signal to the comparator circuit increases, andthe output decreases, causing the corona current from the transfer charging assemblyto decrease, thereby controlling the current to a specific level at all times.



4-12

D. Controlling the Separation/ Pre-Transfer Corona Current

1. OutlineThe circuit shown in Figure 4-111 is the circuit that controls the separation corona

current and the pre-transfer corona current, and the circuit has the following function:q Turning ON and OFF the separation/pre-transfer corona current.w Switching the separation corona current.e Controlling the separation corona current to a specific level.r Switching the pre-transfer corona current.t Controlling the pre-transfer corona current to a specific level.

The DC component of the separation corona current and the pre-transfer coronacurrent is controlled to a specific level by collecting a sample signal from the secondaryside of the high-voltage transformer (HVT) to eliminate the effects of changes in theenvironment on corona discharge. (The AC transformer is controlled for its voltage.)

The surface potential of the drum during copying is measured, and themeasurements are used together with the measurements taken by the environmentsensor to vary the separation corona current, thereby limiting the effects of changes inthe environment.

Figure 4-111

+--

+--

DC controller PCB

HVT.POST.AC

HVT.POST.DC

Q156

Micro-processor (master)

D/A con-

verter

ROED

J114A-7

DCON

J202-4

J114A-1

J202-10

J114A-10

J202-1

J114A-8

J202-3

J114A-9

J202-2

HVSCT

HVTOFFSwitching

circuitAC control

circuit

Switching circuit

Constant current

control circuitDrive circuit

(HVT)

Overcurrent detection

circuit

DC transformer

DC transformer (positive power supply)

DC transformer (negative power)

AC transformer

Photosensitive drum

Switching circuit

Switching circuit

Constant current

control circuit

Drive circuit

Drive circuit



4-13

Figure 4-112

The corona current is varied to suit the measurements of temperature and humiditytaken by the environment sensor, thereby limiting the effects of the environment.

Figure 4-113

Humidity (%)

Pre

-tra

nsfe

r cu

rren

t (-)

Temperature ( C)

Drum surface potential low

Sep

arat

ion

curr

ent (

-)

Drum surface potential high

Drum surface potential medium



4-14

2. Turning ON and OFF the Separation/ Pre-Transfer Corona CurrentThe separation corona current and the pre-transfer corona current are turned ON

and OFF by the HVTAC drive signal (HVP.POST.AC), roller electrode drive signal(ROED), and high-voltage DC drive signal (DCON).

3. Separation Corona Current (DC component)For the output control value, the direct current of the separation corona current (DC

component) is varied according to the voltage level (3 to 11 V) of the HVSCT signal.

Figure 4-114

4. Pre-Transfer Corona Current (DC component)The control value of the pre-transfer corona current (DC component) is varied

according to the voltage level of the HVP.POST.DC signal.

Figure 4-115

-330

03 11

HVT.POST DC signal voltage level (V)

Pre-transfer corona current ( A)

-500

1003 11

HVT.POST DC signal voltage level (V)

Pre-transfer corona current ( A)



4-15

5. Controlling the DC Component Overcurrent of the Separation/Pre-TransferCorona CurrentIf an overcurrent flows into the separation/pre-transfer charging assembly, the high-

voltage transformer stop signal (HVTOFF) is generated to cut off the corona current(DC/AC component) temporarily to the pre-transfer/separation charging assembly.

When the HVOFF signal is generated, the copier continues to operate; application ofthe corona current will be resumed once the application voltage returns to normal.

If leakage occurs because of a broken charging wire and, as a result, an overcurrentflows to generate the HVTOFF signal, the corona current will not be applied unless thecause is removed.

Separation jams will be frequent if the corona current output to thetransfer/separation charging assembly is stopped because of an overcurrent.No warning will be issued to the control panel in response to this condition; ifseparation jams are frequent, check the relevant mechanism.

Table 4-104 Combination of Transfer/Separation Signals



4-16

Note:

Switching signal Control signal

Signal* DCON HVT.POST.AC ACBTP ROED HVSTC HVT.POST.DCHVT output J114A-10 J114A-7 J114A-3 J114A-1 J114A-8 J114A-9

Pre-transfer ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘1’ — 3~11V

Pre-transfer OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ — 2V

Separation ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘1’ 3~11V —

Separation OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ 2V —

E. Controlling the Blank Exposure Lamp (LEDs)

1. OutlineThe blank exposure lamp is a LED array consisting of 134 LEDs.All 134 LEDs turn ON when the blank exposure lamp ON signal (BLKON) goes ‘0’

while the drum is rotating to prevent adhesion of unwanted toner on the photosensitivedrum. (This does not apply while an original is exposed or during potential control andAE measurement.) The six LEDs at the rear and the six LEDs at the front are kept ONat all times while the drum is rotating.

2. Controlling the Activation in Reduce ModeWhen an original is being exposed while making a reduced copy, as many LEDs

(rear) as corresponding to the ratio of reduction are turned ON to black out (white out)the non-image area.

The LEDs at the front are also turned ON to suit the copy paper size.

3. Controlling the Activation in Direct ModeWhen an original is exposed in Direct mode, as many LEDs (both rear and front) as

corresponding to the copy paper size are turned ON to black out (white out) the non-image area.

If a non-default ratio is selected or when making copies using sheets of a default sizein Direct mode, a non-image width is created (Table 4-105) at the rear and the front(standard frame erasing).

The non-image width may be set to 0 mm in service mode.

4. Controlling the Activation in Sheet Frame Erasing ModeIn sheet frame erasing mode, LEDs are turned ON so that toner will not deposit along

the sides of the copy (about 7 mm wide; the width will not vary in relation to the selectedreproduction ratio).

Reference:In multifeeder mode, copy paper size may be set or left “free.” If you have set a size,frame erasing will be executed according to that size; if free is valid, frame erasingis controlled based on the maximum size (297 × 432 mm).

Figure 4-116

7 mm (approx.)

7 mm (approx.)

7 mm (approx.)

2.75mm

Feeding direction



4-17

5. Controlling the Activation in Original Frame Erasing ModeIn original frame erasing, LEDs are turned ON so that a margin (about 2 mm) along

the sides in relation to the original are kept free of toner.

Table 4-105

6. Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erasing ModeIn book frame erasing mode, LEDs are turned ON so that a margin (about 20 mm,

standard) along the center of the specified size will be free of toner. The width may beadjusted to 20 ±20 mm in service mode.

Figure 4-1172 mm (approx.)

2 mm (approx.)

20mm



4-18

Paper size

All paper sizes

Non-image width

2.75 ± 2.5mm

7. Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erasing ModeHole image erasing mode is provided to prevent black dots from appearing on copies

made of an original with holes. LEDs are turned ON so that a width covering such holeswill be free of toner.

The width may be varied between 1 and 20 mm.

Figure 4-118

8. Controlling the Activation of AE ModeIn AE mode, the surface potential of the drum is measured, requiring that LEDs be

turned OFF.Since only part of the photosensitive drum is measured for surface potential, how-

ever, only the LEDs shining such areas are turned OFF and other LEDs are turned ON.

Figure 4-119

Photosensitive drum

Blank exposure lamp (LEDs)

Potential sensor

Feeding direction

1~20mm



4-19

F. Drum Heater Circuit

1. OutlineThe inside of the photosensitive drum is equipped with a drum heater (60 W), and

the heater serves to keep the surface temperature of the drum at a specific level at alltimes.

The AC power is supplied to the drum heater through the power switch (SW1), doorswitch (SW2), drum heater switch (SW3), and AC driver.

When the drum heater switch is ON and the door switch (SW2) is ON, AC power issupplied regardless of whether the power switch (SW1) is ON or OFF. If the drum heaterswitch (SW3) is OFF, AC power is supplied to the drum heater only if the power switchis ON.

The drum heater drive circuit turns OFF when the drum heater drive signal (DHRD)generated by the DC controller PCB goes ‘0’, supplying the drum heater with half-waveAC power.

If the drum heater drive signal (DHR) generated by the DC controller PCB is ‘1’, onthe other hand, the drum heater is supplied with full-wave AC power.

The relationship between the state of the copier and the ON/OFF state of the drumheater circuit of the AC driver is as shown in Table 3-308.

Table 4-106

The temperature of the drum is monitored at all times by the thermistor (TH) built intothe drum heater.

If the temperature of the drum drops below a specific level, the output from thecomparator circuit goes ‘1’, turning ON the trigger circuit. This condition in turn turns ONthe triac and activates the drum heater.

If the surface temperature of the drum is higher than a specific value, the output fromthe comparator circuit goes ‘0’ and, as a result, the drum heater turns OFF.

Drum surface temperature control value: 42°CThermal fuse rated temperature: 76°C



4-20

Copier state

Power plug is connectedand power switch is OFF

During copying

During standby

Drum heater drive circuit

OFF(supplies half-wave AC power)

ON(supplies full-wave AC power)

Figure 4-120

+--

+12V

AC driver

Drum heaterdrive circuit

SW1Power

supply switch

SW3Drum heater switch

SW2

AC power supply

Door switch

Drum heaterH3

TP3

Triac

J01-1Drum heater control PCB

Trigger circuit

Comparator circuit

ThermistorTH

J01-5

-6

DC controller PCB

Power supply

unit



4-21

2. Idle Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum and the Developing CylinderIn a high-humidity environment, the photosensitive drum and the developing cylinder

could absorb moisture, possibly lowering the density of copies made in the morningwhile at times distorting images.

To prevent such a problem, the photosensitive drum and the developing cylinder arecaused to make an idle rotation during the wait-up period in the morning if the surfacetemperature of the upper fixing roller is 75°C or less.

The control period of idle rotation may be any of three types, selected in relation tothe vapor ratio measured by the environment sensor as shown in Table 4-107.

Reference:The term vapor ratio refers to the amount of moisture (g) in 1 kg of air.

The controls shown in Table 4-107 may be varied in service mode.

Table 4-107



4-22

Vapor ratio

7g/kg or less

from 7 to 2g/kg

12g/kg or more

dle rotatin time

None

2 to 2.5 min

Up to 5 min

Idle rotation period

No idle rotation

From when the fixing roller reaches100°C until fixing warm-up

From power-on until fixing warm-up

G. Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire

1. OutlineThe copier is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for cleaning the

charging wire of the primary charging assembly, and cleaning is executed when thefollowing conditions are met:• The temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or less at power-on.• Charging wire cleaning is executed in user mode. (p. 1-16)• Last rotation (LSTR) has ended after making about 2000 copies.

If cleaning has been executed under the above two conditions, cleaning is executedafter making 2000 copies thereafter.

2. Operation of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning WireWhen the power switch is ON and the surface temperature of the fixing roller is

100°C or less, the primary charging wire cleaning motor (M12) rotates clockwise to movethe cleaner forward for about 20 sec. The drive motor rotates counterclockwise to movethe cleaner in reverse for about 16 sec. (The copier is not equipped with a cleanerposition detection mechanism.)

The RAM on the DC controller PCB keeps count of how many times the chargingwire has been cleaned. Cleaning is executed each time 2000 copies have been made;in the case of continuous copying, cleaning is executed when as many copies asspecified have been made.

Figure 4-121


Wire

Feeding screw

DC controller PCB

Wire cleaner

Rear direction

Front direction

Primary charging wire cleaning motor (M12)

J103B-3, 4

(PCLM)Primary charging wire cleaning motor drive signal



4-23

H. Cleaning the Pre-Transfer, Transfer, and Separation ChargingWires Automatically

The copier is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the charging wiresused in the pre-transfer, transfer, and separation charging assemblies.

As in the case of the primary charging wire automatic cleaning mechanism, a cleanerdrive motor is used to operate the cleaning mechanism.

The mechanism operates under the same conditions and for the same length of timeas the cleaning mechanism used for the primary charging wire.

Figure 4-122

Rear

Front

Wire cleaner

Wire

Pre-transfer charging wire

Feeding screw

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M13)

DC controller PCB

Pre

-tran

sfer

cha

rgin

g cl

eane

r mot

or d

rive

sign

alP

TR

CLM

J10

3A-9

.10



4-24

Figure 4-123 (transfer/separation charging assembly)

Transfer/separation charging wire

Wire

Wire cleaner

Dc controller

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor (M6)

Tran

sfer

/sep

arat

ion

char

ging

w

ire c

lean

er m

otor

driv

e sig

nal

TS

CLM

J1

08A

-1.1

9

Rear

Front

DC controller PCB



4-25

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND CLEANING ASSEMBLY

A. Outline

The developing assembly is driven by engaging and disengaging the drive from themain motor by the developing clutch (CL8).

The cleaning assembly is supplied with drive by the main motor through drum gears.The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner level detection

circuit; when the level of the toner drops below a specific value, the toner sensor (TS1)causes the message Add Toner to appear on the control panel. Then, copying operationwill be forced off after making about 200 copies.

The developing assembly is supplied with toner by the hopper assembly by the workof the hopper motor 1 (M11); the toner inside the hopper assembly is stirred by thehopper motor 2 (M10).

The toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved to the rear of the copier andsent to the waste toner case through the waste toner feeding pipe.

The waste toner feeding assembly is equipped with a torque limiter. When the screwbecomes clogged with waste toner, the waste toner feeding screw locking detectionturns ON to stop the main motor (M1).

Figure 4-201

Hopper assembly

DC controller PCB

M1 Main motor

Waste toner case

Waste toner feeding pipe

Waste toner feeding screw

Waste toner feeding screw locking detection (MSW4)

MS4

Drum cleaning assembly

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive drum

TS 2

TS 1

Toner sensor

Developing clutch

Hopper motor1

Hopper motor2

Was

te to

ner

feed

ing

scre

w lo

ckin

g de

tect

ion(

WT

FL)

Dev

elop

ing

clut

ch d

rive

sign

al (

DV

LD)

Dev

elop

ing

asse

mbl

y to

ner

leve

l sig

nal (

DT

EP

)

Hop

per

tone

r le

vel s

igna

l (T

EP

)

Hop

per

mot

or (

tone

r st

irrin

g) d

rive

sign

al (

M10

ON

)

Developing assembly

M11

M10

CL8

Hop

per

mot

or (

tone

r su

pply

) dr

ive

sign

al (

M11

ON

)



4-26

B. Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the SupplyOperation

The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner sensor (TS2);when the toner inside the developing assembly drops below a specific level while thedeveloping clutch (CL8) is ON during copying, the developing assembly toner levelsignal ( ) goes ‘0’ and the signal is sent to the DC controller PCB.

The DC controller generates hopper motor (toner supply) drive signal (M11ON) if itdetects the developing assembly toner level signal ( ) for 0.3 sec or more to supplytoner from the hopper assembly.

When the toner inside the developing assembly reaches a specific level and thedeveloping assembly toner level signal =1 is detected for 0.7 sec or more, thehopper motor (M11) is stopped.

If the toner sensor (TS2) becomes faulty for some reason and if the DC controllerPCB detects the developing assembly toner level signal ( =0) for more than 120 secwithout an adequate amount of toner inside the developing assembly, ‘E202’ will beindicated and copying operation will be stopped.

The toner inside the hopper assembly is monitored by the hopper toner sensor ( )while the hopper motor 1 (M11) is supplying or stirring toner.

When the level of toner inside the hopper drops below a specific value, the hoppertoner level detection signal ( ) goes ‘0’; if the DC controller PCB detects this signalfor 1 sec or more, it will issue the message Add Toner on the control panel. At this time,the Copy Start key on the control panel will change to red at that time.

Figure 4-202

Developing assembly toner level detection signal (DTEP)

Hopper toner level detection signal (TEP)

INTR

Hopper motor 1 (M11)


SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

*1 *2

*3

Toner supply indication Toner supply indication OFFCopy Start key ON

*1

*2

*3

Supply operation will be started if the developing assembly toner level detection signal=0 is detected for 0.3 sec or more.Supply operation will be ended if the developing assembly toner level detection signal=1 is detected for 0.7 sec or more.The sequence of toner supply is stopped for 1 sec after driving the hopper for 2.0 sec, and this sequence is repeated.

TEP

TS1

DTEP

DTEP

DTEP

DTEP



4-27

The number of copies valid at this time is stored in RAM on the DC controller PCB.If the hopper toner level detection signal ( =1) is detected for 1 sec or more, the DCcontroller PCB will assume the presence of toner and clear the counter reading whileremoving the message Add Toner from the control panel.

Reference:A piezoelectric oscillator is used inside the developing assembly and the hopper. Inthe absence of toner, the oscillator oscillates at several kHz, causing the sensoroutput to be ‘0’. In the presence of toner, the weight of the toner stops the oscillationof the oscillator, causing the sensor output to go ‘1’.

Figure 4-203

Do not install the developing assembly locking assembly without setting thedeveloping assembly in the copier.The toner collecting in the path from the hopper to the developing assembly couldmove astray because of the vibration caused by inspection/repairs work.

AMP

Piezoelectric oscillator

Integration circuit

OutputTEP

TEP



4-28

Caution:

C. Controlling the Developing Bias/Roller Electrode

1. OutlineThe developing cylinder during copying is given an AC bias and DC bias. The DC

bias is a sum of VL2 measured by the potential sensor before starting copying operationand 100 V.

To prevent adhesion of unwanted toner to the photosensitive drum, the DC bias isvaried according to the surface potential of the drum.

Figure 4-204

2. Control Timing

Table 4-201

Photosensitive drumDeveloping assembly

VDB

Dark area

Light area

Bias

VDB VL2 100 [V]

Toner



4-29

Bias

DCcomponent

AC component 1500 Vp-p,2700Hz

Voltage

+600V

+600V

VL2+100 [V]

Period

CNTR1, 2

INTR, AER, LSTRduring copying

SCFW, SCRVduring copying

Description

The surface potential changes at all times.It is therefore measured by the potentialsensor and varied to prevent adhesion ofunwanted toner to the drum.

Prevents adhesion of unwanted toner tothe drum.

Prevents fogging of white background.

Executes toner projection.

If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or less and the ambient tem-perature is 17°C or more,

Figure 4-205

Making the 2nd and subsequent copies after 60 min or up to 10 min after power-on,

Figure 4-206

Copy Start key ON

Main motor (M1)


DC bias

AC bias

INTR SCFW LSTR STBY

:+600VDC bias:

AER SCRV SCFW SCRV

:Potential control value (VL2 + 100 V)

Power switch ON

WMUP

Main motor (M1)


DC bias

AC bias

INTR CNTR1 LSTR STBYCNTR2

: +600VDC bias:



4-30

Making the 1st copy after 60 min or more or 10 min or more after power-on,

Figure 4-207

Copy Start key ON

Main motor (M1)


DC bias

AC bias

INTR

:+600VDC bias: :Potential control value (VL2 + 100 V)

CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCRVSCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY



4-31

3. Developing Bias Control CircuitThe circuit that controls the developing bias is equipped with the following functions:

a. Turing the AC bias ON and OFF.b. Controlling the DC bias to a specific level.

q Turning OFF the AC BiasThe developing bias remote signal ACBTP is ‘0’.

The AC bias switch circuit turns OFF.The drive circuit turns OFF.

The AC transformer (T401) output stops.The above condition stops the AC bias to the developing cylinder.

w Turning ON the AC BiasThe developing bias remote signal ACBTP is ‘1’.

The drive circuit turns ON.The AC bias switch circuit turns ON.

The above condition causes the voltage to be increased to 1500 Vp-p and sentto the developing cylinder.

Figure 4-208

DC controller PCB

Q156

(master)Micro-

processor

D/A converter

Switching circuit

Drive circuit

DC transformer

AC wave generation

AC transformer

High-voltage transformer (HVT) High voltage detection

Drum

J114A-3

J202-8

J114A-10

J202-1

J114A-1

J202-10

J114A-2

J202-9

ACBTP

DCBTP

ROED

DCBC

Developing cylinder

Roller electrode

Switching circuit

Drive circuit



4-32

e Controlling the DC Bias Voltage to a Specific LevelThe voltage level of the DC bias is determined by the level of the signal (DCBC)from the DC controller PCB.• The high-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) is ‘1’.• The roller bias remote signal (ROED) is ‘1’.• The developing DC control signal DCBC is 3 V or more or less than 12 V, and

the AC bias switch circuit turns ON.Under the above condition, the DC bias output will increase if the signal (DCBC)from the DC controller PCB increases.

Figure 4-209

4. Roller Electrode Bias Control CircuitThe circuit used to control the roller electrode bias is provided with the following

functions:a. Turning ON the Roller Electrode

q Roller Electrode ON Signal• When the high-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) is ‘1’ and the roller bias

signal (ROED) is ‘1’, the switching circuit turns ON and the high-voltagetransformer drive circuit turns ON.The DC transformer T402 turns ON to supply a bias of about 1000 V to theroller electrode. (The DC bias is not subjected to constant voltage control.)

DC bias voltage level (V)

DCBC signal input voltage (V)

03 11

600

(V)



4-33

w Turning OFF the Roller Electrode• When the high-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) is ‘0’ and the roller bias

signal (ROED) is ‘0’, the switching circuit turns OFF and the high-voltagetransformer drive circuit turns OFF. The DC transformer T402 turns OFF todeprive the roller electrode of the bias.

* The connector number of the signal name represents the output from the DC controller PCB.

Table 4-202 Combination of Developing DC/Roller Electrode Bias Output Signals



4-34

Switching signal Control signal

Signal* DCBTP ACBTP ROED ACON DCBCHVT output J114A-10 J114A-3 J114A-1 J114A-7 J114A-2

DC bias ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ 3~11V

DC bias OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ 2V

Roller bials ON ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ —

Roller bials OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ —

D. Detecting the Locking of the Waste Toner Feeding Screw

If, for some reason, the waste toner pipe becomes clogged with waste toner and thewaste toner feeding screw is prevented from rotation, the waste toner can fall out of thepipe.

To prevent such a problem, a feeding screw locking detection mechanism isprovided.

The gear A (Figure 4-210) for the waste toner feeding screw is subjected to a forcein the direction of the axis when the feeding screw gets locked and is moved along theaxis.

The movement of the gear A is monitored by the waste toner feeding screw lockingdetection switch (MS4).

When MS4 is pushed by the gear A, the main motor (M1) stops, and an error indi-cation (E013) will be indicated on the control panel.

Figure 4-210 (rear view)

Waste toner pipe

Waste toner feeding screw

Cleaning assembly waste toner feeding screw

Cleaning assembly

DC controller PCB

M1

If the waste toner feeding screw gets locked, the gear A moves in the direction of the arrow.

Waste toner feeding screw locking detection (MS4)

Gear A

Was

te to

ner

feed

ing

scre

w lo

ckin

g de

tect

ion

(WT

FL)

J11

4B-1

,2

Main motor

Waste toner case



4-35

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY


Be sure to observe the following when disassembling/assembling the machine:






A. Scanning Lamp

1. Removing the Scanning Lamp1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard glass.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the center.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the reflecting shade w and the

support plate e.

Figure 4-301

q q

w e



4-36

!

4) While pushing the rear electrode block to the rear with a finger, remove the scanninglamp r.

Figure 4-302

1. Do not work until the surface of the scanning lamp has cooled.2. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp.3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, dry wipe it.4. Do not leave fingerprints on the reflecting shade.5. Take care not to deform the deflecting shade.6. When installing the lens hood, fit the boss on the lens hood into the cut-off in the

rail at the front; then, engage the hook at the rear while turning the lens hoodslightly to the right.

2. Removing the Thermal Fuse1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard glass.2) Remove the control panel.3) Remove the scanning lamp.4) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the right end.5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the thermal fuse w.

Figure 4-303

q qw

r



4-37

Caution:

B. Standard White Plate Assembly

1) Remove the RDF.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the copyboard glass right

retaining plate w.

Figure 4-304

4) Remove the two stepped screws e (M3x6), and remove the standard white coverr.

Figure 4-305

e

e

r

q

w



4-38

5) Remove the six mounting screws e, and remove the RDF mount cover r.6) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the rear top cover y.

Figure 4-306

7) Remove the control panel.8) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the standard white plate i.

Figure 4-307

u

u

i

e

e

r r

t t

y



4-39

C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit

1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly; then, slide out the

fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-17.)3) Remove the primary charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly.4) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the blank exposure assembly rail

stay w.

Figure 4-308

6) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the two mounting screws w; then, removethe pre-exposure lamp unit e.

Figure 4-309

q w

e

qq

w



4-40

D. Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly

1. Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, slide

out the blank exposure lamp assembly e.

Figure 4-310

Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum when removing the blankexposure lamp assembly.

q

q

w

e



4-41

Caution:

E. Photosensitive Drum

nn Photosensitive DrumThe copier’s photosensitive drum is a high-sensitivity amorphous silicon drum,

whose sensitivity may lower if the drum or the process unit is not positioned correctly.Keep the following in mind whenever handling the photosensitive drum:q If you have removed the process unit from the copier or the photosensitive drum from

the process unit, keep the photosensitive drum out of light.To do so, use the photosensitive drum protection sheet, or wrap six or more sheetsof A3 or larger copy paper.

w Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum near a window or areassubject to direct rays of the sun.

e Avoid areas subject to high temperature/ humidity, low temperature/humidity or rapidchanges in temperature and humidity.

r Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent gas.The above points apply equally to the photosensitive drums of other models.

1. Removing the Drum Unit1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Take out the process unit. (See p. 7-17.)3) Take out the primary charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly.4) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.5) Remove the blank exposure assembly rail stay.6) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the gear plate w.

Figure 4-311

q

q

w



4-42

7) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the front side stay r.

Figure 4-312

8) Holding it as shown, remove the photosensitive drum t.

Figure 4-313

Remove the photosensitive drum, taking care not to damage it.You need not remove the bearing at the rear and the gear at the front.

t

ee

r



4-43

Caution:

2. Replacing the Drum Heater1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the process unit.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the flange w at the front.

Figure 4-314

After removing the photosensitive drum, wrap about five to six sheets of copy paperor the drum protection sheet kept near the waste toner case around thephotosensitive drum to protect the photosensitive drum from dirt and scratches.

3) Pull out the flange from the front, and disconnect the connector; then, remove thedrum heater from the photosensitive drum, and remove the drum heater.

3. Installing the Photosensitive DrumInstall the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it, while paying

attention not to soil or damage its surface.

F. Potential Sensor Assembly

1. Removing the Potential Sensor Assembly1) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-41.)

The potential sensor assembly and the blank exposure lamp assembly areconstructed as a single entity.

qw



4-44

Caution:

Caution:

G. Primary Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly1) Open the front door, and open the hopper assembly.2) Loosen the mounting screw q, and slide up the fixing member w to fix it in place.3) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the primary charging assembly r.

Figure 4-315

After servicing the charging assembly, execute cleaning of the wire in user mode.(If the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100°C or less, you need notperform this step, as the execution will be automatic.)

H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly1) Open the front assembly, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the

pre-transfer charging assembly e.

Figure 4-316

After servicing the charging assembly, execute cleaning of the wire in user mode.(If the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100°C or less, you need notperform this step, as the execution will be automatic.)

q we

q

w

e

r



4-45

Note:

Note:

I. Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing guide w.

Figure 4-317

4) Disconnect the connector e, and slide out the transfer/separation charging assem-bly r to the front; then, remove it by lifting it at an angle to the left.

Figure 4-318

er

A

B

q

w



4-46

2. Installing the Transfer/Separation Charging AssemblyInstall the transfer/separation charging assembly by reversing the steps used to

remove it with the following in mind:1) Fit the four bosses q of the transfer/separation charging assembly into the cut-offs

of the fixing/feeding unit frame w.2) Slide it from the front so that the leaf spring e will come into contact with the frame

of the transfer/separation charging assembly.

Figure 4-319

Figure 4-320

Figure 4-321

w w

w

e

qq

qq



4-47

3) Install the fixing guide plate r with a mounting screw t.

Figure 4-322

4) Execute cleaning of the wire in user mode. (If the surface temperature of the upperfixing roller is 100°C or less, you need not perform this step, as the execution will beautomatic.)

t

r



4-48

J. Charging Wire

1. OutlineThe primary, pre-transfer, transfer/separation charging wires are located around the

photosensitive drum. (The wire diameter is 0.06 mm.)

2. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Wire Cleaner1) Hold the wire cleaner, and disengage it with a flat-blade screwdriver.

Figure 4-323

3. Installing the Charging WireThe charging wire (except the grid wire) is installed in the same way for all charging

assemblies. (The following cites the primary charging assembly.)1) Remove the shielding plate (left, right) of the charging assembly.

Be sure to remove the left and right shielding plates individually to preventdeformation of the primary charging assembly. (At the same time, take care not toloosen the mounting screw q on the left/right shielding plate.)

Figure 4-324

2) Remove the wire cleaner.

For other assemblies, remove the lid (2 pcs.).

q



4-49

Caution:

3) Free a length of about 5 cm from a 0.06mm-dia. charging wire reel, and form a loopof about 2 mm in diameter.

Reference:To form a loop, wind the wire around a hex key once, and twist the hex key threeto four times; then, twist the charging wire.

4) Cut the excess end of the twisted charging wire by a nipper or the like.5) Hook the loop on the stud.

Figure 4-325

6) Hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner at the rear, and hook thecharging wire tension screw on the charging wire where indicated in Figure 4-326;then, twist it.

Figure 4-326

7) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.8) Pick the end of the tension spring of the charging wire with tweezers, and hook it on

the charging power supply electrode. (In the case of the pre-transfer chargingassembly, hook the spring on the pin at the front.)

Figure 4-327

Make sure of the following:• The charging wire is not bent or twisted and its gold plating has not peeled.• The charging wire is in the charging wire positioning V-groove.

Stud ReelCharging corona electrode

(front)Charging wire

(rear)



4-50

Caution:

Figure 4-328 Primary Charging Wire

9) Install the cushion to the front of the charging wire. (This does not apply to theprimary charging assembly.)

10) Remove the shielding plate (left, right).

For other charging assemblies, install the lids (2 pcs.).

11) Install the wire cleaner. (At this time, pay attention to the orientation of the wirecleaner.)

12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

4. Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to fix the shielding plate (left, right).2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to fix the motor unit in place at the front.

Figure 4-329

Screws

(correct) (wrong)

Grid side

(correct) (wrong)



4-51

Caution:

3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move it in the direction of the arrow shown in Figure4-330; then, fix it in place temporarily.

Figure 4-330

4) Free a length of about 5 cm from a 0.1mm-dia. charging wire reel, and form a loopat the end of about 2 mm in diameter.

Reference:To form a loop, wind the charging wire around the hex key once, turn the hex keythree to four times, and twist the wire.

5) Cut the twisted wire (excess) by a nipper.6) Hook the loop on the stud A shown in Figure 4-331.7) After having strung the wire for 31 runs, lead it through section B, give it a half turn,

and put it between the washer and the motor unit; then, wind it once (clockwise)around the mounting screw, and tighten the mounting screw.

Figure 4-331

8) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.9) Tighten the mounting screw you loosened in step 3).

Keep tightening the screw until the tension of the grid wire is even.Pay attention to avoid deformation of the charging assembly; i.e., try to tighten themounting screw (front) on the left/right shielding plate.

10) Tighten the mounting screw loosened in steps 1) and 2).

Stud A

Screw B

Screw



4-52

11) Wipe the grid wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

1. Check to make sure that the grid wire is not broken or twisted.2. Check to make sure that the wire is run at even intervals, i.e., it is in the groove

of the block.

5. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Figure 4-332

Reference:The height (position) of the primary and transfer charging assemblies may beadjusted by turning the screw behind the charging assembly. A full turn changes theposition of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.



4-53

Caution:

Assembly

Primary

Pre-transfer

Transfer

Separation

Range

± 1mm

Noadjustmentmechanism

± 2mm

± 2mm

Height of charging wire

D

16.2 –0.5 14.9 –0.5

C

10.2 –0.5mm

B9.5 +1.0 - 0 mm

A7.5 +1.5 - 0 mm

7.5 +1.5 - 0 mm

6. Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Anti-Stray Toner Sheet1) Open the front doors.2) Remove the developing assembly.3) Remove the hopper unit.4) Remove the process unit.5) Remove the two screws q, and remove the blanking exposure rail w.

Figure 4-333

6) Clean the primary charging anti-stray toner sheet e.

Figure 4-334

e

qq

w



4-54

K. Developing Assembly

The copier’s developing assembly is not equipped with a protection cover, requiringyou to be careful not to damage the developing assembly after removing thedeveloping assembly.Be sure not to install the developing locking assembly if the developing assemblyis not set in the copier. The toner collecting in the path from the hopper to thedeveloping assembly could move astray because of the vibration occurring duringinspection/ repair work.

1. Removing from the Developing Assembly1) Open the multifeeder door, and remove the mounting screw; then, remove the door

stopper tape.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and push the developing locking assembly w in the

direction of the arrow to remove.

Figure 4-335

3) Disconnect the connector e, and pull out the developing assembly r carefully fromthe copier.

Figure 4-336

e r

w

q



4-55

Caution:

2. Removing the Blade Unit1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the developing assembly cover

w.

Figure 4-337

3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and pour out the toner from the developingassembly.

4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the blade unit r together with themounting plate.

Figure 4-338

The blade must be installed with high precision. Do not remove the blade on its ownin the field.Be sure to remove it together with its mount.

3. Installing the BladeInstall the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind:

1) Butt the blade mount against the developing assembly, and tighten the two mountingscrews.To protect the developing cylinder, put copy paper on the cylinder before installingthe blade.

e er

q qw



4-56

Caution:

4. Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.2) Remove the blade unit.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the gear unit w together with the

gear.

Figure 4-339

When removing the gear unit, be careful of the gear attached to the screw, as it willbecome free.

4) Remove the grip ring e attached to the cylinder shaft at the rear, and remove thegear r, parallel pin t, and butting roll y.

Figure 4-340

e

r

t

y

qq w



4-57

Caution:

5) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the electrode plate i.

Figure 4-341

6) Remove the mounting screw o, and remove the magnetic positioning plate !0.

Figure 4-342

7) Remove the grip ring !1 from the cylinder shaft at the front, and remove the buttingroll !2.

Figure 4-343

!1

!2

o

!0

u

i



4-58

8) Remove the two mounting screws !3, and remove the blade !4 together with themount.

Figure 4-344

9) Remove the bearing !5 at the front and the rear, and remove the developing cylinder!6.

Figure 4-345

Do not leave fingerprints or oil on the surface of the developing cylinder. Ifnecessary, dry wipe it with lint-free paper. (Do not use solvent.)

5. Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti-Stray Toner Sheet1) Remove the developing assembly, and clean the developing assembly anti-toner

stray sheet q.

Figure 4-346

q

!5 !5!6

!3 !3!4



4-59

Caution:

L. Hopper Assembly

1. Removing the Hopper Assembly1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-55.)2) Slide out the hopper assembly to the front. (See p. 7-16.)3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the hopper assembly w.

Figure 4-347

q

w



4-60

M.Drum Cleaner

1. Construction

Figure 4-348

2. Removing the Cleaning Blade1) Slide out the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-17.)2) Disconnect the connector q of the drum heater AC line.3) Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the cleaning blade assembly e.

Figure 4-349

4) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the pressure spring t.

Figure 4-350

rt

ww e q

Cleaning blade

Separation claw



4-61

5) Loosen the five mounting screws y, and remove the cleaning blade from the bladesupport plate.

Figure 4-351

3. Installing the Cleaning BladeInstall the cleaning blade by reversing the steps used to remove it.

1) Push in the cleaning blade q until it butts against the rear.

Figure 4-352

2) Lightly tighten the five mounting screws w; then, temporarily fix them in place whereresistance is felt.

3) Fully tighten the screws temporarily tightened in step 2) by turning them 20° to 30°in the order indicated.

Figure 4-353

After installing the cleaning blade, check to make sure that its edge is notappreciably wavy. In addition, be sure to clean the blade before installation, as toneror dirt can cause it to become wavy.

q

w

we rt

Order of tightening

q

No gap.

Blade retaining plate

y



4-62

Caution:

4. Installing the Side Seal1) Install the side seal q on the inner side of the cleaner housing where indicated (both

ends) while taking care so that it is not displaced outside the edge.

Figure 4-354

5. Cleaning the Cleaning Side ScraperPerform the following when replacing the cleaner blade (every 500,000 copies).

1) Remove the cleaning blade.2) Remove any paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (between the magnet

roller and the toner guide roller;A) with tweezers.3) Remove the toner coated on the magnet roll surface. (Use a sheet of copy paper

bent in the form of the letter U.)

Figure 4-355a

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (rear)

Magnet roller

Remove waste toner.

(rear)

30~

40m

m

A

q



4-63

Figure 4-355b

4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (while viewing it from the front).5) If a coating has developed once again in the area from which waste toner was

removed in step 3), repeat steps 3) through 5).

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (front)Magnet roller

Remove waste toner.

(front)

30~

40m

m

A



4-64

N. Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Separation Claw/Separation Drive Assembly from the Drum Unit1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-17.)2) Remove the screw q, and remove the No. 2 heat insulting plate w.3) Remove the screw e, and remove the claw holder r.

Figure 4-356

1. Take care not to bend the separation claw.2. Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum.

e er

qw

Caution:



4-65

O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly

1) Slide out the process unit and the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. (See p. 7-17, p.5-82.)

2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan. (See p. 7-30.)4) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB.5) Remove the waste toner drive assembly together with the waste toner feeding

assembly.6) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the waste toner feeding screw locking

sensor w.

Figure 4-357

7) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the waste toner feeding assemblyt from the waste toner drive assembly.

Figure 4-358

r

t

q w



4-66


CHAPTER 5

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE .....5-3A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-3B. Cassette Lifter Operations.............5-5C. Detecting the Size of Copy

Paper in the Cassette....................5-7III. PICK-UP FROM THE PAPER DECK....5-11

A. Outline ...........................................5-11B. Lifter Operations............................5-13C. Detecting Paper for the Deck ........5-15D. High-Speed Pick-Up......................5-15

IV. PICK-UP FROM THE MULTIFEEDER...................................5-16A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-16B. Detecting the Size of Paper in

the Multifeeder...............................5-17C. Sequence of Operations

(multifeeder) ..................................5-18V. CONTROLLING THE

REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-19VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY

COPIES (1st SIDE) ............................5-20A. Two-Sided/Overlay Copy

Operation.......................................5-20

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-22

C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-24

D. Reversal Delivery ..........................5-28E. Switching Paper Sizes for Two-

Sided/Overlay/Reversal Delivery Copies ...........................................5-30

F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray................................................5-33

G. Skipping.........................................5-34VII. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-40

A. Outline ...........................................5-40VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-53

A. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-53B. Paper Deck Assembly ...................5-62C .Cassette/Paper Deck Pick-Up

Assembly .......................................5-71D. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller

Assembly .......................................5-78E. Registration Feeding Assembly.....5-79F. Feeding Assembly.........................5-82G. Holding Tray Assembly..................5-86H. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly ...5-103

This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy isdelivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing ofoperation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

blank page

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Outline

The copier uses center reference, in which copy paper is moved along the center ofthe pick-up/feeding path, thereby ensuring stable pick-up feeding operations.

The pick-up system consists of the paper deck, cassettes, and multifeeder assembly;in addition, the system includes the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feedingassembly for making two-sided/overlay copies.

The feeding system has two feeding paths: for one-sided copies and for two-sided/overlay copies (through the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feedingassembly), and the paths are separated by a delivery paper deflecting plate.

When making a one-sided copy, the copy paper picked up from the cassette, paperdeck, or multifeeder is controlled by the registration roller so that its leading edgematches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum; then, the paper isforwarded to the copy tray through the transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and deliveryassembly.

When making two-sided/overlay copies, on the other hand, the paper is stacked onthe holding tray after fixing on the first side. Then, it is picked up from the holding trayfor copying on the second side; it moves through the holding tray feeding assembly andis sent to the copy tray through the same path as one-sided copies.

As many as 17 sensors are used to monitor the movement of copy paper; see Figure5-101 for the arrangement of these sensors.

Table 5-101



5-1

Sensor No. Name Sensor No. Name

PS8 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor PS24 Pick-up vertical path 0 paper sensor

PS9 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS27 Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor

PS10 External delivery sensor PS30 Pick-up vertical path 4 paper sensor

PS12 Internal delivery sensor (reversing assembly) PS33 Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor

PS14 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS36 Pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor

PS15 Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS47 Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

PS17 Holding tray pick-up sensor PS49 Left deck outlet paper sensor

PS22 Multifeeder pick-up sensor PS52 Claw jam sensor

PS23 Registration paper sensor

Figure 5-101

Delivery paper deflecting plateFixing assemblyDelivery assembly

Feeding assembly

Photosensitive drum

Registration rollerMultifeeder

PS23

Holding tray assembly

Copy tray


Cassette 3

Cassette 4

Paper deck

PS22

PS33

PS24PS37

PS8PS9PS17

PS14

PS12

PS10 PS47

PS52

PS36

PS27

PS25

PS28PS29

PS26

PS30

PS32PS31

PS15



5-2

II. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE

A. Pick-Up Operation

See Figure 5-201 for an idea of how cassette pick-up operations are controlled.

Figure 5-201

J118A-10

J119A-7

J116B-2

J121B-8

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B

CL15

CL17

PS33

CL18

Pick-up motor

J115A-4 Vertical path 0 feeding clutch drive signal (CL18D*)

Vertical path 1 feeding clutch drive signal (CL15D*)

Paper path 1 detection signal (PS33D)



J121B-4

J117A-10 CL11



J117A-12

J122A-6

J117A-2

J117A-4

J117A-7

J117B-10

SL11

CL10

CL13

PS27

PS26

PS25

Vertical path 3 detection signal (PS27D)

Cassette 3 pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL11D*)

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch drive signal (CL10D*)

Cassette 3 lifter detection signal (PS25D)


Cassette 3 paper detection signal (PS26D)

J130B-4

J122B-6

J117B-2

J117B-4

J117B-7

SL12

CL12

PS30

PS29PS28


Cassette 4 pick-up solenoid drive signal (SL12D*)

Cassette 4 pick-up clutch drive signal (CL12D*)

Cassette 4 lifter detection signal (PS28D)

Cassette 4 paper detection signal (PS29D)

M2



5-3

1. OutlineThe copy paper inside the cassette is lifted by the lifter so that it remains in contact

with the pick-up roller.When the pick-up clutch (CL10, CL12) turns ON, the pick-up roller rotates to pick-up

copy paper. Then, the pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL11, SL12) turns ON so thatthe pick-up roller leaves the paper.

The copy paper then reaches the feeding roller and the separation roller, whichserves to make sure that only one sheet of copy paper is fed forward; then, the verticalpath roller operates to send the copy paper to the registration roller.

The registration roller serves to control the copy paper so that its leading edge andthe leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum match.

2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations• Cassette 3, A4, 2 Copies, Continuous

Figure 5-202

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL10)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Cassette 3 pick-up releasing solenoid (SL11)

Vertical path roller 0 paper sensor (PS24)


Registration roller paper sensor (PS23)

Registration roller clutch (CL9)

SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY



5-4

B. Cassette Lifter Operations

The lifter inside the cassette is designed so that the pick-up roller lowers when thecassette is pushed inside the copier, causing the lifter position sensor (P25, PS28) toleave the light-blocking plate. This condition turns ON the lifter motor (M14, M15) tomove up the lifter. The lifter motor stops where the lifter position sensor (PS25, PS28)can detect the top surface of the stack of copy paper on the lifter.

When copy paper runs out and the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor(PS26, PS29), the message Add Paper is indicated on the control panel.

The light-blocking plate leaves the cassette open/closed sensor 3/4 (PS50/PS51)when the grip of the cassette is held, lowering the lifter.

Figure 5-203 (paper present)

Figure 5-204 (paper absent)

Lifter

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever


Copy paper

Lifter



5-5

Figure 5-205

M2

Copy paper

Lifter position sensor (PS25/PS28)

Paper sensor (PS26/PS29)

Paper detecting lever

Pick-up roller

Lifter

Separation roller

Feeding rollers

Lifter position lever

(M14 / M15)

Pick-up roller

Cassette open/closed sensor (PS50/51)

M

Pick-up motor

Lifter motor



5-6

C. Detecting the Size of Copy Paper in the Cassette

1. OutlineThe size of the copy paper inside the cassette is detected by the paper size sensor

installed to the rear of the cassette holder.When the cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the paper size sensor is pushed

by the boss on the cassette, enabling the identification of the width and the length of thecopy paper.

The copier identifies the paper size in relation to the combination of paper width andlength and, at the same time, determines the point at which the scanner is reversed andhow to control blank exposure.

The boss on the cassette used to press the paper size sensor operates inconjunction with the guide plate inside the cassette, and its position is determined whenthe guide plate is adjusted to the paper size.

2. Detecting the Size of PaperThe copy paper length sensor consists of two photointerrupters, and the outputs of

these two photointerrupters are used to identify the length of paper.The copy paper width sensor, on the other hand, is a variable resistor, and its output

(resistance) is used to determine the width of paper.Figure 5-206 shows the relationship between paper widths and outputs of the

variable resistors. To ensure that the relationship is maintained, it is important that youregister the paper width basic value whenever you have replaced the DC controller PCB.(See “Registering Paper Width Basic Value” on p. 10-53.)

Figure 5-206

A4/A3

A4R

STMT-R

STMT-R(139.7mm)

A4R(210mm)

A4(297mm)

Paper width

Var

iabl

e re

sist

or o

utpu

t



5-7

Figure 5-207

3. Markings on the Width Guide RailThe width guide rail inside the cassette has paper size positioning holes marked A

through M as shown in Table 5-201.Make use of these holes if the user reports such problems as skew pick-up to make

sure if the specified width is the actual width of the copy paper being used. (Thisinformation is not disclosed to the user.)

Table 5-201

Length guide

Cassette

Width guide (front)

Width guide (rear)

Paper width detecting VR

Paper length sensor unit



5-8

Marking Paper name Remarks

A STMT-RB A5-RC B5-RD KLGL-RE GLTR-RF G-LGL G3G A4-RH LGL/LTR-RI FLSC G2J B4/B5K G-LTR G1L 11" × 17"/LTR G5M A3/A4

4. Paper SizesThe microprocessor on the DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper according

to the following table.The paper sizes in Table 5-203 are specified in service mode selected in relation to

each group.(The asterisk indicates the paper size specified at time of shipment.)

Table 5-202 Table 5-203



5-9

Paper length sensor

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

0

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

0

Signal name

ON/OFF

A4

(G4)

(G1)

B5

STMT

A5

G-LTRR

K-LGLR

B5R

A5R

STMTR

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

0

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

1

—

—

—

—

LTRR

A4R

—

—

—

—

—

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

1

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

0

A3

11" × 17"

—

B4

LGL

—

—

—

—

—

—

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

1

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

1

—

—

—

—

(G2)

(G3)

—

—

—

—

Paper width sensor (slice level)unit: mm

Group Size

G1 * G-LTRK-LGL

G2 * FOOLSCAPOFFICIOE-OFFIA-LGLA-OFFI

G3 * G-LGLFOLIOAUS-FLS

G5 * LTRA-LTR

288.5

273.7

261.8

238.0

212.9

206.6

196.6

186.0

165.2

144.1

• Paper Types

Table 5-204

5. Registering Paper Width Basic ValueSee p. 10-53.



5-10

Description Summary Size (length × width mm)

A3 A3 (297±1) × (420±1)

A4R A4R (210±1) × (297±1)

A4 A4 (297±1) × (210±1)

A5 A5 (210±1) × (148.5±1)

A5R A5R (148.5±1) × (210±1)

B4 B4 (257±1) × (364±1)

B5R B5R (182±1) × (257±1)

B5 B5 (257±1) × (182±1)

11" × 17" 11 × 17 (279±1) × (432±1)

LETTER-R LTRR (216±1) × (297±1)

LETTER LTR (297±1) × (216±1)

STATEMENT STMT (216±1) × (139.5±1)

STATEMENT R STMTR (139.5±1) × (216±1)

LEGAL LGL (216±1) × (356±1)

KOREAN LEGAL K-LGL (265±1) × (190±1)

KOREAN LEGAL R K-LGLR (190±1) × (265±1)

FOOLSCAP FLSC (216±1) × (330±1)

AUSTRALIAN FOOLSCAP A-FLS (206±1) × (337±1)

OFICIO OFI (216±1) × (317±1)

ECUADORAN OFICIO E-OFI (220±1) × (320±1)

BOLIVIA B-OFI OFICIO (216±1) × (355±1)

ARGENTINE LETTER A-LTR (280±1) × (220±1)

ARGENTINE LETTER-R A-LTRR (220±1) × (280±1)

GOVERNMENT LETTER G-LTR (267±1) × (203±1)

GOVERNMENT LETTER-R G-LTRR (203±1) × (267±1)

ARGENTINE LEGAL A-LGL (220±1) × (340±1)

GOVERNMENT LEGAL G-LGL (203±1) × (330±1)

FOLIO FOLI (216±1) × (317±1)

ARGENTINE OFFICIO A-OFI (220±1) × (340±1)

III. PICK-UP FROM THE PAPER DECK

A. Outline

The paper deck picks up and feeds paper by operating various loads in response tothe instructions from the DC controller PCB.

The loads used to pick up and feed paper and move up the lifter are driven by thepick-up motor.

The service person is expected to register the new size in service mode wheneverthe deck size has been changed.

Figure 5-301

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B

J118B-10

J114B

Pick-up vertical path roller 1 drive clutch drive signal (CL15D*)

J119A-7 Paper path 1 detection signal (PS33D)

J121A-15 Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid drive signal (C1PURR)

J116A-7 Deck paper sensor signal (C1PD)

J116A-4 Deck lifter position sensor signal (C1LTP)

J1005A-5 Deck upper limit detection signal (RDEL)

J119A-4 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper detection signal (PS8D)

Deck lifter motor drive signal (RDLMD)

J116B-2

J119B-11


J116A-2 Deck pick-up clutch drive signal (C1PUCD)

Right lifter

Copy paper Pick-up roller

Separation roller

Feeding roller

Holding tray feedingPS8

SL4

CL14

PS24

PS33

CL15M2

PS

37P

S31

PS

32

Pick-up motor

Deck lifter drive motor

M18



5-11

1. Pick-Up OperationsThe copy paper inside the deck is lifted by the lifter so that the copy paper remains

in contact with the pick-up roller.When the deck pick-up clutch (CL14) turns ON, the pick-up roller rotates to pick up

copy paper. Then, the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4) turns ON so that thepick-up roller leaves the surface of the paper.

Thereafter, copy paper reaches the feeding roller and the separation roller, whichmake sure that only one sheet is forwarded to the feeding path. Then, the vertical pathroller operates to feed the copy paper as far as the registration roller.

The registration roller serves to make sure that the leading edge of the copy papermatches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.

2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations• Paper Deck, A4, 2 Copies

Figure 5-302

INTR

Copy Start keyON


Pick-up motor (M2)

Right deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4)



Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch (CL15)

SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBYSCRV



5-12

B. Lifter Operations

1. OperationsWhen the deck is pushed inside the pedestal, the deck open/closed sensor (PS38)

turns ON and, at the same time, the pick-up roller lowers, causing the deck lifter positionsensor (PS31) to leave the light-blocking plate.

This condition turns ON the lifter drive motor (M18), and the drive of the pick-upmotor (M2) is transmitted to the cable take-up shaft to move up the lifter.

The lifter stops where the deck lifter position sensor (PS31) can detect the topsurface of the copy paper on the lifter.

A deck lifter limit sensor (PS37) is located in consideration of such cases in whichthe ascent fails to stop even after the sensor arm has blocked the deck lifter positionsensor (PS31).

After it has moved up, the lifter is held in place by the work of gears.When the deck is slid out from the copier, the cable take-up gear disengages itself,

allowing the lifter to move down on its own weight.

Figure 5-303

Lifter limit sensor(PS37)

Lifter position sensor(PS31)

Paper sensor(PS32)

Paper detecting lever

Pick-up roller

Lifter

Oil damper

Separation roller

Feeding rollers

Pick-up roller

Lifter limiter detecting lever

Copy paper

Pick-up motor

Deck open/closed sensor(PS38)

M2

M18




5-13

Figure 5-304

2. Deck Limit DetectionWhen the deck reaches the lifter position sensor (PS31), the deck lifter position

detection signal is sent to the DC microprocessor of the DC controller PCB, which inresponse will stop the deck lifter drive motor (M18). The deck limit sensor (PS37) is usedin consideration of such faults as in which the clutch fails to stop.

When the deck limit sensor (PS37) detects the deck, the deck limit signal is sent tothe limit detection circuit of the DC controller PCB, causing the deck drive signal from themicroprocessor to be cut off. (Figure 5-305)

Figure 5-305 Deck Limit Detection (2-cassette + paper deck)

Deck drive signal

DC controller PCB

PS31

M18

PS37

Micro-processor Limit detection

circuit

Deck position sensor


Deck limit sensor

Copy paper

Lifter

Deck

Separation roller

Feeding rollerPick-up rollerLifter detecting leverLifter position sensor(PS31)

: Pick-up roller up; i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever lowers, blocking the lifter position sensor (PS31).

: Pick-up roller down; i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever moves up, leaving the lifter position sensor (PS31).



5-14

C. Detecting Paper for the Deck

1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of PaperThe presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper sensor

(PS32).When the deck runs out of copy paper, the paper detecting lever leaves the deck

paper sensor (PS32), indicating the absence of paper.

Figure 5-306 (paper present)

Figure 5-307 (paper absent)

2. Detecting the Deck SizeThe service person is expected to register the deck size in service mode.

D. High-Speed Pick-Up

When paper is picked up from the paper deck, the pick-up motor (M2) rotates at ahigh speed to speed up first copy time, and such rotation applies to the following:• From when the first sheet has reached the path sensor (PS24) until it reaches the

registration roller to form an arch.The high-speed rotation refers to a rotation made at about twice the speed of normalrotation.





5-15

IV. PICK-UP FROM THE MULTIFEEDER

A. Pick-Up Operation

The presence of paper in the multifeeder is checked by the multifeeder paper sensor(PS22). When the multifeeder is selected as the source of paper and, in addition, paperis present in the multifeeder, the multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7) and the multifeederpick-up relay solenoid (SL15) turn ON in response to a press on the Copy Start key,causing the pick-up roller, feeding roller, separation roller, and holding roller to rotate.

The multifeeder pick-up solenoid (SL1) turns ON in the direction of pick-up, loweringthe rotating pick-up roller on the copy paper and ultimately feeding the copy paper insidethe machine. When the first sheet has been picked up, the pick-up roller pick-up solenoidturns ON in the releasing direction, causing the pick-up roller to leave the copy paper.Thereafter, the multifeeder pick-up solenoid (SL15) turns OFF, and the copy paper is fedby the work of the registration roller and the holding roller.

Figure 5-401

DC controller PCB

M2

CL7

SL15

SL10

Copy paper

Tray

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid

Pick-up rollerFeeding rollerHolding

roller

To registration roller

Separation roller PS22

J115

B-1

3

J115

B-1

2M

ultif

eede

r pic

k-up

sol

enoi

d dr

ive

sign

al (p

ick-

up d

irect

ion;

SL1

0FD

)

J115

B-1

0M

ultif

eede

r pic

k-up

rela

y so

leno

id d

rive

sign

al (M

FRLS

D)

J115

B-2

J115

B-7

Mul

tifee

der

pape

r de

tect

ion

sign

al (

MF

S)

Mul

tifee

der p

ick-u

p clu

tch

drive

sig

nal (

MFP

CD

)

Pick-up Motor

Mul

tifee

der p

ick-u

p so

leno

id d

rive

signa

l (re

leas

ing

dire

ctio

n; S

L10B

D)



5-16

B. Detecting the Size of Paper in the Multifeeder

When the slide guide of the multifeeder is set to suit the paper width, the variableresistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the slide guide generates aspecific output, allowing the DC controller to identify the width of the copy paper.

The width identified this way is used to control the lens and blank exposure. Thelength of paper when the multifeeder is used is identified in relation to how long the pre-registration paper sensor (PS23) remains ON.

You need to enter the paper width basic value whenever you have replaced thepaper width detecting variable resistor of the multi feeder (p. 10-53).

Figure 5-402

DC controller PCB

Variable resistor

Slide guide (rear)

Slide guide (front)

Multifeeder tray

Mul

tifee

der

pape

r de

tect

ion

sign

al(M

FP

W)



5-17

C. Sequence of Operations (multifeeder)

Figure 5-403

INTR

Copy Start key ON

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid(releasing direction; SL10)

Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7)

Registration paper sensor (PS23)

Registration roller drive clutch (CL9)

Scanner motor (M3)

SCFW

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid (pick-up direction; SL10)

Multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid (SL15)

SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

Scanner motor rotation CCW (in reverse)



5-18

V. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH

The registration clutch serves to make sure that copy paper and the image on thedrum match at a specific point.

In modes other than binding mode, the registration clutch exerts control so that theleading edge of copy paper and that of the image on the drum match.

In binding mode, control is as shown in Figure 5-501 so that a binding margin will becreated on the copy.

Figure 5-501

A BCopy paper advances ahead of image on drum

Copy paper lags behind image on drum

Image on drumImage on drum

Drum Drum

Copy paper



5-19

Selected mode

One-sided originals One-sided copy

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side(left)

Copying on 2nd side(right)



Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side



Copy papertiming

B

A

B

A

B

B

B

B

B

A

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

Shift (mm)

May bebetween 0and 20 mm;illustrationsassume ashift of 5 mm.

Copy paper on copy tray

One-sided original↓

Two-sided copyTwo-sided original

↓Two-sided copy

Two-sided original↓

One-sided copy

Page separation↓

(one-sided copy)

Page separation ↓

Two-sided copy

One-sided original ↓

Overlay copyTwo-sided original

↓Overlay copy

Page separation ↓

Overlay copy

D 5

D

5or 0

5

D

5

5

D 5

D 5or 0D 5

D 5

D

5

5

D 5

D 5

D 5

Copy paper Image area for copying on 1st side

Image area for copying on 2nd side

Area D: Erased by blank exposure

VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY COPIES (1st SIDE)

A. Two-Sided/Overlay Copy Operation

The feeding path for copying on the first side of a two-sided/overlay copy is formedwhen the delivery paper deflecting plate is lifted by the delivery paper deflecting solenoid(SL2).

The paper deflecting plate is lifted as soon as the registration clutch (CL9) turns ON.When its first side has been copied, the copy paper is fed to the holding tray by the

holding tray inlet roller (CW rotation).The holding tray swinging solenoid (SL9) and the holding tray (X, Y) motor (M8, M9)

help stack copy paper each time a sheet arrives at the holding tray. (See pp. 5-30 and -31.)

When the first sheet is stacked on the holding tray assembly, the holding tray re-pickup roller is rotated to help stacking. The holding tray is capable of supporting up to 50sheets of copy paper.

Figure 5-601

DC controller PCB

J108

A-7

Reg

istra

tion

pape

r det

ectio

n si

gnal

(RG

PD

)J108

B-4

Fixin

g as

sem

bly

outle

t pap

er d

etec

tion

signa

l (FX

DEL

)

J108

A-1

9Fi

xing

asse

mbl

y in

let p

aper

det

ectio

n sig

nal (

FXC

JS)J1

13B

-10

Hol

ding

tray

inle

t pap

er s

enso

r (P

S15

D)

J108

B-1

0D

elive

ry d

efle

ctin

g so

leno

id d

rive

signa

l (D

PDSD

)J113

B-1

2In

tern

al d

eliv

ery

sign

al (

IDP

D)

J113

A-7

Hol

ding

tray

forw

ard

clut

ch d

rive

sign

al (

HT

FW

CD

)

J113

A-6

Hol

ding

tray

rev

ersi

ng c

lutc

h dr

ive

sign

al (

HT

RV

CD

)

J113

A-5

Hol

ding

tray

re-

pick

up

rolle

r so

leno

id d

rive

sign

al (

HT

DS

D)

SL2

M2

CL5

CL4Pick-up motor

PS12

PS47

PS52

PS15

PS23

SL6

Holding tray inlet roller


Holding tray re-pick up rollerHolding tray feeding assembly



5-20

1. Sequence of Operations for Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (1st side)

Figure 5-602

Power switchON

Pick-up motor (M2)

INTR SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

: Motor CW rotation : Motor CCW rotation

SCFW

Fixing assembly outlet sensor (PS47)

Internal delivery sensor (PS12)

Holding tray inlet paper sensor (PS15)

Holding tray forward clutch (CL5)

Holding tray (X) motor (M8)

Holding tray swinging solenoid (SL9)

Holding tray re-pick up roller solenoid (SL6)

Holding tray (X) home position sensor (PS21)

Delivery deflecting plate solenoid (SL2)

Holding tray (Y)motor (M9)

Holding tray (Y) home position sensor (PS20)

Holding tray re-circulating lever motor (M7)



5-21

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side)

When copying on the second side of a two-sided copy, the copy paper is picked upfrom the stack on the holding tray.

When the Copy Start key is pressed, the holding tray separation clutch (CL6) and theholding tray re-pick up roller solenoid (SL6) turn ON to feed one sheet of copy paper tothe holding tray registration roller.

The copy paper forms an arch when its leading edge butts against the holding trayregistration roller and moves ahead to the holding tray feeding assembly when theholding tray registration clutch (CL3) turns ON.

The copy paper then moves through the holding tray feeding assembly to the regis-tration roller.

Figure 5-603

J113

B-7

J113

B-1

1

J113

B-1

2

J113

A-1

0

J113

B-6

J113

B-8

J119

A-4

J113

A-5

J112

A-9

J108

A-7

J112

A-7

J119

A-7

Hol

ding

tray

reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

driv

e si

gnal

(H

TR

GC

D)

Hol

ding

tray

pic

k-up

pap

er d

etec

tion

sign

al (P

S17

D)

Holdi

ng tr

ay fe

eding

ass

embly

2 p

ick-u

p pa

per d

etec

tion

signa

l

(PS

9D)

Hol

ding

tray

hom

e po

sitio

n si

gnal

(H

TY

HP

)

Hol

ding

tray

re-c

ircul

atin

g le

ver h

ome

posit

ion

signa

l (H

TLPD

)

Hol

ding

tray

sep

arat

ion

clut

ch d

rive

sign

al (H

TSP

CD

)

Holdi

ng tr

ay fe

eding

ass

embly

1 p

ick-u

p de

tecti

ng si

gnal

(PS8

D)

Reg

istr

atio

n pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(R

GP

D)

Hol

ding

tray

feed

ing

1 cl

utch

driv

e si

gnal

(HTF

1CD

)

Pic

k-up

ver

tical

pat

h 1

pape

r det

ectio

n si

gnal

(PS

33D

)

Hol

ding

tray

re-p

ick u

p ro

ller s

olen

oid

drive

sig

nal (

HTD

SD)

Hol

ding

tray

feed

ing

2 cl

utch

driv

e si

gnal

(HTF

1CD

)

PS23

PS33

Pick-up motor

PS8

Holdingtray feeding

assembly

PS19

PS9

Holding tray registration roller

CL3

J113

A-3

Hol

ding

tray

regi

stra

tion

pape

r det

ectio

n sig

nal (

PS14

D)

M2

PS20

CL1

CL2

CL6

SL6

DC controller PCB

PS14PS17



5-22

1. Sequence of Operations for Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side)

Figure 5-604

INTR

Copy Start key ON

Holding tray re-circulating bar home position sensor (PS19)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray separation clutch (C6)

SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTRSCRV

Holding tray weight solenoid (SL7)


Holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17)

Holding tray registration paper sensor (PS14)

Holding tray registration clutch (Cl3)

Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor (PS9)




5-23

C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side)

1. OutlineThe feeding path for copying on the second side of an overlay copy is formed when

the holding tray paper deflecting plate is lifted by the holding tray paper deflectingsolenoid (SL8).

The second side is copied on copy paper picked up from the holding tray. The copypaper is first fed in the direction of the holding tray inlet and then switched back in thedirection of the holding tray registration roller.

Figure 5-605

CL5

CL4

SL6

M2

Holding tray re-pick up roller

CL6

SL8

PS14

PS17


Feeding rollerHolding tray registration roller

Holding tray reversing

registration roller

J113

A-5

J113

B-8

J113

A-7

J113

A-6

J113

A-3

J113

B-9

J113

B-1

1H

oldi

ng tr

ay p

ick-

up d

etec

tion

sign

al (

PS

17D

)

Hol

ding

tray

pic

k-up

pap

er d

efle

ctin

g pl

ate

sole

noid

driv

e si

gnal

(H

TP

DD

)

Hol

ding

tray

reg

istr

atio

n pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(P

S14

D)

Hol

ding

tray

rev

ersi

ng c

lutc

h dr

ive

sign

al (

HT

RV

CD

)

Hol

ding

tray

forw

ard

clut

ch d

rive

sign

al (

HT

FW

CD

)

Hol

ding

tray

sep

arat

ion

clut

ch d

rive

sign

al (

HT

SP

CD

)

Hol

ding

tray

re-

pick

up

rolle

r so

leno

id d

rive

sign

al (

HT

DS

D)

DC controller PCB

Pick-up motor



5-24

2. Outline of Operationsq After pick-up, the copy paper is fed upward by the holding tray paper deflecting plate.

Figure 5-606

w As soon as the trailing edge of the copy paper leaves the holding tray paperdeflecting plate, the holding tray forward clutch (CL5) turns OFF, temporarilystopping the copy paper.

Figure 5-607

e The holding tray reversing clutch (CL4) turns ON, and the copy paper is reversed inthe direction of the holding tray registration roller.

Figure 5-608

Holding tray registration roller

PS14

Holding tray paperdeflecting plate



5-25

r The copy paper reaches the holding tray registration roller and moves ahead to theregistration roller through the holding tray feeding assembly.

Figure 5-609

PS14 To holding tray feeding assembly



5-26

3. Sequence of Operations for Overlay Copies (2nd side)

Figure 5-610

Copy Start key ON


Pick-up motor (M2)


INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR

Holding tray re-circulating lever home position sensor (PS19)

Holding tray weight solenoid (SL7)

Holding tray separation clutch (CL6)

Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)


Holding tray registration clutch (CL3)



Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL8)



SCFW SCRV



5-27

D. Reversal Delivery

The reversal delivery feeding path is formed by the delivery paper deflecting platelifted by the delivery deflecting plate solenoid (SL2).

The delivery deflecting plate operates as soon as the registration clutch (CL9) turnsON, thereby forwarding the paper in the direction of the holding tray.

A specific period of time after the trailing edge of copy paper has moved past thefixing assembly outlet sensor (PS47), the holding tray forward clutch (CL5) turns OFFand, at the same time, the holding tray reversing clutch (CL4) turns ON.

This condition causes the roller inside the holding tray to rotate in reverse, feedingthe copy paper in the direction of delivery. (Figure 5-612)

Figure 5-611 (CW operation)

Figure 5-612 (CCW operation)

CL5

PS47

PS12

CL4

M2

CL5

PS47

PS12

CL4

SL2

M2

Pick-up motor Holding tray

reversing clutch

Holding tray forward clutch




5-28

1. Sequence of Reversal Delivery Operations

Figure 5-613

Copy Start key ON

Pick-up motor (M2)

INTR SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

: Motor CW rotation

: Motor CCW rotation

SCFW

Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47)




Holding tray (X) motor (M8)

Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)

External delivery sensor (PS10)

Holding tray (X) home position sensor (PS21)

Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL2)

Holding tray (Y)motor (M9)

Holding tray (Y) home position sensor (PS20)



5-29

E. Switching Paper Sizes for Two-Sided/Overlay/ReversalDelivery Copies

1. Movement of the Paper Size GuideWhen the Copy Start key is pressed in two-sided/overlay/reversal delivery copy

mode, the holding tray (X, Y) motor (M8, M9) starts to rotate clockwise, and the papersize guide moves in the direction of the arrow (Figure 5-614).

When the light-blocking plate of the paper size guide blocks the holding tray (X, Y)home position sensor (PS21, PS20), the motor (M8, M9) stops.

Then, the DC controller PCB sends a specific number of pulses to represent the sizeof the copy paper being used to the motor (M8, M9).

The motor, in response, rotates counterclockwise to move the paper size guide to theposition appropriate to the copy size to wait for the arrival of copy paper.

While the second side is being copied, the motor (M8, M9) remains at rest; it remainsat rest until the first side of the next copy is copied.

Figure 5-614

DC controller PCB

M8 M9Holding tray Y motor

Holding tray X motor

CW direction

Reverse direction

Paper size guide plate

PS20

Light-blocking plate

Rear guide plate

J113

-A10

J113

-1

PS21

Hol

ding

tray

(X

) ho

me

posi

tion

sens

or(H

TX

HF

)

Hol

ding

tray

(Y

) ho

me

posi

tion

sens

or(H

TY

HP

)



5-30

2. Movement of the Paper Jogging Plate and the Rear Guide PlateWhen copy paper reaches the holding tray assembly, the paper jogging plate (X

direction) and the rear guide plate (Y direction) operate to arrange sheets of paper.The holding tray paper jogging solenoid (SL9) on the holding tray paper guide plate

is turned ON/OFF to operate the paper jogging plate to put the sheets of copy paper intoorder, thereby preventing skew movement for re-pick up.

Figure 5-615

When copy paper reaches the holding tray assembly, the motor M9 rotates clockwiseand counterclockwise to operate the rear guide plate to arrange the trailing edge of thecopy paper.

Figure 5-616

Reverse

Forward

Rear guide plate

Copy paper

ONSL9

Paper jogging plate

Side guide



5-31

3. Detecting Copy PaperCopy paper (last sheet) is detected for re-pick up from the holding tray.When copy paper has been stacked on the holding tray, the holding tray re-circulat-

ing motor (M7) is driven to place the re-circulating lever on the top sheet of the stack.When the last sheet is picked up, the re-circulating lever falls through the holding tray,allowing the holding tray re-circulating lever home position sensor (PS19) to assume thatthe last sheet has been picked up and to generate the last sheet detection signal(HPLPD).

Figure 5-617

Holding tray re-circulating motor (M7)

Copy paper

Re-circulating lever

Holding tray re-circulating lever home position sensor (PS19)



5-32

F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray

When the Copy Start key is pressed for copying on the second side, pick-up/sepa-ration operation is initiated.

In response to a press on the Copy Start key, the holding tray re-pick up solenoid(SL6) turns ON to rotate the holding tray re-pick up roller, sending the copy paper in thedirection of the feeding roller/separation belt; at the same time, the holding tray weightsolenoid (SL7) is turned ON to lower the weight plate on the copy paper to facilitatepaper feeding.

If double feeding has occurred while paper is being moved in the direction of thefeeding roller/separation belt, the separation belt pushes back the top sheet in the direc-tion of the holding tray.

Reference:The weight plate is lowered for re-pick up of the first sheet and the last sheet.

Figure 5-618

Separation belt Weight plate

Feeding roller Copy paperHolding tray re-pick up roller



5-33

G. Skipping

1. OutlineWhat is termed skipping is a copy sequence used when making two-sided copies of

one-sided originals by skipping every other original, thereby making efficient use of thespace in the feeding assembly (holding tray assembly and holding tray feeding assem-bly) not taken up by copy paper.

Figure 5-619

Skipping is executed automatically under the following conditions:• The RDF is used to make two-sided copies of one-sided originals.• The copy paper and the original are A4, B5, or LTR and are fed horizontally.• Binding mode and cover mode are not used.• No more than two sets of copies are specified.

2. OperationThe originals are copied in the following sequence:

a. 4 Originals for 2 Sets of Copies4 (th original), 2, 4, 3, 2, 1, 3, and 1 (st original)

b. 5 Originals for 2 Sets of Copies5 (th original), 3, 1, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 4, and 2 (nd original)

c. 4 Originals for 1 Set of Copies4 (th original), 2, 3, and 1(st original)

d. 5 Originals for 1 Set of Copies5 (th original), 3, 1, 4, and 2 (nd original)

Reference:Skipping may be disabled in user mode.

Space

Copy paper


Originals to be skipped

Originals

Photosennsitivedrum

Registrationrollers



5-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-35

e The 3rd original is picked up, but is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

r The 2nd original is picked up. t The 2nd original is copied.w The 4th original is picked up and copied.

u The 4th original is picked up. i The 4th original is copied. (2nd set) o The 3rd original is picked up.y The 1st original is picked up, but is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).At this time, the number of originals is identified as being an even number. (If making one set of copies, moves to step 16.)

!5 The 4th original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation). (If making two sets of copies, repeats steps 7 through 15 once.)

!2 The 2nd original is copied. (2nd set) !4 The 1st original is copied on the back of the 2nd copy paper picked up from the holding tray.

!1 The 2nd original is picked up.!0 The 3rd original is copied on the back of the 4th copy paper picked up from the holding tray.

q

!6 The 3rd original is picked up. !7 The 3rd original is copied on the back of the 4th copy paper picked up from the holding tray. (2nd set)

!8 The 2nd original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

!3 The 1st original is picked up.

RDF

Scanner

Fixing rollers Holding tray

Originals

Photosensitive drumRegistration rollers

1234

123

4

4

12

3

4

4

1

2

34

4

1

2

2

34

4

1

2

2

34

4

123

4

42

12

2

3

4

4

4

12

2

3

4

4

4

12

2

3

4

4

34

1

2

2

34

4

34

1

2

2

2

34

4

34

1

2

2

2

34

4

34

1

1

2

2

2

34

4

34

12

2

12

3

4

4

34

12

2

1 2

3

4

4

34

12

2

1 2

3

3

4

4

34

1

2

2

1 2

34

34

34

The Copy Start key is pressed.

3. Skip Mode (copying an even number of originals)

Figure 5-620a

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-36

@1 End.@0 The 1st original is copied on the back of the 2nd

copy paper picked up from the holding tray. (2nd set)

!9 The 1st original is picked up.

1

2

2

1 2

34

3 4

34

1

1

2

2

1 2

34

3 4

34

12

1 2

1 2

34

3 4

34

Figure 5-620b


e The 4th original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

r The 3rd original is picked up. t The 3rd original is copied.w The 5th original is picked up and copied.

i The 1st original is copied. o The 5th copy paper picked up from the holding tray is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

(If making one set of copies, moves to step 22.)

!0 The 5th original is picked up.u The 1st original is picked up.y The 2nd original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

!3 The 4th original is copied to the back of the 3rd copy paper picked up from the holding tray. The copy paper is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

!5 The 3rd original is copied.!2 The 4th original is picked up.!1 The 5th original is copied. (2nd set) (When making two sets of copies, repeats steps 9

through 19 once.)

q The Copy Start key is pressed.

!8 The 1st original is picked up. !9 The 1st original is copied. @0 The 5th original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

!7 The 2nd original is copied on the back of the 1st copy paper picked up from the holding tray. The copy paper is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

!6 The 2nd original is picked up.

!4 The 3rd original is picked up.

12345

RDF

Scanner

Fixing rollers Holding tray

Originals

Photosensitive drumRegistration rollers

1234

5

5

123

4

5

12

3

45

5

12

3

3

45

5

1

2

3

3

45

5

1

23

3

45

5

1

1

23

3

45

5

1

1

23

3

45

55 W

1

1

23

3

4

5

5 W

1

1

23

3

4

5

5

5 W

1

1

23

3

4

5

5

5 W

1

1

23

33

4

44

5

5

5 W

15

12

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

1

5

12

3

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

1

5

1

2

3

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

11

5

1

2

22

3

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

53

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

1

1

1

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

5

5

5 W

1

5

1

1

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

5

5 W

Figure 5-621a

4. Skip Mode (copying an odd number of originals)


@3 The 4th original is copied (2nd set) on the back of the 3rd copy paper picked up from the holding tray. The copy paper is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

@4 The 3rd original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

@5 The 2nd original is picked up.@2 The 4th original is picked up.

@8 End.@7 The 1st original is returned to the RDF’s original tray without copying (skip operation).

@6 The 2nd original is copied (2nd set) on the back of the 1st copy paper picked up from the holding tray. The copy paper is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

@1 The 5th copy paper picked up from the holding tray is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged. (2nd set)

5

1

1

23

3

4

5

5 W

W

15

23 4

W

1

1

23

3

4

5

5 W

15 2

34

W

1

1

23

4

34

5

5 W

15

23

3 4

4

W

1

1

2

3

45

5 W

15

23

3 4

4

W

1

1

2

345

15

23

3 4

45 W

W

15

1

2

12

2

3

3

4

1 23 4

4

5

5 W

W15

23

1 23 4

45 W

W

1

2345

5 W

15

23

1 23 4

4

W

12345

5 W

15

2

1 2 4

4

W

Figure 5-621b

5. Reverse DeliveryReverse delivery is executed when an odd number of originals are copied in skipping

mode or when reverse delivery is selected. In reverse delivery, the copies are turnedover for delivery so that they are collated on the copy tray.

a. If the copies of an odd number of originals are stacked not using reverse delivery,

Figure 5-622a

b. If the copies of an odd number of originals are stacked using reverse delivery,

Figure 5-622b

2

1

3

21

3



5-39

VII. DETECTING JAMS

A. Outline

As many as 17 sensors are arranged as shown in Figure 5-701 to check if copypaper is moving properly. The microprocessor reads signals from sensors at such timesas programmed to detect jams. When the microprocessor detects a jam, it discharges allsheets moving ahead of the jam and stops the ongoing operation; thereafter, it indicatesinstructions on jam removal on the control panel.

If the jam is in the pick-up assembly (Figure 5-701), control of the fixing assemblytemperature is continued throughout jam removal work unless paper has been picked upfrom the multifeeder.

The sheets existing on the holding tray at time of a jam are picked up after jamremoval. (This, however, does not apply if the holding tray has been removed for jamremoval.)

Figure 5-701

Photosensitive drum

Pre-transfer roller

Registration roller

Pick-up assembly block

Paper deck

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

PS27

PS36

PS24

PS33PS8Holding tray feeding assembly

PS9PS17

PS14

Delivery paper deflecting plate

Delivery assemblyPS10 PS47

Fixing assembly

Feeding assembly


PS23

Multifeeder

Copy tray PS12PS15

PS30

PS52



5-40

Table 5-701



5-41

Name

Holding trayfeeding assembly1 paper sensor

Holding trayfeeding assembly2 paper sensor

Externaldelivery sensor

Internal deliverysensor

Holding trayregistrationpaper sensor

Holding tray inletpaper sensor

Holding traypick-up sensor

Holding tray re-circulating leverhome positionsensor

Function

Detectsdelay/station-ary jams.



Detects sta-tionary jams.



Detects delayjams.

Detects paperon holdingtray.

Sensor No.

PS23

PS24

PS27

PS30

PS33

PS36

PS47

PS52

Sensor No.

PS8

PS9

PS10

PS12

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS19

Name

Registrationpaper sensor

Pick-up verticalpath 0 papersensor





Fixing assemblyoutlet papersensor

Claw jamsensor

Function








Detectsstationaryjams

The microprocessor identifies any of the following conditions as a jam:a. Paper exists over a sensor at power-on, at the end of wait-up, or during standby.b. Delay jams are detected when copy paper does not reach a specific sensor within a

specific period of time.1. Registration roller delay jam by the registration paper sensor (PS23).2. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam by the pick-up vertical path 1 paper

sensor (PS33).3. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam by the pick-up vertical path 0 paper




sensor (PS30).7. Fixing feeding re-pick up delay jam by the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

(PS47)8. External delivery delay jam by the external delivery sensor (PS10).9. Holding tray inlet delay jam by the holding tray inlet paper sensor (PS15).10. Holding tray pick-up delay jam by the holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17).11. Holding tray registration delay jam by the holding tray registration paper sensor

(PS14).12. Holding tray feeding assembly 2 delay jam by the holding tray feeding assembly

2 paper sensor (PS9).13. Holding tray feeding assembly 1 delay jam by the holding tray feeding 1 paper

sensor (PS8)c. Stationary jams are detected when paper does not move past a specific sensor

within a specific period of time.1. Registration roller stationary jam by the registration paper sensor (PS23)2. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam by the pick-up vertical path 1 paper

sensor (PS33)3. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam by the pick-up vertical path 0 paper




sensor (PS30)7. Fixing feeding re-pick up stationary jam by the fixing assembly outlet paper

sensor (PS47)8. External delivery stationary jam by the external delivery sensor (PS10)9. Internal delivery stationary jam by the internal delivery paper sensor (PS12)10. Holding tray inlet stationary jam by the holding tray inlet paper sensor (PS15)11. Holding tray registration stationary jam by the holding tray registration paper

sensor (PS14)12. Holding tray feeding assembly 2 stationary jam by the holding tray feeding

assembly 2 paper sensor (PS9)13. Holding tray feeding assembly 1 stationary jam by the holding tray feeding

assembly 1 paper sensor (PS8)14. Fixing assembly separation claw jam by the claw jam sensor (PS52)



5-42

1. Registration Roller Delay Jam

Figure 5-702

2. Registration Roller Stationary Jam

Figure 5-703

Registration delay jam check


SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator

I

SCRV SCFW SCRV

INTR

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

I:Varies according to the length of copy paper.

Jam check


Pick-up motor (M2)

Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7)

Copy Start key ON

Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor (PS33)





INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

Jam indicator ON

0.4 sec(approx.)

0.7 sec (approx.)

0.9 sec (approx.)

1.4 sec (approx.)

1.7 sec (approx.)

2.1 sec (approx.)

Normal Error



5-43

3. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 0/1 Delay Jam

Figure 5-704

4. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 0/1 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-705

Pick-up vertical path feeding jam check

Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS33)

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW


Copy Start key ON

Normal Error

Jam indicator ON


I



Jam indicator

Normal

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW


Copy Start key ON

Error



5-44

5. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 2–4 Delay Jam

Figure 5-706

6. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 2–4 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-707

SCFW

Jam indicator

SCFW SCRV

Error

PKUPR

Pick-up vertical path delay jam check


Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)



Copy Start key ON

Normal

Normal

Normal

Error

Error


I

I

I

SCFW

Jam indicator ON

SCFW SCRV

Error

PKUPR

Left deck pick-up clutch (CL16)


Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor (PSS36)


Copy Start key ON

Normal



5-45

7. Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay Jam

Figure 5-708

8. Fixing Assembly Outlet Stationary Jam

Figure 5-709

Fixing assembly outlet delay jam check

SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator

SCRV SCFW SCRV

Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)


Normal

I



SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator ON

SCRV SCFW SCRV

Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)


Normal

1.1 sec (approx.)



5-46

9. External Delivery Delay Jam

Figure 5-710

10. External Delivery Stationary Jam

Figure 5-711

External delivery delay jam check

Jam indicator ON

I

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

External delivery paper sensor (PS10)

SCRV LSTR

I: Varies according to the length of copy paper.


Jam indicator ON

I

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

External paper sensor (PS10)

SCRV LSTR

I: About 0.25 sec in normal delivery. Varies according to the length of copy paper in reverse delivery.



5-47

11. Internal Delivery Delay Jam

Figure 5-712

12. Internal Delivery Paper Stationary Jam

Figure 5-713

Internal delivery delay jam check

Jam indicator ONSCFW

Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


SCRV LSTR

Normal

I



Jam indicator ON

0.2 sec (approx.)

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Internal delivery paper sensor (PS12)

SCRV LSTR



5-48

13. Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam

Figure 5-714

14. Holding Tray Inlet Stationary Jam

Figure 5-715

Holding tray inlet delay jam check

Jam indicator SCFW

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15)

LSTR

Normal

I

Error



Jam indicator ONSCFW

Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15)

LSTR

Normal

0.2 sec (approx.)



5-49

15. Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Delay Jam

Figure 5-716

16. Holding Tray Registration Delay Jam

Figure 5-717


Jam indicator ON

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Normal Error

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

I: 0.1 sec in two-sided copying. Varies according to the length of copy paper in overlay copying.

I


Jam indicator ON

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Normal Error

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW



5-50

17. Holding Tray Registration Stationary Jam

Figure 5-718

18. Holding Tray Feeding 1/2 Delay Jam

Figure 5-719


Jam indicator ON

Jam check


Normal

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

Pick-up motor (M2)


Error

Holding tray registration delay jam check

Jam indicator

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Normal Error

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

I




5-51

19. Holding Tray Feeding 1/2 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-720

20. Fixing Assembly Separation Claw Stationary Jam

Figure 5-721

Jam indication ON

Fixing assembly outletpaper sensor (PS47)

Jam check0.15s or less (approx.)

Normal Error

SCFW

SCRV LSTR

Pick-up motor (M2)

Claw jam sensor (PS52)

Holding tray feeding 1/2 delay jam

Jam indicator ON

Jam check


Normal Error

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

I

Pick-up motor (M2)





5-52

VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY








A. Multifeeder Assembly

1. Removing the Multifeeder Assembly1) Remove the right cover and right upper cover; then disconnect the two connectors

q.

Figure 5-801

2) Open the multifeeder assembly, and open the multifeeder door by pulling on the grip.Remove the door tape, and lift the multifeeder assembly to separate the multifeederassembly from the hinge.

q



5-53

!

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller1) Open the multifeeder paper guide.2) Remove the stop rings q from both left and right 1 (two each); then, remove the

shutters w and the two rollers e (two each).

Figure 5-802

If the multifeeder was used at time of installation or if it was used after a long time,pick-up operation may fail.If such is the case, remove the protection sheet from the sponge roller, and dry wipethe surface of the sponge roller.

3. Installing the Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind.• The front and rear pick-up rollers are not interchangeable.• The front pick-up roller is silver.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the roundmarking w on the collar (silver) is toward the front.

q Marking (roller)w Marking (collar)

Figure 5-803

q

w

Direction ofrotation

Collar (silver) Front (copier)

q

qw

we



5-54

Caution:

• The pick-up roller at the rear is gold.When installing the pick-up roller r to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the round

marking t on the side of the roller and the round marking y on the collar (gold) are atthe rear of the copier.

r Pick-up rollert Marking (roller)y Marking (collar)

Figure 5-803a

4. Removing the Separation Roller1) Remove the multifeeder assembly.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the upper registration roller

assembly w.

Figure 5-804

q qw

r

ty


Collar (gold)Rear (copier)



5-55

3) Remove the spring e at the front and the rear (one each) and the mounting screwr at the front; then, pull out the positioning pin t, and remove the lower registrationroller assembly y.

Figure 5-805

4) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the separation roller support i.5) Remove the joint, and remove the separation roller o.

The bushing at the front will come off when removing the separation roller. Takecare.

Figure 5-806

u

i o

e r ty



5-56

Caution:

The urethane sponge used is pink immediately after foaming and changes to yellowas time passes, faster if exposed to light; it changes from pink to orange and toyellow, showing the general characteristics of urethane sponge; however, suchdiscoloration will not lower its physical properties (performance). Keep in mind thatthe same type of sponge can take on different colors.

Figure 5-806a

5. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the multifeeder assembly.2) Remove the separation roller.3) Remove the pick-up roller at the front, and remove the stop ring.4) Remove the stop ring q at the front of the feeding roller assembly, and remove the

feeding roller assembly e together with the timing belt w.

Figure 5-807

w

e

q

Urethane sponge



5-57

Caution:

6. Removing the Multifeeder Paper Sensor1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the solenoid cover w. Remove the

mounting screw e. Remove the solenoid r together with the support plate.

Figure 5-808

2) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the grip y.

Figure 5-809

t

y

q w

e

r



5-58

3) Remove the ten mounting screws u, and remove the door sensor fixing i and themultifeeder cover o.

Figure 5-810

4) Remove the two mounting screws !0, and remove the lower cover !1.

Figure 5-811

5) Remove the two mounting screws !2, and remove the guide plate !3.

Figure 5-812

!2

!3

!0!1

u

u u

u

i

o



5-59

6) Remove the two mounting screws !4, and remove the sensor mount !5.7) Remove the sensor from the sensor mount.

Figure 5-813

7. Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt for the Multifeeder AssemblyButt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open state).Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley.

Figure 5-814

8. Installing the Feeding Roller of the MultifeederInstall the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly so that the belt pulley

w and the marking ‘1’ e are at the front of the copier.

q Pick-up rollerw Belt pulleye Marking (roller)

Figure 5-815

q

w

e

5

5

(front)

PulleyPulley

Timing beltRack plate

Section A

Slide volume

B

!4

!5



5-60

9. Adjusting the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller Pressure (multifeeder)If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

pressure spring of the separation roller:• If double feeding occurs, move the position of the spring hook on side A.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring hook on side B.

Figure 5-816

10. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (multifeeder)Make adjustments by sliding the solenoid in the direction of A so that the gap

between the shutter q and the shutter plate w is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the solenoid ispulled.

Figure 5-817

Figure 5-818

q w

0.4–

0.2m

m

0.4–

0.2m

m

A

BA



5-61

B. Paper Deck Assembly

1. Removing the Paper Deck Assembly from the Copier1) Remove the two stoppers q from the left and the right of the paper deck, and

remove the paper deck.

Figure 5-820 (left side of paper deck)

Figure 5-820a (right side of paper deck)

q

q



5-62

2. Removing the Lifter Cable1) Remove the paper deck.2) Remove the two mounting screws q from the top, loosen the two mounting screws

w on the side, and remove the deck front cover e.3) Remove the two mounting screws r from the inside of the deck; then, remove the

guide plate t at the front and the rear.

Figure 5-821

4) Mark the position of the latch assembly with a scribe; then, remove the sevenmounting screws y from the left and the right (7 in total), and remove the latchassembly u.

5) Remove the gear cover i from the front right.

Figure 5-822 (left)

y

u

w

w

r

t

q

e



5-63

Figure 5-822a (right)

6) Remove the mounting screw o from the front, thereby freeing the oil damper plate!0.

Figure 5-823

7) Remove the E-ring !1, and remove the end of the cable !2 from the pulley whilesliding out the gear and the pulley cover to the front.

Figure 5-824

!1

!2

o !0

yy

u

i



5-64

8) While holding the gear and the spring at the rear, remove the E-ring !3; then, removethe cable !5 from the pulley cover !4 while sliding out the pulley cover to the front.

9) Remove the end of the cable from the pulley.

Figure 5-825

10) Remove the mounting screw !6 from the cable relay assembly at the front, andremove the fixing !7.

Figure 5-826

!6

!7

!3

!4

!5



5-65

11) Remove the mounting screw !8 from the cable relay assembly at the rear, andremove the fixing !9.

Figure 5-827

12) Remove the two mounting screws @0, and remove the grip assembly @1.

Figure 5-828

@0

@1

!8 !9



5-66

13) Remove the eleven mounting screws @2, and remove the cable together with itsmounting plate @3.

Figure 5-829 (front)

Figure 5-829a (rear)

@2@3

@2

@3



5-67

3. Changing the Deck Paper SizeTo change the size of the paper deck, change the position of the guide plate at the

front, rear, and rear left.

Reference:At time of shipment from the factory, the paper deck is set to A4.You need not perform the following steps if the user uses A4 sheets. (Be sure,however, to attach the paper size label.)

1) Pull out the deck to the front until it stops.2) Remove the three mounting screws q from the guide plate at the front, rear, and rear

left, and remove the three guide plates w.

Figure 5-830

q

q

q

w

w

w

(front)

(rear)



5-68

3) Install the front, rear, and rear left guide plate w according to the size markings onthe base plate, front side plate, and guide plate of the deck.

Figure 5-831

Check to make sure that the front and the rear guide plates are installed as follows:• The plate is installed at a right angle in relation to the base of the deck.• The plate is installed in parallel in relation to the metal plate at the front and the

rear.

4) Put copy paper in the deck, and push in the deck into the copier.5) Register the new deck paper size in the copier’s memory in service mode (]5]).

LTR

B5

A4

AL

LTR

LTR

B5

B5

A4



5-69

Caution:

4. Adjusting the Registration for the DeckRemove the deck front cover; then, loosen the mounting screws q on both left and

right of the deck (2 in total), and slide the latch assembly w back and forth until thespecifications indicated in Figure 5-833 are met.

Figure 5-832 (left)

Figure 5-832a (right)

Figure 5-833

02

4

6

810

0–1.5mm

q

w

q

w



5-70

C. Cassette/Paper Deck Pick-Up Assembly

1. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly from the Copier1) Slide out the paper deck and the cassette from the appropriate holder.2) Open the upper right door and the lower right door.

You may not be able to remove the pick-up assembly if you try to remove it withoutfirst removing the cassette and the paper deck because of the lifter.

3) Remove the mounting screw q and the connector cover w; then, disconnect the twoconnectors e.

4) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the pick-up assembly t.

Figure 5-834

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller1) Remove the pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the two stop rings q from the outside, and remove the pick-up rollers w in

the direction of the arrows.

Figure 5-835

q

w

q w

e

rr

t



5-71

Caution:

n Orientation of the Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The front and rear pick-up rollers are not interchangeable.• The collar of the front pick-up roller is gold.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the roundmarking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar (gold) aretoward the front of the machine.

Figure 5-836

• The collar of the pick-up roller at the rear is silver. When installing the pick-up roller rto the pick-up assembly, be sure that the round marking t of the collar (silver) istoward the rear.

Figure 5-836a

r

t


Collar (silver) Rear (copier)

q

we

Direction of rotation

Collar (gold)Front (copier)



5-72

3. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the screw w, and remove the feeding roller cover q.3) Remove the stop ring e from the front of the feeding roller.4) Remove the stop ring r at the front and the pick-up roller t; then, remove the

feeding roller u together with the timing belt y.

Figure 5-837

4. Removing the Separation Roller1) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the feeding guide plate w; then,

remove the open/close guide e.

Figure 5-838

qw

e

q

w

e

r t y

u



5-73

2) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the separation roller assembly tfrom the joint.

Figure 5-839

3) Remove the separation roller y from the separation roller shaft mount.

Take care not to drop the pin from the roller.

Figure 5-840

The urethane sponge used is pink immediately after foaming and changes to yellowas time passes, faster if exposed to light; it changes from pink to orange and toyellow, showing the general characteristics of urethane sponge; however, suchdiscoloration will not lower its physical properties (performance). Keep in mind thatthe same type of sponge can take on different colors.

y

r

t



5-74

Caution:

Caution:

5. Adjusting the Separation Roller PressureIf double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

pressure spring of the separation roller:• If double feeding occurs, move the position of the spring hook on side B.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring hook on side A.

q Feeding roller e Locking leverw Separation roller r Pressure spring

Figure 5-841

q

w

e

r

A

B



5-75

6. Orientation of the Separation RollerKeep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller:

Figure 5-842

If installed in the wrong orientation, the separation roller will interfere with thelocking washer.

7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up AssemblyWhen installing the feeding roller to the cassette/deck pick-up assembly, install it so

that the belt pulley w is at the front of the copier.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, be sure so that the

marking ‘5’ t is toward the front.

q Feeding roller assembly r Feeding roller shaftw Belt pulley t Marking (roller)e Feeding roller

Figure 5-843

wq

r

5

5

e

t

Front

Wider groove Narrower groove

(front of copier)

(rear of copier)



5-76

Caution:

8. Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the DeckAdjust the position of the solenoid so that the left end of the right solenoid arm is 57.2

±0.5 mm from the center of the hole A in the solenoid mount as indicated in Figure 5-844.

Figure 5-844

9. Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid for the CassetteTurn the two screws q to adjust the solenoid so that the distance from the bottom of

the pick-up assembly and section A of the roller arm is 36 ± 0.5 mm as indicated inFigure 5-845.

Figure 5-845

10. Adjusting Registration for the CassetteLoosen the screw w shown in Figure 5-846, and adjust the position of the cassette

hook plate q so that the registration is as specified. (See p. 10-53.)

Figure 5-846

q

w

36–0

.5m

m

A

q

A57.2–0.5mm



5-77

Figure 5-847

If you have adjusted the front/rear registration for the cassette, you will have toregister the basic settings (]4]).

D. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly

1. Removing the Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly1) Open the upper right door and the lower right door.2) Remove the right deck pick-up assembly/1st cassette pick-up assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector; then, remove

the pick-up vertical path roller assembly w.

Figure 5-848

q q

w

02

4

6

810

0–1.5mm



5-78

Note:

E. Registration Feeding Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 5-849

2. Removing the Registration Feeding Assembly1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover, and remove the transfer/separation charging

assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail support plate w;

then, remove the registration feeding assembly pressure spring e.

Figure 5-850

4) Remove the E-ring r, and push in the rotating shaft t inside the machine to removethe shaft.

q

w

e

Registration feeding assembly



5-79

5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the registration feeding assembly u fromthe fixing/feeding unit.

Figure 5-851

3. Removing the Registration Roller (upper rubber roller)1) Loosen the two set screws q on the stopper of the electromagnetic clutch at the

rear.2) Remove the spring w, E-ring e, spacer r, bushing t, and bearing y.

Figure 5-852

qw erty

r

t

y

u



5-80

3) Remove the spring u, E-ring i, spacer o, and bearing !0, and bushing !1.4) Remove the pre-transfer upper front guide !2 and remove the registration roller

(upper rubber roller) !3.

Figure 5-853

u

i

!2

!3o

!0!1



5-81

F. Feeding Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 5-854

2. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit1) Remove the front door, open the hopper assembly, and remove the power supply

switch assembly cover; then, close the hopper assembly.2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.3) Remove the left and right mounting screws q (1 each), and remove the

fixing/feeding unit stopper w.

Figure 5-855 (left stopper)

Figure 5-856 (right stopper)

q

w

qw

Feeding assembly



5-82

4) Lift the fixing/feeding unit off the copier.

Take care. The fixing/feeding unit weighs about 15 kg.

3. Removing the Feeding Belt1) Lift the fixing/feeding unit off the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the E-ring q, spacer w, and bearing e at the front.

Figure 5-857

4) Remove the E-ring e and two mounting screws r at the rear.

Figure 5-858

er

q

we



5-83

Caution:

5) Remove the E-ring t, gear y, and pin u at the rear.6) Remove the E-ring i and bearing o at the rear.

Figure 5-859

7) Remove the three harness retainers !0 and the two edge saddles !1; then, free theconnector !2 from the harness, and remove the screw !3 to remove the cord guide!4.

Figure 5-860

8) Remove the two screws !5, and remove the handle support plate !6.

Figure 5-861!5 !6

!0

!1 !2

!3

!4

tyu

io



5-84

9) Remove the two mounting screws !7 at the front and the rear; then, remove the feed-ing belt unit !8.


10) Remove the screw @0, and remove the feeding upper plate S !9; thereafter, removethe feeding belt @1 and the postcard belt @2.

Figure 5-863

@0

!9

@1

@2

(front)

!7 !8



5-85

G. Holding Tray Assembly

1. Construction

q Holding tray inlet assembly r Re-pick up assemblyw Side guide plate t Re-pick up rollere Y direction guide plate

Figure 5-864 (cross section)

q Holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cut roller) solenoid (SL6)w Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)e Holding tray forward clutch (CL5)r Holding tray separation clutch (CL6)t Holding tray registration clutch (CL3)

Figure 5-864a (rear view)

q

we

r

t

q w e

r t



5-86

2. Removing the Holding Tray Assembly from the Copier1) Open the front cover.2) Remove the fixing/pre-feeding cover.3) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.

3. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Assembly1) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the screw e (1 each), and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover q

and the inlet assembly rear cover w; then, remove the two screws t and disconnectthe two connectors y to remove the side guide plate r.

Figure 5-865

3) Remove the three mounting screws u (front).


uu

q we

r

t

y



5-87

4) Remove the three mounting screws i (front), and disconnect the two connectors owhile lifting the holding tray re-pick up assembly; then, remove the holding tray re-pick up assembly !0.

Figure 5-867 (rear)

4. Removing the Holding Tray Registration Paper Sensor1) Open the front cover.2) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.3) Remove the holding tray re-pick up assembly.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the registration paper sensor

assembly w.

Figure 5-868

q qw

i

i

o

!0



5-88

5. Removing the Re-Pick Up Roller1) Open the front cover.2) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front.3) Remove the mounting screw q (1 each), and remove the two pick-up rollers w.

Figure 5-869

6. Removing the Holding Tray Driver PCB1) Open the front cover.2) Slide out the holding tray to the front and then out of the copier.3) Turn over the holding tray assembly.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray driver PCB cover

w.

Figure 5-870

qw

q

w

w



5-89

5) Remove the two mounting screws e, and disconnect the nine connectors r (J201,J202, J203, J204, J205, J207, J208, J209, J210); then, remove the holding traydriver PCB t.

Figure 5-871

7. Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor1) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front, and remove the copier.2) Turn over the holding tray assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail w.

Figure 5-872

q

q

w

e

r t



5-90

4) Turn over the holding tray assembly.5) Remove the E-ring e, flange r, and belt t.

Figure 5-873

6) Remove the two mounting screws y, and turn over the holding tray Y motorassembly u; then, disconnect the connector 1.

Figure 5-874

7) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the holding tray Y motor.

u

y

y

e

r

t



5-91

8. Removing the Y Motor Home Position Sensor1) Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the right rail, and turn over the holding tray.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the Y motor home position sensor

assembly w.

Figure 5-875

9. Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the inlet assembly upper front cover w.

Figure 5-876

q

w

qw



5-92

2) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the inlet assembly upper rear cover r.

Figure 5-877

3) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the inlet assembly y.

Figure 5-878

t

t

y

e

r



5-93

10. Removing the Feeding Roller/Separation Belt Assembly1) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front.2) Remove the holding tray inlet assembly.3) Remove the mounting screw q.

Figure 5-879

4) While opening the left cover w, remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly e.

Figure 5-880

w

e

q



5-94

11. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly.2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front.

Figure 5-881

3) Remove the stop ring e, gear r, and bushing t at the rear.4) Remove the roller y from the feeding roller assembly.

Figure 5-882

e

rt

y

q

w



5-95

12. Removing the Separation Belt Assembly1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly.2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front.

Figure 5-883

3) While lifting the front of the separation belt assembly, shift it to the rear to remove.4) Remove the belt from the separation belt assembly.

13. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Holding TrayTurn the separation roller adjusting roll so that the distance to the shaft is 32.7 ±0.1

mm.

Figure 5-884

32.7–0.1mm

q

w



5-96

14. Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive SolenoidInstall the solenoid so that its stroke (gap between the rubber silencer and the end

of the solenoid) is 5.0 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 5-885

15. Removing the Side Guide Plate1) Mark the position of the side plate assembly with a scribe. (See Figure 5-894.)2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the two connectors; then,

remove the side guide plate assembly w.

Figure 5-886

q

q

w

5.0–0.3mm



5-97

16. Removing the Holding Tray X Motor1) Remove the side guide plate assembly.2) Remove the mounting screw, and remove the motor cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector; then, remove

the motor w.

Figure 5-887

17. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Circulating Motor1) Remove the side guide plate assembly.2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper guide

plate with a scribe. (See Figure 5-893.)3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the rear guide plate assembly e.

Figure 5-888

q

q

w

e

q

w



5-98

4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the motor assembly t.

Figure 5-889

18. Removing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid1) Remove the side guide plate.2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper guide

plate assembly with a scribe.3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the front guide plate assembly e.

Figure 5-890

q we q

r

t



5-99

4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the cover t.

Figure 5-891

5) Remove the two mounting screws y, two grip rings u, and spring pin i; then,remove the solenoid o.

Figure 5-892

y u

io

r

t



5-100

19. Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate AssemblyMark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a scribe, and install

it along the marking.

Figure 5-893

20. Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate AssemblyMark the position of the side guide plate assembly with a scribe, and install it along

the marking.

Figure 5-894



5-101

21. Attaching the Timing Belt for the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging GuidePlateButt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state),

and attach the timing belt.

Figure 5-895

22. Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging SolenoidWhen installing the solenoid, be sure that the stroke (between the rubber silencer

and the end of the solenoid) is 1.5 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 5-896

1.5–0.3mm

A



5-102

H. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly

1. Removing the Holding Tray Feeding Assembly from the Copier1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray feeding front

cover w.

Figure 5-897

3) Remove the five mounting screws e and the two metal fixings r; then, remove theholding tray feeding assembly t from the rail.

Figure 5-898

e

e

e

e

e

r r

t

q q

w



5-103

2. Removing the Sensor from the Holding Tray1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front.2) Remove the mounting screw q and the metal fixing w; then, remove the holding tray

feeding sensor cover e from the bottom of the holding tray feeding assembly.

Figure 5-899

Do not open the holding tray upper feeding guide more than it is designed to open;otherwise, the stopper r will be damaged.

3) Remove the two mounting screws, and disconnect the connector; then, remove thesensor assembly from the holding tray feeding assembly.

When installing the holding tray feeding sensor cover, be sure that the two springsare in the bosses behind the holding tray upper feeding guide.

q

we

r



5-104

Caution:

Caution:


CHAPTER 6

FIXING SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ........................6-1A. Outline ...........................................6-1B. Fixing Drive Assembly...................6-2C. Controlling the Fixing

Temperature ..................................6-3D. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Main Thermistor (TH1) ............6-8E. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Upper Separation Claw ...........6-9

F. Fixing Heater SSR Error Detection Circuit ............................6-10

G. Locking the Fixing/Feeding Unit ....6-12H. Error Detection Circuit ...................6-13

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-16A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-16B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-33

This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of thefunctions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows howthese units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

blank page

I. BASIC OPERATIONS

A. Outline

The upper and lower rollers of the fixing assembly and the delivery roller are drivenby the main motor (M1) through clutches. (See Figure 6-101.)

The upper roller is equipped with two built-in heaters; the sub heater is turned onduring WMUP after power-on, and the main heater is turned on/off during WMUP andthereafter for temperature control. (See Figure 6-102.)

The surface temperature of the upper roller is monitored by the main thermistor(TH1) and is controlled by the DC controller so that it remains at the target value.

The cleaning belt for the upper fixing roller is operated by a one-way clutch methodusing a solenoid (SL14; fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid).

You can display the message that warns against the running out of the cleaning beltin service mode after the fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14) has turned on250,000 times.

Further, you can check the cumulative number of times the fixing cleaning belt drivesolenoid has turned on in service mode (*6*; ‘WEB’).

The length of the cleaning belt is monitored by keeping the cleaning belt detectinglever in contact with the belt. The cleaning belt detecting lever shifts as the belt is usedand fed, and ‘E005’ is indicated on the control panel when it blocks the sensor PS11.

The delivery assembly is equipped with a delivery paper deflecting plate; the DCcontroller PCB generates the delivery flapper solenoid drive signal while causing two-sided/overlay copies to turn ON the delivery flapper solenoid (SL2), thereby driving thedelivery flapper and, as a result, sending copy paper to the holding tray.

The cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14) is used to trigger the external delivery sensor(PS10).

Number of Activations (SL14)• twice for large-size copy•once for small-size copy

Reference:1. Heater

120V model : 790 W (main) + 410 W (sub)220/240 model : 1200 W (main)

2. Thermal switch: 240 ±10°C



6-1

B. Fixing Drive Assembly

If a jam occurs in the fixing delivery assembly, the DC controller PCB generates thefixing drive stop signal to turn ON the fixing drive stop solenoid (SL3), therebyimmediately stopping the fixing roller.

The belt used to clean the upper fixing roller is taken up gradually when the cleaningbelt take-up arm is moved up and down by the cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14).

The cleaning belt guide serves to keep the area of contact between the fixing rollerand the cleaning belt large to prevent offset.

The fixing assembly inlet guide is shifted by turning ON/OFF the fixing assembly inletguide drive solenoid (SL16), thereby changing its height and, ultimately, improving paperfeeding.

The height differs at a point of about 130 mm after copying operation starts and theregistration roller has rotated according to the following conditions:• High if the length of the copy paper is equivalent to B5R or larger.• Low if the length of the copy paper is shorter than the above.In the case of the multifeeder (free size), the following applies to suit various lengths:• High when starting copying operation.• The same control as the above will be used by measuring the length of the first sheet

when it moves past the registration paper sensor (PS23).

Figure 6-101

Fixing drive solenoid

M1

Main motor

SL3Clutch

Fix

ing

driv

e st

op s

igna

l (F

XD

SD

)

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y in

let g

uide

driv

e si

gnal

(F

XG

DS

D)

Fixin

g cle

anin

g be

lt dr

ive s

olen

oid

drive

sig

nal (

FCBS

D)

Cleaning belt drive solenoid

Delivery flapper solenoid(SL2)

Ext

erna

l del

iver

y pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(E

XD

PD

)

Inte

rnal

del

iver

y pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(ID

PD

)

Del

iver

y pa

per

defle

ctin

g so

leno

id d

rive

sign

al (

DP

DS

D)

PS10

Cleaning belt take-up arm

DC Controller PCB

PS12

Holding tray

SL16



6-2

C. Controlling the Fixing Temperature

The surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is monitored by the main thermistor(TH1), and the output of the thermistor is sent to the microprocessor.

Using the output, the microprocessor varies the main heater drive signal (MHRD)and the sub heater drive signal (SHRD) to control the fixing temperature.

The rear of the copier’s upper fixing roller is equipped with a sub thermistor (TH2) tomonitor overheating.

Figure 6-102

Upper fixingroller

PS47

Fix

ing

unit

deliv

ery

pape

r de

tect

sig

nal (

FX

DE

L)

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y cl

aw ja

m s

igna

l (F

XC

JS)

Cle

anin

g be

lt ou

t pre

caut

ion

sign

al (

CB

OP

)

Fix

ing

heat

er m

ain

ther

mis

tor

(TH

1)

Mai

n he

ater

driv

e si

gnal

(M

HR

D)

Sub

hea

ter

driv

e si

gnal

(S

HR

D)

DC controller PCB

TPISSR

PS11

PS52

Cleaning beltguide plate

Main thermistor (TH1)

Thermal switch

Lowerfixingroller

AC power supply AC driver PCB

Fix

ing

heat

er s

ub th

erm

isto

r (T

H2)

Sub thermistor (TH2)



6-3

The copier uses the six types of control shown in Tables 6-101 and -102 in relationto the time that has elapsed from power-on and according to the ambient temperature.

n After 60 min from power-on and the surface of the fixing roller is 75°C,

Table 6-101

n 60 min or more after power-on

Table 6-102

In addition, control is also made under the following special conditions:q Power Save Mode

When the Pre-Heat key is pressed, the following takes place (may be varied in usermode):

n Control Temperature during Pre-Heat Mode

*From when the Pre-Heat key is pressed onceagain until the beginning of STBY.

Table 6-103



6-4

Mode Internal Control temperaturetemperature Standby Copying

H mode 17°C or more 200°C 205°CM mode 12° to 17°C 210°C 212°CL mode 12°C 210°C 212°C

Mode Internal Control temperaturetemperature Standby Copying

H mode 17°C or more 200°C 205°CM mode 12° to 17°C 200°C 205°CL mode 12°C 200°C 205°C

Saving rate Control Recovery*

–10% 180°C 50 sec

–25% 155°C 90 sec

–50% 110°C 15 sec

None 195°C 0

w Copy Speed Down SequenceThe copier makes as many as 45 copies per minute normally. To ensure proper

fixing, however, the sheet-to-sheet gap is increased if the main thermistor (TH1) on theupper fixing roller detects the following surface temperature.

Table 6-104

In down sequence, control is to 40 cpm and 35 cpm mode according to the surfacetemperature of the upper fixing roller. During the period, normal copying speed will beused once again if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches that shownin Table 6-104; however, if copying operation has been stopped once, WMUP sequencewill be used until the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 195°C. (autostart)

For instance, if the aforementioned surface temperature is detected during copyingoperation, WMUP sequence will be started while indicating the remaining number ofcopies on the control panel. Then, the remaining number of copies will be made inresponse to a press on the Copy Start key as soon as auto start or STBY is activated.



6-5

Down Condition 60 min from 60 sec andsequence power-on later after

45 cpm recovery 170°C 175°Cmode

40 cpu mode 165°C 170°C

35 cpu mode 160°C 165°C

Copy stop 155°C 160°C

nn Fxing Assembly Temperature Control Sequence60 min after power-on with fixing roller surface temperature 75°C

Figure 6-103

210 C

205 C

200 C

195 C

(205 C)

(195 C)

(210 C)

(200 C)

(212 C)

(205 C)

(210 C)

(200 C)

Mode H (17 C~)

Mode M/L (12 C~17 C,~12 C)

Power switch ON

WMUP

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

Main motor (M1)

Wait indication

STBY

195 CAbout 10 sec after

end of CNTR

INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRW SCRF SCRV LSTR

Copy Start key ON

ON in green ON in orange



6-6

Figure 6-104

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

Main motor (M1)

Pre-Heat key indicator

STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

*1

60min Copy Start key ON Pre-Heat key ON Auto shut-off ON

ON Flashes

210 C

205 C

200 C

195 C

180 C

155 C

110 C

Mode H (17 C~) ,Mode M/L (12~17 C, ~12 C)

10% power saving

25% power saving

50% power saving

*1: May be varied in service mode.



6-7

D. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Main Thermistor (TH1)

The main thermistor (TH1) is moved back and forth over a distance of 12 mm in theaxial direction of the upper fixing roller to prevent damage to the roller.

The reciprocating cam is supplied with drive from the cleaning belt drive solenoid(SL14) through a one-way arm.

Figure 6-105

Upper fixing rollerReciprocating cam

One-way arm

Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14)

Thermistor (TH1)

12mm

Thermistor



6-8

E. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Upper Separation Claw

The upper separation claw is moved back and forth over a distance of 3 mm in theaxial direction of the upper fixing roller to prevent damage to the roller.

Figure 6-106

M1

Upper fixing rollerSeparation claw

Separation claw

Reciprocating cam

Internal delivery roller

Main motor

3mm



6-9

F. Fixing Heater SSR Error Detection Circuit

The safety circuit for the copier’s fixing heater SSR uses the following signals toidentify an error:1. Fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD)2. Main heater ON detection signal (MHOND)

Figure 6-107 shows the main heater only, but the sub heater is controlled in the sameway.

Heater ONThe CPU causes the SSRON signal to go ‘0’, and the MHRD signal goes ‘1’ to turn

ON the heater. At this time, the fixing feeding unit detection signal (FFURLS), powerswitch ON detection signal (MSWD), and front door open detection signal (FDOD) are‘0’.

Heater OFFThe CPU causes the SSRON signal to go ‘1’, and the MHRD signal goes ‘0’ to turn

OFF the heater.

SSR ErrorIf the main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) is ‘1’ when the CPU on the DC

controller PCB is not generating the fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD), as by thegate array q, or if the main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) is ‘0’ when the CPUon the DC controller PCB is generating the fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD), asby the CPU w, an SSR error is identified and the CPU on the DC controller PCBindicates an error code.

At the same time, the power switch OFF signal (PWOFF) is caused to go ‘0’ to cutoff the AC circuit. When the power switch is turned OFF, power to the heater will be cutoff; however, since the DC controller PCB is supplied with power for a specific period oftime (see descriptions on the power supply), the power supply PCB sends the powerswitch ON detection signal (MSWD) to prevent activation of the relay inside the powerswitch in response to the PWOFF signal.

Since the copier’s main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) is ‘1’ even under thefollowing conditions, the SSRON signal is kept ‘0’ to avoid wrong detection of an SSRerror:

1.When the fixing/feeding unit has been slid out (FFURLS signal: 1);2.The front door is opened (FDOD signal: 1); and3.The power switch has been turned OFF (MSWD signal: 1).



6-10



6-11

Fig

ure

6-10

7

qw

PC

1

Gat

e ar

ray

CP

U

+5V

Pow

er s

witc

h(S

W1)

Pow

er s

uppl

y P

CB

MS

WA

FF

UR

LS

+12

V

PW

OF

F

Gat

e ar

ray

Fro

nt d

oor

switc

h(S

W2)

Mai

n he

ater

(H1)

Q64

3

MH

RD

Rec

tifie

rci

rcui

tQ

641

AC

driv

erP

CB

MH

ON

D

SS

RO

N

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B

FD

OD

G. Locking the Fixing/Feeding Unit

If a jam straddles the fixing/feeding unit and the holding tray unit when the copierstops because of a jam, i.e., paper exists over the internal delivery sensor (PS12), themain motor (M1) and the fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid (SL13) are turned ON forabout 3 sec.

This way, the locking lever is lowered from the fixing/feeding unit to the rear of theholding tray unit.

If the fixing/feeding unit is slid out for jam removal, the holding tray unit will also beslid out to prevent tearing of the straddling paper.

The locking is released when the main motor rotates during initial rotation after jamremoval.

Figure 6-108

Fixing/feeding assembly


Locking lever

Spring clutch

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid (SL13)

M1

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid drive signal J108B-2

(FFULSD)

Main motor

DC controller

PCB



6-12

H. Error Detection Circuit

1. OutlineFigure 6-109 is a control block diagram of the error detection circuit, which has the

following functions:a. monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1).b. monitoring the activation of the fixing heaters (main, H1; sub, H2).c. monitoring the rotation of each motor in normal reading and stream reading.

Each of these functions is executed by the gate arrays of the DC controller PCB.The condition of each load is checked by the gate arrays; and after checking for the

presence/absence of an error, they send the results to the master CPU.

Figure 6-109

LA1

H2H1

Lam

p re

gula

tor

AC

driv

er

Gat

e ar

ray

Mas

ter

CP

U

DC controller PCB

120V

H1

AC

driv

er

230V



6-13

2. Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection CircuitThe gate array is designed to receive the scanning lamp ON signal (CVRON) and

the scanning lamp ON detection signal (CVRACTIVE). It detects an error if the scanninglamp is ON in the absence of the scanning lamp ON signal.

In such cases, the gate array informs the master CPU of the error detection of thescanning lamp and, at the same time, generates the power switch OFF signal.

In this condition, the relay in the power switch is powered to turn OFF the powerswitch, thereby stopping the AC power supply (error auto power-off).

Figure 6-110

Lamp regulator

Master CPU

DC controller

Gate array

CVR

ACTIVE

LA1

Power switch OFF

Error

CVR ON



6-14

3. Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection CircuitThe gate array generates the fixing heater ON signal (SSRON) and receives the

fixing heater ON detection signal (SSR ACTIVE). An error is detected if the fixing heateris ON in the absence of the fixing heater ON signal.

In such cases, the gate array informs the master CPU of the error activation of thefixing heater and, at the same time, generates the power switch OFF signal.

The error signal (FUSER TEMP ERROR) of the thermistor used to monitor thetemperature of the fixing roller is also sent to the gate array. The gate array generatesthe power switch OFF signal also when the surface temperature of the fixing rollerincreases abnormally.

When the power switch OFF signal is generated, the relay in the power switchbecomes powered to turn OFF the power switch, thereby stopping the AC power supply(auto power-off).

Further, if the fixing assembly sub thermistor (TH2) detects overheating (230 ±10°C),the DC controller PCB will indicate ‘E001’ on the control panel and cut off the supply ofAC power.

The fixing assembly sub thermistor is checked for an open circuit; upon detection,the DC contoroller PCB will display ‘E000’ on the control panel for 5 sec and cut thesupply of AC power.

Figure 6-111

Error

DC controller PCB

Gatearray

H1

H1

H2

TH1

TH2

MasterCPU

ACdriver

ACdriver

Timer

Main heater ONSub heater ON

MainSub

SSR ON

SSRACTIVE

FUSERTEMPERROR

100/120V

220/240V

Power switch off

Over-heatingdetection

+12V

Overheating/opencircuit

Subthermister

Main thermister



6-15

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY








A. Fixing Assembly

1. Construction

q Upper fixing unit e Lower rollerw Upper roller

Figure 6-201

2. Locking Mechanism

Figure 6-202

Fulcrum

Locking arm

q

w

e



6-16

!

3. Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt

Figure 6-203

1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the feeding/feeding front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing upper cover w.

Figure 6-204

4) Remove the two mounting screws e used to hold the fixing cleaning belt assembly inplace, and open the top of the fixing cleaning belt assembly r in the upward direction.

Figure 6-205

e

r

qw

Take-up roller Feeding roller



6-17

5) Remove the cleaning belt feeding roller t and the cleaning roller take-up roller ywhile pushing them to the rear.

Figure 6-206

When cleaning the silicone oil pan, be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting atthe bottom of the cleaning belt feeding roller.

ty



6-18

Caution:

4. Installing the Fixing Cleaning BeltInstall the fixing cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it with the

following in mind:1) Wind the cleaning belt two to three times around the cleaning belt take-up roller q.

When doing so, be sure that the arm guide plate w is outside the take-up roller.Check that the area where the roller comes into contact is impregnated with oil.

Figure 6-207

Check to make sure that the cleaning belt is not wound at an angle and it is free ofslack or wrinkles.In addition, be sure that the fixing cleaning belt is installed in the direction (feeding/take-up) shown in Figure 6-203.

2) After installing the fixing cleaning belt, move the one-way lever e in the direction ofthe arrow shown in Figure 6-208, and turn it until all the slack has been removed.

Figure 6-208

Be sure to return the count reading of ‘WEB’ (*6*) to ‘0’ whenever you havereplaced the fixing cleaning belt.

e

qw



6-19

Caution:

Caution:

5. Removing the Upper Fixing Unit1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the fixing upper cover.4) Open the fixing delivery assembly q.

Figure 6-209

5) Remove the two mounting screws w, and remove the flywheel mount e.

Figure 6-210

w

e

q



6-20

6) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the flywheel t.

Figure 6-211

7) Remove the fixing cleaning belt, and clean the silicone oil pan; then, remove the twomounting screws y and the two harness retainers u, and disconnect the threeconnectors i.

Figure 6-212

y u

i

rt



6-21

8) Open the upper feeding unit o slightly, and remove it in the upper left direction; then,place it on a desk.

Draw out the silicone oil in advance from the silicone oil pan to avoid spilling itduring work.

Figure 6-213

6. Removing the Fixing Heater1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Open the fixing delivery assembly.4) Remove the flywheel.5) Remove the upper fixing cover, and remove the fixing cleaning belt; then, clean the

silicone oil pan, and remove the fixing upper unit.6) Pull out the faston q from the front of the hater (main heater, sub heater).7) Remove the mounting screw w, and remove the front electrode support plate spring

e.

o



6-22

Caution:

8) Free the two cables r at the front of the heater from the wire saddle t.

Figure 6-214

9) Remove the two fastons y from the rear.

Figure 6-215

10) Pull out the main heater and the sub heater from the fixing assembly while takingcare not to damage them.

The side plate of the upper fixing unit could push down the height adjusting supportplate of the fixing inlet guide if you force open the upper fixing unit when servicingthe fixing/feeding unit, possibly lowering the position of the fixing inlet guide and,ultimately, causing jams.To prevent such a problem, take extra care whenever opening the upper fixing unit.

y

q

w

e

rt



6-23

Caution:

7. Installing the Fixing HeaterInstall the fixing heater by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:a. Do not touch the surface of the heater.b. Install both heaters so that the side with the longer wire is toward the front.c. Install the main heater (800W) on the right and the sub heater (400 W) on the left

when viewing them from the front; however, install the main heater only to a220/240V model, which does not have a sub heater.

d. Connect the fastons of the heater wires at the rear so that the one on the right is tothe main heater and the one at the top is to the sub heater while viewing them fromthe rear.

8. Removing the Upper Fixing Roller1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Open the fixing delivery assembly.4) Remove the flywheel.5) After removing the upper fixing cover, remove the fixing cleaning belt; then, clean the

silicone oil pan, and remove the upper fixing unit.6) Remove the main heater and the sub heater.7) Remove the two mounting screws used to hold the fixing cleaning assembly q in

place, and release the cleaning belt.

Figure 6-216

8) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the heater holder r from the rear.

Figure 6-217

e

e r

qw w



6-24

9) Remove the two stoppers t (front, rear).

Figure 6-218 (rear)

Figure 6-218a (front)

10) Remove the upper roller unit y while being careful of the thermistor and the thermalswitch.

Figure 6-219

y

t

t



6-25

11) Remove the C-ring u at the front, and remove the gear i.12) Remove the C-ring o at the rear, and remove the gear !0.13) Slide out the bearing !1 and the bushing !2 at the rear toward the front.14) Slide out the bearing !3 and the bushing !4 at the front of the upper roller toward the

front.

Figure 6-220

9. Installing the Upper Fixing RollerInstall the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.

• Handling the Upper RollerTo protect the surface of the roller from dirt and scratches, wrap it in copy paper or thelike.

• Installing the Upper Rollera. Install it so that the side whose section A shown in Figure 6-221 (notch) is longer is

toward the rear.

Figure 6-221

b. Install the collars of the bushings q w starting at the rear toward the front in thesame orientation.

Figure 6-221a

q

w

Front

Rear

Front Rear

A

ui

o !0!1

!2

!3!4



6-26

10. Removing the Thermal Switch1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the fixing upper cover and the stay cover.5) Remove the fixing cleaning belt. Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the oil

pan w.6) Remove the mounting screw e and the faston r, and remove the thermal switch

assembly holder t.7) Remove the four mounting screws y, and remove the thermal switch assembly.

Figure 6-222

8) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the thermal switch.

11. Removing the Main Thermistor (TH1)1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the fixing upper cover.4) Remove the cleaning belt.5) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the oil pan w.

Figure 6-223

q w

q we rr

r rt y



6-27

6) Remove the mounting screw e, and shift the thermistor assembly r to the right toremove.

Figure 6-224

7) Remove the mounting screw t and two retaining springs y, and remove thethermistor u.

Figure 6-225

12. Removing the Lower Separation Claw Assembly1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the upper fixing cover.5) Remove the fixing cleaning belt, and clean the silicone oil pan; then, remove the

upper fixing unit.

t

yy u

e r



6-28

6) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the lower separation clawassembly w together with the support plate.

Figure 6-226

7) Remove the tension spring, and remove the lower separation claw assembly.

13. Removing the Lower Roller1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the fixing cleaning belt and fixing upper cover; then, clean the silicone oil

pan.5) Remove the upper roller assembly of the fixing assembly.6) Remove the lower separation claw support plate.7) Remove the lower roller q from the fixing assembly, and remove the two E-rings w

from the lower roller; then, remove the two bearings e.

Figure 6-227

q ww e e

q

q

w



6-29

14. Removing the Upper Separation Claw1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Open the fixing delivery assembly, and release the spring q; then, remove the upper

separation claw w.

Figure 6-228

15. Adjusting the Nip (tightening the pressure adjusting nut)The nip width is correct if it is as indicated in Table 6-201. Otherwise, turn the

pressure adjusting nut.

Figure 6-229

a and c are points 10 mm from either end of the copy paper.

Table 6-201

Paper feeding direction

c

a

A3

pape

r

Center of paper

b

q w



6-30

Note:

Dimensions

b

| a – c |

Measured when the upper andlower rollers are sufficiently heated.

7.3 ± 0.5 mm

0.5 mm or less

a. Measuring the NipWait 15 min after the end of the copier’s warm-up, and make 20 copies before

measuring the nip.1) Place A3 copy paper, and select A3.2) Open the copyboard cover.3) Start service mode (*4*); using the >> key, select nip measurement mode ‘NIP’.4) Press the * user mode key.

The above will cause the copier to pick up paper and become ready formeasurement as in Figure 6-229.

Reference:The paper will stop once between the fixing rollers; then, it is dischargedautomatically in about 10 sec.

5) Measure the nip.

16. Adjusting the Fixing ClutchAdjust the fixing clutch by turning the set screw e so that the gap between the 41T

gear q and the control ring w is 0.1 to 0.3 mm whenever you have replaced any of thefollowing component parts:

Figure 6-230

qw

e



6-31

17. Removing the Sub Thermistor (TH2) Unit1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the screw w, and remove the fixing assembly upper cover q; then, remove

the screw r, and remove the harness cover e.

Figure 6-231

3) Remove the screw y, and remove the thermistor (TH2) unit t.

Figure 6-232

It is difficult to replace the sub thermistor on its own in the field. Be sure to replaceit on a unit basis (thermistor unit t in Figure 6-232.)

y t

t

q

e

w

r



6-32

Note:

B. Delivery Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 6-233

2. Removing the Delivery Upper Guide (fixing delivery assembly)1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit to the front and then out of

the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q; then, pull out the pin w, and remove the delivery

upper guide e.

Figure 6-234

qwe

Delivery upper guide (fixing/delivery assembly)



6-33

3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Locking Assembly1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the two mounting screws q and the E-ring w; then, disconnect the

connector e, and remove the fixing/feeding locking assembly r.

Figure 6-235

4. Removing the External Delivery Roller1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the delivery roller guide w.

Figure 6-236

q qw

q

w

e

r



6-34

4) Remove the fixing/feeding locking assembly.5) Remove the two E-rings e, gear r, torque limiter t, and bushing y at the front.6) Remove the E-ring u and the bushing i at the rear; then, remove the external

delivery roller o.


Figure 6-237a (rear)

u

i

e e

rt

yo



6-35

5. Removing the External Delivery Sensor and the Internal Delivery Sensor1) Remove the external delivery roller.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, external delivery sensor assembly, and internal

delivery sensor assembly w.

Figure 6-238

6. Removing the Fixing Assembly Outlet Paper Sensor Assembly1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit to the front, and remove the front cover and the upper

fixing unit. (See p. 6-20.)2) Remove the lower fixing separation claw assembly. (See p. 6-28.)3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

assembly w to the right; then, disconnect the connector e (J108), and remove thesensor.

Figure 6-239

qwe

q

w



6-36

7. Removing the Internal Delivery Roller1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the

copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the fixing upper unit. (See p. 6-20.)4) Remove the fixing lower separation claw assembly. (See p. 6-28.)5) Remove the E-ring q, gear w, and parallel pin e at the front.6) Remove the E-ring r and bushing t.

Figure 6-240

7) Remove the E-ring y and the gear at the rear.8) Remove the E-ring i and the bushing o.

Figure 6-241

9) Remove the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor assembly. (See p. 6-36.)10) Remove the internal delivery roller.

y u

i o

q

we

r t



6-37

blank page


CHAPTER 7

EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. CONTROL PANEL .............................7-1A. Outline ...........................................7-1B. Operation.......................................7-1

II. FANS ..................................................7-5III. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-8

A. Outline of Power Supply................7-8B. Power Supply Circuit .....................7-9C. Power Supply for Date/Time

Display...........................................7-11IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-12

A. External Covers.............................7-12B. Control Panel.................................7-20C. Door Switch Assembly ..................7-26D. Fan Unit .........................................7-28E. Removing the Counter Assembly..7-31F. Main Motor Assembly....................7-32

G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly .......................................7-32

H. Drive Assembly (drum/developing assembly)....................7-35

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly ........7-36J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly................7-39K. Duplexing Unit Drive 1 Assembly..7-40L. Lifter Drive Assembly ....................7-41M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive

Assembly .......................................7-43N. Attaching the Drive Belt.................7-45O. DC Controller PCB ........................7-46P. DC Power Supply Assembly .........7-47Q. High-Voltage Transformer

Assembly .......................................7-48R. Power Supply Input Assembly ......7-49

This chapter shows the copier's external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier'svarious control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation totheir timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

blank page

I. CONTROL PANEL

A. Outline

The copier’s control panel consists of the control panel controller PCB, 320 × 240-dot liquid crystal display panel unit, transparent touch switch panel, and key switchpanel, and it provides the following functions:q Data communicationw LCD processinge LCD contrast automatic adjustment and manual adjustmentr Touch switch inputt Key switch input

B. Operation

1. Data CommunicationThe control panel controller PCB exchanges data with the copier’s image processor

PCB through an interface unit in serial.The microprocessor on the control panel controller PCB serves to control such data

communications.

Figure 7-101

LCD panelInput key, VR911,

Indicator LED

Control panel controller PCB

DC controller PCB

Display memory

LCD controller

Interface unit



7-1

2. LCD ProcessingThe microprocessor on the DC controller PCB sends commands to the LCD

controller as necessary; in response, the LCD controller interprets these commands andexecutes them. The LCD controller serves to turn ON/OFF the indicators according tothe appropriate instructions.

The LCD controller, in addition, is used to write display character codes in sequenceto RAM for display memory; the RAM data for display memory is sent for display to thedisplay panel at such times as instructed by the LCD controller.

Figure 7-102

Columndriver

Columndriver

Columndriver

Columndriver

LCD panel

Row driver

Row driver

Row driver

Displaymemory

LCDcontroller

PCB

CPU

DC controller PCB

Key control panel LED display

Touch panel

Control panel controller PCB



7-2

3. LCD Contrast Automatic AdjustmentThe control panel controller PCB is equipped with a function that adjusts the changes

in the contrast caused by changes in temperature.The control panel controller PCB is equipped with a thermistor (TH911) to monitor

the temperature inside the control panel. The voltage supplied to the LCD is variedaccording to the changes in resistance of the temperature to ensure optimum contraston the LCD.

The LCD contrast set by the contrast volume (VR911) on the control panel remainsunaffected by the ambient temperature.

Figure 7-103

If the temperature around the control panel increases, the resistance of thethermistor decreases, thereby increasing the supply voltage (VO) to the LCD.

When the temperature near the control panel decreases, the resistance of thethermistor increases, thereby decreasing the supply voltage (VO) to the LCD.

OV

-24V

+5V

DC/DC converter

LCD

Thermistor (TH911)

VR911

Vo

Vo: Supply voltage to the LCD.



7-3

4. Touch Switch InputThe keys of the touch switch panel and the control panel controller PCB are

connected as shown in Figure 7-102. The touch switch panel consists of bonded glassand film sheets between which pacers are provided; it has keys in a pattern of 15columns and 20 rows.

When the film surface is pressed by a finger, the contact between the film and theglass causes electrical continuity.

This way, a pair of electrodes is connected, allowing detection of X/Y coordinates asin the case of a common key matrix. In other words, the control panel controller PCBdetects which key has been pressed based on the correspondence between the keyscan signal from the control panel controller PCB and the input signal to the control panelcontroller circuit.

Figure 7-104

Electrode

Electrode Spacer

Glass sheet

Film sheet



7-4

II. FANS

The copier is equipped with six fans, serving to exhaust ozone, collect stray toner,and cool the parts. Table 7-201 shows the function of each fan together with its filter andfan orientation.

Figure 7-201

FM8

FM5FM7

FM6

FM3

FM2



7-5

Table 7-201

The following fans are controlled to either full-speed mode or half-speed mode. Thecircuits are switched as in Figure 7-202 between +24V and +12 V by the CPU on the DCcontroller PCB.

• Air exhaust fan (FM2)• Feeding fan (FM6)• Cleaner fan (FM7)• Scanner cooling fan (FM8)When the CPU causes the FMFLL signal to go ‘1’, +24 V is supplied to initiate full-

speed rotation; when the FMHLF signal goes ‘1’, +12 V is supplied to initiate half-speedrotation.

Figure 7-202

FM

CPU

FMFLL

FMHLF

+24v

+12v

DC controller PCB

Fan



7-6

Notation

FM2

FM3

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

Name

Air exhaust fan

Fixing heatexhaust fan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner coolingfan

Orientation

Blowing

Drawing

Drawing

Drawing

Drawing

Blowing

Filter

Ozone

Air, dust-proofing

Function

Exhausts air from each fan to theoutside.

Prevents overheating inside themachine by the fixing heater.Exhausts silicone oil vapors.

Draws in stray toner from aroundthe developing assembly.

Draws copy paper to the feedingbelt.

Prevents internal overheating.

Cools the scanner and the primarycharging assembly.



7-7

Pow

er s

witc

h O

N

Fix

ing

heat

exh

aust

fa

n (F

M3)

Air

exha

ust f

an (

FM

2)

Cle

aner

fan

(FM

7)

Fee

ding

fan

(FM

6)

WM

UP

INT

RC

NT

RLS

TR

WM

UPR

ST

BY

INT

RC

NT

RA

ER

SCFW

SC

RV

SC

FW

SC

RV

LST

RS

TB

Y

15 m

in (

appr

ox.)

10 m

in (a

ppro

x.)

10 m

in (a

ppro

x.)

Cop

y S

tart

key

ON

Pow

er s

witc

h O

FF

: F

ull-s

peed

rot

atio

n

: H

alf-

spee

d ro

tatio

n

Sca

nner

coo

ling

fan

(FM

8)

Dev

elop

ing

fan

(FM

5)

Fig

ure

7-20

3 F

an O

pera

tion

Seq

uenc

e

III. POWER SUPPLY

A. Outline of Power Supply

Figure 7-301 is a block diagram showing the distribution of power inside the copier.

Figure 7-301

Drum heater

Fixing heater

Scanning lamp

M1

M2

M3

CB1

LF1

Drum heatercontrolPCB

AC driverPCB

J303-1

-2

-3

Main motorcontrolPCB

Pick-up motorcontrolPCB

Scanner motorcontrolPCB

38VU

38VU

38VU

38VU powersupply circuit


24VR powersupply circuit

24VA2 powersupply circuit

24VH powersupply circuit

SW2

SW3

DC power supply PCB

Lamp regulatorSW1

J302-1 -3

DC controllerPCB

HVT

SW1: Power switchSW2: Front drum switchSW3: Drum heater switchSW4: High-voltage multifeeder door switch

J305-1

-3

-5

-7

J311-5

24VU

24VR

5VR

12VU

RMT

24VR

24VH

MSW5

J304-2

-4

24VA2

24VA1

38VU

J308-1

-3

-5

J309-1

-3

-5

24VA2

24VA1

38VUSorter

RDF

24VA1 powersupply circuit


5VR powersupply circuit

J301-1

-3

-5

(a)

NO

(b)

NC

RL401



7-8

B. Power Supply Circuit

The copier’s DC power supply provides eight DC outputs: 38 VU, 24 VU, 24 VR, 24VA2, 24 VH, 24 VA1, 12 VU, and 5 VR.

Its AC power supply consists of the following: a. AC direct input line without a switch;b. input line through a power switch (SW1); and c. input line through both power switch(SW1) and door switch (SW2).

When the power switch (SW1) is turned ON, each power supply circuit is suppliedwith AC power for DC outputs; the input lines are switched for the 5 VR, 12VU, and24VA1 power supply circuits by the remote signal (RMT) from the DC controller PCB.

When the power switch (SW1) is turned ON, power is supplied to each power supplycircuit through the line that goes through the power switch (SW1; b) to activate themicroprocessor on the DC controller PCB. Then, the microprocessor on the DCcontroller PCB causes the remote signal (RMT) to go ‘1’ to turn ON the relay (RL401),switching the AC input line to the AC direct input line (a).

When the power is turned OFF, the 38VU, 24VU, 24VR, 12VA2, and 24VH circuitsturn OFF; however, other DC power supply circuits remain ON to continue to provide theDC controller PCB with DC power, thereby rotating the fans for a specific period of time(about 15 min).

Thereafter, the DC controller PCB causes the remote signal (RMT) to go ‘0’ to cut offthe AC circuit, thereby automatically cutting off the AC input to the DC power supplyPCB.

You must disconnect the power plug before working on the DC controller PCB (forreplacement, for example).

Reference:The tolerances for DC voltage are as follows:• +38VU +10%, –7%• +24VU +10%, –7%• +24VU ±2%• +24VA2 +10%, –7%• +24VH +10%, –7%• +5VR ±4%• +12VU +10%, –7%• +24VU +10%, –20%

The above, however, assumes that the AC input accuracy is ±10%.



7-9

Caution:

Figure 7-302

Fan rotation

Power plug connected Power switch ON Power switch OFF

Power switch disconnected

15 min (approx.)Remote signal (RTM)

38VU output timing

24VU output timing

24VR output timing

24VA2 output timing

5VR output timing

12VU output timing

24VA1 output timing

24VU1 output timing

24VU2 output timing



7-10

As a means of protection for the power supply PCB, the AC power supply input sideis equipped with a fuse and each DC circuit is equipped with a built-in overcurrentprotection circuit.

If an overcurrent flows because of a short circuit in the power supply line, theprotection circuit will turn on to turn OFF the output of the power supply unit. If suchhappens, disconnect the power plug, and remove the cause of activation; then, turn ONthe power supply. The protection circuit may be reset by turning ON the AC power supplyonce again after keeping the AC power supply of the power supply unit OFF for about30 sec.

If an overcurrent flows, the protection circuit turns on before the fuse of the AC inputblows; however, the AC input fuse may blow if the AC power supply is turnedON/OFF while the output of the power supply unit has a short circuit.

C. Power Supply for Date/Time Display

The DC controller PCB is equipped with a lithium battery as a backup to be used inthe event that the power plug is disconnected by accident.

The lithium battery is good for about five years with the power plug disconnected.When its life is exhausted, the date/time notation remains unchanged; the notationmechanism starts to operate once again when the power plug is connected.

You cannot use the lithium battery once it reaches its life, i.e., you cannot rechargeit. (Replace it with a service part battery.)

The service part battery will not discharge unless it is connected to a circuit, and it isgood as long as five years after it is first used.

Keep in mind that the backup data will be lost when the battery reaches its life orwhen it is taken out for replacement; be sure to re-enter data as necessary.

Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog.Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated.Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of it in fire. Keep the battery out of reachof children and discard any used battery promptly.



7-11

Caution:

Caution:

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY






correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts is removed.7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front


A. External Covers

q Front door t Lower right cover (1)w Multifeeder door y Rear cover (4)e Upper right door (4) u Upper left cover (5)r Lower right door (2) i Lower left cover (7)

Figure 7-401

q w

e

r

t

y

u

i



7-12

!

q Upper inside cover (2) r Power switch assembly cover (3)w Fixing/feeding assembly front cover (3) t Hopper covere Connector cover (1)

Figure 7-402

Remove the covers as necessary to clean, inspect, or repair the inside of themachine.

Those covers that may be removed through mere removal of mounting screws ontheir own are omitted from the discussions.

1. Removing the Front Door1) Open the front door, and remove the mounting screw w of the stopper tape q; then,

remove the two stoppers e.

Figure 7-403

q

w

e

q

w

e

r

t



7-13

2) Pull out the pin r in downward direction.

Figure 7-404

3) Hold the front door t, and pull it out in upward direction at an angle.

Figure 7-405

t

r



7-14

2. Removing the Inside Upper Cover1) Remove the front door, and shift the fixing/feeding lever; then, slide out the

fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the inside upper cover w.

Figure 7-406

3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the screw q of the releasing lever; then, while pushing the rear (inside of

the fixing/feeding assembly) of the releasing lever locking shaft, shift the releasinglever w to remove.

3) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the fixing knob r.4) Remove the three mounting screws t, and remove the fixing/feeding assembly front

cover y.

Figure 7-407

qw

er

t

t

t

y

q

w



7-15

4. Removing the Rear Cover1) Remove the nine screws q, and remove the rear cover w.

Figure 7-408

5. Sliding Out the Hopper Assembly1) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover q. Remove the three mounting

screws w and the connector cover e, and disconnect the connector; then, slide thehopper r to the front, and turn it.

Figure 7-409

When installing the hopper assembly, be sure to check that the connector isconnected.

qw er

q

q q

w

q q



7-16

Caution:

6. Removing the Process Unit1) Open the front door.2) Remove the developing assembly. (See p. 4-55.)3) Remove the hopper assembly. (See p. 4-60.)4) Slide out the fixing feeding assembly, and place the drum protection sheet on the

registration roller assembly.5) Disconnect the four connectors q, and remove the two mounting screws w.

Figure 7-410

6) Insert the drum rotating tool e into the slit r in the drum shaft. While keeping thedrum in place so that it will not rotate in counterclockwise direction, insert ascrewdriver through the center hole t of the drum rotating tool; then, remove thedrum fixing screw.

Do not remove the drum fixing screw before fixing the drum in place. If the drum isallowed to rotate in counterclockwise direction, the cleaning blade will not come intocontact with the drum correctly, leading to cleaning faults.

Reference:If you are releasing the hopper assembly but not removing it, be sure to open themultifeeder door and the upper right door to allow for space for the front door.

q

w w



7-17

Caution:

Figure 7-411

7) Slide out the process unit y until it stops.

Figure 7-412

y

t

e

r Drum shaft



7-18

8) Hold the grip of the process unit as shown Figure 7-413, and remove it.

Figure 7-413

7. Installing the Process UnitInstall the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it while keeping the

following in mind:1) Place the process unit while aligning it along the front and rear guide plates q of the

left rail.For the right rail, be sure to place the process unit on the L-shaped stay.

Figure 7-414 (rail side)

q

Right hand

Left hand



7-19

2) After inserting the process unit into the copier, match the slit of the drum shaft andthe slit of the drum using the drum rotating tool e. Then, insert the drum fixing t,and insert the mounting screw r into the center hole in the drum rotating tool.

Figure 7-415

B. Control Panel

1. Removing the Control Panel from the Copier1) Remove the mounting screw from the upper left cover, and remove the two stepped

screws (M3x6) from the standard white cover.2) Open the RDF, and remove the three mounting screws q and the three RDF catch

fixings w.

Figure 7-416

w wq q

er t



7-20

3) Remove the three mounting screws e; then remove the right upper cover r.

Figure 7-417

4) Remove the mounting screw from the control panel t.

Figure 7-418

t

e

r



7-21

5) Open the front door, and remove the three mounting screws y; then, remove theconnector cover u, and remove the connector. Open the hopper i.

Figure 7-419

When installing the hopper assembly, check to make sure that the connector isconnected.

6) Shift the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever o from vertical to horizontal, andslide out the fixing feeding assembly !0.

Figure 7-420

o

!0

ui y



7-22

Caution:

7) Remove the three mounting screws !1, and remove the inside upper cover !2; then,push in the fixing feeding assembly.

Figure 7-421

8) Remove the three mounting screws !3, and remove and turn over the control panel.

Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the copier’s chassis.

Figure 7-422

9) Disconnect the three connectors (J911, J915, J955).

!3

!2!1



7-23

Caution:

2. Removing the Control Panel PCB1) Remove the four mounting screws q, and slide the rear cover w to the right to

remove.

Figure 7-423

3. Removing the Touch Panel1) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the center support plate w.

Figure 7-424

q

q qw

q w



7-24

2) Remove the three flat cables e (J912, J913, J916) of the control panel CPU PCB,and disconnect the connector r (J956) of the inverter PCB.

3) Remove the five mounting screws t, and remove the touch panel y.

Figure 7-425

4. Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB1) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the control panel right support

plate w and the control panel CPU PCB e.

Figure 7-426

q

q

we

e

r t

ty



7-25

2) Remove the thirteen mounting screws r; then, remove the keypad PCB t.

Figure 7-427

C. Door Switch Assembly

1. Removing the Front Door Switch Assembly1) Open the front door.2) Remove the inside upper cover.3) Remove the control panel.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the door switch assembly w.

Figure 7-428

q w

r

t



7-26

2. Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly1) Remove the front door, and remove the hopper assembly.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the power supply switch

assembly cover w.

Figure 7-429

3) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the multifeeder doorsensor/multifeeder door catch assembly r.

Figure 7-430

4) Remove the sensor from the multifeeder door sensor/multifeeder door catchassembly.

3. Installing the Drum Heater SwitchInstall the switch so that its right side is in ON position.

e

r

q

w



7-27

D. Fan Unit

1. Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover. (See p. 7-15.)2) Disconnect the three connectors q (J1, J2, J3) from the potential control PCB, and

disconnect also the connector w (J921) from the service switch PCB.3) Remove the five mounting screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove

the scanner cooling fan unit t together with the potential controller PCB.

Figure 7-431

2. Removing the Air Exhaust Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the air exhaust fan e.

Figure 7-432

q

w e

e

ee qw

r t



7-28

3. Removing the Fixing Air Exhaust Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the fixing heat exhaust fan e.

Figure 7-433

4. Removing the Developing Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the connector q (J301) from the high-voltage transformer PCB, and

remove the three mounting scrwes w; then, shift the high-voltage transformerassembly e.

Figure 7-434

q

w

e

q

q

w

e



7-29

3) Remove the two mounting screws r, and disconnect the connector t; then, removethe developing fan y.

Figure 7-435

5. Removing the Cleaner Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the developing fan assembly e.

Figure 7-436

q

w e

r

r

t

y



7-30

6. Removing the Feeding Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB.3) Remove the cleaner fan.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the feeding fan e.

Figure 7-437

E. Removing the Counter Assembly

1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover; then, remove the mountingscrew from the control panel.

2) Remove the mounting screw q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then, removethe support plate together with the counter assembly.

Figure 7-438

qw

we

q

we



7-31

F. Main Motor Assembly

1. Removing the Main Motor1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the high-voltage PCB.3) Remove the spring q; loosen the tension pulley, remove the four mounting screws

w, detach the belt at the tip of the main motor, and remove the main motor e.

Figure 7-439

G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-440

q w e



7-32

2. Removing the Waste Toner Bottle1) Remove the mounting screw, remove the lower right cover, and slide out the waste

toner bottle to the side of the multifeeder.

3. Removing the Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding

tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB.4) Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan.5) Remove the waste toner bottle.6) Remove the spring q, and loosen the tension pulley w; then, detach the timing belt

e.

Figure 7-441

7) Remove the three mounting screws r, and disconnect the holding tray assemblydrawer connector t.

Figure 7-442

r t

q

w

e



7-33

8) Remove the mounting screw y of the DC controller PCB, and disconnect the threeconnectors u (J113, J114, J115) and two connectors i.

Figure 7-443

9) Remove the four mounting screws o, and remove the fixing/waste toner driveassembly !0 together with the waste toner feeding assembly.

When removing the fixing/waste toner drive assembly, stop up the tip of the wastetoner pipe with a ball of paper or the like to prevent spilling of waste toner.

Figure 7-444

o o

o

!0

y

u

i



7-34

Caution:

H. Drive Assembly (drum/developing assembly)

1. Construction

Figure 7-445

2. Removing the Drive Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding

tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB and the high-voltage transformer

assembly.4) Remove the waste toner bottle.5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan.6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly.7) Remove the three mounting screws q to free the harness guide 1 w.

Figure 7-446

q

w



7-35

8) Remove the seven mounting screws e, and remove the drive unit r.

Figure 7-447

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-448

e

e

r



7-36

2. Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly1) Remove the lower right cover.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the rear right grip assembly w.

Figure 7-449

5) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the waste toner bottle supportplate r.

Figure 7-450

e

e

r

q

w

q



7-37

6) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the harness guide 2 y.

Figure 7-451

7) Remove the four mounting screws u, and disconnect the connector i; then,remove the vertical path drive assembly o.

Figure 7-452

i

o

u

u

t

y



7-38

J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-453

2. Removing the Pick-Up Drive Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding

tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB and the high-voltage transformer

assembly.4) Remove the waste toner bottle.5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan.6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly.7) Free the harness guide 1. (See Figure 7-446.)8) Detach the timing belt.9) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the deck relay drive assembly w.

Figure 7-454

q

w



7-39

10) Remove the eight mounting screws e, and disconnect the two connectors r; then,remove the pick-up drive assembly.

Figure 7-455

K. Duplexing Unit Drive 1 Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-456

2. Removing the Duplexing Unit Drive 1 Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the

copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the DC controller PCB.

e

e

e

e

r



7-40

4) Remove the spring q of the tensioner, and remove the timing belt.5) Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the duplexing unit drive 1

assembly e.

Figure 7-457

L. Lifter Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-458

q

w

we



7-41

2. Removing the Lifter Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the

copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the rear right grip assembly.5) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the waste toner bottle support

plate w.

Figure 7-459

6) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the three screws r; then, remove the lifterdrive assembly t.

Figure 7-460

e

r

t

q

q

w



7-42

M.Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-461

2. Removing the Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the

copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the waste toner bottle support plate.5) Remove the rear right grip assembly.6) Remove the DC controller PCB, and detach the timing belt.7) Remove the two mounting screws q (two each of the paper width detection

assembly of the cassettes 3 and 4); then, disconnect the connector w (one each).

Figure 7-462

q

w



7-43

8) Remove the five mounting screws e, and remove the cassette pick-up driveassembly r.

Figure 7-463

e

e

e

r



7-44

Caution:

N. Attaching the Drive Belt

Attach the drive belt through the gears and rollers as indicated in Figure 7-464.

Figure 7-464

When installing the holding tray drive belt, be sure to attach the holding tray drivebelt on the roller located at the bottom against pick-up drive belt (inside) and toattach the pick-up drive belt on the roller at the top (outside).

Registration feedingdrive belt

Drum drive beltMain motor

Fixing/waste tonerdrive belt

Pick-up motor Holding tray drive belt

Pick-up drive belt



7-45

O. DC Controller PCB

1. Removing the DC Controller PCB1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the connector from the DC controller PCB.3) Remove the five mounting screws q used to hold the mount in place, and remove

the DC controller PCB together with its mount w.

Figure 7-465

The DC controller PCB is equipped with a battery (BAT101). Observe the following,as shorting both ends of the battery will cause overheating:

2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB• When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or the factory, put it intact with

the mount in a conducting bag. (Use a conducting bag whose one side is transparentso that the face of the PCB shows through it.)

• Make settings in service mode and user mode after replacement.• When entering settings in service mode, enter the values recorded on the label

attached to the front door.

q

q

w



7-46

Caution:

P. DC Power Supply Assembly

1. Removing the DC Power Supply Assembly1) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover.2) Remove the nine mounting screws q, and remove the DC power supply protection

plate w.

Figure 7-466

3) Disconnect the nine connectors (J303, J304, J305,J306, J308, J309, J311, J312,relay connector).

4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the DC power supply PCB rtogether with its mount.

Figure 7-467

e e

r

q

w



7-47

Q. High-Voltage Transformer Assembly

1. Remove the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the four connectors q (J201, J202, J203, J301).3) Remove the three mounting screws w, and remove the PCB assembly e.

Figure 7-468

4) Remove the two fastons r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the twomounting screws, and remove the transformer assembly u.

Figure 7-469

The high-voltage transformer PCB needs factory adjustment like the transformerassembly itself; you must replace them in a set of two whenever either needsreplacement.

rt

y

y

u

q w

w

e



7-48

Caution:

R. Power Supply Input Assembly

1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover.3) Remove the four mounting screws q.4) Disconnect the four connectors w, and remove the power cord mount e.

Figure 7-470

q

qw

e



7-49

blank page


CHAPTER 8

INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING THE SITE......................8-1II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION....8-3

A. Unpacking......................................8-4B. Installing the Scanner....................8-6C. Installing the Fixing Assembly.......8-7D. Installing the AP Kit and the

Charging Assembly .......................8-9E. Installing the Copy Tray.................8-15F. Checking the Developing

Assembly .......................................8-17

G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly....8-19H. Supplying Toner.............................8-20I. Setting Images/Functions and

User Mode.....................................8-24III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE...........8-28IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL

CARD V ..............................................8-29

This chapter introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows how the copier may beinstalled using step-by-step instructions.

blank page

I. SELECTING THE SITE

Keep the following in mind when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay avisit to the user’s before the delivery of the machine:1. There must be a power outlet that satisfies the required power ratings and that may

be used exclusively for the machine.2. The temperature must be between 7.5° and 32.5°C (45.5 and 90.5°F) and the

humidity, between 5% and 85% RH. In particular, avoid areas near water faucets,water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigerators.

3. Avoid areas near sources of fire and areas subjected to dust or ammonium gas.Avoid direct rays of the sun; provide curtains as necessary.

4. The level of ozone generated when the machine is in operation will not affect thehealth of the individuals near it. However, since some may find it unpleasant, be surethat the room is well ventilated.

5. The floor must be flat so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and themachine will be kept level.

6. The space must be large enough to allow at least 10 cm / 3.9 in. from all walls sothat the machine may be operated without obstacles.

Figure 8-101

7. The site must be well ventilated. If multiple machines are installed, be sure that theexhaust from other machines will not flow into the machine.Be sure not to install the machine near air inlets used for ventilating the room.

Generally, silicone gas (vapors of silicone oil from the fixing assembly) emitted bya copier soils corona charging wires, making the life of the wires shorter. This ismore conspicuous in a low humidity environment.

50 cm / 19.5 in. min.

60 cm / 23.4 in. min.

50 cm / 19.5 in. min.

10 cm / 3.9 in. min.



8-1

Note:

Figure 8-102

Figure 8-103

Wrong 2

Exhaust

Wrong 1



8-2

Note:

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to warm place, droplets of water tendto form on its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and a copiersuffering from condensation can generate blank copies.

If you are installing a machine brought in from a cold place, leave it alone withoutunpacking for at least one hour before starting the installation work.

A. If you are using stairs when moving the machine into or out of the user’s, keepthe following in mind:1. Remove the fixing/feeding assembly, holding tray, and copy paper from the

machine, and carry them separately from the machine. (If an RDF is installed,detach it also.)

2. When holding the machine, do not use the grips on the pick-up or deliveryassembly; support it holding the four corners of the machine bottom.

B. If the site of installation has a relatively high humidity, the image fault may occur.It is recommended that the drum heater switch be turned ON to avoid such aproblem. If the site registers 60T or more under ‘RHUM’ (machine insidehumidity) in service mode (*1*), you must turn on the drum heater switch bypressing its right side.

C. Turn up the two adjusters located on the bottom of the machine (2 at front), andmake sure that they are unlocked. You must be careful to make sure that theadjusters will not fall off the bottom of the machine in transit because of vibration.

D. You must work in a group of three or more. When removing the pads, in particular,make arrangements so that one person can hold the grip at the rear and anotherat the front, while yet another person removes the pad and the base plate.

E. Go through the following when moving the machine:1. Find the grip inside the case attached to the machine for use in the location

indicated by the arrow.2. Make sure that the grip is fully inside the slot before lifting the machine. (Take

extra care to be sure that the grip will not slip off while lifting the machine.)3. The machine weighs about 190 kg. Be sure to work in a group of four when

lifting it.(front)

(rear)

Remove the cover.

To remove the grip, pull it out while pressing down on the stopper.



8-3

A. Unpacking



8-4

Work

Unpack the copier, and remove theplastic sheet.

Push in the grip (accessory) into thefront of the pick-up side.

Keep the stopper of the gripfacing downward; otherwise, itmay slip off when the copier islifted.

Hold the grips (front, rear) of thecopier’s pick-up side, and lift thecopier slightly to remove the twopads. Remove the corrugated card-board (base plate).

Hold the grips (front, rear) of thecopier’s delivery side, and lift thecopier slightly to remove the twopads. Remove the corrugatedcardboard (base plate).

Checks/remarksNo.

1

2

3

4

Corrugated cardboard (base plate)

Caution:

The copier weighs about 190 kg.



8-5

Work

Check to make sure that the twoadjusters (2 at front) on the copier’sbottom are shifted up and released.

Slide out the two slope plates fromthe skids.

Turn over the slope plates, and insertfixing pins (1 each) through the pinholes of the skids and the pin holesin the slope plates.• Hold the copier’s grips (front, rear),

and put if off the skid plates bysliding it along the slope plates.

Open the cardboard box, and takeout the parts and accessories.

No.

5

6

7

8

Checks/remarks

Check to make sure that the followingaccessories are available:• Copy tray • Delivery gear (black)• Toner• Grip (1 pc.)• Drum rotating tool• Mode memory sheet• Grip assembly cover (large; 3 pcs.)• Grip assembly cover (small; 1 pc.)• Original tray (2 mounting screws)• Operator’s Manual• Developing assembly (1 pc.)• Drum protection sheet• Cassette size label

Adjusters

B. Installing the Scanner



8-6

Work

Remove the copier’s taping.

Open the RDF.

Remove the scanner fixing (packingtape).(keep the metal fixing for possiblerelocation of the machine.)

No.

1

2

3

Checks/remarks

Remove the protection tape of the size indexand the protection sheet of the copyboardglass.

C. Installing the Fixing Assembly



8-7

Work

Open the front door.

Shift the fixing/feeding assemblyreleasing lever in the direction of thearrow (left) to release thetransfer/separation chargingassembly. Slide out thefixing/feeding unit to the front.

Remove the tag and the separationclaw releasing block of thefixing/feeding assembly.

Be sure to remove strips oftape and particles of glue fromthe feeding belt.

Remove the retaining tag, and openthe fixing assembly/deliveryassembly.

No.

1

2

3

4

Checks/remarks

Separation claw releasing block

Tag

Fixing/feeding assembly

Releasinglever

Caution:

Tags

Fixing delivery assembly



8-8

Work

Remove the two fixing nip releasingscrews.

Close the fixing/delivery assembly.

No.

5

6

Checks/remarks

Screw (rear)

Screw (front)

D. Installing the AP Kit and the Charging Assembly



8-9

Work

Remove the screw from thereleasing lever of the fixing feedingassembly. While pushing the rear ofthe releasing lever lock shaft (on theside of the fixing feeding inside), shiftthe releasing lever to remove thelever. Remove the screw, andremove the fixing knob; remove thethree screws, and remove the fixingfeeding cover.

Remove the metal fixing (1 screw),and disconnect the connector; whilepushing the front and the rear of thetransfer/separation chargingassembly, pull it to the front and thenremove it toward the upper rear.Using alcohol, clean thetransfer/separation chargingassembly.Install the transfer/separationcharging assembly, and connect theconnector.Install the metal fixing.

Take care to avoid contactbetween the transfer/separationcharging assembly and thetransfer guide so that the gutwire will not be cut. Be sure thatthe charging assembly is fullydry.

No.

1

2

Checks/remarks

Screw Connector

q

w

Metal fixing

Fixing knob Screw Fixing feeding cover

ScrewScrewsScrews

Releasing lever

Releasing lever lock shaft (rear)

Caution:



8-10

Work

Install the fixing/feeding assemblyfront cover with three screws. Installthe fixing knob and the releasinglever; then, put the lever in releasestate (lever on left).Push the fixing/feeding assemblyinside the machine.

Open the multifeeder door and theupper right door, and remove thescrew from the black tape (doorstopper) of the front door. (This is toprevent the front door from closingthe hopper after the hopper hasbeen opened.)

Remove the tape from the tagattached to the hopper assembly.

Open the hopper cover, and removethe three screws and the connectorcover.

Disconnect the connector, andrelease the hopper assembly.

Slide out the hopper assembly to thefront, and turn the front right side90°.

No.

3

4

5

6

7

8

Checks/remarks

Hopper assembly Screw

Connector cover

Screw

Hopper cover

Work

Disconnect the connector, andloosen the screw; then, while movingthe charging assembly fixing in thedirection of the arrow (upper right),fix it in position with a screw.Using alcohol, clean the primarycharging assembly.

Disconnect the connector, andremove the screw. Take out the pre-transfer charging assembly. Usingalcohol, clean the pre-transfercharging assembly.

Disconnect the four connectors, andremove the two screws. (You willremove the drum fixing screw in step7.)

Remove the harness from theedge saddle.



8-11

Connectors

Drum fixing screwScrew Screw

Screw ConnectorCleaner screw retainer

Connector

Primary charging assemblyScrew

Caution:

No.

9

10

11

Checks/remarks



8-12

Work

Insert the drum rotating tool into the slitin the drum shaft. Holding the rotatingassembly so that the drum will not turnin counterclockwise direction, removethe drum fixing screw and the drumfixing (from the slit).

1. If the drum is let to rotate incounterclockwise direction, thecleaning blade will not come intocontact correctly with the drum,possibly causing cleaning faults.Be sure to remove the drumfixing screw only after holding thedrum in place.

2. Do not expose the photosensitivedrum to light more than 30 min.

3. Never expose the photosensitivedrum to direct rays of the sun.

4. When placing the photosensitivedrum or the process unit outside,be sure to cover it using six moresheets of copy paper to block outthe light.

While paying attention to the hopper,slide out the fixing feeding assembly.Place the drum protection sheet(accessory) to protect the rubberroller of the registration rollerassembly and the drum.

Slide out the process unit to thefront, and insert the drum rotatingtool into the front of the drum shaft;while rotating the drum, check that itis free of scratches.

No.

12

13

14

Checks/remarks

Slit Drum shaft

Rotating tool

Caution:



8-13

Work

Insert the process unit into themachine, and match the slit in thedrum axis and the slit in the drumusing the drum rotating tool. Then,while holding the drum in place bythe drum rotating tool with the drumfixing (slit member), insert a screw inthe tool.

Remove the drum protection sheetfrom the fixing feeding assembly;then, insert the fixing assembly intothe copier.

Tighten the two mounting screws onthe process unit. Connect the fourconnectors.Insert the primary charging assemblyand the pre-transfer chargingassembly, and fix them in place.Put the harness through the edgesaddle.

Install the process unit front cover,and close the hopper; then, close thehopper, and connect the connectorof the hopper.Tighten the three screws, and installthe connector cover; then, close thefront door.

No.

15

16

17

18

Checks/remarks

1. Check to make sure that each chargingassembly is fully dry.

2. When inserting the pre-transfer chargingassembly, slide it horizontally in relation tothe process unit so as not to damage thesurface of the roller electrode.

3. Check to make sure that the one-way armof the pre-transfer charging assembly ison the eccentric cam.

Slit

Screw

Rotating toolSlit member

Drum shaft

Drum shaft slit

Caution:



8-14

Work

Remove the two screws, andremove the cover from the copier’srear right (bottom).The drum protection sheet will beused when servicing the processunit. Remove the dirt, if any, andkeep it near the waste toner case atthe rear together with the drumrotating tool. (Keep the drum rotatingtool in the hole in the grip on thewaste toner case top together withthe waste toner case cap.)

Do not roll the drum protectionsheet.

Install the cover to the copier’s rearright (bottom).

No.

19

20

Checks/remarks

Drum tool

Waste toner case

Drum protection sheetCaution:

E. Installing the Copy Tray

1. Replacing the Delivery GearIf you are not installing a sorter or a stapler sorter to the copier, i.e., if you are using

the copy tray, you must replace the delivery gear with the gear (black) which is used forcopy tray.

If you are installing a sorter or a stapler sorter to the copier, check to make sure thatthe gear is as indicated in step 1, and do NOT perform any of the steps.



8-15

Work

Open the front door, and slide outthe fixing feeding assembly; then,remove the fixing knob, releasinglever, and fixing delivery cover.Remove the E-ring, and remove thedelivery gear from the copier.

Replace the gear with the deliverygear (black) attached to the copytray, and install the E-ring.

Be sure to match the groove onthe female side of the replacedgear and the male side of thetorque limiter.

No.

1

2

Checks/remarks

E-ring

White gear (for sorter)

Torque limiter

E-ring

Black gear (for tray)

Torque limiter

Caution:

2. Replacing the Leaf Springs of the Delivery RollerIf you are not installing a sorter or a stapler sorter to the copier, i.e., if you are using

the copy tray, you must replace the leaf springs (2 pcs.) of the delivery roller with the leafsprings (identified by a blue label; with weak spring pressure) which are used for thecopy tray.

If you are not installing a sorter or a stapler sorter to the copier, check to make surethat the two leaf springs at the center are stronger than the two leaf springs on bothends, and do NOT perform any of the following steps:



8-16

Work

Remove the two screws, and removethe fixing delivery assembly cover.

Remove the screw, and remove thetwo leaf springs at the center (w/ rolls).Separate the leaf springs and the rolls.

After installing the rolls to the leafsprings (accessory), install the leafsprings to the fixing delivery assembly.

Install the fixing delivery assemblycover with two screws; then, push inthe fixing feeding assembly into thecopier, and close the front door.

No.

1

2

3

4

Checks/remarks

Screw

Screw

Screws

F. Checking the Developing Assembly



8-17

Work

Open the multifeeder tray, andremove the screw from the blacktape.

Remove the screw, and slide thedeveloping assembly locking unit inthe direction of the arrow (rear) toremove.

Take out the developing assemblyfrom the shipping box. By turning thedeveloping assembly cylinder gearby hand, check the cylinder forscratches.

Holding the center (grip pocket) ofthe developing assembly, install it tothe copier.Connect the connector.

When installing the developingassembly, insert it from a highposition, and take care not tobring the developing cylinder intocontact with the metal plate of thedeveloping assembly base.

No.

1

2

3

4

Checks/remarks

Screw

Screw

Connector

Caution:



8-18

Work

Insert the developing assemblylocking unit from the right side (rear),and insert it to the left (front) when itis horizontal.Tighten the screw on the developingassembly locking unit.

Install the black tape of themultifeeder with a screw.

Close the multifeeder door.

No.

5

6

7

Checks/remarks

Screw

G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly



8-19

Work

Open the multifeeder. Holding thegrip on the multifeeder, open themultifeeder door. Shift the lever in thedirection of the arrow, and take outthe pick-up roller releasing spacer.

Slide out the right deck/cassette halfway, and open the upper right coverand lower right cover; then, removethe pick-up roller releasing spacersof the holders 3 and 4 of the paperdeck.

Reference:It is difficult to remove thespacers without removing thecassettes, as they are locked inplace.

No.

1

2

Checks/remarks

Spacer

Lever

Spacer

Spacers

H. Supplying Toner



8-20

Work

Check the sides (left/right) of themouth for the toner bottle.

Shake the toner bottle well about tentimes.

Open the hopper cover, and fit theboss on the tip of the toner bottle in thegroove of the toner supply mouth.• The toner supply mouth and the

toner bottle will become locked inposition.

No.

1

2

3

Checks/remarks

Left Right

q w



8-21

Work

Holding the copier’s shutter (black)on the right side of the toner supplymouth of the hopper, pull it to theright until it stops.

Pull the shutter on the toner bottleside to the right.

When toner has dropped from thetoner bottle to the hopper, lightly tapon the bottom of the toner bottle tomake sure all toner has moved intothe hopper.

No.

4

5

6

Checks/remarks



8-22

Work

Holding the shutter of the tonerbottle, push it to the left until it stops.

Holding the copier’s shutter, push itto the left until it stops.

Push the copier’s shutter up to themarking nt on the hopper assembly.• This will unlock the toner bottle.

No.

7

8

9

Checks/remarks

Marking



8-23

Work

Pull the toner bottle in the upper leftdirection to remove.

Close the hopper cover.

Remove the connector face plate forthe RDF.

Connect the RDF’s connector (male)into the copier’s connector (female).

No.

10

11

12

13

Checks/remarks

I. Setting Images/Functions and User Mode



8-24

Work

Connect the power plug to the poweroutlet, and insert the door switchactuator into the door switchassembly of the front door.

Slide out the holding tray and theholding tray feeding assembly; then,check to make sure that there is noforeign matter and the parts are freeof damage.

Slide out the paper deck and thecassette to the front, and remove thepacking material.

Turn ON the power switch.

Set the size guide plate to suit theuser’s needs.

Put copy paper in the cassette andthe paper deck.

Attach the appropriate stickers to thepaper size plate of the cassette andthe paper deck.

Push in the cassette and the paperdeck into the copier.

Insert the copy tray into the copier.

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Checks/remarks

Make sure all packing material has beenremoved before turning on the power.

• Adjust the Contrast key so that the display onthe control panel has appropriate contrast forgood viewing; explain to the user how thismay be done.

• Check that the Add Paper indicator turns ON.• Press keys on the keypad and the Clear key

to make sure that the copy count is correct.



8-25

Work

After the WAIT period is over, startservice mode by inserting a paper clip orthe like into the hole in the copier’supper left inside cover.

Select ‘TONER-S’ (*4*), and press theuser mode key *.

↓Check to make sure that the message‘CHECK THE DEVELOPER’ hasappeared.

↓After checking the installation of thedeveloping assembly, press the OK key.

↓Press the user mode key *.

↓Execute toner supply (from hopper todeveloping assembly; about 8 to 10min).

↓↓

Press the Reset key twice to endservice mode.

Using two screws, install the originalholder while toner is being supplied.(You may install it on the left side of thecopier if you are not installing a sorter.)

No.

10

11

Checks/remarks

• Close the front door so that light will not enterthe inside of the machine.

• This mode will operate for a maximum ofabout 10 min, supplying toner from thehopper to the developing assembly.

• Do NOT turn off the power while themachine is operating.

Screws

Original holder



8-26

Work

When toner has been supplied,place the Test Sheet on thecopyboard, and make copies tocheck the image.Toner may fall from the drumseparation claw to cause soiledimages on the first ten or so copies;such a condition will disappear whenmore copies have been made.Check to make sure that paper ispicked up from all sources of paper.

Make two-sided and overlay copies.

Set the standard mode in user modeand service mode (*5*) to suit theuser’s needs.Register the paper size for the paperdeck in service mode (*5*).DK-SZ-R (paper deck)Press the Reset key twice to endservice mode.

Remove the door switch retainingtool, and install the cover, fixing knob,and releasing lever to the fixingfeeding unit; then, close the front door.

Clean up the area around the machine.

Move the copier to the site ofinstallation, and fix it in position usingthe two adjusters.

As necessary, turn ON the drumheater switch (by pushing it on theright side) to suit the environment.

No.

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

Checks/remarks

• Check to make sure that there is no abnormalsound.

• Make copies at each default ratio, and checkthe copy image of each.

• Check to make sure that as many copies asset are made normally.

• If the density is different between left andright, adjust the height of the rear of theprimary charging assembly to correct.

• Check to make sure that copying operation isnormal.

• Check to make sure that there is no abnormalsound.

• Check to make sure that paper movement atthe holding tray assembly is normal.



8-27

Work

Put the grip attached to the front ofthe pick-up side under the grip on thepick-up rear side.Install the three covers (large) and onecover (small) of the grip assembly.

If you are installing options such as asorter, complete this step and installthem as instructed in their respectiveInstallation Procedures.

Fill out the service sheet.

No.

19

20

21

Checks/remarks

III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE

Go through the steps in the table when relocating the machine by truck or othermeans of transportation.

A. If you are using stairs when moving the machine into or out of the user’s by stairs,keep the following two points in mind:

1. Draw out the fixing/feeding unit assembly and the holding tray, and remove all copypaper; carry them separately from the machine. (If the RDF is installed, remove it.)

2. When holding the machine, do not use the grips on the pick-up assembly/deliveryassembly, but hold the machine on its four corners at the bottom.

B. You must always make sure that the two adjusters (2 at front) found on the bottomof the machine are turned up (released). At times, the adjusters can slip out ofplace; be careful not to lose them.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JA PAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALL ATION

8-28

Work

Make a copy in Direct.

Remove all copy paper from thepaper deck and all cassettes.

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect the power plug.

Fix the No. 2 mirror mount in placewith the locking plate from the leftcover side.

Remove the developing assembly.

Tape the transfer corona assembly,fixing/feeding unit assemblyreleasing lever, holding trayassembly, and holding tray feedingassembly in place.

Tape the front door, hopper cover,cassettes, left/right paper deckcover, and right door (upper, lower)in place.

Place an A3/11" × 17" sheet of copypaper on the copyboard glass, andtape the RDF in place.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Checks

Make sure that the lensis inside the lens hood.

Make sure that the No.2 mirror mount is fixedand will not move.

Transport thedeveloping assembly ina separate box.

Remarks

Caution:

IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V

1) Open the RDF, and remove the three mounting screws q and the three fixings (RDFcatches) w.

Figure 8-401

2) Remove the three screws e from the front side on the copier’s upper right cover.

Figure 8-402

e

w wq q



8-29

3) Remove the screw r from the control panel.

Figure 8-403

4) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover. Remove the three screws t andthe connector cover y, and disconnect the connector; then, slide the hopperassembly u to the front, and rotate it.

Figure 8-404

u t y

r



8-30

5) Shift the fixing feeding assembly releasing lever i from vertical to horizontalposition, and slide out the fixing feeding assembly o.

Figure 8-405

6) Remove the three screws !0, and remove the upper inside cover !1; then, push inthe fixing feeding assembly.

Figure 8-406

!0 !1

o

i



8-31

7) Remove the three screws !2; then, remove the control panel, and turn it over.

Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the copier’s chassis.

Figure 8-407

8) Remove the five tapping screws !3, and slide the PCB cover !4 5 mm to the right toremove the control panel PCB cover.

Figure 8-408

!4 !3!3

!2



8-32

Caution:

9) Remove the control card inlet face plate !5.

Figure 8-409

10) Remove the face plate screw !6.

Figure 8-410

!6

!5



8-33

11) Place the sheet !7 over the hole in the control panel (display opening of the ControlCard V).

Figure 8-411

12) Remove the protection sheet from the display of the Control Card V.13) Fix the Control Card V in place on the control panel using four screws !8. (Slide a

card into and out of the Control Card V, and fix the Control Card V in place where thecard may be moved easily.)

Figure 8-412

!8

!7



8-34

Check to make sure that the connector !9 of the printer is centered over the hole.

Figure 8-413

14) Install the grounding wire @0 of the Control Card V as indicated in Figure 8-414.

Figure 8-414

@0

!9



8-35

15) Disconnect the shorting connector @1 shown in Figure 8-415.

Figure 8-415

16) Connect the 4P connector of the Control Card V and the 4P connector of the copier.

Be sure to lead the connector wire through the harness retainer so that it will notcome into contact with the scanner cable and the drive pulley.

17) Remove the protection sheet from the control panel of the Control Card V.18) Attach the control panel nameplate @2 of the Control Card V to the copier’s control

panel.

Figure 8-416

@2

@1



8-36

Caution:

19) Install the control panel to the copier.20) Install the hopper and the cover to the copier.

Check to make sure that the connector is connected when installing the hopperassembly.

21) Turn ON the copier, and check the operation of the Control Card V.



8-37

Caution:

blank page


CHAPTER 9

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ...9-1II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES...9-2

A. Copier ............................................9-2B. RDF-H1 .........................................9-3

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING.................9-4IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART ...9-6

A. Copier ............................................9-6B. RDF-H1 .........................................9-8

This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/durables andscheduled servicing charts.

blank page

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS

Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a spe-cific level of machine performance; they must be replaced regardless of external deteri-oration or damage. Plan the replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing.

as of March 1997

Note: The above values are estimates only and are subject to change based on futuredata.

Table 9-101



9-1

No.

1

2

Parts

Primary/pre-transfer/transfer/separation corona wire

Primary charging assembly gridwire

Parts No.

FY3-0030-000

FY3-0040-000

FY1-0883-000

Q’ty

AR

AR

AR

Life (copies)

250,000

250,000

500,000

Remarks

100V

120/220/240V

II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES

Some parts of the machine may require replacement because of wear or damageover the period of warranty. Replace them as necessary.

A. Copier

as of March 1997

Table 9-201a



9-2

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Parts

Multifeeder pick-up roller

Multifeeder feeding roller

Multifeeder separation roller

Scanning lamp

Scanning lamp

Cleaner separation claw

Fixing cleaning belt

Delivery upper separation claw

Pick-up roller (paper deck, cassette)

Feeding roller (paper deck, cassette)

Separation roller (paper deck,cassette)

Duplexing pick-up crescent roller

Duplexing upper separation belt

Duplexing feeding roller

Primary charging wire cleaner 1

Primary charging wire cleaner 2

Transfer charging wire cleaner

Separation charging wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging assemblyscraper

Upper fixing roller

Lower fixing roller

Parts No.

FF5-1220-000

FF5-1221-000

FB2-7522-000

FB2-7545-000

FH7-3280-000

FH7-3282-000

FB2-6899-000

FA3-8908-000

FC1-0391-030

FF5-1220-000

FF5-1221-000

FB2-7695-000

FB2-7777-000

FC2-1532-000

FA5-5427-000

FC2-1533-000

FF2-3552-000

FF2-3551-000

FF2-3551-000

FF2-3552-000

FF5-3090-000

FF5-3090-000

FA4-1867-000

FB2-7200-000

FB2-7121-000

Q’ty

1

1

2

1

1

1

3

1

6

3

3

6

3

2

8

1

2

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

Life (copies)

120,000

120,000

120,000

120,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

500,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

Remarks

Front

Rear

100V/120V

220V/240V

Rear

Front

Table 9-201b

B. RDF-H1

as of March 1997

No.

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35



9-3

Parts

Insulating bush (front, rear)

Fixing main thermistor (TH1)

Fixing sub thermistor (TH2)

Pick-up clutch (cassette)

Pick-up clutch (paper deck)

Cleaning blade


Transfer/separation chargingassembly


Fixing thermal switch

Delivery lower separation claw

Developing cylinder

Developing roll

Parts No.

FB2-7239-000

FH7-7349-000

FG5-8812-000

FH7-5726-000

FH7-5729-000

FA4-1827-000

FG5-4378-030

FG5-4550-090

FG5-4377-050

FH7-7154-000

FA2-9037-000

FF5-3086-000

FB2-6933-000

Q’ty

2

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

Life (copies)

500,000

500,000

500,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

Remarks

Replace togetherwith upper fixingroller.

Use two edges;one for 500,000.

No.

1

2

3

4

5

Parts

Feeding belt

Pick-up crescent roller

Separation belt

Feeding roller

Separation flapper

Parts No.

FC1-7815-020

FF5-5191-000

FE6-3059-000

FB3-8814-000

FF5-6048-000

Q’ty

1

2

9

1

3

Life (copies)

200,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

100,000

Remarks

If cleaning isdifficult.

Actual copiesmade.

Actual copiesmade.

Actual copiesmade.

Actual copiesmade.

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING

1. Provide scheduled servicing every 250,000 copies.2. Check the service record before leaving the office, and take replacement parts

as necessary.3. If you have cleaned charging wires, check to make sure that they are completely

dry before installing them.



9-4

Caution:

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Work

Meet the person in charge.

Record the counter reading.

Make test copies.

Clean the following:• Grid wire• Shield plate• Roller electrode

Clean the optical path assembly:• Reflecting plate for original

exposure• Side reflecting plate for original

exposure• Lens• No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 mirrors• Dust-proofing glass• Pre-exposure lamp plastic sheet• Standard white plate• Heat absorbing glass

Check the waste toner case.

Checks

Check the generalconditions.

Check faulty copies.

Check the following:a. Image densityb. Background of copies

(for soiling)c. Clarity of charactersd. Leading edge margine. Fixing, registration

(displacement), backof copies

f. Counter operation

If the case is more thanhalf full, dispose of thewaste toner in a plasticbag. Or, replace thewaste toner case.

Remarks

Standards: 4.0±1.5 mm (Direct)

Dry wipe with lint-free paper; then,use alcohol toclean.

Use a blowerbrush. If the dirtcannot be removed,use alcohol.Moist clothDry wipe.



9-5

No.

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Work

Clean the transfer guide.• Transfer guide plate (upper,

lower)• Transfer/separation charging

guide rail

Check and clean the cleaningassembly.• Magnet roller (check)• Separation claw (clean)• Side scraper (check)

Clean the separation feedingassembly.• Feeding belt

Clean the fixing delivery assembly.• Guide• Separation claw (upper, lower)• Cleaning belt (check)

Provide scheduled servicing to suitthe number of copies made.

Clean the copyboard glass.

Make test copies.

Make sample copies.

Put sample copies in order, andclean up the area around themachine.

Record the final counter reading.

Fill out the service sheet, andreport to the person in charge.

Checks

If the coating on themagnet roller is uneven,• Rotate the magnet roller

counterclockwise toremove paper lint anddust.

• Remove the paper lintand the like from theside scraper assembly.

Remarks

Remove thephotosensitivedrum from theprocess unit.

After cleaning, besure to install thephotosensitive drum.

SolventSolvent

Use alcohol.

IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART

Do not use solvents/oils other than those specified.

A. Copier: Clean : Replace : Lubricate : Adjust : Check

Note 1: Take care not to touch the mirrors and the lenses.



9-6

Caution:

Unit

Opticalassembly

Opticaldriveassembly

Charging

Photosensitive

Developing

Part

No. 1 through No. 6 mirror

Dust-proofing glass

Heat absorbing glass

Standard white plate

Reflecting shade(scanning lamp)

Scanner rail

Scanner cable

Charging wire (primary,pre-transfer, transfer,separation)

Grid wire (primary)

Charging wire shield plate

Roller electrode waste tonerreceptacle (pre-transfercharging assembly)

Photosensitive drum

Primary charging anti-stray sheet

Developing cylinder

Developing assembly roll

Developing anti-stray sheet

Remarks

Use a blower brush;for the No. 5 mirror,use the mirrorcleaning tool.

Use alcohol; then,apply lubricant.

Inspect and adjustonly when servicingafter the first 250,000copies.

Use solvent.

Instal-lation

every250,000

every500,000

every750,000

every1,000,000

Interval



9-7

Unit

Cleaner

Fixingassembly

Deliveryassembly

Wastetoner case

Externalcontrol

Pick-upassembly

Feedingassembly

Holdingtray

Hopper

Part

Blade

Side scraper assembly

Separation claw

Inlet guide

Fixing cleaning belt

Thermistor

Oil receptacle

Separation claw (upper,lower)

Waste toner

Copyboard glass

Ozone filter

Air filter (scannercooling fan)

Pick-up roller

Feeding roller

Separation roller

Transfer guide/roll

Registration roller(upper, lower)

Feeding belt

Feeding roller

Pick-up roller (crescent)

Upper separation belt

Lower separationfeeding roller

Toner supply mouth

Toner receptacle

Remarks

Apply toner.*Switch edges.

Remove paper lint.

Take it up at time ofinstallation.

Remove asnecessary.

Instal-lation

every250,000

every500,000

*

(upper)

every750,000

every1,000,000

(lower)

Interval

B. RDF-H1

: Clean : Replace : Lubricate : Adjust : Check



9-8

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Part

Feeding belt

Original sensor (S1)

Pre-registration sensor (S2)

Separation flapper (front, middle, rear)

Pick-up crescent roller

Separation belt

Feeding roller

Registration roller

Reversing roller/roll

Delivery roller/roll

Remarks

Actual copies mode.

every100,000

every200,000

Interval

o e r y u t

i w q

!0


CHAPTER 10

TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..10-3A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................10-3B. Points to Note for Scheduled

Servicing......................................10-4II. STANDARDS AND

ADJUSTMENTS...............................10-5A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5B. Exposure System ........................10-10C. Image Formation System ............10-15D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............10-21E. Fixing System..............................10-32F. Electrical System.........................10-35

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS ............................................10-54A. Making Initial Checks ..................10-54B. Image Fault Samples ..................10-58C. Troubleshooting Image Faults.....10-59

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-75A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .....10-75

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS......................................10-106A. Copy Paper Jams........................10-106B. Feeding Failure ...........................10-113

VI. ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL PARTS ..............10-114

A. Sensors .......................................10-114B. Switches and Solenoids ..............10-118C. Motors and Fans .........................10-122D. Clutches ......................................10-124E. Lamps, Heaters, and

Photosensors ..............................10-126F. PCBs ...........................................10-128G. Variable Resistors, Light-

Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB ................................10-130

VII. SERVICE MODE..............................10-140A. Outline .........................................10-140B. Using Service Mode ....................10-140C. Using Adjustment Mode and

Option Setting Mode ...................10-141D. Control Display Mode ( 1 ) ....10-142E. I/O Display Mode ( 2 ) ...........10-157F. Adjustment Mode ( 3 ) ...........10-193G. Function Mode ( 4 ) ...............10-211H. Options Mode ( 5 ) ................10-222I. Counter Mode ( 6 ) ................10-231

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...........................10-237A. Copier..........................................10-237B. RDF Self Diagnosis.....................10-242C. Sorter Self Diagnosis ..................10-243

]]

]]

]]

]]

]]

]]

This chapter provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and identification(image fault/malfunction).

blank page


The troubleshooting procedures in this manual are prepared in the form of tables,rather than flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult the tables.

EX. AC power is absent.

n To find out the cause (faulty part) of a single problem, see the Cause/Fault column.In the case of “AC power is absent,” you will learn that the power plug may not beconnected, the covers may not be closed properly, or the main power may be absent.

n To find out checks to make or remedies to provide for a single problem, see theRemedy column as guided by YES/NO to the checks; or, move to the next step asnecessary.

n The instruction “Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB” asks you to connect the meter’s positive probe (+) to J109-1 andnegative probe to J109-2 (–).

Is the powerplug connected to

the outlet?

Connect theplug

Checks YES/NO Remedies

NO1

Step

Are the front doorand delivery coverclosed properly?

Close the doorand cover.

NO2

Is the specifiedvoltage present at the

power outlet?

The problem is notthe copier s: advise the user.

NO3

YES

YES

YES

Guide to Troubleshooting Tables

Cause/Fault

Power plug

Covers

Main power

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Checks

Is the power plug connect-ed to the outlet?

Are the front door and deliv-ery cover closed properly?

Is the specified voltage pre-sent at the power outlet?

Is the specified voltage pre-sent between J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is located near thepower supply cord mount.)

Remedies

Connect the plug.

Close the door and cover.

The problem is not the copier’s; advise the user.

Go to step 6.

blank page

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

Make adjustments in non-AE and at copy density 5.


Is there a difference in density between

front and rear?

Is it lighter at the rear?

Make two to three copies of the Test Sheet.

Check the height of the charging wire.

Turn OFF and then ON the power switch, and make a copy.

If the difference still exists after turning either screw 1.5 mm (a full turn results in a change of 0.7 mm), check the charging assembly and the scanning lamp/scanner for dirt.When turning it counterclockwise, be sure that the height of the wire is not less than 7.5 mm.

Check the copy paper and the transfer system.

Is the density of gray scale No. 1

too light?

Clean the standard white plate, mirror, lens, dust-proofing glass, scanning lamp, and reflecting plate/heat absorbing glass.

Turn OFF and then ON the power switch, and make a copy.

Is VDM VDT –10 V?

Is PLMT ’1’?

Is VL1M VL1T –10 V?

Is LLMT ’1’?

Check the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Check the scanning lamp and the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Increase the value of VDT-SW.

Turn OFF and ON the power switch, and make a copy.

Increase the value of LIGHT_5.

Decrease the value of LIGHT_5.


optimum?


too dark?

Perform AE adjustment.(Refer to P. 10-8)

Making Pre-Checks Adjusting the Density Slope Adjusting the Solid Black Density

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

] 5 ]

] 1 ]

] 3 ]

Clean the charging wire.

Make a copy.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Turn the adjusting screw at the rear of the primary charging assembly clockwise and the adjusting screw at the front counterclockwise for the same degree. (1.5 mm max. on either screw)

Turn the adjusting screw at the rear of the primary charging assembly counterclockwise and the adjusting screw at the front clockwise for the same degree. (1.5 mm max. on either screw)

B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing


Cleaning

Part Tool/solvent Work/remarks

Manual feed tray,

Pick-up roller,

Feeding roller

Vertical path roller

Alcohol and lint-free

paper


paper

Cleaning

Cleaning


Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging assembly, Transfer/separation assembly, Pre-transfer assembly

Primary charging anti-stray sheet

Dust-proofing glass

Blank exposure lamp

No. 4 mirror to

No. 6 mirror

Roller electrode

Developing assembly base

Registration roller

Moist cloth (Note 1)


paper

Lint-free paper

Blower brush or lint-

free paper


paper

Cleaning

Cleaning

Dry wiping; then, cleaning

with lint-fee paper moistened

with alcohol

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning with a blower brush;

cleaning with lint-free paper if

dirt is excessive; use the mirror

cleaning tool for the No. 5

mirror

Disposing of the toner collecting

on the roller electrode

Cleaning

Cleaning

Note: Do not leave any droplets of water.

Copyboard glass


CleaningAlcohol

Lens

Standard white plate

Reflecting plate

Blower brush

Lint-free paper

Blower brush

Cleaning

Dry wiping, cleaning

Cleaning

No. 1 mirror through

No. 3 mirror

Blower brush or lint-

free paper

Cleaning with a blower brush;

using lint-free paper if dirt is

excessive


Separation claw

Upper roller,

Lower roller

Feeding assembly

Re-pick up assembly,

Reversing roller

Re-pick up assembly,

Pick-up roller,

Registration roller

Solvent and lint-free

paper

Cleaning oil and lint-

free paper

Moist cloth (Note 1)


paper

Paper guideSolvent and lint-free

paper


paper

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Developing anti-stray sheet

• Make thorough checks to be sure that the block (front, rear) is free of melting, thermal deformation,cracking, and yellowing because of leakage. If an abnormal condition is noted, replace it with a newpart without delay.

• Inspect and clean both outside and inside of the block (front, rear).• Do NOT use a cloth coated with metal powder.• Do NOT use a moist cloth. Dry wipe with lint-free paper, and use alcohol. Make sure that the part is

completely dry before installing it.• Be sure to complete scheduled servicing and replacement within a specific period of time.

Note:

II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Image Adjustment

1. Adjusting the Leading Edge MarginSelect ‘LE_BLANK’ in service mode ( ).Make adjustments so that the leading edge non-image width is 4.5±1.5 mm when the

Test Sheet is copied in Direct.(unit: 0.1 mm)

Figure 10-201

2. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width (registration)Select ‘REGIST’ in service mode ( ).Make adjustments so that the leading edge margin is 4.5±1.5 mm when the Test

Sheet is copied.(unit: REGIST:0.1mm)

Figure 10-202

3. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (paper deck and cassette position)Make adjustments by moving the horizontal adjusting plate of the paper deck and

each cassette so that the distance between the edge of the copy image and that of thecopy paper is 0 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied.

Figure 10-203

0–1.5mm

0246

8

10

(+)(-)

4.5–1.5mm

]3]

4.5–1.5mm

]3]



10-5

a. Paper Deck

Figure 10-204a

Figure 10-204b

Adjusting plate

Screw

Adjusting plateScrew



10-6

b. Cassette

Figure 10-205

Note:If you have adjusted the front/rear registration for the cassette, you will have toregister the paper width basic value. (p. 10-53)

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (holding tray position; 2nd side of a two-sided/overlay copy)Loosen the two screws, and move the position of the guide plate of the holding tray

assembly so that the distance between the edge of the copy image and that of the copypaper is 0 ±2.0 mm in Direct mode.

Figure 10-206

0–2.0mm

0246

8

10

(+)(-)

Screw

AdjustingPlate



10-7

5. Adjusting the Left/Right MarginMake adjustments so that the image left/right margin is 2.75 ±2.5 mm when the Test

Sheet is copied in Direct mode.You must have adjusted the “left/right registration” before making this adjustment.

a. Front Margin Adjustment (left margin)Select ‘F-BLANK’ in service mode ( ), and change the setting.Increasing the setting increases the front margin.(unit: 0.1 mm)

b. Rear Margin (right margin)Select ‘R-BLANK’ in service mode ( ), and change the setting.Increasing the setting increases the rear margin.(unit: 0.1 mm)

6. AE Auto Adjustment1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch

assembly.2) Push the service mode switch with a clip or the like over the cover.3) Select AE_ADJ: 0 ← (]: START) (0: F5, 1: F9) in service mode ( ).4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.

Figure 10-207

5) Press the ] user mode key once.The scanning lamp will turn ON, and auto adjustment will be executed.

AE_ADJ : 1 ← (]:START)

Changes to ‘1’.

NA-3 Test Sheet

Butted.

]4]

]3]

]3]



10-8



10-9

6) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.7) Press the ] user mode key once.

The scanning lamp will turn ON, and auto adjustment will be executed.

AE_ADJ : 0 ← (]:START)

Changes to ‘0’.8) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

7. Adjusting the AE SlopeAfter executing AE auto adjustment, make a copy of a dark original (e.g.,

newspaper). If the copy is foggy or too light, perform the following:1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch

assembly.2) Press the service mode switch over the cover with a clip.3) Select ‘AE_SLOP’ in service mode ( ).4) Place a dark original (e.g., newspaper).5) Change the setting using the keypad, and press the ] user mode key.

q If the setting was decreased in adjustment mode, the copy of a newspaper will belighter.

w If the setting was increased in adjustment mode, the copy of a newspaper will bedarker.

Note:You can make copies by pressing the Copy Start key.

6) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

]3]

B. Exposure System

1. Adjusting the Scanner Home PositionMake copies, and remove the control panel; then, check to make sure that the line

in section A on the electrode (front) of the No. 1 mirror mount is within section B of thehole in the glass support (front).

Otherwise, change the setting of ‘BRAKE_SC’ in service mode ( ) so that theline in section A is within section B.

Figure 10-208

B

No. 1 mirror mount

Electrode mount (front)

A (left) of wall

Glass support(front)

Hole

]3]



10-10

2. Routing the Scanner Drive CableRoute the cable as indicated by numbers q through i, and perform “adjusting the

wire tension” and “adjusting the mirror position” shown on the next page.

Figure 10-209

Steel ball

Wind eight times.

Fix in place temporaily.

1

3

4

8

5

6

2

7

6

2



10-11

3. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner CableBe sure to perform the following whenever you have installed the scanner cable.

1) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the left cover.2) Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket.3) Turn the tension adjusting screw so that the value is as indicated:

• Turn the tension adjusting screw A so that the reading of the spring gauge is200 ±50 g when the middle of the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm.

Figure 10-210

4. Adjusting the Mirror Position1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable and Adjusting the Mirror Position

Be sure to perform the following whenever you have installed the scanner drive wire:1) Move the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2/No. 3 mirror mount to the left.2) Set the mirror positioning tool (front, rear; FY9-3011) as shown:

Figure 10-211

Figure 10-212

A

A

10 mm

10 mm

(rear)

(front)

Mirr

or m

ount



10-12

5. Cleaning the Mirror (No. 5 mirror)1) Remove the copyboard glass.2) Remove the lens hood.3) Remove the mirror guide plate.4) Move the lens stage in Enlarge direction.5) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror cleaning tool.6) As shown, butt the mirror cleaning tool q against the No. 5 mirror, and clean the

mirror by moving the tool in the direction of the arrows. (At this time, take care so thatthe No. 4 mirror will not come into contact with the cleaning tool or your fingers.)

Figure 10-213

6. Installing the Light-Blocking Belts

q Light-blocking belt 1 e Light-blocking belt 3w Light-blocking belt 2 r Light-blocking belt 4

Figure 10-214

q

w

e

r

q



10-13

7. Installing the Lens X Direction Drive BeltInstall the lens X direction drive belt with a mounting screw w where the lens X

direction drive motor q has lowered on its own weight.

Figure 10-215

q

wOwn weight



10-14

C. Image Formation System

1. Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to fix the left/right shielding plate in place.2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to fix the motor unit in place at the front.

Figure 10-216

3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move it in the direction shown in Figure 10-217;then, fix it temporarily.

Figure 10-217

4) Free a length of about 5 cm from a 0.1mm-dia. charging wire reel, and form a loopof about 2 mm in diameter.

Reference:When forming a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and twist thehex key three to four times; then, twist the charging wire.

Screw

Screws



10-15

5) Cut the twisted wire (excess wire) by a nipper.6) Hook the loop on stud A shown in Figure 10-218.7) When you have routed the wire for 31 runs, lead it through section B, give it a half

turn, and put it between the washer and the motor unit; then, wind it about once(clockwise) around the mounting screw, and tighten the mounting screw.

Figure 10-218

8) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.9) Tighten the mounting screw you loosened in step 3).

Keep tightening the screw until the tension of the grid wire is even.Pay attention so that the charging assembly is not deformed; try to tighten themounting screw (front) on the left/right shielding plate as early as possible.

Stud A

Screw



10-16



10-17

2. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Table 10-201

Reference:The height (position) of the primary and transfer/separation charging wire may beadjusted by turning the screw behind the charging assembly. A full turn of the screwchanges the position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.

Charging assembly

Primary

Pre-transfer

Transfer

Separation

Height of charging wire

A

B

C

D

7.5+1.5 -0mm

7.5+1.5 -0mm

9.5+1.0 -0mm

10.2–0.5mm

A:16.2–0.5mm B:14.9–0.5mm

A B

Range

±1mm

No adjustingmechanism

±2mm

±2mm

3. Adjusting the Blank Exposure Lamp1) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard.2) Select A4.3) Make a copy, and check to make sure that the left/right registration is correct.4) Make a copy in Direct.5) Check the image, and measure the non-image width shown in Figure 10-219.

(with standard frame erasing ON)

Table 10-202

Figure 10-219

6) If the non-image width is not as specified, turn the adjusting screw to adjust theposition of the blank exposure lamp assembly.

Figure 10-220

Adjusting screw

02

4

68

12

10

02

3

68

12

10

W1 W1



10-18

Paper size

All paper sizes

Left/right non-image width

2.75±2.5mm

4. Position of the Roller Electrode

Figure 10-221

5. Position of the Side Seal in the Cleaning Assembly

Be sure that the side seal does not extend inside the cleaner housing.

Figure 10-222

6. Cleaning the Cleaner Side ScraperPerform the following when replacing the side scraper and, thereafter, for every

500,000 copies made.1) Remove the cleaning blade.2) Remove paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (between the magnet roller

and the toner guide roller; A) with tweezers.

Ref

eren

ce a

ttach

men

t

Side seal

Roller electrode

Scraper



10-19

3) Remove the coating of toner from the surface of the magnet roller. (Use a sheet ofcopy paper shaping it like the letter U.)

Figure 10-223

Figure 10-224

4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing from the front).5) If a coating of toner develops again where toner was removed in step 3), repeat

steps 3) through 5).

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (front)Magnet roller

Remove waste toner.

(front)

30~

40m

m

A

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (rear)

Magnet roller

Remove waste toner.

(rear)

30~

40m

mA



10-20

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System

1. Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller (cassette/deck)Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The front and rear pick-up rollers are not interchangeable.• The collar of the front pick-up roller is gold.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar(gold) are toward the front of the machine.

Figure 10-225

• The collar of the rear pick-up roller is silver. When installing the pick-up roller r tothe pick-up assembly, make sure that the round marking t on the collar (silver) istoward the rear of the machine.

Figure 10-225a

r

t


Collar (silver) Rear (copier)

q

we

Direction of rotation

Collar (gold)Front (copier)



10-21

2. Orientation of the Separation Roller (cassette/deck)Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller.

Figure 10-226

3. Orientation of the Feeding Roller (cassette/deck)When installing the feeding roller assembly q to the cassette/deck pick-up

assembly, make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front of the machine.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the

marking ‘5’ t is toward the front of the machine.

Figure 10-227

wq

r

5

5

e

t

Front (copier)

Wider groove Narrower groove

(front of copier)

(rear of copier)



10-22

4. Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller (multifeeder)Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The front and rear pick-up rollers are not interchangeable.• The collar of the front pick-up roller is silver.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking w is toward the front of the machine.

q Pick-up rollerw Marking (collar)

Figure 10-228

• The collar of the rear pick-up roller is gold.When installing the pick-up roller e to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the

round marking r on the side of the roller and the round marking t on the collar (gold)are toward the rear of the machine.

e Pick-up rollerr Marking (roller)t Marking (collar)

Figure 10-228a

r

ty


Collar (gold)Copier

q

w


Collar (silver) Front (copier)



10-23

5. Orientation of the Feeding Roller (multifeeder)When installing the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly, make sure

that the belt pulley w and the marking ‘5’ e are toward the front of the machine.

Figure 10-229

6. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller (cassette/deck)If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up operation, change the

position of the pressure spring of the separation roller:• If double feeding occurs, change the position of the spring hook to side B.• If pick-up failure occurs, change the position of the spring hook to side A.

q Feeding roller e Locking leverw Separation roller r Pressure spring

Figure 10-230

q

w

e

r

A

B

q

w

e

5

(front)

5



10-24

7. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller (holding tray)Turn the separation adjusting roller so that the distance between the shafts are 32.7

±0.1 mm.

Figure 10-231

8. Adjusting the Pressure of the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller (multifeeder)When pick-up double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up operation,

adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller.• If double feeding occurs, change the position of the spring hook to side A.• If pick-up failure occurs, change the position of the spring hook to side B.

Figure 10-232

BA

32.7–0.1mm



10-25

9. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (cassette)Make adjustments so that the distance from the bottom of the pick-up unit in each

cassette holder to the bottom end of the bushing of the roller support A is 36 ±0.5 mmwhen the plunger of the pick-up releasing roller is drawn as shown.

Figure 10-233

10. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (deck)Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the distance from the center of the hole A

in the solenoid to the left end of the right solenoid arm is 57.2 ±0.5 mm as shown inFigure 10-234.

Figure 10-234

A57.2–0.5mm

36–0

.5A

q



10-26

11. Adjusting the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (multifeeder)Make adjustments by sliding the solenoid in the direction of A so that the distance

between the shutter q and the shutter plate w is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the solenoid ispulled.

Figure 10-235

Figure 10-235a

12. Routing the Timing Belt for the Multifeeder Assembly Side GuideButt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open state).Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and install the timing belt to the pulley.

Figure 10-236

Pulley

Timing belt

Rack plate PulleySection A

B

Slide volume

q w

0.4–

0.2m

m

0.4–

0.2m

m

A



10-27

13. Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Paper Deflecting Drive SolenoidTemporarily fix the delivery paper deflecting plate drive solenoid with a screw; then,

push down the lever q in the direction of A to push in the delivery paper deflecting platedrive solenoid w in the direction of B, and tighten the mounting screw e.

Figure 10-237

14. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive SolenoidInstall the solenoid so that its stroke is 5.6 ±0.3 mm, i.e., between the rubber silencer

and the end of the solenoid.

Figure 10-238

5.6–0.3mm

q we

B

A



10-28

15. Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide AssemblyMark the position of the side guide plate assembly with a scriber for installation later.

Figure 10-239

16. Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide AssemblyMark the position of the paper jogging guide assembly with a scriber for installation

later.

Figure 10-240



10-29

17. Installing the Timing Belt for the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging GuidePlateButt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state).Install the timing belt on the pulley.

Figure 10-241

18. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging SolenoidInstall the solenoid so that the stroke is 1.5 ±0.3 mm, i.e., between the rubber

silencer and the end of the solenoid.

Figure 10-242

1.5–0.3mm

A



10-30

19. Installing the Drive BeltInstall the drive belt on the gears and rollers as follows:

Figure 10-243

Caution:When attaching the holding tray drive belt, attach it on the pulley so that it is towardthe front (inside when viewed from the rear) while the pick-up drive belt is towardthe rear (outside when viewed from the rear).

Registration feedingdrive belt

Drum drive beltMain motor

Fixing/waste tonerdrive belt

Pick-up motor Holding tray drive belt

Pick-up drive belt



10-31

E. Fixing System

1. Points to Note When Handling the Fixing Heatera. Do not touch the heater surface.b. Install both heaters so that the side with the longer heater wire is toward the front.c. In the case of the 120V model, install the main heater (790 W) on the right and the

sub heater (410 W) on the left when viewing from the front of the fixing assembly.In the case of the 220/240V model, install the main heater (1200 W) on the right side.

d. Use the faston on the right for the main heater and that at the top for the sub heaterfor heater connection at the rear.

2. Position of the Fixing Assembly Paper GuideKeep the following in mind when working in the field:

a. See Figure 10-244 for the position of the guide.b. The height of the lower guide is when the solenoid (SL16) is ON.c. Make sure that the difference in height of the guide between front and rear is 0.5 mm

or less.d. To adjust the height of the guide, loosen the fixing screw on the height adjusting

support plate.e. Make checks by removing the lower roller.

Height of the Fixing Inlet Guide(dimensions refer to the center of the guide)

Difference in Height between Front and Rear

Figure 10-244

(front)Inlet guide

a b

a

b

(rear)

Standard unit base plate

a-b 0.5mm

Inlet guide

(lower roller)

(upper roller)

59.7mm+/-0.162.9mm+/-0.1high position



10-32

Caution:Do not loosen the mounting screw on the paper guide mount; otherwise, the paperguide position must be adjusted. If you have loosened it for some reason, makesure that the original position is maintained with reference to the notches providedon the fixing assembly.

3. Adjusting the Pressure of the Lower Roller (nip)The nip width must be as indicated in Table 10-203. Otherwise, make adjustments

by turning the pressure adjusting nut.

Figure 10-245

Paper feeding direction

c

a

A3

pape

r

Center of paper

b



10-33

Note:a and c represent points 10 mm from either side.

Table 10-203a. Measuring the Nip

Wait for 15 min after the copier has completed its warm-up period, make 20 A4copies, and measure the nip.

1) Select A3.2) Open the copyboard cover.3) Select ‘NIP’ in service mode ( ).4) Press the ] user mode key.

The copier will pick up A3 copy paper and become ready for measurement as shownin Figure 10-245.

Reference:The paper will stop between fixing rollers halfway and then will be deliveredautomatically after about 20 sec.

5) Measure the nip.

4. Adjusting the Fixing ClutchIf you have replaced any of the component parts shown below, adjust the gap

between the 41T gear q and the control ring w so that it is 0.1 to 0.3 mm (equivalent offour sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) with a set screw e.

Figure 10-246

qw

e

]4]



10-34

Dimension

b

|a-c|

Measured when both upperand lower rollers have beenheated sufficiently.

7.3±0.5mm

0.5mm or less

F. Electrical System

1. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB1) Install a new DC controller PCB.2) Press the service mode switch over the cover with a clip.3) Select RAM_INIT:0 ← (]: START) in service mode ( ).4) Press the ] user mode key.5) Execute AE adjustment.6) Enter the values recorded on the label attached behind the front door.7) Enter the appropriate settings for the user in service mode ( ).8) Press the Reset key twice.

2. Checking the Surface Potential Control System

a. OutlineIf image faults are noted, you must first find out whether the problem is in the latent

image formation block including the photosensitive drum and the potential controlsystem or it is in the developing/transfer mechanism.

To do so, it is important to check to see whether the surface potential is optimum.You can check the surface potential in service mode.

b. Disabling the Auto Control MechanismYou may disable the auto control mechanism as a way to find out whether the corona

current control, lamp intensity control, or developing bias control mechanism is faulty(non-auto control mode).

You may also use non-auto control mode as a tentative remedy for a fault in the autocontrol mechanism. In non-auto control mode, all outputs are fixed to their appropriatevalues.q Steps

1) Select ‘PO_CONT’ in service mode ( ).2) Check to make sure that the indication on the message display is as follows:

NIP : 0 ← (] : START)

PO_CONT : 0 ← (] : START)

Changes to ‘1’.

3) Press the ] user mode key. (non-auto control mode selected)

NIP : 0 ← (] : START)

PO_CONT : 1 ← (] : START)

4) Press the Reset key twice.

]4]

]5]

]4]



10-35

Caution:In non-auto control mode, all values for corona current control, lamp intensitycontrol, and developing bias control are set to their respective default values.

w Using Non-Auto Control ModeWhen image faults are noted, you may use non-auto control mode to find out

weather the cause is on the input side or the output side of the microprocessor on theDC controller PCB.

If the images are corrected in non-auto control mode, the cause is on the input side,i.e., potential measuring unit or the DC controller PCB.

c. Zero-Level CheckYou may make use of a zero-level check to decide whether the surface potential

control circuit is normal or faulty.

Reference:The term zero-level check refers to a check made to find out if the microprocessorrecognizes 0 V when the drum surface potential is 0 V.

This way, you can decide whether the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB isnormal or faulty.

There are two types of zero-level checks: in method 1, the level shift circuit of the DCcontroller PCB is checked and in method 2, the potential measurement circuit:q Method 11) Turn OFF the power switch.2) Short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PBC. Disconnect J103.3) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly, and turn ON the power

switch.4) Start service mode ( ), and check if the indication of address PC023

(hexadecimal analog value) is between ‘0003’ and ‘001B’ during initial rotation.

If it is not between ‘003’ and ‘001B’, the DC controller PCB may be faulty.

5) Turn OFF the power switch, and remove the door switch actuator.6) Remove the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB.7) Connect the connector to J103 on the DC controller PCB.8) Turn ON the power switch.

]2]



10-36

w Method 21) Turn OFF the power switch.2) Remove the blank exposure lamp assembly.3) Connect the connector of the potential sensor.4) Attach the potential sensor check electrode (FY9-3012) to the potential sensor.

Figure 10-247

Caution:When attaching the check electrode to the potential sensor, take care so that itsmagnet will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover.

Figure 10-248

Caution:Be sure to keep the clip far away from the sensor window so that it will never comeinto contact with the sensor cover.

Cover



10-37

5) Connect the cable for the potential sensor check electrode to J-1 on the potentialmeasurement PCB.

6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly.7) Turn ON the power switch.

Caution:Do not touch the potential sensor assembly once you have turned ON the powerswitch.

8) Start service mode ( ), and check to make sure that the indication of addressP023 (hexadecimal analog value) is between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’ during initialrotation.

Reference:1. If the value is within the range in method 1 but not in method 2, the sensor may

be soiled or the potential measuring unit may be faulty.2. If the value is within the range in both method 1 and method 2, the operations

throughout the signal paths from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessoron the DC controller PCB are likely to be normal.

9) Turn OFF the power switch.10) Remove the potential sensor check electrode.11) Install the blank exposure lamp assembly.12) Turn ON the power switch.

]2]



10-38

3. Checking the Potential Control System


Short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB with a jumper wire. Disconnect J103.

Start non-potential control mode (PO.CONT ’1’; ).

Turn OFF the power switch.

Remove the jumper wire used to short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB. Connect J103.

Check to make sure that the potential measurement PCB is supplied with power, and replace the potential measurement unit.

Turn OFF the power switch.


Start non-potential control.( ) PO.CONT ’1’

Measure the voltage between J114-A6 (+) and J114-A13 (—) on the DC controller PCB during copying. (STEP A)

Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage. Try changing the value of ’FUZZY’ in service mode ( ).Try replacing the copy paper.

Select ’TC’ (transfer charging assembly current) in service mode ( ).Convert the value (unit: A) indicated during copying into its

equivalent control voltage by referring to 48 "Potential Control Conversion Table."

Replace the DC control PCB.

Select the ON voltage limiter for the scanning lamp. ( ) LIMT.

Start potential control. ( ) PO.CONT ’0’


Clean the standard white plate, mirror, lens, and dust-proofing glass; then, turn OFF and then ON the power switch.

Start non-potential control .( ) PO.CONT ’1’

START

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

(transfer output)(zero-level check)

END.


Start service mode( ).Is the indication of address

P023 between ’0003’ and ’001B’ during initial rotation?

Is the difference between

the actual measurement taken for STEP A and the value under

’TC’ in service mode within –10%?

Replace the DC controller PCB.NO

<Checking the Transfer Output> <Checking the Scanning Lamp Output>

Is the problem corrected?

Is the toner image on the photosensitive drum

before transfer normal?

A

Replace the high-voltage transformer. Is the problem corrected?

Is ’1’ indicated under ’LIMIT’?

Is ’1’ indicated under ’LIMIT’?

YES

YES

Measure the voltage between J111-B7 (+) and J111-B8 (—) on the DC controller PCB during

B] 4 ]

2 ]]

] 1 ]

] 4 ]

] 5 ]

] 4 ]

] 4 ]

] 4 ]


Start potential control ( ; PO.CONT’0’).

Measure the voltage between J114-A2 and J114-A13 on the DC controller PCB during copying. (STEP C)

Check the developing assembly for leakage.

Select ’BIAS’ (developing bias DC value) in service mode ( ). Convert the value (unit: V) indicated during copying into its equivalent control voltage by referring to 48 "Potential Control Conversion Table."

Measure the voltage between J114-A3 and J114-A13 on the DC controller PCB.

Is the difference between the actual

measurement of STEP C and ’BIAS’ in service mode

within –10%?

YES

YES

(developing bias DC component)

(developing bias AC component)

Select the primary power supply limit indication ( ; PLMT).

Is ’1’ indicated under ’PLMY’?

Replace the photosensitive drum.

Start non-potential control ( ; PO.CONT ’1’).

END.

Replace the DC controller PCB.

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

Measure the voltage between J114-A5 and J114-A13 on the DC controller PCB during copying.

(primary output)

Is the difference between the actual measurement

of STEP B and ’PC’ in service mode within –10%?


A



Is the voltage about 5 V when the scanner

is moving forward?Replace the high-voltage transformer. Is the problem corrected?

<Checking the Primary Output> <Checking the Developing Bias Output>

BSelect ’GLEAM-5’ in service mode ( ; Direct mode).

YES

Does the indication change between 0.5 and 4 V according to the changes in

’GLEAM-5’ during copying?


Check the lamp regulator or the scanning lamp.

S

SEnter a value (minimum/maximum; within the specified range), and press the ] user mode key; then, measure the voltage during copying.Ex.

GLEAM-5 Reading 34 Û 2.8V 139 Û 3.9V

Select ’PC’ (primary charging assembly current value) in service mode ( ). Convert the value (unit: A) indicated during copying into its equivalent control voltage by referring to 48 "Potential Control Conversion Table."

] 3 ]

] 1 ]

] 1 ]

] 1 ]

] 1 ]

] 4 ]

4. Potential Control System Conversion Table



10-41

Control (V)

3.00

3.05

3.10

3.15

3.20

3.25

3.30

3.35

3.40

3.45

3.50

3.55

3.60

3.65

3.70

3.75

3.80

3.85

3.90

3.95

4.00

4.05

4.10

4.15

4.20

4.25

4.30

4.35

4.40

4.45

4.50

4.55

4.60

Primary (µA)

1,400

1,391

1,382

1,373

1,365

1,356

1,347

1,338

1,330

1,321

1,312

1,303

1,295

1,286

1,277

1,268

1,260

1,251

1,242

1,233

1,225

1,216

1,207

1,198

1,190

1,181

1,172

1,163

1,155

1,146

1,137

1,128

1,120

Developing bias (V)

0

3

7

11

15

18

22

26

30

33

37

41

45

48

52

56

60

63

67

71

75

78

82

86

90

93

97

101

105

108

112

116

120

Pre-transfer (µA)

0

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-16

-18

-20

-22

-24

-26

-28

-30

-33

-35

-37

-39

-41

-43

-45

-47

-49

-51

-53

-55

-57

-59

-61

-63

-66

Transfer (µA)

440

437

434

431

429

426

423

420

418

415

412

409

407

404

401

398

396

393

390

387

385

382

379

376

374

371

368

365

363

360

357

354

352

Separation (µA)

100

96

92

88

85

81

77

73

70

66

62

58

55

51

47

43

40

36

32

28

25

21

17

13

10

6

2

-1

-5

-8

-12

-16

-20



10-42

Control (V)

4.65

4.70

4.75

4.80

4.85

4.90

4.95

5.00

5.05

5.10

5.15

5.20

5.25

5.30

5.35

5.40

5.45

5.50

5.55

5.60

5.65

5.70

5.75

5.80

5.85

5.90

5.95

6.00

6.05

6.10

6.15

6.20

6.25

6.30

Primary (µA)

1,111

1,102

1,093

1,085

1,076

1,067

1,058

1,050

1,041

1,032

1,023

1,015

1,006

997

938

980

971

962

953

945

936

927

918

910

901

892

883

875

866

857

848

840

831

822

Developing bias (V)

123

127

131

135

138

142

146

150

153

157

161

165

168

172

176

180

183

187

191

195

198

202

206

210

213

217

221

225

228

232

236

240

243

247

Pre-transfer (µA)

-68

-70

-72

-74

-76

-78

-80

-82

-84

-86

-88

-90

-92

-94

-96

-99

-101

-103

-105

-107

-109

-111

-113

-115

-117

-119

-121

-123

-125

-127

-129

-132

-134

-136

Transfer (µA)

349

346

343

341

338

335

332

330

327

324

321

319

316

313

310

308

305

302

299

297

294

291

288

286

283

280

277

275

272

269

266

264

261

258

Separation (µA)

-23

-27

-31

-35

-38

-42

-46

-50

-53

-57

-61

-65

-68

-72

-76

-80

-83

-87

-91

-95

-98

-102

-106

-110

-113

-117

-121

-125

-128

-132

-136

-140

-143

-147



10-43

Control (V)

6.35

6.40

6.45

6.50

6.55

6.60

6.65

6.70

6.75

6.80

6.85

6.90

6.95

7.00

7.05

7.10

7.15

7.20

7.25

7.30

7.35

7.40

7.45

7.50

7.55

7.60

7.65

7.70

7.75

7.80

7.85

7.90

7.95

8.00

Primary (µA)

813

805

796

787

778

770

761

752

743

735

726

717

708

700

691

682

673

665

656

647

638

630

621

612

603

595

586

577

568

560

551

542

533

525

Developing bias (V)

251

255

258

262

266

270

273

277

281

285

288

292

296

300

303

307

311

315

318

322

326

330

333

337

341

345

348

352

356

360

363

367

371

375

Pre-transfer (µA)

-138

-140

-142

-144

-146

-148

-150

-152

-154

-156

-158

-160

-162

-165

-167

-169

-171

-173

-175

-177

-179

181

-183

-185

-187

-189

-191

-193

-195

-198

-200

-202

-204

-206

Transfer (µA)

255

253

250

247

244

242

239

236

233

231

228

225

222

220

217

214

211

209

206

203

200

198

195

192

189

187

184

181

178

176

173

170

167

165

Separation (µA)

-151

-155

-158

-162

-166

-170

-173

-177

-181

-185

-188

-192

-196

-200

-203

-207

-211

-215

-218

-222

-226

-230

-233

-237

-240

-245

-248

-252

-256

-260

-263

-267

-271

-275



10-44

Control (V)

8.05

8.10

8.15

8.20

8.25

8.30

8.35

8.40

8.45

8.50

8.55

8.60

8.65

8.70

8.75

8.80

8.85

8.90

8.95

9.00

9.05

9.10

9.15

9.20

9.25

9.30

9.35

9.40

9.45

9.50

9.55

9.60

9.65

9.70

Primary (µA)

516

507

498

490

481

472

463

455

446

437

428

420

411

402

393

385

376

367

358

350

341

332

323

315

306

297

288

280

271

262

253

245

236

227

Developing bias (V)

378

382

386

390

393

397

401

405

408

412

416

420

423

427

431

435

438

442

446

450

453

457

461

465

468

472

476

480

483

487

491

495

498

502

Pre-transfer (µA)

-208

-210

-212

-214

-216

-218

-220

-222

-224

-226

-228

-231

-233

-235

-237

-239

-2341

-243

-245

-247

-249

-251

-253

-255

-257

-259

-261

-264

-266

-268

-270

-272

-274

-276

Transfer (µA)

162

159

156

154

151

148

145

143

140

137

134

132

129

126

123

121

118

115

112

110

107

104

101

99

96

93

90

88

85

82

79

77

74

71

Separation (µA)

-278

-282

-286

-290

-293

-297

-301

-305

-308

-312

-316

-320

-323

-327

-331

-335

-338

-342

-346

-350

-353

-357

-361

-365

-368

-372

-376

-380

-383

-387

-391

-395

-398

-402



10-45

Control (V)

9.75

9.80

9.85

9.90

9.95

10.00

10.05

10.10

10.15

10.20

10.25

10.30

10.35

10.40

10.45

10.50

10.55

10.60

10.65

10.70

10.75

10.80

10.85

10.90

10.95

11.00

Primary (µA)

218

210

201

192

183

175

166

157

148

140

131

122

113

105

96

87

78

70

61

52

43

35

26

17

8

0

Developing bias (V)

506

510

513

517

521

525

528

532

536

540

543

547

551

555

558

562

566

570

573

577

581

585

588

592

596

600

Pre-transfer (µA)

-278

-280

-282

-284

-286

-288

-290

-292

-294

-97

-299

-301

-303

-305

-307

-309

-311

-313

-315

-317

-319

-321

-323

-325

327

-330

Transfer (µA)

68

66

63

60

57

55

52

49

46

44

41

38

35

33

30

27

24

22

19

16

13

11

8

5

2

0

Separation (µA)

-406

-410

-413

-417

-421

-425

-428

-432

-436

-440

-443

-447

-451

-455

-458

-462

-466

-470

-473

-477

-481

-485

-488

-492

-496

-500

5. Checking the Environment Sensor1) Start service mode ( ), and check the temperature/humidity on the control

panel display; then, record the values.Data A‘RTMP’ °C ......Data A1‘RHUM’ % ......Data A2

2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn OFF the power switch.3) Remove the environment sensor, and insert the environment sensor tool (FY9-3014)

in its place.4) Turn ON the power switch, and leave the machine alone for 5 min.5) Start service mode ( ), and check the temperature/humidity on the control

panel display; record the values.Data B‘RTMP’ °C ......Data B1‘RHUM’ % ......Data B2

6) Compare data A and data B.• difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 ±5• difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 ±20

If the difference between data A and data B is outside the specification, replace theenvironment sensor.

7) Press the Reset key twice, and turn OFF the power switch.8) Remove the environment sensor tool, and install the environment sensor.9) Install all covers.

Caution:The environment sensor tool (FY9-3014) is adjusted at the factory to high precision;keep it in an airtight case with a drying agent.

6. Checking the PhotointerruptersThe copier’s photointerrupters may be checked either using a conventional meter or

service mode.

a. Using a Meter1) Set the tester’s range to 30VDC.2) Connect the tester’s - probe to GND on the DC controller PCB.3) Connect the tester’s + probe to the terminal (DC controller PCB) shown.4) Make a check as instructed.

b. Using Service Mode1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch

assembly.2) Press the service switch with a clip over the cover.3) Press , , and in sequence on the control panel.4) Using the keypad on the control panel, enter the address of the appropriate

photointerrupter, and check the indication.

Caution:The machine’s motor can start to operate in response to the changes in the sensorstate; take adequate care.

]2]

]1]

]1]



10-46



10-47

* Or, tape the detecting lever in place, and push in the feeding unit, holding tray, andholding tray feeding assmebly inside the machine.

Name

PS1

Scanner homeposition sensor(SCHP)

PS3

Scanner originalleading edge 1sensor (SCDP1)

PS5

Copyboard coveropen/closedsensor (CBCC)

PS6

Lens X homeposition sensor(LXHP)

PS7

Lens Y homeposition sensor(LYHP)

PS8

Holding trayfeeding assembly1 paper sensor(PS8D)

+ probe

Address

J111A-2

PC007-03

J111A-5

PC107-6

J112A-4

PC007-02

J110A-8

PC102-02

J110B-2

PC102-03

J119A-4

PC002-04

Move thescanner byhand instandby.

Move thescanner byhand instandby.

Move thecopyboardcover byhand instandby.

Put paperover thelens Yhome posi-tion sensorin standby.

Put paperover thelens Yhome posi-tion sensorin standby.

Put paper inthe detect-ing leverassmbly ofPS8 instandby.*

Checks

The light-blockingplate is at PS1.

The light-blockingplate is not at PS1.



The copyboardcover is closed.

The copyboardcover is opened.





Paper is present.

Paper is notpresent.

Displayindication

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V

0V

5V

5V

0V



10-48


** Or, put paper over the sensor to block its photocell.

Name

PS9

Holding trayfeeding assmbly2 paper sensor(PS9D)

PS10

External deliverysensor (EXDPD)

PS11

Fixing cleaningbelt lengthsensor (CBOP)

PS12

Internal deliverysensor (IDPD)

PS14

Holding trayregistrationsensor (PS14D)

PS15

Holding tray inletpaper sensor(PS15D)

+ probe

Address

J113B-12

PC002-03

J108B-7

PC005-04

J108A-13

PC005-05

J108B-12

PC005-02

J113A-3

PC005-07

J113B-10

PC005-06


Put paper inthe detect-ing leverassembly ofPS10 instandby.*

Put paper inthe detect-ing leverassembly ofPS11 instandby.**




Checks

Paper is present.


Paper is present.


Paper is present.


Paper is present.


Paper is present.


Paper is present.


Displayindication

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V

5V

0V

5V

0V



10-49


Name

PS17

Holding tray pick-up sensor(PS17D)

PS19

Holding tray re-circulating barhome positionsensor (HPLPD)

PS20

Holding tray Yhome positionsensor (HTYHP)

PS21

Holding tray Xhome positionsensor (HTXHP)

PS22

Multifeeder papersensor (MFS)

PS23

Registrationpaper sensor(RGPD)

PS24

Pick-up verticalpath 0 sensor(PS24D)

+ probe

Address

J113B-11

PC005-09

J113B-6

PC005-10

J113A-10

PC100-3

J113B-1

PC100-2

J115B-7

PC002-05

J108A-7

PC002-02

J116B-7

PC002-00



Move therear parti-tion byhand instandby.

Move theside guideby hand instandby.

Put paperinto thedetectingleverassembly ofPS22 instandby.

Move thedetectinglever byhand instandby.


Checks

Paper is present.


Copy paper ispresent.

Copy paper is notpresent.


The light-blockingplate is not atPS20.



Paper is present.






Displayindication

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



10-50

Name

PS25

Casette 3 lifterposition sensor(C3LTP)

PS26

Casette 3 papersensor (C3PD)

PS27


PS28

Casette 4 lifterposition sensor(C4LTP)

PS29

Casette 4 papersensor (C4PD)

PS30


PS31

Deck lifterposition sensor(RDLTP)

PS32

Deck papersensor (RDPD)

+ probe

Address

J117A-4

PC008-08

J117A-7

PC008-06

J117B-4

PC008-04

J130A-4

PC008-09

J130B-7

PC008-07

J130B-4

PC008-05

J116A-4

PC007-14

J116A-7

PC007-10









Checks

















Displayindication

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



10-51

Name

PS33


PS36


PS37

Deck limitersensor (RDEL)

PS38

Deckopen/closedsensor (RDEOP)

PS41

Upper right doorsensor (RUPDOP)

PS42

Lower right doorsensor (RLWDOP)

PS46

Multifeeder doorsensor (MFDC)





Move thedetectinglever byhand instandby.**

Move thedetectinglever byhand instandby.**


Checks















Displayindication

1

0

1

0

—

—

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



+ probe

Address

J119A-7

PC007-12

J121B-10

PC007-13

J116B-13

—

J116B-10

PC007-04

J119B-4

PC007-00

J119B-7

PC007-01

J105A-9

PC005-03



10-52

Name

PS47

Fixing assemblyoutlet papersensor (FXDEL)

PS50

(cassette 3open/closed sensor)

PS51

(cassette 4open/closed sensor)

PS52

(claw jam sensor)

PS53

(fixing/feedingunit sensor)

+ probe

Address

J108B-4

PC005-08

J117B-7

PC009-5

J130B-7

PC009-6

J108A-19

PC009-1

J108A-2

PC005-1

Move thedetectinglever byhand instandby.*

Hold thegrip of thecassette 3,and moveit.

Hold thegrip of thecassette 4,and moveit.

Move thedetectinglever byhand instandby*.

Move thereleasinglever of thefixing/feeding unit byhand instandby.

Checks



When the light-blocking plate is atPS50

When the light-blocking plate isnot at PS50

When the light-blocking plate is atPS51

When he light-blocking plate isnot at PS51




The light-blockingplate is not at PS53(unit set).

Displayindication

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

Voltagereading

on meter

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V



7. Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Value ( ]]4]])Perform this under the following conditions:

• If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR of the copier (including themultifeeder).

• If you have adjusted the front/rear registration for the cassette.For the cassettes 1 through 5, you must register values for two types (STMTR/A4R)

for each cassette; for the multifeeder, you must register values for three types (A6R,A4R, A4).

a. Cassettes 3 and 4The following uses the cassette 3 as an example.

1) Select the 8th screen in service mode (]4]).2) Slide out the cassette 3, and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to

‘STMTR’, and set the cassette to the copier.3) Press ‘C3_STMTR’ on the control panel display.4) Press ‘]’ key.

• Check to make sure that the value XXX under ‘C3_STMTR:XXX’ is ‘(XXX)’.5) Slide out the cassette 1, and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette to

‘A4R’, and set the cassette in the copier.6) Press ‘C3_A4R’ on the control panel screen.7) Press ‘]’ key.

• Check to make sure that the value YYY under ‘C3_A4R:YYY’ is ‘(YYY)’.

b. MultifeederPerform the steps shown for the cassettes 3 and 4; however, in the case of the

multifeeder, you must perform them for A6R (105mm width), A4R, and A4.

Figure 10-249

A6R (105mm)

PaperGuide

Guide



10-53



10-54

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS

A. Making Initial Checks

1. Site of Installationa. Make sure that the power supply voltage is as rated (±10%; the power plug must

remain connected at night).b. Make sure that the site is not subject to high temperature/humidity (near water

faucets, water boilers, humidifiers; avoid areas near refrigerators or sources of fireand areas subject to dust).

c. Avoid areas subject to ammonium gas.d. Avoid areas subject to direct rays of the sun.

As necessary, provide curtains.e. Make sure that the room is well ventilated.f. Make sure that the floor is level so that the machine will remain level.g. Make sure that the machine will remain powered at night as well.

Check the site environment to see if it fits the above conditions.

2. Checking the OriginalsTry to identify whether the problem is due to the originals used or to the machine.

a. The copy density level is best adjusted to 5 ±1 (scale).b. Originals with a reddish background can generate copies with poor contrast; e.g., red

sheets, red slips.c. Checking the Density of Originals

Reference:Originals which are diazo copies or which have a high transparency tend togenerate copies which can be mistaken for “foggy” copies. Originals prepared inlight pencil tend to generate copies which can be mistaken for “light” copies.

3. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White PlateCheck the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt. If

soiled, clean them with a solution of mild detergent or alcohol. If scratches are found,replace them.

4. Charging Assembliesa. Check each charging assembly for dirt and charging wires for faults (scratches).b. Clean the charging wire and the shielding plate of each charging assembly. (If dirt

still exists, replace the part.)c. Check the height of each charging wire.d. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is properly installed.e. Check the charging wire for rusting.f. Check the anti-vibration rubber (charging assembly) for displacement. (This does not

apply to the primary charging assembly.)



10-55

5. Checking the Developing Assemblya. Check to make sure that the rolls at both ends of the developing assembly are in

contact with the drum.b. Check to make sure that there is an even coating of toner on the surface of the

developing cylinder.

6. Checking the Papera. Check to see if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon.b. Check to see if the paper is damp. Make copies using paper fresh out of package.

7. Checking the Periodically Replaced PartsCheck the parts against the scheduled servicing chart and the periodically replaced

parts table; as necessary, replace them.

8. OthersBringing a machine from a cold to warm place in winter can cause condensation

inside the machine, leading to various problems.

Reference:a.Condensation on the scanning system (glass, mirror, lens) leads to light images.b.Condensation in the charging system leads to leakage.c. Condensation on the pick-up or the feeding guide plate leads to feeding

problems.If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part or leave the machine powered andalone for 60 min.

Note:If the density is uneven (difference between the separation side and the rear), theimage is too light, or the copy is foggy, try the “Image Adjustment Basic Procedure”first.



10-56



10-57

B. Image Fault Samples

Not available



10-58



10-59

C. Troubleshooting Image Faults

1. The copy is too light. (halftone area only)

Cause

Scanner

Developingassembly

Developingassembly

Lamp regulator

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Perform the Image AdjustmentBasic Procedure. Is the problemcorrected?

Clean the standard white plate,mirror, lens, and dust-proofingglass. Is the problem corrected?

Are the rolls on the developingassembly in firm contact with thedrum during copying?

Is the coating of toner on thedeveloping cylinder even?

Replace the lamp regulator. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.

End.

Check the developingassembly locking lever.

Check the developingassembly.

End.

Replace the DCcontroller PCB.

2. The copy is too light. (solid black also)3. The copy is too light. (overall, considerably)

Cont’d



10-60

Cause

Transfer/separationassembly

Copy paper

Checks


Turn OFF the power switch in themiddle of copying, and open thefront door. Is the toner image onthe surface of the photosensitivedrum before transfer more or lessnormal?

Is the charging wire of the transfercharging assembly properlyhooked and is its position correct?

Is the transfer/separation chargingassembly installed properly?

Change the setting under 'FUZZY'in service mode ( ) to '1',and make copies. Is the problemcorrected?

Try fresh copy paper. Is the imagedarker?

]5]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

Go to step 7.

1. Hook the chargingwire properly.

2. Adjust the height ofthe charging wire.

1. Clean the chargingwire.

2. Install the chargingassembly properly.

End. (The problem is due tothe environment.)

Return the setting under'FUZZY' to '0'; and go tothe next step.

1. The paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct methodof storage.

2. Advise the user thatusing paper notrecommended byCanon may not bringthe best results.

Tran

sfer



10-61

Cause

Transferlower guide,Varistor

DC controllerPCB

Developingassembly

Pre-transferchargingassembly

Potentialcontrol,Photosensitivedrum

Developing bias

Checks

Measure the resistance betweenthe transfer lower guide and metalportion of the feeding assemblywith a meter. Is it 0Ω?

Is the developing assemblyinstalled properly? Are thedeveloping rolls of the developingassembly in firm contact with thephotosensitive drum?

Is the pre-transfer charging wirehooked properly and is its heightnormal?

Is the pre-transfer chargingassembly inserted properly?

Turn OFF and then ON the powerswitch. Check VD and VL1 inservice mode ( ). Are thesettings of VDM and VL1Midentical with the target values(VDT, VL1T) ±10 V?

]1]

Step

7

8

9

10

11

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

1. Check the transferguide if it is in contactwith a metal portion(side plate of thefeeding assembly, forexample).

2. Replace the varistor.

Check the high-voltagetransformer (HVT) andthe DC controller PCB.

Check the developingassembly locking unit.

1. Hook the chargingwire properly.

2. Adjust the height ofthe charging wire.

1. Clean the chargingwire.

2. Install the chargingassembly properly.

Check the potentialcontrol system; if normal,replace the photosensi-tive drum.

Check the developingbias control system.

Tran

sfer

Dev

elop

men

t

4. The copy has uneven density. (darker at front)5. The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front)



10-62

Cause

Primarycharging wire

Developingassembly

Scanner

Pre-exposurelamp

Developingassembly

Chargingassembly, Copypaper

Checks


Are the developing rolls of thedeveloping assembly in firm con-tact with the photosensitive drum?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side deflectingplate, mirror, lens, dust-proofingglass, and heat-absorbing glass.Is the problem corrected?

Is the pre-exposure lamp ONduring copying?


Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

End.

Check the developingassembly locking unit.

End.

1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp.

2. Replace the DCcontroller PCB.

1. Clean the tip of theblade for thedeveloping assembly.(dry wiping)

2. Clean the surface ofthe developingcylinder.

3. Check the toner insidethe developingassembly to find out ifit is even.

1. Clean all chargingwires once again, andcheck the position ofeach.

2. Try replacing copypaper.

6. The copy is foggy. (overall)



10-63

Cause

LIGHT_5

Scanner

Cleaningassembly

Pre-exposurelamp, DCcontroller PC

Developing roll

Developingcylinder

Lamp regulator

Potential controlsystem

DC controllerPCB.

High-voltagetransformer,Developingassembly

Checks


Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side reflectingplate, mirror, lens, dust-proofingglass, and heat-absorbing glass.Is the problem corrected?

Is the cleaning blade installedproperly?

Is the pre-exposure lamp ONduring copying?

Is the developing roll worn?

Is the developing cylinder worn?


Make checks on p. 10-35. Is thepotential sensor normal?

Set the meter range to 30 VDC. Isthe voltage between J114A-2(DCBC) and J114A-13 (GND) onthe DC controller PCB duringcopying between 2 and 11 V?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

End.

Install the cleaning bladecorrectly.

1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp.


Replace the developingroll.

Replace the developingcylinder.

End.



1. Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCBto the high-voltagetransformer; if normal,replace the high-voltage transformer.

2. Check the developingassembly.

7. The copy has vertical fogging.8. The copy has black lines. (vertical, fuzzy, thick)



10-64

Cause

Primary charg-ing assembly

Scanner

Pre-exposurelamp

Developingassembly

Fixing assem-bly, Cleaningassembly

Checks

Clean the primary charging wire,grid wire, and shielding plate. Isthe problem corrected?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side reflectingplate, lens, mirror, dust-proofingglass. Is the problem corrected?

Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Isthe problem corrected?

Is the coating of toner on thedeveloping assembly even?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

End.

End.

Check the edge of theblade for the developingassembly, and clean it.

Check the fixingassembly and thecleaning assembly.

9. The copy has black lines. (vertical, thin)



10-65

Cause

Photosensitivedrum cleaningassembly

Photosensitivedrum

Developingassembly,Exposuresystem

Fixing assembly

Checks

Press the Copy Start key, and turnOFF the power switch while copypaper is in the feeding assembly.Are there black lines on the copybefore it moves through the fixingassembly?

Is there paper trapped on thecleaning blade of the cleaningassembly?

Are there scratches on the edgeof the cleaning blade? (Feel theedge of the cleaning blade forscratches.)

Are there scratches or black linesin the peripheral direction of thephotosensitive drum?

Check the fixing assembly upperroller surface for scratches orblack lines in peripheral direction.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Go to step 5.

Remove the foreign mat-ter, and clean the clean-ing blade and the out-side of the assembly.

Switch the edges. If bothedges have scratches,replace the cleaningblade.

Replace the photosensi-tive drum. If scratchesexist, identify the cause.

Check the developingassembly and the expo-sure system.

1. Replace the upperroller.

2. Check the cleaningbelt take-up mecha-nism.

3. Check the reciprocat-ing mechanism of thethermistor and theseparation claw to seeif it operates normally.

Check the fixing assem-bly inlet assembly fordirt.

10. The copy has white spots. (vertical)11. The copy has white lines. (vertical)

Cont’d



10-66

Cause

Fixing assembly

Primarycharging wire

Developingassembly

Copy paper

Photosensitivedrum

Checks

Press the Copy Start key with thecopyboard cover open, and turnOFF the power switch while thecopy paper is moving through thefixing assembly. Does the copyimage have white spots or whitelines before it goes through thefixing assembly?

Clean the charging wire, grid wire,and shielding plate of the primarycharging assembly. Is the problemcorrected?


Try fresh copy paper. Is theproblem corrected?

Are there scratches in theperipheral direction of thephotosensitive drumcorresponding to image areas?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

1. Clean the inlet assem-bly (upper, lower) ofthe fixing assembly.

2. Check the fixingassembly upper roller.

3. Check the take-upand cleaning mecha-nisms of the cleaningbelt.

4. Clean the separationclaw.

Clean the part thorough-ly with alcohol. If dirt per-sists, replace the charg-ing wire.

Check the blade edge ofthe developing assemblyfor paper lint or the like.

The copy paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct method ofstoring paper.

Investigate the cause ofthe scratches, andreplace the photosensi-tive drum.



10-67

Cause

Transfer/separation chargingassembly, Pre-transfer charg-ing assembly

Blank exposurelamp, DCcontroller PCB

Light fromoutside

Checks

Is the cleaning assemblyseparation claw in contact with thecopy paper while the paper isbeing fed?

Are the blank exposure lampLEDs ON while the scanner ismoving forward for areas of theimage corresponding to whitespots or white lines?

Step

6

7

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

1. Clean the pre-transfercharging assemblyand the transfer/sepa-ration chargingassembly. If the dirtstill exists, replace thecharging wire.

2. Try replacing copypaper.

3. Select 'FUZZY' in ser-vice mode ( ),and change the set-ting to '3'.

Check the wiring fromthe blank exposure lampto the DC controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

Check if the photosensi-tive drum is exposed toexternal light.

]5]

12. The copy has white spots. (horizontal)



10-68

Cause

Developingassembly

Drum

Copy paper

Scanner rail,Scanner cable

Charging wire

Photosensitivedrum

Checks

Is the problem noted at intervalsof about 52 mm?

Is the problem noted at intervalsof about 25 cm?


Is the problem noted at the samelocation on every copy?

Are there scratches on the surfaceof the photosensitive drum?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

1. Clean the developingrolls.

2. Dry wipe the surfaceof the developingcylinder.

3. If scratches are foundon the surface of thedeveloping cylinder,replace thedeveloping cylinder.

1. Clean the drum.2. If scratches are found

on the drum, replacethe drum.

The copy paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct method ofstorage (place, etc.).

1. Check the scanner railfor foreign matter.

2. Adjust the tension ofthe scanner cable.

Clean each chargingassembly.

Replace thephotosensitive drum.

13. The back of the copy is soiled.



10-69

Cause

Developingassembly

Cleaningassembly

Fixing assembly

Deliveryassembly

Checks

Turn OFF the power switch whencopy paper is moving through thefeeding assembly. Is the back ofthe paper soiled at the time?


Are the take-up mechanism andupper roller cleaning mechanismnormal?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

1. Clean the registrationroller.

2. Clean the transferguide.

3. Check the developingassembly for leakageof toner.

1. Clean the feedingassembly.

2. Check the cleaningassembly for leakageof toner.

1. Check the cleaningbelt take-up mecha-nism.

2. Clean the upper andlower rollers.

3. Clean the fixingassembly inlet guide.

Clean the delivery rollerand the separation claw.

14. The copy has fixing faults.



10-70

Cause

Upper roller,Lower roller

Heater (H1, H2)

Lower rollerpressure

Copy paper

Upper fixingroller

Checks

Is the problem vertical?

Does the heater (H1, H2) turn ONas soon as the power is turnedon?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)within standards?

Is the paper of a typerecommended by Canon?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the upper andlower rollers forscratches.

See "The fixing heaterfails to operate."

Adjust the lower rollerpressure.

Try recommendedpaper; if the results aregood, advise the user touse recommendedpaper.

Check the upper rollerfor peeling.

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y

15., 16., 17. The copy has leading edge displacement.



10-71

Cause

Original

Copy paper

Pick-up roller

Leading edgemargin

Registrationclutch,Registrationroller

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the original placed correctly?

Is the paper of a typerecommended by Canon?

Is the leading edge displacementthe same regardless of the sourceof paper (paper deck, cassette)?

Has the pick-up roller reached itslife?

Perform leading edge marginadjustment. Is the problemcorrected?

Set the meter range to 30 VDC.Does the voltage between J108A-4 (+) and J108-A5 (-) on the DCcontroller PCB changemomentarily from 24 to 0 V whilethe scanner is moving forward?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

Place it correctly.

Try recommendedpaper; if the results aregood, advise the user touse recommendedpaper.

If it is the same, go tostep 4.

Check each pick-upsystem.

If wear is noted on thepick-up roller, replace it.

End.

1. Replace the No. 1registration clutch.

2. Check the registrationroller for deformationand wear.


18. The copy has a blurred or fuzzy image.



10-72

Cause

Scanner drivegear

Scanner rail

Photosensitivedrum

Drum drivegear

Developinggear

Cleaningassembly gear

Drum drivesystem

Checks

Do the lengths of the cable woundon the cable pulley overlap whilethe scanner is moving? Or, is thecable too slack or too taut?

Move the No. 1 mirror mountslowly by hand. Does it movesmoothly?

Is the problem noted at intervalsof about 25 cm?


Is the problem noted at intervalsof 6 mm?


Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

1. Route the cable onceagain.

2. If the cable is twistedor frayed, replace it.

Clean the surface of thescanner rail with alcoholsolution; thereafter,apply a small amount oflubricant.

1. Check the drum gear.2. Check the ends of the

drum (in contact withthe developing rolls)for scratches andprotrusions.

Check the drum drivegear.

Check the developingassembly.

Check the cleaningassembly.

Check the drum drivesystem.

19. The copy has horizontal fogging.

20. The copy has poor sharpness.



10-73

Cause

Scanning lamp,Lam regulator

Scanner

Feedingassembly

Checks

Is the problem noted at the samelocation on every copy made inDirect?

Does the scanning lamp flickerwhile the scanner is movingforward?

Make a reduced copy. Is theproblem noted at a differentlocation?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 3

Check the scanninglamp and the lampregulator.

Check the scanner.

Check the feedingassembly.

Cause

Copyboardglass

Mirror position

Scanner

Photosensitivedrum

Lens driveassembly

Checks

Is there oil or the like on thecopyboard glass?

Is the horizontal ratio on copiesmade in Direct within standards?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, mirror, lens, dust-proofing glass. Is the problemcorrected?

Replace the photosensitive drum.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Clean the copyboardglass.

Adjust the distancebetween No. 1 mirrorand No. 2 mirror.

End.

End.

Check the operation ofthe lens drive assembly.

21. The copy is blank.

22. The copy is completely black.



10-74

Cause

Primary charg-ing assembly

Developingassembly

DC controllerPCB

Scanning lamp

Connector

Potential controlsystem

Developing bias

Main motor(M1)

Checks

Is the primary charging assemblyinstalled properly?

Is the charging wire or the gridwire broken?

Is the developing assembly lockedto the drum?

Is the blank exposure lamp OFFwhile the scanner is movingforward?

Is the scanning lamp ON duringcopying?

Are the connectors on each PCBconnected properly?

Is control by the potential sensorperformed properly?

Is the contact of the developingbias secured in place?

•Is half of the first copy blank?

•Is the first copy blank and doesthe second copy have displacedregistration? Or, does the copyjam (stationary)?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Install the primary charg-ing assembly properly.

Install the charging wireor the grid wire onceagain.

Check the developingassembly locking lever.

Check the DC controllerPCB.

See "The scanning lampfails to turn ON."

Connect the connectorsproperly.

Replace the potentialmeasurement unit.

Secure it in place.

Replace the main motor(M1).

Cause Checks

Is the scanning lamp ON duringcopying?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

Action

See "The scanning lampfails to turn ON."

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions

Note:Pay attention to the orientation/location of the spring used to force the detectinglever in place whenever you are installing/removing each sensor.

1. E000



10-75

Cause

Sub thermistor(TH2)

Main thermistor(TH1)

Thermistor

Thermistor

Checks

Turn off and then on the powerswitch. Is '000' indicated for about5 sec and then is the powerswitch turned off automatically?

Execute 'ERROR' in service mode( ) to reset 'E000'.Check that the fixing assembly isinstalled properly.Turn OFF the power switch, anddisconnect and connect the powerplug.Does the fixing roller heater turnON when the power switch isturned ON?

Caution:Take extra care. Repeating thisprocedure causes the fixingtemperature to rise abnormally,damaging the fixing roller andthe separation claw.

Turn OFF the power switch, andwait until the upper fixing roller iscool; then, turn ON the powerswitch. Select the screen showing'FTMP' in service mode ( ).Does the value under 'FTMP'remain the same? (Turn OFF thepower switch after the check.)

Is the thermistor in even contactwith the upper fixing roller?

Clean the contact face of the ther-mistor. Is the problem corrected?

]1]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Check the sub thermistor(TH2).

Replace the DC con-troller PCB or the SSR.

Check the wiring fromJ108A on the DCcontroller PCB to thethermistor (TH1); ifnormal, replace thethermistor (TH1).

Install the thermistorproperly.

End.

Cont’d

2. E001



10-76

Cause

Environment


DC controller

Checks

Does the problem occur onlywhen the power is turned ON forthe first time in the morning?

Replace the thermistor. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

6

7

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

•Advise the user that thesite environment isoutside the standards.

•Advise the user to waituntil the room is warmenough before turningon the power.

End.

Replace the DCcontroller.

Cause

Thermistor(TH1/TH2)

DC controller

AC driver

DC controller

Checks

Execute 'ERROR' in service mode( ), and open the front doorand the delivery assembly to coolthe fixing roller. Is 'E001' indicatedas soon as the power switch isturned ON?

Turn OFF the power switch, andslide out the fixing feeding assem-bly. Disconnect the relay connectorJ2757 from the fixing unit, and setthe tester range to 1 KΩ. Is thereading about 0Ω when the probeis connected to the harness termi-nal of the thermistor? (Be sure toconnect J2757 after the check.)

Replace the AC driver. Is theproblem corrected?

]4]

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

Replace the thermistor.


End.

Check the wiring fromthe AC driver to the DCcontroller; if normal,replace the DCcontroller.

3. E0024. E003

5. E004



10-77

Cause



Environment


DC controller

Checks

Execute 'ERROR' in service mode( ), and turn ON the power.Does any of the following apply?• The fixing heater fails to operate.• E002 or E003 is indicated.

Is the contact of J108A, J2755,and relay connector J2757 on theDC controller and the connectorJ2745 in the fixing assemblynormal? Further, is the wiring fromthe thermistor to the connectorJ108A normal?

Is the thermistor in even contactwith the upper fixing roller?

Clean the contact face of the ther-mistor. Is the problem corrected?

Does the problem occur onlywhen the power is turned ON forthe first time in the morning?

Replace the thermistor. Is theproblem corrected?

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

See the appropriatesection.

Correct the applicableproblem.

Install it properly.

End.

•Advise the user that thesite environment isoutside the standards.

•Advise the user to waituntil the room is warmenough before turningon the power.

End.


Cause

Fixing heater

AC driver

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Execute 'ERROR' in service mode( ). Does the fixing heateroperate immediately after power-on?


]4]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

See "The fixing heaterfails to operate."

End.


6. E005

7. E006

8. E010



10-78

Cause

Cleaning belt

Cleaning beltdetecting lever

Fixing feedingunit

DC controllerPCB

Sensor

Checks

Is the cleaning belt of the fixingassembly taken up?

Is the position of the cleaning beltdetecting lever correct?

Is the fixing feeding unit properlyinstalled in the machine?

Is the voltage between J108A-13(+) and J108A-12 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB about 5 V? Is thecleaning belt length sensor (PS11)normal? (See the descriptions onhow to check photointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Replace the cleaningbelt.

Correct the position ofthe lever.

The connector at therear of the fixing feedingunit may have poorcontact. Make a check.


Replace the sensor.

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Main motor(M1)

Checks

Is the connector of the main motorconnected?

Does the voltage between J111B-4 (+) and J111B-1 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB change from 0 V toabout 5 V when the Copy Startkey is pressed?

Replace the main motor. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Connect the connector.


End.

Cause

Fixing feedingconnector

Checks

Is the connector correctly fixed inposition? Further, is it properlyintegrated?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

Action

Check the connectorassembly for itscondition.

9. E013



10-79

Cause

Waste tonerfeeding screw

MSW4

DC controllerPCB

Harness(vertical pathroller driveclutch CL15)

Checks

Is the waste toner feeding screwdrive gear pushing the wastetoner feeding screw lock detectionswitch (MSW4)?

Does the voltage between J114B-1 (+) and J114B-2 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB change from about5 to about 0 V?

Does the harness of the verticalpath roller drive clutch have anopen circuit?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

The feeding screw insidethe waste toner pipemay be locked becauseof an obstacle. Removethe waste toner pipe,and try turning the screwby hand. If it turnssmoothly, install it onceagain and see if theproblem has beencorrected. If it does notturn, replace the wastetoner pipe aftercorrecting the cause.

Replace MSW4.


Replace CL15.

10. E015



10-80

Cause

Power supply(motorcontroller PCBis part of pick-up motor)

DC controllerPCB

Pick-up motor(M2)

Checks

Set the tester range to 200 VDC.Connect the + probe to J612-3and the – probe to J612-4 on themotor controller PCB. Is thevoltage about 12 V?

Is the voltage between thefollowing pins of the DC controllerPCB as indicated?

(+) (–) Voltage

J114B-10 J114B-9 12 V (approx.)

J114B-12 J114B-11 5 V (approx.)

Connect the + probe to J114B-8on the DC controller PCB and the– probe to GND. Does the voltagechange to about 5 V when themotor starts to rotate?

Replace the pick-up motor (M2).Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC power supplyPCB to the motorcontroller PCB; if normal,replace the DC powersupply PCB.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe motor controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe motor controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

End.

11. E020



10-81

Cause

Hopper assem-bly sensor

Hopper motor

Connectionbetween hopperassembly anddevelopingassembly

Toner sensor

DC controllerPCB

Connector(hopperassembly)

Outlet (hopperassembly)

Checks

Remove the upper cover of thedeveloping assembly. Is toner inthe developing assembly about tooverflow? (Put the upper coverback on after the check.)

Is hopper full of toner?

Select 'PC002' in service mode( ). Is the indication for bit10 (TEP) on the message display'0', indicating the absence oftoner?

Select 'HPPR_MTR' in servicemode ( ). Does the hoppermotor rotate about 3 sec when the] key is pressed?

Install the developing assembly,and set the copy count to '20'.Select 'P002' in service mode (

), and press the Copy Startkey. Is the indication for bit 9(DTEP) on the message display'0', indicating the presence oftoner?

Is the connector disconnected?

Is the end of the outlet cover bentso that the amount of tonersupplied from the hopper to thedeveloping assembly is less thana specific amount?

]2]

]4]

]2]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

Action

Go to step 5.

Go to step 5.

Replace the hopperassembly sensor.

See "The hopper motorfails to rotate."

Check to make sure thatthe hopper assemblyand the developingassembly are securelyconnected.

Replace the toner leveldetecting circuit.


Connect the connector.

Replace the seal of theoutlet, and replace bothhopper collars 1 and 2 atthe same time.

12. E030 (The total copy counter fails to operate.)

13. E031 (The option counter has an open circuit.)



10-82

Cause

Option counter

Total copycounter

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn OFF the power switch, anddisconnect J104B of the DCcontroller PCB. Set the testerrange to X1KΩ, and measure theresistance between J104B-6 andJ104B-7. Is it about 500Ω?

Connect J104B to the DCcontroller PCB, and turn ON thepower switch. Set the tester rangeto 30 VDC. Does the voltagebetween J104B-6 (+) and J104A-6(–) on the DC controller changefrom about 24 to about 0 then toabout 24 V when the Copy Startkey is pressed?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe total copy counter; ifnormal, replace the totalcopy counter.

Replace the total copycounter.

Replace the DCcontroller PC.

Cause

Total copycounter

Total copycounter

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn OFF the power, and removeJ104B from the DC controllerPCB. Set the tester range tox1KW, and measure theresistance between J104B-2 andJ104B-1. Is it about 500W?

Connect J104B to the DCcontroller PCB, and turn ON thepower. Set the tester range to 30VDC. Does the voltage between104B-2 (+) and J104A-6 (–) on theDC controller change from about24 to about 0 and then to about24 V when the Copy Start key ispressed?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe total copy counter; ifnormal, replace the totalcopy counter.

Replace the total copycounter.


14. E050

15. E051

16. E202 (Locks the keys but does not indicate a code.)

Action

Replace PS20.

Replace the holding trayY motor (M9).

End.



Cause

Holding tray Xhome positionsensor (PS21)

Holding tray Xmotor (M8)

Holding traydriver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the holding tray X homeposition sensor (PS21) normal?

Disconnect J209 from the holdingtray driver PCB. Is there electricalcontinuity between the followingpins on the motor side?J209-1 and -2J209-5 and -6

Replace the holding tray driverPCB. Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the PS21.

Replace the holding trayX motor (M8).

End.


Cause

Holding tray Yhome positionsensor (PS20)

Holding tray Ymotor (M9)

Holding traydriver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the holding tray Y homeposition sensor (PS20) normal?

Disconnect J208 from the holdingtray driver PCB. Is there electricalcontinuity between the followingpins on the motor side?J208-4 and -5J208-8 and -9

Replace the holding tray driverPCB. Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Cause

Scanner homeposition sensor

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner at home positionwhen E202 turns on?

Is the scanner home positionsensor (PS1) normal? (See thedescriptions on how to checkphotointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

See “The scanner failsto move forward.”

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB toPS1; if normal, replacePS1.



17. E203

18. E204 (Locks the keys but does not indicate a code.)

19. E210 (The lens X direction drive system has an error.)20. E212 (The lens Y direction drive system has an error.)



10-84

Cause

Scanneroriginal leadingedge sensor 1(PS3)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Does the scanner move forwardwhen the Copy Start key ispressed?

Is the scanner original leadingedge sensor 1 (PS3) normal?(See the descriptions on how tocheck photointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

See "The scanner failsto move forward."



Cause

Lens X homeposition sensor(PS6)

Lens Y homeposition sensor(PS7)

X direction beltsupport plate

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn ON the power switch. Doesthe lens move in X/Y direction?

Is the lens X/Y home positionsensor (PS6/7) normal? (See thedescriptions on how to checkphotointerrupters.)

Replace the DC controller PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Is the X direction drive belt andthe belt support plate slippingagainst each other?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

Action

See "The lens fails tomove."



End.

Replace the belt supportplate with one providedwith spacers.

Cause

Scanner homeposition sensor

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner at home positionwhen E202 turns on?

Is the scanner home positionsensor (PS1) normal? (See thedescriptions on how to checkphotointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action




21. E240

22. E243

23. E710/E711

24. E712



10-85

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Control panelPCB

Checks

Turn ON and OFF the powerswitch. Is the problem corrected?

Replace the control panel PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.


End.

Cause

Malfunction

Connector

RDF controllerPCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks


Is the connector (J772) connectingthe RDF and the copier connectedsecurely?

Replace the RDF controller PCB.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


End.


Cause

Malfunction

DC control PCB

Checks


Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


Cause

DC controller

Checks

Turn ON and then OFF the powerswitch. Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


25. E713

26. E800

27. E802



10-86

Cause

Malfunction

J716

Power switch(SW1)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn ON and OFF the powerswitch.

Is the connection of the relayconnector J716 under the powerswitch (SW1) securely connected?

Set the tester to the X1Ω range.Disconnect the relay connectorJ716, and connect the probe ofthe tester to the connectorterminal on the power switch side.Is the resistance about 30Ω?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

End.

Connect the connectorsecurely.

Replace the powerswitch (SW1).

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe power switch (SW1);if normal, replace the DCcontroller PCB.

Cause

Malfunction

Connector

Sorter controllerPCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks


Is the connector (J703) connectingthe sorter and the copier securelyconnected?

Replace the sorter controller PCB.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


End.


Cause

Operation

DC controllerPCB

Power supplyunit

Checks

Turn on and then off the powerswitch. Is the problem corrected?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

End.

End.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe power switch (SW1),and check electrical con-tinuity; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

28. AC power is absent.



10-87

Cause

Power plug

Main supply

Circuit breaker(CB1)

Power cord,Line filter (LF1)

Front door

Front doorswitch (SW2)

Front doorswitch (SW2)

Wiring to doorswitch

Power switch(SW1)

Wiring

Checks

Is the power plug connected to thepower outlet?

Is the rated AC voltage at thepower outlet?

Is there the specified voltagebetween J301-1 and J301-5,between J301-3 and J301-5, andbetween J302-1 and J302-3?(J301 and J302 are in the powersupply unit.)

Press the button of the circuitbreaker (CB1). Is AC powersupplied?

Replace the power cord and theline filter (LF1). Is AC powersupplied?

Is the front door securely closed?

Close the front door. Is SW2pressed?

Remove the door switch, andconnect the probes to 1 and 2 or 3and 4 of the door switch. Is theresistance 0 when the actuatoris pressed and whenreleased?

Is the wiring connected to the doorswitch properly?

Connect the probes to bothterminals of the power switch(SW1). Is the resistance 0 whenthe switch is ON and whenOFF?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Connect the power plug.

The problem is not of thecopier's. Advise the user.

End.

End.

End.

Check the wiring of theAC power supply lineand contact of theconnectors.

Close the front door.

Close the front door.

Replace the door switch.

Connect it properly.

Replace the powerswitch.

Check the wiring of theAC power supply lineand the connection ofthe connectors.

29. DC power is absent.



10-88

Cause

AC powersupply

Wiring, DC load

DC powersupply PCB

Checks

Is the rated voltage presentbetween J301-1 and J301-5 andbetween J301-3 and J301-5 andbetween J302-1 and J302-3?(J301 and J302 are in the DCpower supply unit.)

Is the fuse (FU51, FU1) on the DCpower supply PCB blown?

Turn OFF the power switch, anddisconnect the power plug; then,connect the power plug about 1min later. Is DC power suppliedwhen the power switch is turnedON?

Turn OFF the power switch, anddisconnect all connectors J303,J304, J305, J306, J308, J309, andJ311 from the DC power supplyPCB; turn ON the power switch,and measure the voltage betweenthe terminals shown in Table.

However, the above assumes thatthe inaccuracy of the AC input is±10%.

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

See "AC power isabsent."

Remove the cause, andreplace the fuse.

End.

Turn OFF the powerswitch, and connect oneof the connectors youhave disconnected.Connect the connector,and turn ON the power.Repeat this procedure tofind out the connectorthat activates the protec-tion circuit, and checkthe wiring and DC loadsfrom that connector.

Replace the DC powersupply. See "AC poweris absent."

Connector

J303

J304

J305

J306

J308

J309

J311

Pin No.

12324135711351312

Output

38VU38VU38VU24VR24VU24VU24VR5VR12VU24VU24VU24VA38VU24VU

24VU224VA238VU

Remarks

+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

±2%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

±2%±4%

+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-20%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

30. Pick-up fails.



10-89

Cause

Upper rightdoor, Lowerright door

Lifter

Pick-up roller

Belt

Drive belt,Gear, Coupling

DC controllerPCB

Deck pick-upclutch (CL14)

Checks

Are the upper right door and thelower right door closed properly?

Does the lifter lower when thedeck is slid out of the copier?Further, is the sound of the liftermoving up heard when the deck isset?

Does the pick-up roller rotate?

Is the belt used to transmit driveto the pick-up roller attachedproperly?

Is the drive from the pick-up motortransmitted to the pick-upassembly through the drive belt,gear, and coupling?

Set the tester range to 30 VDC.Does the voltage between J116A-2 on the DC controller PCB andGND change from 24 to 0 V whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Close the doors properly.

See "The lifter fails tomove up."

If the roller is soiled,clean it with alcohol. Ifdeformation by wear isnoted, replace it.

Attach the belt properly.

Check the drive belt,gear, and coupling.


Check the wiring up tothe clutch; if normal,replace the clutch.

31. The deck lifter fails to move up.



10-90

Cause

Deck

Lifter cable

Spring, Lever

Pick-up motor(M2)

DC controllerPCB

Deckopen/closedsensor (PS38)

Lifter position-sensor (PS31)

Deck lifter drivemotor (M18)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the deck installed properly?

Is the lifter cable routed properly?

Push up the pick-up releasinglever by a finger. Does the pick-uproller lower?

Does the pick-up motor (M2)rotate?

Set the tester range to 12 VDC.Does the voltage between J116B-10 on the DC controller PCB andGND (–) change from about 0 to 5V when the deck is closed?

Set the tester range to 12 VDC. Isthe voltage between J116A-4 (+)on the DC controller PCB andGND (–) as follows?

0 V when the deck is opened;and 5 V when the deck isclosed.

Set the tester range to 30 VDC.Does the voltage between J119B-11 (+) on the DC controller PCBand GND (–) change from 0 to 24V when the deck is slid inside?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

Install the deck properly.

Route the cablecorrectly.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring and the lever.

Go to step 6.


Check the wiring to thesensor; if normal,replace the sensor.

Check the wiring to thesensor; if normal,replace the sensor.

Check the wiring to thedeck lifter drive motor ifnormal, replace themotor.


32. Pick-up fails. (cassette pick-up)



10-91

Cause

Drive gear

Upper rightdoor, Lowerright door

Pressure spring

Vertical pathroller 0 clutch(CL18), Verticalpath roller 1clutch (CL15),Vertical pathroller 2 clutch(CL17), Verticalpath roller 3clutch (CL11),Vertical pathroller 4 clutch(CL13)

Registrationroller driveclutch

Pick-upassembly

Checks

Slide in and out the cassette. Isthe sound of the lifter lowering andthe lifter motor rotating heard?

Is the gear for drive attachedproperly?

Are the upper right door and thelower right door closed properly?

Are the upper right door and thelower right door locking the verti-cal path rollers 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4?

Open the upper right door and thelower right door, and press theCopy Start key after inserting ascrewdriver into the door switch.Do the vertical path rollers 0, 1, 2,3, and 4 rotate?

Is the leading edge of copy paperas far as the registration rollerassembly?

Open the upper right door and thelower right door, and press theCopy Start key while forcing ascrewdriver inside the door switch.Does the feeding/separation rollerrotate?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

Action

See "The lifter fails tomove up."

Attach the belt properly.

Close the doors properly.

Check the lockingsprings.

Check the wiring; if nor-mal, replace the clutch.

See "The registrationroller fails to operate."

Go to step 9.



10-92

Cause

Pick-up clutch

DC controller

Sensor

Pick-upassembly

Checks

Set the tester range to 30 VDC,and connect the probes of thetester to the connectors on the DCcontroller PCB as shown. Doesthe voltage change from 24 to 0 Vwhen the Copy Start key ispressed?

Check to find out which sensorhas detected the jam using 'B-JAM' in service mode ( ). Isthe sensor normal?

]1]

Step

8

9

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the wiring; ifnormal, replace theapplicable clutch.


Check the wiring and thelever; if normal, replacethe sensor.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thesprings.

Cassette Clutch + –

3 CL10 J117A-2 GND

4 CL12 J130A-2 GND

33. The lifter fails to move up. (cassette pick-up)



10-93

Cause

Cassette sizedetecting switch

Gear, Lever

Latch assembly(cassette)

Spring, Lever

Lifter positionsensor

Cassette 3 liftermotor (M14),Cassette 4 liftermotor (M15)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the size of the cassetteindicated on the message display?

Slide out the cassette, and moveup the lifter by hand. Does it movesmoothly?

Is the movement of the latchassembly of the cassette gripnormal?

Push up the pick-up rollerreleasing lever by a finger. Doesthe pick-up roller lower?

Is the lifter sensor (PS31, PS25,PS28) normal?

Connect the connector, and turnON the power switch. Set thetester range to 30 VDC, andconnect the – probe of the testerto GND and the + probe to thefollowing. Does the voltagechange from about 0 to 24 Vwhen the cassette is inserted?

M14: J119A-9M15: J119A-11

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the cassette sizedetecting switch.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thegear and the lever.

Install it properly.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring and the lever.

Check the lever and thewiring; if normal, replacethe sensor.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thegear; if normal, replacethe motor.


34. Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)



10-94

Cause

Pick-up roller,Pickup/feedingroller, Sepa-ration roller

Belt, Gear,Coupling

DC controllerPCB

Multifeederpick-up clutch(CL7)

Multifeederpick-upsolenoid (SL10)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the orientation of the pick-uproller, pick-up/feeding roller, andseparation roller correct?

Is the drive of the main motortransmitted to the multifeeder pick-up assembly through the belt,gear, and coupling?

Is the leading edge of copy paperas far as the registration roller?

Set the tester range to 30 VDC,and connect the probes to J115B-1 (+) and J115B-2 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB. Does the voltagechange from 24 to 0 V when themultifeeder is selected and theCopy Start key is pressed?

Connect the probes of the testerto J115B-11 (+) and J115B-12 (–)on the DC controller PCB. Doesthe voltage change from about 0to 24 and then to 0 V when theCopy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Re-install the applicablepart.

Check the belt, gear,and coupling.

See "The registrationroller fails to rotate."


Replace the multifeederclutch (CL7).

Replace the multifeederpick-up solenoid (SL10).

Replace the DCcontroller

35. The vertical path roller fails to rotate.

36. The registration roller fails to rotate.



10-95

Cause

Belt, Gear,Coupling

Registrationpaper sensor(PS23)

Registrationroller driveclutch (CL9)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the drive from the main motor(M1) transmitted to the registrationroller through the belt, gear, andcoupling?

Is the registration paper sensor(PS23) normal?

Connect the – probe of the testerto GND and the + probe to J108A-5. Does the voltage change fromabout 24 to 0 V when theregistration roller starts to rotate?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Install the belt, gear, andcoupling properly.

Replace PS23.

Replace CL9.


Cause

Belt, Gear,Coupling

Vertical pathroller clutch

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the drive from the pick-up motor(M2) transmitted to each verticalpath roller through the belt, gear,and coupling?

Connect the – probe of the testerto GND and the + probe to thefollowing; does the voltage changefrom about 24 to 0 V when theroller starts to rotate?

Vertical path 0 drive clutch (CL18) J115A-4

Vertical path 1 drive clutch (CL15) J117A-15

Vertical path 2 drive clutch (CL17) J121B-8



Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Install the belt, gear, andcoupling properly.

Replace the applicableclutch.


37. The scanner fails to rotate forward.

38. The scanner fails to move in reverse.



10-96

Cause

Cable

Scanner path

Scanner motor(M3)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner drive cable routedcorrectly?

Is the scanner rail free of dirt, anddoes the scanner move smoothlywhen pushed by hand?

Set the tester range to 12 VDC,and connect the probes of thetester to the following. Does thevoltage change as indicated whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Route the cablecorrectly.

Check the scanner railfor dirt and foreign objectand look for an objectthat may come intocontact with the scanner;as necessary, clean, oil,or repair.Reference:

If the rail surface issoiled, clean with alco-hol and apply a smallamount of lubricant.

Replace the scanner.motor.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe scanner motor; ifnormal, replace the DCcontroller.

+ – Voltage

M3ON J112B-6 J112B-3 about 0V→5V

M3F/R J112B-7 J112B-3 0V→about5V→0V

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Scanner motor(M3)

Checks

Does the scanner move forward?

Set the tester range to 12 VDC.Does the voltage between J112B-7 (+) and J112B-3 (–) on thescanner motor controller PCBchange to about 5 V when thescanner has moved forward?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action



Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe scanner motor; ifnormal, replace thescanner motor.

39. The blank exposure lamp fails to turn ON.

40. The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn ON.



10-97

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Blank exposurelamp

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Remove the blank exposure lamp,and connect the connector. Select'BLANK' in service mode ( ).Does the blank exposure lampturn ON normally when the usermode key is pressed?

Replace the blank exposure lamp.Does it turn ON normally?

]4]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Check the wiring fromthe blank exposure unitto the DC controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

End.

Check the wiring fromthe blank exposure lampto the DC controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Pre-exposurelamp PCB

Checks

Set the tester range to 30 VDC.Does the voltage between J103B-2 (+) and GND on the DCcontroller PCB change from 24 to0 V when the Copy Start key ispressed?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

YES

Action


Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe pre-exposure lampPCB; if normal, replacethe pre-exposure lampPCB.

41. The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn ON.



10-98

Cause

Connector

Lamp (LA1)

Thermal fuse(FU1)

Lamp

DC controllerPCB

Lamp regulator(LR1)

Wiring

Checks

Select 'SCAN LAMP' in servicemode ( ). Does the scan-ning lamp turn ON for 3 sec whenthe user mode key is pressed?

Is the scanning lamp (LA1)installed properly?

Disconnect the power plug fromthe power outlet, and remove thethermal fuse. Is there electricalcontinuity between both terminalsof the thermal fuse?

Set the tester range to X1Ω.Disconnect the connector J4, andconnect the probes to bothterminals of the lamp. Does theindex of the tester swing?

Set the tester range to 12 VDC.Does the voltage between J111B-8 (+) and J111B-5 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB change from about5 to 0 V when the Copy Start keyis pressed?


]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the connector.(The connector mayhave poor contact.)

Disconnect the powerplug from the poweroutlet, and install thelamp properly.

Replace the thermalfuse.Note: The lamp may

have turned ONabnormally, thefuse may bemountedimproperly, or thecooling fan may bemalfunctioning.Make appropriatechecks.

Replace the lamp.


End.

1. Check the ACharness from thepower switch to thelamp regulator.

2. Check the DCharness from the DCcontroller PCB to theDC harness.

42. The hopper motor (M10) fails to operate.



10-99

Cause

Toner leveldetection PCB

DC controllerPCB

J770, J719

Checks

Execute 'HPPR_MTR' in servicemode ( ). Does the hoppermotor rotate?

Is the indication for bit 10 of'PC002' in service mode ( )'0', indicating the absence oftoner?

Execute 'HPPR-MTR' in servicemode ( ) to operate thehopper motor. Does the voltagebetween J05A-1 (+) and J105A-2(–) on the DC controller PCBchange from 24 to about 0 V?

Is the connection of the relayconnector J770 and J719 secure?

]4]

]2]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

If the developingassembly is full of toner,replace the toner leveldetection PCB.


Connect them properly.

43. The hopper motor (M11) fails to operate.

44. The drum heater fails to operate



10-100

Cause

Toner leveldetection PCB

DC controllerPCB

J770, J719

Checks

Execute 'HPPR_MTR' in servicemode ( ). Does the hoppermotor rotate?

Is the indication for bit 10 of'PC002' in service mode ( )'0', indicating the absence oftoner?

Execute 'HPPR-MTR' in servicemode ( ) to operate thehopper motor. Does the voltagebetween J105A-3 (+) and J105A-4(–) on the DC controller PCBchange to about 0 V?

Is the connection of the relayconnector J770 and J720 secure?

]4]

]2]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

If the developingassembly is full of toner,replace the toner leveldetection PCB.


Connect them securely.

Cause

DC controllerPCB

J7

AC driver

Drum heater(H3)

Drum heatercontroller PCB

Checks

Open the front door, and releasethe fixing feeding assembly. Arethe ends of the drum warm? (Donot touch the surface of the drum.)

Set the tester range to 12 VDC,and connect the probes of thetester to J120B-2 (+) and J120B-1(–) on the DC controller PCB. Isthe voltage between the terminals5 V during copying and 0 V duringstandby?

Is the connection of the relayconnector J7 secure?


Remove the drum, and set thetester range to x1 . Does theindex of the tester swing when theprobes of the tester are connectedto both terminals of the heater?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

The drum heater isoperating.


Connect it securely.

End.

Replace the drumheater.

Replace the drum heatercontroller PCB.

45. The lens fails to move.



10-101

Cause

Rail

Drive belt

DC powersupply

DC controllerPCB

Lens motor(M4, M5)

Checks

Turn OFF the power switch, anddisconnect the power plug fromthe outlet. Does the lens movesmoothly when the lens motorpulley is turned by hand?

Is the drive belt installed properly?

Set the tester range to 30 VDC,and connect the probes to J305-1(+) and J305-2 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB. Is DC power 24VU present?

Set the tester range to 200Ω, andconnect the probes of the tester tothe following connectors of thelens motor. Is the resistancebetween connectors as indicated?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the rail for foreignobject and dirt.

Install the drive beltproperly.

See "DC power isabsent."


Replace the lens motor.

MotorX motor

(M4)

Y motor(M5)

+J110A-1J110A-4J110A-1J110A-2J110A-4J110A-5J110A-10J110A-13J110A-10J110A-11J110A-13J110A-14

–J110A-2J110A-5J110A-3J110A-3J110A-3J110A-3J110A-11J110A-14J110A-12J110A-12J110A-12J110A-12

Resistance1 3 5

(approx.)

4 8(approx.)

1 3 5(approx.)

4 8(approx.)

46. The Add Toner indicator fails to turn ON.

47. The Add Toner message fails to turn OFF.



10-102

Cause

Toner sensor(hopperassembly), DCcontroller PCB

DC controllerPCB, Controlpanel

Checks

Is toner in the hopper assembly?

Select 'PC002' in service mode( ). Move the toner aroundthe toner sensor (TS1) so that thesensor is exposed. At this time, isthe indication for bit 10 on themessage display '0', indicating theabsence of toner?

Open the upper cover of thedeveloping assembly. Is the tonerlevel sensor covered by toner?

]2]

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

1. Replace TS1.2. Replace the DC

controller PCB.

1. Replace the DCcontrol.

2. Replace the controlpanel.

End.

Cause

Toner

Toner sensor(TS1)

DC controllerPCB, Controlpanel

Checks

Is toner present at the rear of thehopper?

Select 'PC002' in service mode( ). At this time, is theindication for bit 10 on themessage display '0', indicating theabsence of toner?

]2]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

The amount of tonerinside the hopper is toolittle. Supply toner.

Replace the tonersensor (TS1) in thehopper assembly.


2. Replace the controlpanel.

48. The Control Card Set indicator fails to turn ON.

49. The Control Card Set indicator fails to turn OFF.

50. Paper jams at the fixing assembly inlet.

51. The Add Paper indicator fails to turn OFF.



10-103

Cause

CC-V

Control panel

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Can copies be made without acontrol card?

Replace the control panel. Doesthe indicator turn ON?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Check to see if theconnector of the CC-V isshorted.

End.


Cause

Control card

DC controllerPCB

CC-V

Checks

Is the control card insertedproperly?

Can copies be made?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Insert it properly.


Replace the CC-V.

Cause

Coupling (fixingwaste tonerdrive assembly)

Checks

Is the parallel pin groove of thecoupling worn, hindering themovement of the coupling?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

Action

Apply lubricant to theaffected area of thecoupling.

Cause

Cassette pick-up assembly

Checks

Is the meshing between the teethof the output gear of the liftermotor and the teeth of thecassette pick-up assembly faulty?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

Action

Using the appropriatetool, install the liftermotor properly; or,replace the lifter motorand the cassette pick-upassembly at the sametime.

52. The fixing heater fails to turn ON.



10-104

Cause

Thermal switch(TP1)

Fixing heater(H1, H2)

AC driver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Slide out the fixing assembly, andconnect the probes of the meter toboth terminals of the thermalswitch (TP1). Is there electriccontinuity?

Slide out the fixing unit, andconnect the probes of the meter toboth terminals of the fixing heater(H1, H2). Is there electriccontinuity?

Is voltage between the followingconnectors on the DC controllerPCB 5 V?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the thermalswitch.

Replace the fixingheater.

Replace the AC driverPCB.


Heater

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

(+)

J102B-5

J102B-3

(-)

J102B-1

J102B-1

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS

A. Copy Paper Jams

The machine may be divided into the following blocks in reference to location ofjams:q Pick-up assemblyw Separation/feeding assemblye Fixing/feeding assemblyr Drum cleaner assemblyt Holding tray assemblyy Feeding assembly

The descriptions herein about how to remove jams therefore are given according tolocation.

The machine allows checks on the location and the type of jam in its service mode(B_JAM; ; for as many as eight most recent jams).

Figure 10-501 !

e

t

q

r

y

w

]1]



10-105

1. Pick-up assembly



10-106

Cause

Copy paper

DC controllerPCB, Pick-upclutch

Pick-up roller

Guide plate

Checks

Is the copy paper curled or wavy?

Try Canon-recommended paper.Is the problem corrected?

Does the pick-up roller of theselected cassette/tray rotateduring copying operation?

Is the pick-up roller deformed orworn?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the copy paper.Advise the user on thecorrect method of storingpaper.

Advise the user to userecommended paper.

See "Pick-up fails."

Replace the pick-uproller.

Check the guide platefor deformation.

2. Separation/feeding assembly



10-107

Cause

Copy paper

Registrationroller

Registrationclutch

Transfer/ sepa-ration chargingassembly

Copy paper

Separation claw(cleaner assem-bly)

Feeding belt

Feeding fan

Checks

Has the leading edge of copypaper moved past the registrationroller?

Is the coupling of the registrationroller correctly joined?

Is the registration roller worn,deformed, or soiled?

Is the roller retaining spring onboth ends of the registration rollerinstalled correctly?

Does the registration clutchoperate normally?

Is the transfer/separation chargingassembly installed correctly?

Are there burrs on the paper guideof the transfer/separation chargingassembly?


Is the separation claw under thecleaner assembly damaged?

Are the two feeding belts rotatingproperly?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 5.

Install the fixing/feedingunit correctly.

If soiled, clean it withalcohol; if worn ordeformed, replace it.

Install them correctly.

Check the transfer guidefor foreign matter anddeformation.

Check the registrationclutch.

Check the transfer/sepa-ration charging assem-bly.

Remove the burrs.


Replace the separationclaw.

Check the belt and thepulley.

Check the feeding fan tosee if it is operating.

3. Fixing/delivery assembly

4. Fixing/delivery assembly (reversal delivery)



10-108

Cause

Deliveryassemblyseparation claw

Upper/lowerroller

Paper guide

Nip

Cleaning belt

Lever sensor

Deliverysensor

Deliverydeflecting plate

Delivery rollerdrive assembly

Leading edgemargin

Checks

Is the separation claw worn ordeformed?

Is the paper guide soiled withtoner?

Is the upper/lower roller deformedor scratched?

Is the height (position) of thepaper guide correct?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)within specification?

Is the cleaning belt taken upproperly?

Does each sensor lever movesmoothly?

Are the external delivery sensor(PS10) and the fixing assemblyoutlet sensor (PS47) normal?

Is the delivery deflecting plate ori-ented in the direction of delivery?

Does the delivery roller movesmoothly?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

1. Replace theseparation claw.

2. If soiled, clean it withsolvent.

Replace the roller.

Clean it with solvent.

Adjust it.

Adjust it.

Check the fixing assem-bly cleaner assembly.

Adjust it so that it movessmoothly.

Replace the sensor(s).

Correct the orientation of thedelivery deflecting plate.

Check the delivery rollerdrive assembly.

Check to make sure thatthere is a margin alongthe leading edge of thecopy.

Del

iver

y as

sem

bly

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y

Cause

Internal deliverysensor (PS12)

Delivery paperdeflectingsolenoid (SL2)

Holding tray for-ward clutch (CL5)

Holding tray revers-ing clutch (CL4)

Checks

Is the internal delivery sensor(PS12) normal?

Does the delivery paper deflectingplate move properly?

Does the holding tray inlet rollerrotate clockwise initially?

Does the holding tray inlet roller startto reverse at the correct timing?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Replace the sensor.

Adjust the position of thedelivery paper deflectingplate solenoid, orreplace the solenoid.

Replace the holding trayforward clutch (CL5).

Replace the holding trayreversing clutch (CL4).

5. Cleaning assembly

6. Holding tray assembly (copying on 1st side of two-sided/overlay copy)



10-109

Cause

Transfer/ sepa-ration chargingassembly, Pre-transfer charg-ing assembly

Separation claw(cleanerassembly)

Copy paper

High-voltagetransformer, DCcontroller PCB

Checks

Are the transfer/separationcharging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assemblyinstalled securely?

Is the height of the charging wireas specified?

Is the separation claw under thecleaner assembly damaged?


Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Install thetransfer/separationcharging assembly andthe pre-transfer chargingassembly securely.

Adjust the height of thecharging wire.

Replace the separationclaw.


1. Check the high-voltage transformer.

2. Check the DCcontroller PCB.

Cause

Holding trayinlet papersensor (PS15)

Checks

Perform steps 1 through 3 of 4."Fixing/delivery assembly." Is theproblem corrected?

Is the holding tray inlet papersensor (PS15) normal?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.

Replace PS15.

7. Holding tray assembly (re-pick up)

8. Holding tray assembly (overlay re-pick up)



10-110

Cause

Holding trayseparationclutch (CL6)

Holding tray re-pick up rollersolenoid (SL6)

Holding traypick-up sensor(PS17)

Holding trayregistrationclutch (CL3)

Holding trayregistrationsensor (PS14)

Holding trayweight solenoid(SL7)

Checks

Is the holding tray separationclutch (CL6) normal?

Is the holding tray re-pick up rollerrotating?

Is the holding tray pick-up sensor(PS17) normal?

Is the holding tray registrationclutch (CL3) normal?

Is the holding tray registrationsensor (PS14) normal?

Is the holding tray weight plateoperating?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Replace the CL6.

Replace SL6.

Replace PS17.

Replace CL3.

Replace PS14.

Replace SL7.

Cause

Holding traypaper deflectingplate

Holding traypaper deflectingplate solenoid(SL8)

Holding trayreversing clutch(CL4)

Checks

Perform the items under 7."Holding tray assembly (re-pick-up)." Is the problem corrected?

Is the holding tray paper deflectingplate warped or scratched?

Does the holding tray paperdeflecting plate start to operate atthe correct timing?

Does the roller switch fromclockwise to counterclockwiserotation at the correct timing?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Action

End.

Replace the paperdeflecting plate.

Replace SL8.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe holding trayreversing clutch (CL4); ifnormal, replace CL4.

9. Holding tray feeding assembly



10-111

Cause

Holding trayfeeding clutch(CL1), Holdingtray feedingclutch (CL2)

Holding trayfeeding assem-bly 1 papersensor (PS8),Holding trayfeeding assem-bly 2 papersensor (PS9)

Checks

Is the holding tray feedingassembly installed correctly?

Is the paper inside the holding trayfeeding assembly movingproperly?

Are the holding tray feeding 1paper sensor (PS8) and theholding tray feeding 2 papersensor (PS9) normal?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Install it correctly.

Replace CL1 or CL2.

Replace PS8 or PS9.

B. Feeding Failure

1. Double feeding

2. Wrinkling



10-112

Cause

Separationroller

Spring

Checks

Is the separation roller deformedor worn?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the separationroller.

Replace the spring usedto pull the separationroller.

Cause

Pick-upassembly

Copy paper

Paper guide

Lower rollerpressure

Upper/lowerrollerpressure

Checks

Turn OFF the power while copypaper is moving through thefeeding assembly. Is the paperwrinkled? Or is it moving askew?



Is the paper guide soiled withtoner or foreign matter?

Is the height (position) of thepaper guide correct?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)within specification?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the pick-upassembly. Check theregistration roller.

The paper may be moist.Advise the user on thecorrect method ofstorage.


Clean it with solvent.

Adjust the height (posi-tion) of the paper guide.

Adjust it.

Try replacing the upperand lower rollers oneafter the other.

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y



10-113

VI. ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF THE ELECTRICAL PARTS



10-114

A. Sensors

Figure 10-601

PS3PS1

PS4

PS7

PS5

SRV1

PS46PS22

PS30PS25

PS28PS29

SV2

SVR3

SVR2

PS6

PS23

PS11

PS53PS12

PS52PS47

PS10

PS21

PS8

PS33

PS17PS14

PS19

PS9PS15

PS51

PS41

PS42

PS24

PS26

PS20

PS36

PS50

SV1



10-115

Table 10-601

Symbol

Q

Name

Photointerrupter

Variable resistor

Notation

PS1PS3PS5PS6PS7PS8PS9

PS10PS11PS12PS14PS15PS17PS19PS20PS21PS22PS23PS24PS25PS26PS27PS28PS29PS30PS33PS36PS41PS42PS46PS47PS50PS51PS52PS53SV1SV2

SVR1SVR2SVR3

Function

Scanner home position detectionScanner original leading edge 1 detectionCopyboard cover open/closed detectionLens X home position detectionLens Y home position detectionHolding tray feeding assembly 1 paper detectionHolding tray feeding assembly 2 paper detectionExternal delivery paper detectionFixing cleaning belt length detectionInternal delivery assembly paper detectionHolding tray registration paper detectionHolding tray inlet paper detectionHolding tray pick-up detectionHolding tray re-circulating bar home position detectionHolding tray Y home position detectionHolding tray X home position detectionMultifeeder pick-up detectionRegistration paper detectionPick-up vertical path 0 paper detectionCassette 3 lifter detectionCassette 3 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 3 paper detectionCassette 4 lifter detectionCassette 4 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 4 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 1 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 2 paper detectionUpper right door open detectionLower right door open detectionMultifeeder door open detectionFixing assembly outlet paper detectionCassette 3 open/closed detectionCassette 4 open/closed detectionClaw jam detectionFixing/feeding unit detectionCassette 3 paper length detectionCassette 4 paper length detection

Multifeeder paper width detectionCassette 3 paper width detectionCassette 4 paper width detection



10-116

Paper Deck

Figure 10-602

PS37PS32

PS31PS38



10-117

Table 10-602

Symbol

Q

Name

Photointerrupter

Notation

PS31

PS32

PS37

PS38

Function

Deck lifter position detection

Deck paper detection

Deck lifter limit detection

Deck open/closed detection



10-118

B. Switches and Solenoids

Figure 10-603

MSW4

SL6SL3

SL11

SL12

SL13

SL10

SL15

SW1

MSW5SL14

SL7SL8

SL9

SL2 SW2SW3



10-119

Table 10-603

Symbol

S L

Name

Solenoid

Microswitch/switch

Notation

SL2

SL3

SL6

SL7

SL8

SL9

SL10

SL11

SL12

SL13

SL14

SL15

SL16

MSW4

MSW5

SW1

SW2

SW3

Function

Drives the delivery paper deflecting plate.

Drives the fixing assembly.

Drives the holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cut roller).

Drives the holding tray weight.

Drives the holding tray paper deflecting plate.

Moves the holding tray.

Drives multifeeder pick-up.

Releases the cassette 3 pick-up roller.

Releases the cassette 4 pick-up roller.

Locks the fixing/feeding unit.

Drives the cleaning belt.

Relays drive for multifeeder pick-up.

Drives the fixing assembly inlet guide.

Detects the locked state of the waste toner feeding screw.

High-voltage multifeeder door switch

Power switch

Door switch

Drum heater switch



10-120

Figure 10-604

SL4



10-121

Table 10-604

Symbol

S L

Name

Solenoid

Notation

SL4

Function

Releases the deck pick-up roller.



10-122

C. Motors and Fans

Figure 10-605

M3

M4M5

M1

M7

M2

M12

M10M11

M6

M8

M14M9

M15

M13

FM8

FM7FM5

FM6FM3

FM2



10-123

Table 10-605

Symbol

M

Name

Fan

Motor

Notation

FM2

FM3

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

M1

M2

M3

M4

M5

M6

M7

M8

M9

M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

Function

Exhaust fan

Fixing assembly heat exhaust fan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner cooling fan

Main motor

Pick-up motor

Scanner motor

Lens X motor

Lens Y motor

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor

Holding tray re-circulating bar motor

Holding tray X motor

Holding tray Y motor

Hopper motor (toner supply)

Hopper motor (toner stirring)

Primary charging wire cleaner motor

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor





10-124

D. Clutches

Figure 10-606

Table 10-606

CL8CL7

CL18

CL9

CL15

CL17

CL11

CL13

CL2CL5

CL6

CL1

CL10

CL4

CL3

CL12

Symbol

CL

Name

Clutch

Notation

CL1CL2CL3CL4CL5CL6CL7CL8CL9

CL10CL11CL12CL13CL15CL17CL18

Function

Holding tray feeding 1Holding tray feeding 2Holding tray registrationHolding tray reversalHolding tray forwardHolding tray separationMultifeeder pick-upDevelopmentRegistration roller driveCassette 3 pick-upVertical path roller 3 driveCassette 4 pick-upVertical path roller 4 driveVertical path roller 1 driveVertical path roller 2 driveVertical path roller 0 drive



10-125

Front Paper Deck

Figure 10-607

Table 10-607

CL14

M18

Symbol

CL

M

Name

Motor

Clutch

Notation

M18

CL14

Function


Deck pick-up



10-126

E. Lamps, Heaters, and Photosensors

Figure 10-608

DS3DS2

LA1DS1 H3

TP3

SVR1LA2

TS1TS2

VZ1

CNT2CNT1

TP2TH1

TH2

TP1

H2

H1

THHUM1

LF1CB1

TH



10-127

Table 10-608

Symbol

L F

CNT

C B

Name

Circuit breaker

Counter

Photosensor

Heater

Lamp

Line filter

Variable resistor

Thermistor

Environment sensor

Toner sensor

Varistor

Thermal switch

Thermal fuse

Notation

CB1

CNT1

CNT2

DS1

DS2

DS2

H1

H2

H3

LA1

LA2

LF1

SVR1

TH

TH1

TH2

THHUM1

TS1

TS2

VZ1

TP1

TP2

TP3

Function

Circuit breaker

Total counter

Option counter

Original size 1 detection



Fixing main heater

Fixing sub heater

Drum heater

Scanning lamp

Pre-exposure LED

Noise filter

Multifeeder paper width detecting VR

Drum heater thermistor

Fixing heater main thermistor

Fixing heater sub thermistor

Temperature/humidity sensor (internal temperature sensor)

Hopper toner sensor

Detecting assembly toner sensor

Varistor

Fixing heater thermal switch

Scanning lamp thermal fuse

Drum heater thermal fuse



10-128

F. PCBs

Figure 10-609

t

!1

q

!0

!2

y

o

u!3i

r

e

w



10-129

Table 10-609

Ref.

qwertyuio!0!1!2!3

Name

DC controller PCBControl panel CPU PCBControl pane key PCBFL inverter PCBHVT PCBHolding tray control PCBPotential control PCBOption counter PCBDrum heater controller PCBAC driver PCBLamp regulatorDC power supply PCBService switch PCB

Description

Controls sequence.Controls the control panel.Receives key inputs from the control panel; Controls LED indications.Supplies power for the control panel backlight lamp.Generates high voltage.Controls the holding tray sensors, solenoids, and clutches.Controls the surface potential of the photosensitive drum.Relays the counter signals for options.Controls the drum heater.Controls the AC circuit.Controls the scanning lamp.Supplies DC power.Switches to service mode.



10-130

G. Variable Resistors, Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins byPCB

Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins found,those that may be used in the field are discussed:

Caution:1.Some LEDs emit dim light because of leak current when OFF; this is a normal

condition and should be kept in mind.

2. VRs that may be used in the field............

VRs that must not be used in the field.....

Caution:Do not use VRs and check pins not given in the list; they are for the factory onlyand require special instruments and high precision.

1. DC Controls PCB

Figure 10-610

J112 J111J109 J110 J108

SW101

J107

J106

J105

J104

VR101J103

J102

J101J124

J122J121

J126

J128J123

J119J117J130

J113

J114

J115

J129

J116

A1

B12

A12

B1

A1

B9 B1

A9

J12512 1

B15 B1

A1 A15

B1 B20

A20 A1

B10 B1

A1 A10

A1

A9

B9

A1A1

A11

B11

B1A1

A8

B8

B1A1

A10 B1

B10

A1

A9

B9

B1

8

1

A8 A1

B1 B8

A15 A1

B15B1

8 1 9 1 1 2

A12 A1

B1 B12B1 B15

A15 A1A13

A1

B1 B13

B14

B1 A14

A1

B13

B1 A13

A1

1 2B15

B1 A15

A1

B1

B14 A1

A14

1

7

J127

1 2

1 2



10-131

SW101-2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

AB-configuration (4R4E)

200%

A4→A3, B5→B4

A4→B4

B4→A3, B5→A4

100%

A3→B4, A4→B5

B4→A4

A3→A4, B4→B5

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.1%

122.4%

115.4%

100.0%

86.5%

81.6%

70.7%

50.0%

SW101-2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

SW101*-3

—

—

—

—

No Trans.

100V

230V

230V

120V

Vertical size

AB-configuration

AB/Inch-configuration

A-configuration

Inch-configuration

Inch-configuration (4R3E)

200%

LTR→11"×17"

LGL→11"×17"

100%

LGL→LTR

LGL→11"×17"

11"×17→"LTR

50%

Ratio

200.0%

129.4%

121.4%

100.0%

78.6%

73.3%

64.7%

50.0%

Caution:DIP SW101-3 on the DC controller PCB is for the factory; do not change thesettings to avoid malfunction.

Table 10-610

Table 10-611

Table 10-612



10-132

Table 10-613

Table 10-614

Table 10-615

A-configuration (2R2E)

200%

A4→A3

100%

A3→A4

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.4%

100.0%

70.7%

50.0%

AB/Inch-configuration (4R4E)

200%

A4/LTR→A3, B5→B4

A4/LTR→B4

B4→A3, B5→A4/LTR

100%

A3→B4, A4/LTR→B5

B4→A4/LTR

A3→A4/LTR, B4→B5

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.4%

122.4%

115.4%

100.0%

86.5%

81.6%

70.7%

50.0%

Connector

J123

J125

J126

J129

Description

For factory

For factory

For factory

For factory



10-133

2. AC Driver PCB

Figure 10-611

3. DC Power Supply PCB

Figure 10-612

J301

J302

J303

J304

J305

J306

J308J309

J3115

14

12

1

8

1

6

1

5

1

5/4

1

1

4

1

3

J642

J641

1 6

4 1



10-134

4. Control CPU PCB

Figure 10-613

J913

J912

J916

J915J911J923

J919J9201 16 1 15

B10 B1

A1 A10

1 91 2

14

1

18

1

18

1



10-135

5. Holding Tray Driver PCB

Figure 10-614

J201J202

J203

J204

J205

J206J207J208J209

J210

1 4 B13 B1 1 5

A1 A13 1

13

1

10

3

16 1 9 1 7 1 3 1



10-136

6. Potential Measurement PCB

Figure 10-615

Table 10-616

Table 10-617

J3 J1 J2

VR2

LED1

1 4 1 5 1 4

VR1

VR

VR1

VR2

Description

For factory

For factory

LED

LED1

Description

Remains ON whilemeasuring the surfacepotential of the drum.



10-137

7. HVT1 PCB

Figure 10-616

Table 10-618

J301

J403

J203

J201 J202

1 3

1 104 1

1

5

VR201

1

2

VR

VR201

Description

For factory



10-138

8. HVT2 PCB

Figure 10-617

9. Inverter PCB

Figure 10-618

J956J9552

1

1

4

T502

T501

J501

J404

J402

J401

2

1



10-139

10. Lamp Regulator PCB

Figure 10-619

11. Counter PCB

Figure 10-620

Table 10-619

J651

1 25

J631

2

ON

SW931

J503

5

1

1 6

J501

SW931-1

0

1

0

1

SW931-2

0

0

1

1

Mode

So that the sub counter is assumed to be not connected.

So that the sub counter is used as a small copy counter.

So that the sub counter is used as a two-sided copy counter.

So that the sub counter is used as a large-size copy counter.

VII. SERVICE MODE

A. Outline

The machine’s service mode is divided into the following six:

Table 10-701

Each mode has items which may be checked on the message display.

Reference:When a specific mode is selected, the appropriate page number will be indicated inthe upper right corner of the message display.

B. Using Service Mode

1) Open the front door, and insert a door switch actuator. If you want to make checks(e.g., I/O display mode) while making copies, set the appropriate copying mode.

2) Press the service mode key with a hex key.• ‘$’ will be indicated in the upper right corner of the message display when service

mode starts.3) Enter the number of the mode (Table 10-701) using the ] key and the keypad.

Ex.→ →

4) Press the / key to select the appropriate screen.5) Make a check or adjustments.

To accept the input data, press the user mode key (]).6) End service mode.

• Press the Reset key ( ) once to end the current mode.• Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.• Or, turn OFF the power switch or disconnect the power plug to end service mode.(Opening the front door or the pick-up assembly door will not end service mode.)

]3]



10-140

Item

*1**2**3**4**5**6*

Notation

DISPLAY

I/O DISPLAY

ADJUST

FUNCTION

OPTION

COUNTER

Description

Control/display mode

I/O display mode

Adjustment mode

Function mode

Optional settings mode

Counter mode



10-141

C. Using Adjustment Mode and Option Settings Mode

In adjustment mode or option settings mode, settings made on the control panel arestored in RAM on the DC controller PCB, thereby simulating operations executed byconventional VRs and SWs.

Table 10-702 shows the label attached behind the front door.At the factory, each machine is adjusted, and the adjustment values are recorded on

the label.If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM, you must enter

the values recorded on the label.In addition, be sure to record any values you entered in the field on the label.

Table 10-702

LIGHT_5

LIGHT_5P

AE_SLOP

GLEAM_5

BRAKE_SC

REGIST

LE_BLANK

F_BLANK

R_BLANK

TE_BLANK

PRIMARY

BIAS

PRETRANS

TRN_1

TRN_DUP

TRN_OVL

SEP_1

SEP_DUP

SEP_OVL

C1_STMTR

C1_A4R

C2_STMTR

C2_A4R

C3_STMTR

C3_A4R

C4_STMTR

C4_A4R

MF_A6R

MF_A4R

MF_A4

BOOK_ERA

ATM

DOC_ST

P_INT_RVL

RFAE_F5L

REAE_F9L

RFAE_F5R

RFAE_F9R

LA_LCKPS

LA_SPEED

RF_LENSY

11x17PSZ

LGL_PSZ

LTR_PSZ

LTRR_PSZ

STMT_PSZ

A3_PSZ

A4_PSZ

A4R_PSZ

A5_PSZ

B4_PSZ

B5_PSZ

B5R_PSZ

TYP TYP

D. Control Display Mode ( )

Press the <</>> key to select the screen.

Screen 1-1

]1]



10-142

Item

FTMP

RTMP

RHUM

LMP1

LMP2

WIRE

PLMT

LLMT

Description

Indicates the surface temperature of the fixing roller.(output of the main thermistor TH1)

Indicates the machine internal temperature. (output ofthe thermal sensor on the DC controller PCB)

Indicates the machine internal humidity. (output of thehumidity sensor on the DC controller PCB)

Indicates the ON voltage of the scanning lamp(100/120V model)

Indicates the ON voltage of the scanning lamp. (230Vmodel)

Indicates a value other than '0' if the primary, pre-transfer, or transfer/separation charging wire cleanerstops at a point not its home position. Executing wiringcleaning for the appropriate wire in user mode willreturn the wire cleaner to its home position.

Indicates '1' when the current value reaches the upperlimit or the lower limit during current control on theprimary charging assembly.

Indicates '1' when the ON voltage of the scanninglamp reaches '1' and '2' if it reaches the lower limit.

Remarks

Unit: ÞC

Unit: V

Unit: V

1: Error0: Normal

0: Normal1: Error2: Error

1/9

•LMP1 and LMP2 indicate the ON control voltage even when the scanning lamp isOFF.

Note:If ‘0’ is indicated under ‘WIRE’, be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode (]).If the wire cleaner motor and the wire cleaner unit are normal, executing wirecleaning will activate the cleaner unit, causing it to stop at home position andclearing the indication to ‘0’.(Unless you execute wire cleaning, wire cleaning will remain prohibited and will notbe reset by turning OFF/ON the power.)



10-143

Item

LIFT

Description

Indicates '1' if the lifter position sensor does not turn ONwithin 8 sec after the lifter up command is issued for thepaper deck/cassette lifter.Order of flagsDeck, cassette 3, cassette 4

Remarks

Resetting is byturning OFF andON the powerswitch.

Screen 1-2



10-144

Item

DPOT

VAE

VL1T

VL1M

VL2M

VDT

VDM

Description

Indicates the surface potential of the drum.

Indicates the average surface potential during AEmeasurement.

Indicates the average surface potential during AEmeasurement.

Indicates the measured value of VL1 (light areapotential).

Indicates the measured value of VL2 (light areapotential for developing bias).

Indicates the target value of VD (dark area potential).

Indicates the measured value of VD (dark areapotential).

Remarks

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

2/9

Screen 1-3

• The indication will change to '0' when the HVT unit turns OFF.



10-145

Item

PC

GRID

PTC

TC

SC

BIAS

Description

Indicates the current value of the primary chargingassembly.

Indicates the current value of the grid of the primarycharging assembly.

Indicates the current value of the pre-transfer chargingassembly.

Indicates the current value of the transfer chargingassembly.

Indicates the current value of the separation chargingassembly.

Indicates the DC value of the developing bias.

Remarks

3/9

Screen 1-4



10-146

Item

DCMET-1

DCMET-2

DCMET-3

DCMET-4

Description

Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1.




Remarks

4/9

Screen 1-5

*1: No data exists representing a copier alarm condition.*2: The indication of the rightmost four bits of ‘B-ER 1 through 3’ will remain ‘0000’, and no E code will be

indicated.*3: The jam code related to the RDF indicated under ‘B-JAM’ is ‘0700’ only; for details, see the next screen

‘DF-JAM’.



10-147

Item

B-JAM0

B-JAM3

B-JAM6

B-ALRM *1

B-ER1 *2

B-ER2 *2

B-ER3 *2

A

B

Description

Indicates the location of the most recent jam andsecond most recent jam inside the copier.

Indicates the location of the third, fourth, and fifth mostrecent jams inside the copier.

Indicates the location of the sixth, seventh, and eighthmost recent jams in the copier.

Note used.

Indicates the most recent self diagnosis code for theinside of the copier and the sorter (not RDF).

Indicates the second most recent diagnosis code ofthe inside of the copier and the sorter (not RDF).

Indicates the third most recent diagnosis code of theinside of the copier and the sorter (not RDF).

Indicates the type of ‘E002’ (error occurring when thetemperature of the fixing roller does not reach aspecific value within a specific period of time).

Indicates the type of ‘E001’. (The temperature of thefixing roller exceeds a specific value.)

Remarks

See Table 10-703.(*3)

See Table 10-703.(*3)

See Table 10-703.(*3)

1: 70 ÞC~100 ÞC2: 100ÞC~150 ÞC

1: Main thermistor(TH1)

2: Sub thermistor(TH2)

5/9

Screen 1-6

*1: The rightmost four bits of ‘DF-ERR’ and ‘S-ERR’ will remain ‘0000’, i.e., they will notchange.

*2: For instance, if ‘E480’ is indicated,DF-ERR: 8000 0000‘4’ of ‘E480’ represents the RDF and is omitted for DF-ERR notation. (This, however,does not apply to ‘E400’.)

*3: For instance, if ‘E530’ is detected,S-ERR: 3000 0000‘5’ of ‘E530’ represents the sorter and is omitted for S-ERR notation. (This, however,does not apply to ‘E500’.)



10-148

Item

DF-JAM

S-JAM

DF-ERR *1

S-ERR *1

DF-ALM

S-ALM

Description

Indicates the location of an RDF jam.

Indicates the location of a jam in the sorter.

Indicates the nature of the results of self diagnosis inthe RDF. (*2)

Indicates the nature of the results of self diagnosis inthe sorter. (*3)

Indicates the nature of an alarm for the RDF.

Indicates the nature of an alarm in the sorter.

Remarks

See Tables 10-707,-708, and -709.

See Table 10-704.

See Tables 10-705and -706.

6/9

High-order 2 digits

To reset, open the front door, remove the jam, and close the front door.*1: A double feeding jam location (low-order 2 digits) indication is '00' only; 01, 02 will

not be displayed.*2: Power-on jam only.*3: Power-on jam and jam during initial rotation.

Table 10-703

Sorter Jam Code

Table 10-704



10-149

Display code

01

02

03

04 (*1)

05

06

Display code

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

Sensor No.

PS24

PS33

PS36

PS27

PS30

PS17

PS14

PS8

PS9

PS52 (*3)

PS23

PS15

PS47

PS10

PS12 (*2)

Sensor name

Pick-up vertical path 0





Holding tray pick-up

Holding tray registration

Holding tray feeding assembly 1

Holding tray feeding assembly 2

Fixing claw jam

Registration

Holding tray inlet

Fixing assembly outlet

External delivery

Internal delivery assembly

Jam location

Delay jam

Stationary jam

Power-on jam

Double feeding jam

Timing jam

Sorter-related jam

Display code

03

04

07

08

09

0A

Description

Feeding delay jam

Feeding stationary jam

Power-on jam

Door open jam (while feeding copy paper)

Door open jam (during stapling)

Bin external sensor jam

Sorter Alarm Code

Tray Alarm Code

Table 10-705

Stapler Alarm Code

Table 10-706

RDF Alarm Code

Table 10-707



10-150

Display code Alarm

Overstacking

Resetting

Remove all copy paper from the bin.

Display code

02

Alarm

Overstacking

Resetting


Display code

01

02

03

05

06

07

09

0A

Alarm

Staple down

Staple jam

Stapler safetymechanism ON

Stapling capacity

Stapling full

Different paper sizes

Paper in bin

No staple

Resetting

Run a self check. (Done if the results are good.)

Open the front door, remove all staple jams, andclose the front door.

Open the front door, remove all jams, and close thefront door.





Set a new staple cartridge.

Display code

01

03

05

11

12

13

14

15

Alarm

Re-circulating bar idlerotation

Pick-up separationfailure

Original over stopperplate

Different number of orig-inals after jam recovery

Wrong number oforiginals

Original forced off

Original size error

Mixed original sizes inimage composition

RDF operation

Stops

Stops

Stops

Stops

Stops at100th original

Stops

Stops

Stops

Resetting

Turn ON/OFF the original sensor (S1).


Turn ON/OFF the original sensor (S1),and open/close the RDF.






RDF Jam Codes

Table 10-708



10-151

Type of original jam

Originalforced off

Pick-up delay

Registrationdelay

Double-feeding

Leading edgeretreat

Reversaldelay 1

Reversal stationary

Reversaldelay 2

Reversal initial paper

Reversal pick-up delay

Reversal pick-up stationary

Pic

k-up

Rev

ersa

l

Sensor

S1, S7

S7

S3, S7

S3

S3

S8

S8

S8

S8

S3, S8

S3, S8

Conditions

The sensor (S7) does not detect the leading edgeof an original and, in addition, the sensor (S1) hasnot detected an original 1500 ms after the pick-upmotor (M1) has turned on.

The sensor (S7) does not detect the leading edgeof an original 1500 ms after the pick-up motor (M1)has turned on.

The sensor (S3) does not detect the leading edgeof an original 350 ms after the sensor (S7) hasdetected the leading edge of an original.

The sensor (S3) does not detect an original evenafter the first original has been placed on thecopyboard glass.

The sensor (S3) does not detect the leading edgeof an original after original pick-up operation hasstarted.

During original reversal or delivery, the sensor (S8)does not detect the leading edge of an original 140mm or 225 ms after the belt motor (M3) has startedto rotate in clockwise direction.

During original reversal or delivery, the sensor (S8)does not detect the trailing edge of an original.

During original delivery pick-up, the original to bedelivered is brought back in the direction of thecopyboard glass together with the original that hasbeen picked up. The error occurs when the sensor(S8) does not detect the advance original 50 mmafter the belt motor has started to rotatecounterclockwise.

During original reversal, the sensor (S8) detects anoriginal.

During original reversal, the sensor (S3) does notdetect the leading edge of an original 100 mm or300 ms after the sensor (S8) has detected theoriginal.

The sensor (S3) does not detect the trailing edge ofan original ‘original size + 180 mm’ after the sensor(S8) has turned on.

Code

01

02

03

06

08

11

12

13

20

21

23

Table 10-709



10-152

Type of original jam

Delivery delay

Delivery stationary

RF open

Upper coveropen

Original re-circulation fault

Remainingjam

Remainingoriginal

Re-circulatinglever idleswing (2ndoriginal andlater)

Del

iver

y

Sensor

S6, S8

S6

MS1

MS2S4

S1

S6, S3S8, S7

S8

S13

Conditions

During original delivery, the sensor (S6) does notdetect an original 100 mm or 250 ms after thesensor (S8) has detected the leading of an original.

The sensor (S6) does not detect the trailing edge ofan original 100 mm or 250 ms after a check for areversal delivery check.

The RDF is opened while in operation.

The upper cover is opened while the RDF is inoperation.

The sensor (S1) does not detect an original delivered to the original tray.

At the beginning of original pick-up operation, anyof the sensors (S6), (S3), or (S8) detects anoriginal. (If the paper stop plate is up, includes S7.)

During pick-up of the first original, an original isdetected on the copyboard glass.

For the second or subsequent originals, the re-circulating lever swung without coming into contactwith an original.

Code

41

42

81

82

83

84

88

89

Screen 1-7

70:Finnish80:Italian90:NorwegianA0:PortugueseB0:SpanishC0:Swedish

Guide to Version

00. 00. 01. 01.

R&D numberVersion number

Language*

Country (for Canon: 01)

*Language10:Japanese20:English

30:French40:German50:Danish60:Dutch

(20:North America; 21:UK)



10-153

Item

Q161

Q160

Q156

Q140

Q937

DF

SORT

Description

Indicates the version of the ROM (Q161) on the DCcontroller PCB.




Indicates the version of the ROM (Q937) on thecontrol panel PCB.

Indicates the version of the ROM (IC2) on the RDFcontroller PCB.

Indicates the version of the ROM (Q937) on thesorter controller PCB.

Remarks

See "Guide to Version."







7/9

Screen 1-8

Table 10-710

Column number of the touch panel (00 through 19, in hexadecimal)

*1 Touch panel.

XX. XX

Row number of the touch panel (00 through 15, in hexadecimal)



10-154

Item

KEY-CHK

DF-SIZE

DOC-SIZE

DOC-STS1

DOC-STS2

Display

00. 0F

01. 0F

02. 0F

03. 0F

04. 0F

Key

Reset

Stop

Start

1

4

Display

05. 0F

06. 0F

07. 0F

08. 0F

09. 0F

Key

7

Clear

2

5

8

Display

0A. 0F

0B. 0F

0C. 0F

0D. 0F

0E. 0F

Key

0

3

6

9

ID

Display

0F. 0F

10. 0F

11. 0F

12. 0F

Key

Pre-Heat

Interrupt

Use mode

Guide

Description

Indicates the code of the key pressed on the controlpanel. (*1)

Indicates the size of the original detected by theRDF.

Indicates the size of the original detected by thecopier's original size sensor.

Indicates the output (0/1) of the copier's original sizesensor.

Indicates the output (0/1) of the copier's original sizesensor.

Remarks

See Table 10-710.

8/9

Corresponding original size sensor number.DOC,STSI: X X X X

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓1 0 3 2

Note:The Inch-configuration type does not have original detection circuit 3.


Originaldetectioncircuit 0

Originaldetectioncircuit 1

Original detectioncircuit 3



10-155

Screen 1-9



10-156

Item

MULTI

CST-1

CST-2

CST-3

CST-4

Description

Indicates the outputs of the copy paper width sensorand the paper size sensor set on the multifeeder.WIDE: output of paper width sensor (analog)SW: output of paper length sensor (0/1)SIZE: paper width (mm)

Indicates the outputs of the copy paper width andthe paper size sensor set in the paper deck.WIDE: output of paper sensor (analog)SW: output of paper length sensor (0/1)SIZE: paper width (mm)

Indicates the outputs of the copy paper width andthe paper size sensor set in the left deck.WIDE: output of paper width sensor (analog)SW: output of paper length sensor (0/1)SIZE: paper width (mm)

Indicates the output of the copy paper width and thepaper size sensor set in the cassette 3.WIDE: output of paper width sensor (analog)SW: output of paper length sensor (0/1)SIZE: paper width (mm)

Indicates the outputs of the copy paper width sensorand the paper size sensor set in cassette 4.WIDE: output of paper width sensor (analog)SW: output of paper length sensor (0/1)SIZE: paper width (mm)

Remarks

100V model only.

9/9

E. I/O Display Mode ( )

Press numeric keys to select the screen.The screen will indicate the states of the input port and the output port.

Screen 2-1

Bit data is converted to hexadecimal data for checks on analog data (e.g., addressP023 photosensitive drum potential signal).

]2]



10-157



10-158

Description

Pick-up motor drive signal

Drum motor drive signal

Developing fan drive signal

Developing clutch drivesignal

Holding tray feeding 1 clutchdrive signal

Scanner locking solenoiddrive signal (4-cassette typeonly)

Multifeeder pick-up rollerclutch drive signal

Multifeeder pick-up solenoiddrive signal

Vertical path roller driveclutch drive signal

Right deck pickup clutchdrive signal

Cassette 2 pick-up clutchdrive signal

Cassette 1 lifter motor drivesignal (4-cassette type only)

Deck lifter drive motor drivesignal (paper deck typeonly)

Cassette 2 lifter motor drivesignal (4-cassette type only)

Vertical path roller 1 driveclutch drive signal

Vertical path roller 2 driveclutch drive signal

Deck/cassette 1 pick-uproller releasing solenoiddrive signal

Address

PC000-00

PC000-01

PC000-02

PC000-03

PC000-04

PC000-05

PC000-06

PC000-07

PC000-08

PC000-09

PC000-10

PC000-11

PC000-12

PC000-13

PC000-14

PC000-15

Signal

M2ON

M1ON

FM5D

DEVCD

HTF1CD

SLCKSD

MFPCD

SL10BDSL10FD

CL18D*

RDPUCD/C1PUCD

C2PUCD

C1MD

RDLMD

C2LMD

CL15D*

CL17D*

RDPURR/C1PURR

Jack

J114B-8

J111B-4

J115A-1

J112A-2

J112A-7

J114A-12

J115B-2

J115B-12

J115A-4

J116A-2

J121A-2

J119B-11

J119B-11

J119B-9

J117A-15

J121B-8

J121A-15/J116A-10

Remarks

0: rotate

0: rotate

1: rotate

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name

M02

M01

FM05

CL08

CL01

SL01

CL07

SL10

CL18

CL14

CL16

M16

M18

M17

CL15

CL17

SL04



10-159

Description

Holding tray paper deflectingplate solenoid drive signal

Holding tray weight solenoiddrive signal

Holding tray D-cut (pick-up)roller solenoid drive signal

Fixing inlet guide drivesignal

Holding tray swing solenoiddrive signal

Cassette 3 lifter motor drivesignal

Cassette 4 lifter motor drivesignal



Pick-up vertical path roller 3drive clutch drive signal

Pick-up vertical path roller 4drive clutch drive signal

Cassette 3 pick-up rollerreleasing solenoid drivesignal


Fixing assembly inlet guidedrive signal

Wire cleaner motor homeposition signal

Size detection drive

Address

PC001-00

PC001-01

PC001-02

PC001-03

PC001-04

PC001-05

PC001-06

PC001-07

PC001-08

PC001-09

PC001-10

PC001-11

PC001-12

PC001-13

PC001-14

PC001-15

Signal

HTPDD

HTWSD

HTDSD

FXGDSD

HTJSD

C3LMD

C4LMD

C3PUCD

C4PUCD

CL11D

CL13D

C3PURR

C4PURR

FXGUSD

Jack

J113B-9

J113A-4

J113A-5

J108B-15

J113B-5

J119A-9

J119A-11

J117A-2

J130A-2

J117B-2

J130B-2

J117A-10

J130A-10

J108B-14

—

J110B-4/7/10

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: rotate

1: rotate

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name

SL08

SL07

SL06

SL16

SL09

M14

M15

CL10

CL12

CL11

CL13

SL11

SL12

SL16



10-160

Description

Pick-up vertical path 0 paperdetection signal

Stream reading home posi-tion detection signal

Registration paper detectionsignal

Holding tray feeding assem-bly 2 paper detection signal

Holding tray feeding assem-bly 1 paper detection signal

Multifeeder paper detectionsignal

Fixing sub heater ONdetection signal

Fixing main heater ONdetection signal

Waste toner level signal

Developing assembly tonerlevel signal

Hopper toner level signal

Original size 1 detectionsignal

Original size 2 detectionsignal

Original size 3A detectionsignal

Original size 3 B detectionsignal

Not used

Address

PC002-00

PC002-01

PC002-02

PC002-03

PC002-04

PC002-05

PC002-06

PC002-07

PC002-08

PC002-09

PC002-10

PC002-11

PC002-12

PC002-13

PC002-14

PC002-15

Signal

PS24D

SCDP2

RGPD

PS9D

PS8D

MFS

SHOND

MHOND

WTFL

DTEP

TEP

DSZ1

DSZ2

DSZ3A

DSZ3B

Jack

J116B-7

J111A-8

J108A-7

J113B-12

J119A-4

J115B-7

J102B-4

J102B-6

J114B-1

J106B-8

J105A-6

J110B-5

J110B-8

J110B-12

J110B-11

Remarks

1: paper present

0: home position

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

0: toner absent

0: toner absent

0: original present

0: original present

0: original present

0: original present

Name

PS24

PS04

PS23

PS09

PS08

PS22

H2

H1

MSW4

TS2

TS1

DS1

DS2

DS3

DS3



10-161

Description


CC-X count signal

High-voltage output enablesignal

Control Card V drive signal

Feeding fan/cleaner fandrive signal (half speed)

Feeding fan/cleaner fandrive signal (full speed)

Fixing assemblydelivery/discharge drivesignal (half speed)

Discharge/drive signal (fullspeed)

Potential sensor power-onsignal

Multi solenoid drive signal

Developing bias AC outputsignal

Roller electrode bias outputsignal

Post-separation AC outputsignal

Scanning lamp ON signal

Fixing main heater drivesignal

Fixing sub heater drivesignal

Address

PC003-00

PC003-01

PC003-02

PC003-03

PC003-04

PC003-05

PC003-06

PC003-07

PC003-08

PC003-09

PC003-10

PC003-11

PC003-12

PC003-13

PC003-14

PC003-15

Signal

C2PURR

CCXNTD

HVTRMT

CCNTD

FM6D

FM6D

FM2DFM3D

FM2D

POT-S-ON

BIASAC

PSTBIAS

PSTACSPAC

LAON

MHRD

SHRD

Jack

J121A-13

J123-6

J114A-10

J106B-1

J109-1/J114B-3

J109-1/J114B-3

J117B-12J104A-1

J117B-12

J103B-8

J115B-10

J114A-3

J114A-1

J114A-7

J111B-8

J102B-5

J102B-3

Remarks

1: ON

1: count

0: high-voltage-output ON

1: count

1: half speed

1: full speed

1: half speed

1: full speed

1: ON

1: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

Name

SL05

CCX10

HVT

CCV

FM06/07

FM06/07

FM02FM03

FM02

POT

SL15

HVT

HVT

HVT

LA1

H1

H2



10-162

Description

Scanner motor brake signal

Scanner motor forwardsignal

Scanner motor drive signal

Scanner motor (overcurrentcontrol) current limit

Scanner motor mode 1signal



Blank exposure powersupply (0V) signal

Control panel LCD back lightsignal

Control panel CPU resetsignal

Internal signal (watch dog)

Power switch OFF signal

FT prohibit signal

Not used

Internal signal (tray X shiftstar)

Internal signal (tray Y shiftstart)

Address

PC004-00

PC004-01

PC004-02

PC004-03

PC004-04

PC004-05

PC004-06

PC004-07

PC004-08

PC004-09

PC004-10

PC004-11

PC004-12

PC004-13

PC004-14

PC004-15

Signal

M03BK

M03FW

M03ON

M03CL

M03MD0

M03MD1

M03MD2

B0V

LCDGHT

OPRST

PWOFF

PWOFF

Jack

J112B-5

J112B-7

J112B-6

J112B-4

J112B-10

J112B-9

J112B-8

J103A-8

J105B-11

J105B-5

J104A-8

J112B-1

Remarks

1: brake ON

0: forward1: reverse

0: ON

1: currentlimiter ON

0: blank ON

1: ON

0: reset

1: ON

1: ON

Name

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

LED2

LCD

OPEPANE

SW01

M3



10-163

Description

Front door open detectionsignal

Fixing/feeding unit detectionsignal

Internal delivery signal

Multifeeder door open detection signal

External delivery signal

Fixing cleaning belt lengthdetection signal

Holding tray inlet paperdetection signal

Holding tray registrationpaper detection

Fixing assembly outlet paperdetection signal

Holding tray pick-up detection signal

Holding tray re-circulatinglever home position signal

Hopper assembly connectordetection signal

Holding tray unit detectionsignal

Power switch ON detectionsignal

Control card detection signal

Internal signal (encodererror detection)

Address

PC005-00

PC005-01

PC005-02

PC005-03

PC005-04

PC005-05

PC005-06

PC005-07

PC005-08

PC005-09

PC005-10

PC005-11

PC005-12

PC005-13

PC005-14

PC005-15

Signal

FDOD

FFUCNT

IDPD

MFDC

EXDPD

CBOP

PS15D

PS14D

FXDEL

PS17D

HTLPD

HTCNT

SW1ON

CCNNT

Jack

J104A-4

J108A-2

J108B-12

J105A-9

J108B-7

J108A-13

J113B-10

J113A-3

J108B-4

J113B-11

J113B-6

J105A-4

J113A-14

J102A-6

J106B-2

Remarks

1: open

0: fixing/feed-ing unitconnected

0: paper present

1: closed0: open

1: paper present

1: belt out

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

0: home position

0: hopperconnector off

0: holding trayunit connected

0: ON

1: card present

1: error

Name

SW02

PS53

PS12

PS46

PS10

PS11

PS15

PS14

PS47

PS17

PS19

HT

SW1

CCV



10-164

Description

Hopper motor (toner stirring)drive signal

Pre-exposure LED ON signal

Hopper motor (toner supply)drive signal

Drum heater full-wave/half-wave switching signal

Total copy counter drive signal

Option copy counter drivesignal

Scanner scanning fan drivesignal (half wave)

Scanner cooling fan drivesignal (full speed)

Fixing drive solenoid drivesignal

Fixing cleaning belt drivesignal

Delivery paper deflectingplate solenoid drive signal

Holding tray re-circulatingbar motor drive signal

Holding tray registrationclutch drive signal

Holding tray separationclutch drive signal

Holding tray forward clutchdrive signal

Holding tray reversing clutchdrive signal

Address

PC006-00

PC006-01

PC006-02

PC006-03

PC006-04

PC006-05

PC006-06

PC006-07

PC006-08

PC006-09

PC006-10

PC006-11

PC006-12

PC006-13

PC006-14

PC006-15

Signal

M11ON

PEXP

M10ON

DHRD

TCNTD

OPCNTD

FM8D

FM8D

FXDSD

DPDSD

M7ON

HTRGCD

HTSPCD

HTFWCD

HTRVCD

Jack

J105A-4

J103B-2

J105A-2

J102B-2

J104B-2

J104B-6

J104A-5

J104A-5

J108B-18

J108A-11

J108B-10

J113A-9

J113B-7

J113B-8

J113A-7

J113A-6

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: half-wave0: full-wave

1: count

1: count

1: half wave

1: full speed

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name

M11

LED1

M10

H3

CNT1

CNT2

FM08

FM08

SL03

SL14

SL02

M07

CL03

CL06

CL05

CL04



10-165

Description

Upper right door opendetection signal

Lower right door opendetection signal

Copyboard cover closedsignal

Scanner home positionsignal

Deck/cassette 1 open/closeddetection signal

Cassette 2 open/closeddetection signal

Cassette-1 paper lengthsignal



Cassette-2 paper length signal

Right deck paper detectionsignal

Cassette 2 paper detectionsignal



Deck/cassette 1 lifterposition sensor signal

Cassette 2 lifter positionsensor signal

Address

PC007-00

PC007-01

PC007-02

PC007-03

PC007-04

PC007-05

PC007-06

PC007-07

PC007-08

PC007-09

PC007-10

PC007-11

PC007-12

PC007-13

PC007-14

PC007-15

Signal

RUPDOP

RLWDOP

CBCC

SCHP

RDEOPC1OP

LDEOPC2OP

C1PL0

C1PL1

C2PL0C2PL1

C2PL1

RDPD/C1PD

C2PD

PS33D

PS36D

C1LTPRDEL

C2LTP

Jack

J119B-4

J119B-7

J112A-4

J111A-2

J116B-10

J121B-13

J122A-5

J122A-6

J122B-5

J122B-6

J116A-7

J121A-10

J119A-7

J121B-10

J116A-4

J121A-7

Remarks

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: home position

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: lifter position

1: lifter position

Name

PS41

PS42

PS05

PS01

PS38

PS40

SV3

SV3

SV4

SV4

PS32

PS35

PS33

PS36

PS31

PS34



10-166

Description

Cassette 3 paper length 0signal










Internal signal (fixingassembly temperature errordetection)

Internal signal (CVR errordetection)

Internal signal (SSR errordetection)

Internal signal (power switchopen circuit detection)

Internal signal (total copycounter open circuitdetection)

Internal signal (optioncounter open circuitdetection)

Address

PC008-00

PC008-01

PC008-02

PC008-03

PC008-04

PC008-05

PC008-06

PC008-07

PC008-08

PC008-09

PC008-10

PC008-11

PC008-12

PC008-13

PC008-14

PC008-15

Signal

C3PL0

C3PL1

C4PL0

C4PL1

PS27D

PS30D

C3PD

C4PD

C3LTP

C4LTP

Jack

J122A-1

J122A-2

J122B-1

J122B-2

J117B-4

J130B-4

J117A-7

J130B-7

J117A-4

J130A-4

Remarks

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: upper limit

1: upper limit

Name

SV-1

SV-1

SV-2

SV-2

PS27

PS30

PS26

PS29

PS25

PS28



10-167

Description

Holding tray feeding unitdetection

Fixing claw jam detectionsignal

Service switch detection signal

Scanner locked detectionsignal

Left deck pick-up outletpaper detection signal

Cassette 3 open/closeddetection

Cassette 4 open/closeddetection

Sub thermistor error detection

Address

PC009-00

PC009-01

PC009-02

PC009-03

PC009-04

PC009-05

PC009-06

PC009-07

Signal

HTFCNT

FXCJS

SSWON

SCLK

LEXTPD

C3SS

C4SS

—

Jack

—

J108A-19

J106B-5

J114A-14

J121B-5

J117B-7

J130B-7

J108A-9

Remarks

0: holding trayfeeding unit-connected

1: paper present

1: ON

1: locked

1: paper present

1: open 0: closed

1: open0: closed

1: error

Name

HT

PS52

SSW1

PS48

PS49

PS50

PS51

TH2

Description

Not used

Holding tray feeding 2 clutchdrive signal

Fixing/feeding unit lockingsolenoid drive signal

Power supply unit internalrelay drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC010-00

PC010-01

PC010-02

PC010-03

PC010-04

PC010-05

PC010-06

PC010-07

Signal

HTF2CD

FFULSD

RL401D

Jack

J112A-9

J108B-2

J102A-5

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name

CL02

SL13

RL401



10-168

Description

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Multifeeder pick-up solenoiddrive signal

Not used

Internal signal (clock)

Pick-up motor brake signal

Address

PC011-00

PC011-01

PC011-02

PC011-03

PC011-04

PC011-05

PC011-06

PC011-07

Signal

SL10D

M02BLK

Jack

J115B-13

J114B-5

Remarks

1: ON

1: brake ON

Name

SL10

M02

Description

Internal signal (digit)




Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC012-00

PC012-01

PC012-02

PC012-03

PC012-04

PC012-05

PC012-06

PC012-07

Signal Jack

J125-1

J125-2

J125-3

J125-4

RemarksName

Description

Internal signal (key return)








Address

PC017-00

PC017-01

PC017-02

PC017-03

PC017-04

PC017-05

PC017-06

PC017-07

Signal Jack

J125-5

J125-6

J125-7

J125-8

J125-9

J125-10

J125-11

J125-12

RemarksName



10-169

Description

Multifeeder paper widthsignal (analog)

Cassette 1 paper widthsignal


Photosensitive drumpotential signal (analog)



Not used

Address

PC020

PC021

PC022

PC023

PC024

PC025

PC026

Signal

C1PW

C2PW

POT

C3PW

C4PW

Jack

J115B-4

J130B-10

J130A-12

J103B-9

J117B-10

J117A-12

RemarksName

SVR1

SVR4

SVR5

SVR2

SVR3

RDF-H1 (1/4)



10-170

Description

Stopper plate solenoid (SL1)

Paper deflecting platesolenoid (SL3)

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Pick-up roller sensor (S5)

Delivery sensor 1 (S6)

Pick-up sensor (S7)

Not used.

PCB internal signal

PCB internal signal

Not used.

Not used.


Registration sensor (S3)

Original width detecting VR

Not used

Reversal sensor (S8)

Delivery sensor 2 (S12)

Original tray paper sensor(LED1)

Registration sensor (LED2)

Address

PC027-00

PC027-01

PC027-02

PC027-03

PC027-04

PC027-05

PC027-06

PC027-07

PC028-00

PC028-01

PC028-02

PC028-03

PC028-04

PC028-05

PC028-06

PC028-07

PC029-00

PC029-01

PC029-02

PC029-03

PC029-04

PC029-05

PC029-06

PC029-07

Signal

STPSL

DFSLD

PUSP

PSP3

PDP1

DEP1

PDP2

DMPW

RVPD

PDP4

Jack

J5-10

J4-2

J5-2

J9-6

J9-9

J5-1

J9-20

J8-8

J9-12

J8-2

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

A/D valuestored inadjustmentmode

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: light ON

1: light ON

Name



10-171

RDF-H1 (2/4)

Address

PC030-00

PC030-01

PC030-02

PC030-03

PC030-04

PC030-05

PC030-06

PC030-07

PC031-00

PC031-01

PC031-02

PC031-03

PC031-04

PC031-05

PC031-06

PC031-07

PC032-00

PC032-01

PC032-02

PC032-03

PC032-04

PC032-05

PC032-06

PC032-07

Description

Belt motor clock sensor(S10)

Feeding motor clock sensor(S9)

Registration roller clocksensor (S11)

PCB internal signal

PCB internal signal

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Copier communicationsignal



Not used.


Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

PCB internal signal

Not used.

PCB internal signal

Belt motor drive signal

PCB internal signal

Feeding motor drive signal

PCB internal signal

Pick-up motor drive signal

Signal

BMCLK

FMCLK

RRCLK

Jack

J9-18

J9-15

J5-5

Remarks

alternatesbetween 1 and0 during rotation



1: ON (PCBinternal signal)



Name



10-172

RDF-H1 (3/4)

Address

PC033-00

PC033-01

PC033-02

PC033-03

PC033-04

PC033-05

PC033-06

PC033-07

PC034-00

PC034-01

PC034-02

PC034-03

PC034-04

PC034-05

PC034-06

PC034-07

PC035-00

PC035-01

PC035-02

PC035-03

PC035-04

PC035-05

PC035-06

PC035-07

Description

PCB internal signal

PCB internal signal

PCB internal signal

Original detection LED

PCB internal signal

Brake

Clutch

Paper retaining solenoid(SL2)

Push switch (SW1)

Push switch (SW2)

Push switch (SW3)

Re-circulation sensor (S13)

Upper cover switch (MS2)

RDF switch (MS1)

PCB internal signal

LED (PCB internal signal)

LED (CPB internal signal)

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Signal

DSD

BKD

CLD

WSLD

SW1

SW2

SW3

LDD

UPCC1

RFC

Jack

J8-4

J6-2

J13-2

J5-12

J14-1

J3-2

J2-6

Remarks

1: belt motorCW rotation

1: pick-up motorCW rotation

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: pressed

1: pressed

1: pressed

1: paper present

1: closed

1: closed

Name



10-173

RDF-H1 (4/4)

Address

PC036-00

PC036-01

PC036-02

PC036-03

PC036-04

PC036-05

PC036-06

PC036-07

PC037-00to

PC046-07

PC048-00

PC048-01

PC048-02

PC048-03

PC048-04

PC048-05

PC048-06

PC048-07

Description

DIP SW1

DIP SW2

DIP SW3

DIP SW4

DIP SW5

DIP SW6

DIP SW7

DIP SW8

Not used.


Registration sensor (S3)

Original width volume (VR1)

Not used.

Not used.

Not used.

Original tray sensor LED1ON signal

Registration sensor LED3ON signal

Signal

DEP1

PDP2

DMPS

Jack

J5-7

J9-20

J8-8

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

in hexadecimalnotation.



Name

Stapler Sorter-E2 (1/9)



10-174

Description

Feeding motor (M1) controlsignal

Push bar drive motor (M7)rotation control signal

Not used

Push bar drive motor (M7)drive signal

Guide bar motor (M8) pulsesignal 1




Reference wall drive motor(M6) control signal 1

Reference wall drive motor(M6) control signal 2

Non sort paper detectionsignal (PI3)

Reference wall home position signal (PI13)

Sort paper detection signal(PI4)

Guide bar home positionsignal (PI16)

Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 (M5)

Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 (M5)

Address

PC062-00

PC062-01

PC062-02

PC062-03

PC062-04

PC062-05

PC062-06

PC062-07

PC063-00

PC063-01

PC063-02

PC063-03

PC063-04

PC063-05

PC063-06

PC063-07

Signal

FDPWM

GBMA

GBMB

GBMA

GBMB

GWMA

GWMB

NSPEXT

GWHP

SPEXT

GBHP

MGMA

MGMB

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: Up

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper present

1: home position

1: paper present

1: home position

1: ON

1: ON

Name




10-175

Description

D/A converter serial signal

Not used

Feeding motor (M1) speedchange signal

D/A converter load signal

D/A converter serialcommunication clock signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Feeding motor (M1) CWrotation signal

Feeding motor (M1) CCWrotation signal

Stapler unit fixed clawreleasing solenoid (SL5)drive signal

Paper path switchingsolenoid (SL1) drive signal

Paper retaining solenoid(SL3) drive signal

Stapler unit position fixingclaw releasing solenoid(SL5) drive signal

Stapler motor (M2) CCWrotation signal

Stapler motor (M2) CWrotation signal

Address

PC064-00

PC064-01

PC064-02

PC064-03

PC064-04

PC064-05

PC064-06

PC064-07

PC065-00

PC065-01

PC065-02

PC065-03

PC065-04

PC065-05

PC065-06

PC065-07

Signal

FDMVC

FDMCCW

FDMCCW

MHRSLD

PSLD

PHSLD

HDRSLD

SPMCCW

SPMCW

Jack Remarks

1: controlspeed

0: load

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name




10-176

Description

Bin shift motor (M9) drivesignal

Stapler unit swing motor(M4) rotation signal

Stapler unit swing motor(M4) drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler unit shift homeposition signal (S2)

Logic voltage monitor signal

Not used

Bin internal paper sensor 2analog input signal (S7)

Stapler inside paper sensoranalog input signal

Bin internal paper sensoranalog input signal (S4)

Feeding motor current valueanalog input signal

Feeding motor speedchange analog input signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler unit shift motor (M3)pulse signal 1



Stapler unit drive motor (M3)pulse signal 4

Address

PC066-00

PC066-01

PC066-02

PC066-03

PC066-04

PC066-05

PC066-06

PC066-07

PC067-00

PC067-01

PC067-02

PC067-03

PC067-04

PC067-05

PC067-06

PC067-07

PC068-00

PC068-01

PC068-02

PC068-03

PC068-04

PC068-05

PC068-06

PC068-07

Signal

MVHP

SLDMB

SLDMA

SLDMB

SLDMA

Jack Remarks

1: Up

1: ON

1: ON

1: home position

0: voltagedown

at input, alternatesbetween 1 and 0.





1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name




10-177

Description

Stapler unit swing motor(PI8) clock signal

Bin shift motor (PI17) clocksignal

Feeding motor (PI5) clocksignal

Lead cam position detectionsignal (PI20)

Lead cam center positiondetection signal (PI21)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler unit swing motor(M4) pulse oscillation signal

Push bar drive motor (M7)pulse oscillation signal

Feeding motor (M1) rotationspeed reference signal

Not used

Bin shift motor (M9) pulsesignal 1




Matrix digit output signal 0





Matrix SEG output signal 0



Address

PC069-00

PC069-01

PC069-02

PC069-03

PC069-04

PC069-05

PC069-06

PC069-07

PC070-00

PC070-01

PC070-02

PC070-03

PC070-04

PC070-05

PC070-06

PC070-07

PC071-00

PC071-01

PC071-02

PC071-03

PC071-04

PC071-05

PC071-06

PC071-07

Signal

SWMCLK

BMCLK

FMCLK

LDP

LDCP

FDREF

SFTA

SFTB

SFTA

SFTB

Jack Remarks

alternates between0 and 1.




1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Name




10-178

Description

Matrix COM input signal 0





Gear swing (SL4) drivesignal

Not used

All solenoids drive signal

Stapling home positiondetection signal (Q1)

Reference wall home posi-tion detection signal (PI13)

Stapler unit swing homeposition detection signal (PI9)

Multi guide home positiondetection signal (PI12)

Stapler unit swing prohibitposition signal (MSW2)

Stapler unit orientation position 2 signal (S1)

Stapler unit orientation position 1 signal (S1)

Paper retaining signal (PI11)

Not used

Multi guide drivemotor/reference wall drivemotor drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC072-00

PC072-01

PC072-02

PC072-03

PC072-04

PC072-05

PC072-06

PC072-07

PC073-00

PC073-01

PC073-02

PC073-03

PC073-04

PC073-05

PC073-06

PC073-07

PC074-00

PC074-01

PC074-02

PC074-03

PC074-04

PC074-05

PC074-06

PC074-07

Signal

GCSLD

SPL-HP

GWHP

SWHP

MGHP

SGSTPP

HLD2

HLD1

PHS

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: all ON

1: home position

1: home position

1: home position

1: home position

1: staplingreading

1: front 1 location

1: 2 locations/rearsignal location

1: paper retain-ing position

1: ON

Name




10-179

Description

Stapling position LED 4 ONsignal


Staple absent LED ON signal



Front retrieval key LED ONsignal


Staple key LED ON signal

DIP switch 1-4 detection signal




Joint signal (PI1)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC075-00

PC075-01

PC075-02

PC075-03

PC075-04

PC075-05

PC075-06

PC075-07

PC076-00

PC076-01

PC076-02

PC076-03

PC076-04

PC076-05

PC076-06

PC076-07

Signal

JNTS

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: connected

Name




10-180

Description





Front door open signal(MSW3)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Staple mode key check signal

Stapler unit set detectionsignal

Staple absent signal (SW1)

Stapler safety detection signal (MSW1)

Stapler unit swing positionsignal (PI10)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Front retrieval key checksignal

Shift down key check signal

Bin home position signal(PI18)

PCB check signal

Front door open internal signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC077-00

PC077-01

PC077-02

PC077-03

PC077-04

PC077-05

PC077-06

PC077-07

PC078-00

PC078-01

PC078-02

PC078-03

PC078-04

PC078-05

PC078-06

PC078-07

PC079-00

PC079-01

PC079-02

PC079-03

PC079-04

PC079-05

PC079-06

PC079-07

Signal

DROPN

HKEPN

SFTYSW

SWGP

BHP

DROPN

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: closed

1: ON

1: stapler unitpresent

1: stapleabsent

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: home position

0: S-order PCB

1: door closed

Name




10-181

Description

Staple start key check signal

Shift up key check signal

Feeding guide home posi-tion detection signal (PI6)

Bin external paper detectionsignal (PI7)

Feeding guide up signal(PI2)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Controller PCB LED 1 ONsignal

Controller PCB LED 2 ONsignal

Not used

Bin internal paper sensor 2(S7) A/D input value

Stapler internal sensor (S5)A/D input value

Bin internal paper sensor(S4) A/D input value

Feeding motor current value(M1) A/D input value

Feeding motor speedchange (M1) A/D input value

Stapler internal paper sen-sor (S5) D/A output signal

Swing motor current value(M4) D/A output value

Stapler unit shift motorcurrent value (M3) D/Aoutput value

Address

PC080-00

PC080-01

PC080-02

PC080-03

PC080-04

PC080-05

PC080-06

PC080-07

PC081-00

PC081-01

PC081-02

PC081-03

PC081-04

PC081-05

PC081-06

PC081-07

PC083-00~07

PC084-00~07

PC085-00~07

PC086-00~07

PC087-00~07

PC088-00~07

PC089-00~07

PC090-00~07

Signal Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper present

1: UP

1: ON

1: ON

hexadecimal, 4-digit notation

Name




10-182

Description

Bin sift motor current value(M9) D/A output value

Guide bar drive motorcurrent value (M8) D/Aoutput value

Bin internal sensor intensityvalue (S4) D/A output value

Push bar drive motor currentvalue (M7)

Bin internal paper sensor 2intensity value (S7) D/Aoutput value

Address

PC091-00~07

PC092-00~07

PC093-00~07

PC094-00~07

PC095-00~07

Remarks

hexadecimal, 4-digit notation

JackSignalName

Sorter-E1 (1/2)

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper present

0: home position

1: home position

0: not connected

0: 24V DOWN

0: BUSY

JackSignal

EESCK

EEDI

EECS

BSMD

BSM

BMDWN

BMUP

FEEDPWM

PD

BHP

LDP

JNTS

EED 0

EEBSY

Name



10-183

Description

Serial clock for EEPROM

Serial output data EEPROM

Chip select signal for EEPROM

Bin shift motor (M2) drivesignal

Bin shift motor (M2) PWMsignal

Bin shift motor (M2) DOWNsignal

Bin shift motor (M2) UPsignal

Feeding motor (M1) PWMsignal

Delivery sensor (PI1) signal

Bin home position signal

Lead cam HP sensor (PI3)signal

Joint sensor (MS1) signal

24V DOWN detection signal

Not used

EEPROM serial input data

EEPROM BUSY signal

DIP SW 0

DIP SW 1

DIP SW 2

DIP SW 3

PUSH SW 1

PUSH SW 2

Not used

Not used

Address

PC062-00

PC062-01

PC062-02

PC062-03

PC062-04

PC062-05

PC062-06

PC062-07

PC063-00

PC063-01

PC063-02

PC063-03

PC063-04

PC063-05

PC063-06

PC063-07

PC064-00

PC064-01

PC064-02

PC064-03

PC064-04

PC064-05

PC064-06

PC064-07

Sorter-E1 (2/2)



10-184

Remarks

0: CW

0: ON

JackSignal

FMA/FMB

FMCCC1

FMCCC2

LED

NameDescription

Not used

Feeding motor (M1)CW/CCW signal

Feeding motor (M1) currentswitching signal 1

Feeding motor (M1) currentswitching signal 2

LED1 ON signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC065-00

PC065-01

PC065-02

PC065-03

PC065-04

PC065-05

PC065-06

PC065-07

Stapler Sorter-G1/Sorter-G1 (1/3)

Remarks

1: open

1: open

1: at HP

0: staple absent

1: at HP

0: at HP

0: paper present

1: ON

0: motor ON

1: paper present

1: power down

0: OFF

0: OFF

0: OFF

0: OFF

0: OFF

0: OFF

JackSignal

SOP

SPLOPN

SPL-SET

HKEMP

SPL-HP

SWGSET

SPLPK

SWGMD

BPD

Name

MS1

MS5

MS6

PI13

PI12

MS9

M5

PT1



10-185

Description

Joint signal (MS1)

Stapler cover (MS5)

Stapler set signal (MS6)

Staple sensor (PI13)

Stapler home positionsensor

Stapler swing signal (MS9)

Bin paper sensor

Not used

Staple LED signal

Not used

Stapler swing motor drivesignal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Bin paper sensor

24V detection

Bin HP sensor connectorOFF detection

Lead cam sensor connectorOFF detection

Bin shift clock sensorconnector OFF signal

Guide bar HP connectorOFF detection

Stapler HP sensor connectorOFF detection

Address

PC062-00

PC062-01

PC062-02

PC062-03

PC062-04

PC062-05

PC062-06

PC062-07

PC063-00

PC063-01

PC063-02

PC063-03

PC063-04

PC063-05

PC063-06

PC063-07

PC064-00

PC064-01

PC064-02

PC064-03

PC064-04

PC064-05

PC064-05

PC064-07


Remarks

1: at level (HP)

1: at HP

1: at HP

1: CW

1: CCW

1: ON

0: ON

1: brake

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

0: UP



10-186

Description

Feeding motor clock sensor

Bin shift motor clock sensor

Lead cam sensor

Bin HP sensor

Guide bar HP sensor

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler motor CW rotationsignal

Stapler motor CCW rotationsignal

Guide bar swing motor pulsesignal 0

Guide bar swing motor pulsesignal 1

Feeding motor clock sensor

Not used

Bin shift motor clock sensor

Guide bar swing motorcontrol signal

Feeding motor PWM signal

Feeding motor brake signal

Bin shift motor PWM signal

Bin shift motor ON signal

Paper path switchingsolenoid drive signal

Not used

Paper holding solenoid drivesignal

Bin shift motor UP signal

Address

PC065-00

PC065-01

PC065-02

PC065-03

PC065-04

PC065-05

PC065-06

PC065-07

PC066-00

PC066-01

PC066-02

PC066-03

PC066-04

PC066-05

PC066-06

PC066-07

PC067-00

PC067-01

PC067-02

PC067-03

PC067-04

PC067-05

PC067-06

PC067-07

Signal

FMCLK

BMCLK

LCHP

BHP

SGBHP

SPLMFW

SPLMRV

GBMA

GBMB

FMCLK

BMCLK

GBMON

FMD

PSLD

PHSLD

BMUP

JackName

PI6

PI9

PI2

PI3

PI7

M4

M4

M3

M3

PI6

PI9

M1

M1

M2

M2

SL2

SL3

M2



10-187


Remarks

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: stapler sorter

0: ON

0: open

0: open

1: paper present

1: paper present

Description

DIP SW1

DIP SW2

DIP SW3

DIP SW4

PUSH SW2

PUSH SW3

Stapler present/absentswitch signal

Manual staple key

Bin paper sensor D/A output 0








Joint sensor (PI)

Door sensor (PI)

Not used

Not used

Sort sensor

Non-sort sensor

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC068-00

PC068-01

PC068-02

PC068-03

PC068-04

PC068-05

PC068-06

PC068-07

PC069-00

PC069-01

PC069-02

PC069-03

PC069-04

PC069-05

PC069-06

PC069-07

PC070-00

PC070-01

PC070-02

PC070-03

PC070-04

PC070-05

PC070-06

PC070-07

Hereafter

Signal

MNSPL

JackName



10-188

Description

Primary charging wirecleaning motor drive signal

Pre-transfer charging wirecleaning motor drive signal

Transfer/separation chargingwire cleaning motor drivesignal

Primary charging wirecleaner home position signal

Not used

Address

PC097-00PC097-01

PC097-02PC097-03

PC097-04PC097-05

PC097-06

PC097-07

Signal

PCLM

PTRCLM

TSCLM

PCLHP

Jack

J103B-3J103B-4

J103A-1J103A-2

J108B-19J108A-1

Remarks

1/0:motor CW0/1:motor CCW



1: home position

Name

M12

M13

M06

Description

Not used

Pre-transfer charging wirecleaner home position signal

Transfer/separation chargingwire cleaner home positionsignal

Not used

Holding tray Y motor homesignal

Holding tray Y motor (phaseA) signal

Holding tray Y motor (phaseB) signal

Holding tray X motor holdsignal

Address

PC098-00

PC098-01

PC098-02

PC098-03

PC098-04

PC098-05

PC098-06

PC098-07

Signal

PTCLHP

TSCLHP

M08HLD

M08A

M08B

M09HLD

Jack

J113A-12

J113A-13

J113A-11

J113B-3

Remarks

1: home position

1: home position

Name

M08

M08

M08

M09



10-189

Description

Holding tray X motor (phaseA) signal

Holding tray X motor (phaseB) signal

Holding tray Y home position signal

Holding tray X home position signal

Lens X motor hold signal

Lens X motor (phase A) signal

CVR PWM signal

Not used

Address

PC100-00

PC100-01

PC100-02

PC100-03

PC100-04

PC100-05

PC100-06

PC100-07

Signal

M09A

M09B

HTXHP

HTYHP

M04ACMM04BCM

M04A

Jack

J113B-2

J113B-4

J113A-10

J113B-1

J110A-3J110A-6

J110A-1J110A-2

J111B-7

Remarks

1: home position

Name

M09

M09

PS20

PS21

M04

M04

Description

Lens X motor (phase B) signal

Lens Y motor hold signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC101-00

PC101-01

PC101-02

PC101-03

PC101-04

PC101-05

PC101-06

PC101-07

Signal

M04B

M05ACMM05BCM

Jack

J110A-4J110A-5

J110A-12J110A-15

RemarksName

M04

M05



10-190

Description

Lens Y motor (phase A)signal

Lens Y motor (phase B)signal

Lens X home position signal

Lens Y home position

Internal signal (lens X driveend)

Internal signal (lens Y driveend)

Internal signal(holding tray X drive end)

Internal signal(holding tray Y drive end)

Address

PC102-00

PC102-01

PC102-02

PC102-03

PC102-04

PC102-05

PC102-06

PC102-07

Signal

M05A

M05B

LXHP

LYHP

Jack

J110A-10J110A-11

J110A-13J110A-14

J110A-8

J110B-2

Remarks

1: home position

1: home position

Name

M05

M05

PS06

PS07

Description

Not used

Not used

Internal signal (holding tray X drive start)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC104-00

PC104-01

PC104-02

PC104-03

PC104-04

PC104-05

PC104-06

PC104-07

Signal Jack RemarksName



10-191

Description

Internal signal (holding tray Y drive start)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

PC105-00

PC105-01

PC105-02

PC105-03

PC105-04

PC105-05

PC105-06

PC105-07


Description

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Address

PC118-00

PC118-01

PC118-02

PC118-03

PC118-04

PC118-05

PC118-06

PC118-07


Description

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Address

PC119-00

PC119-01

PC119-02

PC119-03

PC119-04

PC119-05

PC119-06

PC119-07




10-192

Description

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Address

PC120-00

PC120-01

PC120-02

PC120-03

PC120-04

PC120-05

PC120-06

PC120-07


Description

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Address

PC121-00

PC121-01

PC121-02

PC121-03

PC121-04

PC121-05

PC121-06

PC121-07


F. Adjustment Mode ( )

Press the <</>> key to select the screen.Press the appropriate item to highlight.Enter the appropriate value on the keypad, and press the OK key to accept. (Use the

User Mode key to check.)

Screen 3-1

]3]



10-193

1/17

Item

LIGHT-5

LIGHT-5P

AE-SLOP

GLEAM-5

Description

Use it to adjust the reference ONvoltage of the scanning lamp forcopying.

Use it to adjust the reference ONvoltage of the scanning lamp for copyingin photo mode.

Use it to adjust the intensity fornewspaper originals in AE mode.

Use it to adjust the optimum exposure.

Settings

-35~35

-35~35

0~1023

53~139

Remarks

A higher setting willmake the copies lighter.


A higher setting willmake newspapercopies darker.


Screen 3-2



10-194

2/17

Item

BRAKE-SC

REGIST

Description

Use it to adjust the braking appliedwhen the scanner moves in reverse.

Use it to adjust the margin (registration)along the leading edge of copies.

Settings

0~100

-100~100

Remarks

A higher setting willincrease the braking.

A higher setting willdelay the timing atwhich the registrationroller turns ON, therebydecreasing the leadingedge margin. (in 0.1mmincrements)

Screen 3-3



10-195

3/17

Item

LE-BLANK

F-BLANK

R-BLANK

TE-BLANK

Description

Use it to adjust the leading edge non-image width (ON period of the blankexposure lamp).

Use it to adjust the margin along thefront (ON period of the blank exposurelam).

Use it to adjust the rear margin (ONperiod of the blank exposure lamp).

Use it to adjust the trailing edge non-image width (ON period of the blankexposure lamp).

Settings

-100~100

-100~100

-100~100

-100~100

Remarks

A higher setting willincrease the leadingedge non-image margin.

A higher setting willincrease the marginalong the front.

A higher setting willdecrease the rear margin.

A higher setting willdecrease the trailingedge non-image margin.

Screen 3-4



10-196

4/17

Item

PRIMARY

BIAS

PRETRANS

Description

Use it to adjust the application voltagefor the primary charging assembly.(Be sure to enter the value recorded onthe service label when replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the developing bias. (Be sure to enter the value on theservice label whenever replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the current for the pre-transfer charging assembly. (Be sure toenter the value recorded on the servicelabel whenever replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Settings

0~1023

Label value ±34

Label value ±200

Remarks

Screen 3-5



10-197

5/17

Item

TRN-1

TRN-DUP

TRN-OVL

Description

Use it to adjust the current (1st side) forthe transfer charging assembly. (Besure to enter the value recorded on theservice label whenever replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side, 2-sided copy) for the transfer chargingassembly.(Be sure to enter the value recorded onthe service label whenever replacing theDC controller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side,overlay copy) for the transfer chargingassembly.(Be sure to enter the value on theservice label whenever replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Settings

Label value ±100

Label value ±100

Label value ±100

Remarks

Screen 3-6



10-198

6/17

Item

SEP-1

SEP-DUP

SEP-OVL

Description

Use it to adjust the current (1st side) forthe separation charging assembly.(Be sure to enter the value on theservice label whenever replacing the DCcontroller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side, 2-sided copy) for the separation chargingassembly.(Be sure to enter the value recorded onthe service label whenever replacing theDC controller PCB in the field.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side,overlay copy) for the separationcharging assembly.(Be sure to enter the value recorded onthe service label whenever replacing theDC controller PCB.)

Settings

Label value ±200

Label value ±200

Label value ±200

Remarks

Screen 3-7



10-199

7/17

Item

C1-STMTR

C1-A4R

C2-STMTR

C2-A4R

Description Settings Remarks

100V model only

100V model only

100V model only

100V model only

Screen 3-8



10-200

8/17

Item

C3-STMTR

C3-A4R

C4-STMTR

C4-A4R

Description

Use it to fine-adjust and enter the paperwidth basic value (STMTR) for thecassette 3.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for the cassette3.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (STMTR) for thecassette 4.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for the cassette4.

Settings

000~255

000~255

000~255

000~255

Remarks

See p. 10-53.

See p. 10-53.

See p. 10-53.

See p. 10-53.

Screen 3-9



10-201

9/17

Item

MF-A6R

MF-A4R

MF-A4

Description

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A6R) for themultifeeder.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for themultifeeder.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4) for themultifeeder.

Settings

000~255

000~255

000~255

Remarks

See p. 10-53.

See p. 10-53.

See p. 10-53.

Screen 3-10



10-202

10/17

Item

BOOK-ERA

ATM

Description

Use it to adjust the margin for bookframe erasing mode.

Use it to set the operating environment(atmospheric pressure of the site ofinstallation).0:1 ~ 0.75 atm (up to an elevation of2500 m)1:0.75 ~ 0.70 atm (between 2500 and3000 m)2:0.70 ~ 0.65 atm (between 3000 and3500 m)

Settings

10~30

0~2

Remarks

Unit:1 mmA higher setting willincrease the margin.

Decrease the targetpotential for potentialcontrol to avoidleakage under a lowatmospheric pressure.

Screen 3-11

* Used to adjust the sheet-to-sheet distance for page composition mode withthe RDF in use. (The service manual shows how to make adjustments on theRDF; the same may be performed in the copier's service mode, by changingthe setting instead of pressing the DIP switch.)



10-203

11/17

Item

DOC-ST

P-INTRVL

*

Description

Use it to adjust the original stop positionwhen the RDF is in use.

Use it to adjust the sheet-to-sheetdistance for the RDF (2-on-1 mode).

Settings

-1023~1023

-1023~1023

Remarks

Unit:0.5 mmThe effective range isbetween -10 and +10;values outside therange will have noeffect.

Unit:0.5 mmThe effective range isbetween -10 and + 10;values outside therange will have noeffect.

Screen 3-12



10-204

12/17

Item

RFAE-F5L(100Vmodel only)

RFAE-F9L(100Vmodel only)

RFAE-F5R(100Vmodel only)

RFAE-F9R(100Vmodel only)

Description

Use it to adjust the RDF (AE mode andleft pick-up) scanning lamp referenceON voltage.

Use it to adjust the RDF (AE mode andleft pick-up) newspaper original intensity.

Use it to adjust the RDF (AE mode andright pick-up) scanning lamp referenceON voltage adjustment.

Use it to adjust the RDF (AE mode andright pick-up) newspaper original intensity.

Settings

-1023~1023

-1023~1023

-1023~1023

-1023~1023

Remarks

A higher setting willmake the slope lesssteep.

A higher setting willmake the slope steeper.

A higher setting willmake the slope lesssteep.

A higher setting willmake the slope steeper.

Note:Keep the following in mind for ‘DOC-ST’, ‘P-INTRVL’, and ‘LA-SPEED’ in RDF-relate service mode:1. These items affect the values stored in the memory on the RDF controller PCB;

therefore, initializing the copier’s RAM will not clear these values, not requiringre-input.

2. Changes in these items will change the values stored in the memory on the RDFcontroller PCB, and inputs will not directly affect the values in the memory; theoperation will be as follows:

Operation 1

When ‘DOC-ST 5 ← (2)’ is entered, (5-2 = +3), causing the original stop positionto shift by +3 units.

Operation 2

When ‘P-INTRVL:-7 ← (-5)’ is entered, -7 - (-5) = -2, causing the original stopposition to shift by -2 units.

3. For these items, pick-up and delivery settings will be by the User Mode key (∗)on the copier’s control panel instead of SW1 on the RDF controller PCB.



10-205

NEW OLD

Screen 3-13



10-206

13/17

Item

LA-LCKPS(100Vmodel only)

LA-SPEED(100Vmodel only)

RF-LENSY(100Vmodel only)

Description

Use it to adjust the RDF (stream readingmode) image leading edge.

Use it to adjust the original feedingspeed for stream reading.

Use it to correct offset in Y direction ofthe lens when the RDF's right pick-upmode is used (i.e., to correct thedisplacement of the lens referenceposition in right pick-up mode in relationto left pick-up mode).

Settings

2300~2500

-1023~1023

-50~50

Remarks

A higher setting willadvance the timing atwhich the registrationroller turns ON, therebyincreasing the margin.

A higher setting willincrease the speed,thereby reducing theimage. About ±3 mm (6mm total)

A higher setting willincrease the margin instream reading, therebyshifting the copy imageto the rear. Unit: 0.1 mm

Screen 3-14



10-207

14/17

Item

11X17PSZ

LGL_PSZ

LTR_PSZ

Description

Use it to fine-adjust the drive distance ofthe paper guide plate of the duplexingunit for each paper size.

Use this mode if pick-up failure orskew movement occurs when paperis picked up from the duplexing unitin two-sided/overlay copying mode.

Settings

-10~+10

Remarks

Step: 0.183 mm x 2Each step will affectboth front and rearpaper guides so that asignal step will result ina change of 0.367 mm.(A negative value willmake the distancesmaller.)

Screen 3-15



10-208

15/17

Item

LTRR_PSZ

STMT_PSZ

Description



Settings

-10~+10

Remarks


Screen 3-16

A negative value will make the distance smaller.A single step represents a distance of 0.367 mm; since a single step will affectboth front and rear, each step will result in a change of 0.183 × 2 mm.



10-209

16/17

Item

A3_PSZ

A4_PSZ

A4R_PSZ

A5_PSZ

Description



Settings

-10~+10

Remarks


Screen 3-17



10-210

17/17

Item

B4_PSZ

B5_PSZ

B5R_PSZ

Description



Settings

-10~+10

Remarks


G. Function Mode ( )

Press the <</>> key to select the screen.Press the item to highlight, and press the User Mode key (*) to start the operation.Check to make sure that the machine is in standby state when executing any

operations.

Screen 4-1

Note:The message "Check the Developer" will appear in response to the first press onthe [ key. After making sure that the developing assembly has been installed,press the key on the touch panel and then the [ key.OK

]4]



10-211

1/11

Item

TONER-S

Description

Use it for toner supply (at time of installation).The notation indicates the supply duration in sec:normally, 7 to 9 min (420 to 540 sec). Check tomake sure that the developing assembly is installedproperly and locked in place; then, press the key to start toner supply.

OK

Remarks

The operation will stopautomatically.

Screen 4-2



10-212

2/11

Item

ERROR

Description

Use it to reset E000, E001, E002, E003, E05, E013,E020 and the jam history, error history, sorter jam,RDF jam, or alarm history.Resetting E000, however, will not reset the jamhistory.

Remarks

Screen 4-3

* : The Start key red LED,The Start key green LED,The Pre-Heat key LED,The Interrupt key LED,The User Mode key LED,The Pilot Lamp LED will turn ON and OFF in sequence.



10-213

3/11

Item

DISP-LED

LCD-CHK

SCANLAMP

Description

Use it to turn ON the LEDs on the control panel.*

Use it to turn ON the LCD on the control panel. (The LCD back light will remain OFF for 3 sec andthen return.)

Use it to turn ON the scanning lamp. (The scanner cooling fan will also turn ON.)

Remarks

The lamp will remainON for 3 sec.

Screen 4-4



10-214

4/11

Item

BLANK

PRE-EXP

HPPR-MTR

BK-ROT

Description

Use it to turn ON the blank exposure lamp.

Use it to turn ON the pre-exposure LED lamp.

Use it to operate the hopper motor. (M10 and M11 will rotate simultaneously.)

Use it to operate the developing cylinder.

Remarks



The motor will operatefor 3 sec.

The cylinder willoperate for abut 2 min.

Screen 4-5



10-215

5/11

Item

AE-ADJ

Description

Use it to specify how density measurement levelautomatic adjustment should be executed in AEmode:If set to 0, set F5 original.If set to 1, set F9 original.

Remarks

Screen 4-6



10-216

6/11

Item

NIP

PO-CONT

Description

Use it to specify how nip automatic measurementshould be executed for the fixing roller.A solid black image will be created automaticallyand stopped at the fixing roller; in about 20 sec,automatic discharge will occur.

Use it to turn ON/OFF potential control.

Remarks

See p. 10-33.

1:OFF0:ON

Screen 4-7



10-217

7/11

Item

C1-STMTR

C1-A4R

C2-STMTR

C2-A4R

Description Remarks

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

Screen 4-8

* Slide out the cassette, set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette tosuit the paper size, and slide in the cassette. Thereafter, select the item on thescreen to read the paper width reference point.



10-218

8/11

Item

C3-STMTR

C3-A4R

C4-STMTR

C4-A4R

Description

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 1 (STMTR) for cassette 3.

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 2 (A4R) for cassette 3.

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 1 (STMTR) for cassette 4.

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 2 (A4R) for cassette 4.

Remarks

Screen 4-9

* Slide out the cassette, set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette tosuit the paper size, and slide in the cassette. Thereafter, select the item on thescreen to read the paper width reference point.

Figure 10-621

A4/A3

A4R

STMT-R

STMT-R(139.7mm)

A4R(210mm)

A4(297mm)

Var

iabl

e re

sist

or o

utpu

t

Paper width

(Reference)



10-219

Note:The value ‘A6R’ (width) is used as oneof the basic values when the paperwidth detecting VR of the multifeeder isreplaced.However, the size label does not show“A6R,” and the width guide will not clickinto position.As a guide, keep in mind that A6R isthe result of A4 paper folded into fourwith the width being 105 mm.

9/11

Item

MF-A6R

MF-A4R

MF-A4

Description

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 1 (A6R) for the multifeeder.

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 2 (A4R) for the multifeeder.

Use it for automatic adjustment of paper widthreference point 3 (A4) for the multifeeder.

Remarks

Screen 4-10

* Executing 'START' will keep the indication on the screen '0'. Refer to LEDs 1,2, and 3 of the RDF controller PCB (flash in sequence or simultaneously) .



10-220

10/11

Item

RFSKEW

RF-AE

RFSE-INT

S-BCLN

Description

Use it to correct skew movement in the RDF.

Use it for automatic adjustment of the RF AE sensor.

Use it to initialize the RDF sensor.

Use it to clean the RDF separation belt.

Remarks

100V model only.

*

Screen 4-11



10-221

11/11

Item

RAM-INIT

Description

Use it to initialize the RAM on the DC controllerPCB.

Remarks

After initialization, theCopy Start screen willappear.

H. Options Mode ( )

Press the <</>> key to select the screen.Press the appropriate item to highlight; then, enter the appropriate value on the

keypad.Use user mode to set/re-set each mode.

Screen 5-1

]5]



10-222

1/9

Item

SHUT-OFF

DENS-ID

SIZE-DET

COIN-SET

Description

Use it to turn ON/OFF the auto shut-off function.

Use it to switch copy density notation.

Use it to turn ON/OFF the size detection function.

Use it to switch between ''coin'' and ''copy card'' forthe display of the control card on the control panel.

Remarks

1:OFF0:ON

0:9-step1:17-step

1:OFF0:ON

0:control card1:coin2:copy card

Screen 5-2



10-223

2/9

Item

DK-SZ-R

DK-SZ-L(Not used)

COPY-LIM

CALL-SW

Description

Use it to switch the paper sizes for the deck.

Use it to switch the paper size for the left deck.

Use it to set the copy count upper limit.(May be any number between 1and 999.)

1. You may use any available area within thecurrent mode memory.

2. Use 'OPTION CALL SW' in service mode (] 5])0 : Disable call function. (All will be used for

mode memory.)1~9 : Enable call for the settings (copying modes).

The initial value is '0' and may be set tobetween '1' and '9'.

3. A call function may be recalled in the same way amode memory is recalled.

4. The settings will be stored in response to anormal copy start (not after jam, alarm, interrupt, suspension).For instance, if the setting is '3',mode memory 7:most recent copying modemode memory 8:second most recent copying

mode counting from memory 7mode memory 9:second most recent copying

mode counting from memory 8mode memory 1~6: functions as normal mode

memory

Remarks

0:A41:LTR2:B5

0:A41:LTR2:B5

Screen 5-3



10-224

3/9

Item

M-NOTATI

Description

Use it to change the available paper size listing ofthe multifeeder.

Remarks

Screen 5-4



10-225

4/9

Item

U-NOTATI

AE-SW

DOC-F-SW

DF-SIZE

Description

Use it to switch the notation for universal size papers:0: indicates U1, U2, U3, U51: indicates the size selected under 'CST-GRP'

Use it to specify whether to use the RDF's AE orthe copier's AE.(Normally, the RDF's AE will be used whenever theRDF is used; select the copier's AE if the RDF's AEfails for some reason.) Note that stream reading willnot be available when the RDF's AE is not used.

Use it to enable/disable stream reading.

Use it to specify auto paper selection for a stack ofmixed AB- and Inch-configuration papers.Enable it according to the model used; detection willoccur, for instance, when A4 and LTR paper areused at the same time.

Remarks

100V model only.1: Copier0: RDF

100V model only.0: Enable1: Disable

0: Enable detection1: Disable detection

Screen 5-5



10-226

5/9

Item

CST-GRP1

CST-GRP2

CST-GRP3

CST-GRP4

Description

Use it to select the type of notation when 'U-NOTATI' for universal size paper is set to '1'.0: G LTR (indicated as LTR)1: K LGL (indicated as U)

Use it to select the type of notation when 'U-NOTATI' for universal size paper is set to 1'.0: FLSC (indicated as FLSC)1: OFI (indicated as OFI)2: E-OFI (indicated as OFI)3: A-LGL (indicated as LGL)4: S-OFI (Indicated as OFI)

Use it to select the type of notation when 'U-NOTATI' for universal size paper is set to '1'.0: G LGL (indicated as LGL)1: FOLI (indicated as FOLI)2: A FLS (indicated as FLSC)

Use it to select the type of notation when 'U-NOTATI' for universal size paper is set to '1'.0: LTR (indicated as LTR)1: A LTR (indicated as LTR)

Remarks

Screen 5-6



10-227

6/9

Item

FUZZY

VDT-SW

CPMKP-SW

OHP-TEMP

Description

Use it for controlling (fuzzy) the current applied tothe pre-transfer, transfer, and separation chargingassemblies according to the ambient temperature.You may disable control and opt for one of threeenvironment settings.

Use it to switch the dark area target potential (VDT)for potential control if the solid areas of copy imagesare too light.

Use it to turn ON/OFF the special sequence inwhich the copying speed is decreased to maintainfixing of copy images in a low-temperatureenvironment.

Use it to lower the fixing temperature by a specificrange.

Remarks

0:Fuzzy control ON1:If the image is light

under high humiditycondition

2:If the humiditycondition is normal

3:If copy paper comesinto contact with thecleaner separationclaw under lowhumidity condition

Select '0', '1', '2', or '3'on the keypad, andpress the ] key.

-2: for lighter images-1: for somewhat

lighter images0: default+1: for somewhat

darker images+2: for darker images

0: ON1: OFF

0: Normal control temp1: –5°C2: –10°C3: –15°C4: –20°C

Screen 5-7



10-228

7/9

Item

IDL-SW

IDL-MODE

TSPLY-SW

AL-DISP

Description

Use it to turn ON/OFF the drum idle rotation modeto prevent distortion of images under high-humidityconditions or light images at time of power-on (e.g.,in the morning).

Use it to switch the idle rotation mode when thepower switch is turned ON with the surfacetemperature of the fixing roller 75°C or less.If the humidity increases at times and causes imagefaults, select '1' or '2' even in a normal operatingenvironment.

Use it to switch toner supply in reference to thehumidity sensor.

Use it to specify whether the indication of the weblength alarm and the waste toner full alarm shouldbe in service mode only or at all times.

Remarks

0:OFF (no idle rotation)1:ON (control by IDL-

MODE setting)

0:automatic controlusing humiditysensor data

1:idle rotation for 2 min2:idle rotation for 5 min

0:control toner supplymotor using humiditydata

Medium to low humidity:ON for 2 secOFF for 1 sec

High humidity:ON for 4 secOFF for 2 sec

1:toner supply motorON for 2 sec andOFF for 1 sec

0:in service mode only1:at all times

Screen 5-8



10-229

8/9

Item

F-POT-SW

F-POT-D

F-HUM-SW

F-HUM-D

Description

Enter '1' if transfer separation faults occur becauseof an error (faulty) in the potential sensor.Use it as a tentative remedy until replacing thepotential sensor.

Use it when changing the setting 'F-POT-SSW' (0→ 1).0:If the user uses text-oriented originals.1:If the user uses photo-oriented originals.2:If re-transfer (white spots at points 50 mm around

the leading edge) occurs.The degree of separation current is in the order of 0> 1 > 2.

Enter '1' if an error (fault) is found in the environmentsensor (so that the copier will assume the input of F-HUM-D as the output of the humidity sensor).Use it as a tentative remedy until replacing theenvironment sensor.

Enter an approximate humidity value of the site ofinstallation; between 30% and 99%.

Remarks

Factory default : 35

Screen 5-9



10-230

9/9

Item

SCAN_SEL

2SIDE_SL

M-LENGTH

PO-CNTMD

Description

Use it to turn ON/OFF the original size detectionfunction for RDF non-default original sizes.ON: So that an assumed original size will be used if

the size of an original is not one of the defaultsfor such modes as require identification oforiginal size (APS, AMS, frame erasing).

Use it to select two-sided mode (one-sided to two-sided) as standard copying mode.(If '0' is selected, you must initialize the standardmode in user mode for the notation 'two-sided' toappear.)

Use it to register a non-default size paper formultiple manual feeding.

Note:Copying is allowed only when the copier isnot equipped with a sorter. (Otherwise, asorter jam would occur because of a lengtherror.)

Use it to specify whether to turn ON/OFF potentialcontrol for the first normal copying run in 10/60 minafter standby (following power-on).

Remarks

0: OFF1: ON

0: OFF1: ON

432 to 600 mm(in 0.1 mm)

0: ON1: OFF

I. Counter Mode ( )

•Press the <</>> key to select the screen.•Press the item to highlight; then, depressing the service switch while the screen ison the display, press the C key on the control panel to reset the counter reading to‘00000000’.

Screen 6-1

]6]



10-231

1/5

Item

L-TOTAL

L-MULTI

L-CST1

L-CST2

L-CST3

L-CST4

Description

Use it for the large-size total copy counter. (paper length 300 mm or more or non-default size)

Use it for the large-sized multifeeder copy counter. (paper length 300 mm or more or non-default size)

Use it so that copies from the paper deck will not becounted but copies from the large-size cassette 1will be counted. (paper length 300 mm or more ornon-default size)

Use it so that copies from the paper deck will not becounted but copies from the large-size cassette 2will be counted. (paper length 300 mm or more ornon-default size)

Use it so that copies from the large-size cassette 3will be counted. (paper length 300 mm or more or non-default size)

Use it so that copies from the large-size cassette 4will be counted. (paper length 300 mm or more or non-default size)

Remarks

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Screen 6-2



10-232

2/5

Item

L-OVERLAY

L-2-SIDE

L-DF

Description

Use it so that the 2nd sides of large-size overlaycopies will be counted. (paper length 300 mm ormore or non-default size)

Use it so that the 2nd sides of large-size two-sidedcopies will be counted. (paper length 300 mm ormore or non-default size)

Use it so that large-size originals will be counted. (paper length 300 mm or more or non-default size)

Remarks

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Screen 6-3



10-233

3/5

Item

S-TOTAL

S-MULTI

S-CST1

S-CST2

S-CST3

S-CST4

Description

Small-size total copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Small-size multifeeder copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Small-size cassette 1/right deck pick-up copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Small-size cassette 2 pick-up copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less) (100V model only)

Small-size cassette 3 pick-up copy counter (paper length 300 or less)

Small-size cassette 4 pick-up copy counter (paper length 300 or less)

Remarks

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '9999999'.

Screen 6-4



10-234

4/5

Item

S-OVERLAY

S-2-SIDE

S-DF

Description

Small-size overlay 2nd side copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Small-size 2nd side 2-sided copy counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Small size original counter (paper length 300 mm or less)

Remarks

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Screen 6-5

* In view of such durables as requiring replacement by pick-up source (e.g., RDF separation pad).



10-235

5/5

Item

WEB

WSTTNR

L_PU]

R_PU]

PRINT-JAM

DH-JAM

Description

Copy counter after replacement of the fixingcleaning belt (An alarm will be issued at the start ofservice mode after making 250,000 copies.)

Copy counter after disposal of the waste toner fromthe waste toner case (An alarm will be issued at thestart of service mode after making 250,000 copies.)

RDF left pick-up counter

RDF right pick-up counter(100V model only.)

Copier/sorter jam counter

Feeder jam counter

Remarks

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

Returns to '00000000'after '99999999'.

nn Incrementing the Counter Readingq TOTAL

• For the 1st side of overlay/2-sided copies, when paper is stacked on the holdingtray.

• For one-sided copies and the 2nd side of overlay/2-sided copies, when the paperis discharged outside the machine. (If a sorter is installed, when the paper isdischarged to the sorter bin.)

w OVERLAY, 2_SIDE• When the paper (overlay/2-sided copy) is discharged outside the machine.

e MULTI, CST• When the copy paper picked up from each of these sources is discharged outside

the machine.• For the 1st side of an overlay/2-sided copy, when the paper is stacked on the

holding tray.r RDF

• When the size of the original is identified after picking it up in the RDF.



10-236

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS

The microprocessor of the machine’s DC controller is equipped with a function thatchecks the condition of the machine (particularly the condition of its sensors); it willindicate an error code on the control panel upon detection of an error.

A. Copier



10-237

Code Cause

• Main thermistor (TH1; poor contact,open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)• Thermal switch (TS1; open circuit)• SSR (faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)• Sub thermistor (TH2; poor contacrt;

open circuit i.e., the power switchturns off in about 5 sec after ‘E000’is indicated.)

• Main thermistor (TH1; short circuit)• SSR (faulty)• Sub thermistor (TH2; overheating)• DC controller PCB (faulty)


• Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)• Thermal switch (TS1; open circuit)• SSR (faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)


• Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)• SSR (faulty)• DC controller PCB

• SSR (faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Cleaning belt (fixing assembly;taken up)

• Cleaning belt sensor (PS11; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Connector (fixing assembly rear;poor contact)

• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Main motor (M1; faulty)• DC controller PCB ( faulty)

Description

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 70°C within 3min 30 sec after power-on.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller exceeds 230°C for 2 sec ormore.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 100°C within 2min after it has exceeded 70°C.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 150°C within 2min after it has exceeded 100°C.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller is 70°C or less for 2 sec ormore after it has reached 100°C.

• An open circuit is detected in theSSR used to drive the fixing heater.

• The take-up length of the cleaningbelt inside the fixing assemblyexceeds a specific value.

• The fixing feeding assembly hasbecome displaced during copyingoperation.

• Clock pulses (2 or more) are notgenerated within 1 sec after themain motor drive signal has beengenerated.

E000

E001

E002

E003

E004

E005

E006

E010



10-238

Code Cause

• Waste toner feeding screw (faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Pick-up motor (M2; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Hopper motor (M10, M11; faulty)• Developing assembly toner level

detection circuit (faulty)• Hopper toner level detection circuit

(faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)• Hopper connector (not connected)

• Total copy counter (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Option counter (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (faulty)• Vertical path drive electromagnetic

clutch (C215; open circuit inharness)

• Holding tray X home position sensor(PS21; faulty)

• Holding tray X motor (M8; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Holding tray Y home position sensor(PS20; faulty)

• Holding tray Y motor (M9; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

Description

• The waste toner feeding screwcannot rotate, and the detectingswitch (MSW4) has been pressed amultiple number of times within aspecific period of time.

• Clock pulses (2 or more) are notgenerated within 1 sec after thepick-up motor drive signal has beengenerated.

• The toner supply signal remains '0'(toner absent) for 2 min or moreduring copying operation.

• The toner supply signal does not go'1' in 10 min when toner supplysequence is initiated at time ofinstallation.

• An open circuit is detected in thetotal copy counter when the tonercopy counter drive is OFF.

• An open circuit is detected in theoption counter when the optioncounter drive is OFF.

• The holding tray X home positionsignal (HTXHP) is not generatedwithin 4 sec when the holding tray Xmotor (M8) drive signal is beinggenerated.

• The holding tray X home positionsignal (HTXHP) is generated for 2sec or more when the holding tray Xmotor (M8) drive signal is beinggenerated.

• The holding tray Y home positionsignal (HTYHP) is not generatedwithin 4 sec when the holding tray Ymotor (M9) drive signal is beinggenerated.

• The holding tray Y home positionsignal (HTYHP) is generated for 2sec or more when the holding tray Ymotor (M9) drive signal is beinggenerated.

E013

E015Note 2

E020

E030

E031

E050

E051



10-239

Code Cause

• Scanner home position sensor(PS1; faulty)


• Scanner motor (M3; faulty)• Scanner home position sensor

(PS1; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Scanner motor (M3; faulty)• Scanner original leading edge

sensor (PS3, PS4; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Lens X home position sensor (PS6;faulty)

• Lens X motor (M4; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Lens Y home position sensor (PS7;faulty)

• Lens Y motor (M5; faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Scanner lock sensor (PS48; faulty)• Scanner locking solenoid (SL1;

faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Lamp regulator (faulty)• PC controller PCB (faulty)

Description

• The scanner home position signal(SCHP) is generated for 0.5 sec ormore when the scanner motor (M3)drive signal is being generated.

• The scanner home position signal(SCHP) is not generated within 10sec after the power switch or theCopy Start key has been turnedON.

• The scanner leading edge signal(SCDP1) is not generated within 0.8sec after the scanner starts to moveforward.

• The scanner leading edge signal(SCDP2) is not generated within 1.0sec after the scanner starts to moveforward. (100V model only)

• The lens X home position signal(LXHP) is not generated within 9sec after the power switch or theCopy Start key has been pressed.

• The lens X home position signal(LXHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

• The lens Y home position signal(LYHP) is not generated within 9sec after the power switch or theCopy Start key is pressed.

• The lens Y home position signal(LYHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

• The scanner lock sensor signal(SCLK) is not generated within aspecific period of time after scannerlocking is initiated in stream readingmode.

• The scanner doe not stop at thescanner original leading edge 2sensor (PS4).

• The scanning lamp turns ON duringstandby.

• The scanning lamp turns OFFduring copying.

• The lamp ON detection signal(CVRON) is generated even whenthe scanning lamp ON signal(LAON) is '0'.

E203

(E202)No code indica-tion; keys arelocked; Note 2.

(E204)No code indica-tion; keys arelocked; Note 2.

E210

E212

E213(100V modelonly)

E220



10-240

Code Cause


• DC controller PCB (faulty)• Control panel PCB (faulty)



• RDF controller PCB (faulty)• Connector (poor contact)• 24V power supply (faulty)

• Sorter controller PCB (faulty)• Connector (poor contact)• 24V power supply (faulty)

• Auto power-off circuit (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

• Auto power-off circuit (faulty)• DC controller PCB (faulty)

Description

• An error has occurred in thecommunication between the master(Q156) and the slave (Q140) in themicroprocessor on the DC controllerPCB.

• An error has occurred in thecommunication between the master(Q156) on the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB and the slave(Q140) in the microprocessor on thecontrol panel PCB.

• The RAM (Q136, Q137, Q138,Q162) on the DC controller PCBcannot be initialized at power-on.

• The RAM (Q136, Q137, Q138,Q162) on the DC controller PCBgoes out of order after power-on.

• The communication IC on the RDFcontroller PCB goes out of order.

• The communication IC on the sortercontroller PCB goes out of order.

• An open circuit is detected in theauto power-off circuit.

• The auto power-off signal hasoccurred twice or more within 2 sec.

• The relay (RY401) in the powersupply unit does not operate inresponse to the auto power-offsignal.

E240

E243

E710

E711

E712

E713

E800

E802

Caution:1. When the self diagnosis function has turned ON, you can reset the machine by

turning its power switch OFF once.E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E005, E013, or E020 is not reset by turning OFFthe power switch; this is to prevent the user from casually resetting the machinewhen the thermistor has an open circuit, since such would overheat and damagethe fixing roller and would cause overflowing of toner from the hopper.For E000 through E003, the power switch will automatically turn off in about 20sec when it is turned on without resetting the copier. In the case of an open circuitin the sub thermistor (TH2), however, the power switch will turn off in about 5 secafter ‘E000’ is indicated.To clear E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E005, E013 or E020, you must clearthe data in the RAM on the DC controller PCB as follows:

1) Start service mode ( ).2) Press the / key to select ‘ERROR’.3) Press the OK key to clear the E code.4) The message display on the control panel will be refreshed, and the copy mode

screen will return.2. E015, E202, or E204 may be checked under ‘B-ERR1’, ‘B-ERR2’, or ‘B-ERR3’ in

service mode ( ).]1]

]4]



10-241

B. RDF Self Diagnosis

Note:When the self diagnosis mechanism has turned on, turn off and then on the powerswitch to reset.You may continue to make copies even when the RDF has gone out of order; simplydisconnect the lattice connector from the RDF, open the RDF, and place the originalon the copyboard glass.



10-242

Code Cause

• Data communication with copier(faulty)

• Pick-up motor (M1; fails to rotate)• Pick-up roller sensor (S5; faulty)

• Belt motor (M3; fails to rotate)• Belt motor clock sensor (S10; faulty)

• Feeding motor (M2; fails to rotate)• Feeding motor clock sensor (S9;

faulty)

• Original tray paper sensor (S1;faulty)

• Registration sensor (S3; faulty)

Description

• The communication is monitored atall times, and this error is detected ifthe communication is disrupted for 5sec or more.

• A flag is attached to the spindle ofthe pick-up motor (M1), and therotation of the motor is monitoredwith reference to the flag blockingthe pick-up roller sensor (S5).This error is detected when S5 doesnot turn on and off twice or morewith 1 sec.

• The number of belt clock pulseswithin 200 msec is below a specificnumber.

• The number of feeding motor clockpulses within 200 ms is below aspecific number.

• The output of the sensor is 2.3 V ormore in the absence of paper.

E400

E401

E402

E403

E411



10-243

C. Sorter Self Diagnosis

Code Cause

• CPU or communication IC

• Feeding motor (fails to rotate)• Feeding guide up/down mechanism

(e.g., interference)

• Push bar motor (fails to rotate)

• Reference wall motor (fails to rotate)

• Multiguide motor (fails to operate)

• Bin paper sensor automaticadjustment (faulty)

• Bin paper sensor automaticadjustment (faulty)

• Guide bar drive motor (fails torotate)

• Stapler unit drive motor (fails torotate)

Description

• An error has occurred in thecommunication between the sorterand the copier.

• The lock signal from the motor is offfor a specific period or more.

• The operation does not end within aspecific period after the motor drivesignal has been generated.



• Automatic adjustment of the binpaper sensor cannot be executed;or, there is an error in theadjustment value.

• Automatic adjustment of the binpaper sensor cannot be executed;or, there is an error in theadjustment value.

• The motor does not stop operationwithin a specific period of time afterthe motor drive signal has beengenerated.

• The motor does not stop to operatewithin a specific period after themotor drive signal has beengenerated.

• The clock signal is absent from theclock sensor of the motor within aspecific period.

• The input signal from the drivehome position sensor remainsunchanged for a specific period.

E500

E510

E522

E523

E524

E525

E526

E530

E531

n Sorter•Error Indications, Error Types, and Timing of Detection

n ResettingWhen the copier is making a copy,q The copier indicates ‘Jam’.w After jam resetting, the copier indicates ‘Turn On the Power’.e After the power has been turned off and then on, the copier runs a self check, and

will reset itself if the results are good. (If the results are not good, it will enter“down” state* , indicating ‘E5XX’ on its control panel.)

When the copier is not making a copy,q The copier indicates ‘Turn On the Power’.w After the power has been turned off and then on, the copier runs a self check, and

will reset itself if the results are good. (If the results are not good, it will enter“down” state* , indicating ‘E5XX’ on its control panel.)

• In “down” state,q The copier indicates ‘E5XX’.

You can disconnect the sorter and continue to make copies † (as long as you arenot using a function which requires a sorter).If you select a mode which requires a sorter, the copier will indicate ‘Mode Is NotAvailable’.The copier will run a self check and will reset itself if the results are good.

* A state in which an ‘E’ indication is displayed.† You need not detach the sorter from the copier.



10-244

Code Cause

• Stapler unit drive motor (fails torotate)

• Stapler internal paper sensor (faultyadjustment)

• Bin shift motor (fails to rotate)

• Power supply (faulty)

Description

• The operation does not end within aspecific time after the motor drivesignal has been generated.

• The stapler internal automaticadjustment mechanism has failed oran error has occurred in theautomatic adjustment value.


• Clock signals from the clock sensorof the motor are absent for aspecific period.

• The input signal from the lead camposition sensor does not change fora specific period.

• 24 VP is absent during the copier’sinitial rotation or when the CopyStart key is pressed.

E532

E533

E540

E550


APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-2C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5

D. RDF-H1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM......................................A-7

E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10

blank page

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART• A4, 2 Copies, Continuous, Paper Deck

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-1

Pre-transfer corona assembly (DC)

Transfer corona assembly


Separation corona assembly

Power indicator

Main motor (M1)

Primary corona assembly


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Sequence

9

10

11

12

13

14

Developing bias (DC)

Pre-exposure lamp

Blank exposure lamp

WMUP INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRF SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

15

16

17

18

19

20

Pre-transfer corona assembly (AC)

Developing bias (AC)

Scanning lamp

Surface potential measurement

Corona cleaning motor

Scanner motor (M3)



Developing clutch !

Forward Reverse

Controlled to 200¡C (205¡C)

Copy Start keyON

Power switchOFF

195¡C(200¡C)

Power switchON

Delivery fan (FM2)

Registration roller drive clutch (CL9)

Fixing heat exhaust fan (FM3)



External delivery sensor (PS10)


21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Feeding fan (FM6)

Cleaner fan (FM7)

Scanner cooling fan (FM8)

Total copy counter (CNT1)

Developing fan (FM5)

##'('( half speedFull speed

On (orange)

10 min (approx.)

10 min (approx.) 10 min (approx.)

10 min (approx.)

15 min (approx.)

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS

What follows below is a list of signals and abbreviations used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.

1. Signals

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6045 REV. 1 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-2

ACBTP AC BIAS TIMING PULSE commandACON AC TRANSFORMER DRIVE commandLED2ON BLANK EXPOSURE (0V) commandRDLTP RIGHT DECK LIFTER POSITION signalC3LMD CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE commandC3LTP CASSETTE 3 LIFTER POSITION signalC3PD CASSETTE 3 PAPER DETECT signalC3PL0 CASSETTE-3 PAPER LENGTH signalC3PL1 CASSETTE-3 PAPER LENGTH signalC3PUCD CASSETTE 3 PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandC3PURR CASSETTE 3 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandC3PW CASSETTE-3 PAPER WIDTH signalC3SS CASSETTE 3 SET UP signalC4LMD CASSETTE 4 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE commandC4LTP CASSETTE 4 LIFTER POSITION signalC4PD CASSETTE 4 PAPER DETECT signalC4PL0 CASSETTE-4 PAPER LENGTH signalC4PL1 CASSETTE-4 PAPER LENGTH signalC4PUCD CASSETTE 4 PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandC4PURR CASSETTE 4 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandC4PW CASSETTE-4 PAPER WIDTH signalC4SS CASSETTE 4 SET UP signalCBCC COPYBOARD COVER CLOSED signalCBOP CLEANING BELT OUT PRECAUTION signalCCNNT CONTROL CARD DETECT signalCCNTD CONTROL CARD DRIVE commandCL11D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 3 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL13D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 4 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL15D* VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 1 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL18D* VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 0 CLUTCH DRIVE commandDCBC DC BIAS CONTROL signalDCBTP DC BIAS TIMING PULSE commandDEVCD DEVELOPING CLUTCH DRIVE commandDHRD DRUM HEATER DRIVE commandDPDSD DELIVERY PAPER DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE commandDSZ1 DOCUMENT SIZE 1 signalDSZ2 DOCUMENT SIZE 2 signalDSZ3A DOCUMENT SIZE 3 signalDSZ3B DOCUMENT SIZE 3 signalDTEP DEVELOPER TONER signalEXDPD EXTERNAL DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalFCBSD FIXING CLEANING BELT DRIVE SOLENOID DRIVE commandFDOD FRONT DOOR OPEN DETECT signalFFUCNT FIXING/FEEDER UNIT CONNECT signalFFULSD FIXING/FEEDER UNIT LOCK SOLENOID DRIVE commandFM2D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)FM3D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)FM7D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)

FM2D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM3D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM5D DEVELOPING UNIT COOLING FAN DRIVE commandFM6D FEEDER FAN DRIVE commandFM7D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM8D SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN DRIVE commandFXCJS FIXING ASSEMBLY CLAW JAM signalFXDEL FIXING UNIT DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalFXDSD FIXING UNIT DRIVE SOLENOID commandFXGDSD FIXING ASSEMBLY GUIDE DOWN SOLENOID DRIVE commandFXGUSD FIXING ASSEMBLY GUIDE UP SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTCNT HOLDING TRAY CONNECT signalHTDSD HOLDING TRAY D-CUT SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTF1CD HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 1 CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTF2CD HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 2 CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTFCNT HOLDING TARY FEEDER UNIT CONNECT signalHTFWCD HOLDING TRAY FORWARD CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTJSD HOLDING TRAY JOGGING SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTLPD HOLDING TRAY LAST PAPER DETECT HOME POSITION signalHTPDD HOLDING TRAY PAPER DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTRGCD HOLDING TRAY REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTRVCD HOLDING TRAY REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTSPCD HOLDING TRAY SEPARATION CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTWSD HOLDING TRAY WEIGHT SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTXHP HOLDING TRAY X HOME POSITION signalHTYHP HOLDING TRAY Y HOME POSITION signalHUM1 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal 1HUM2 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal 2HVPCT PRE-TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVSCT SEPARATION CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVTCT TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVTPC PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandIDPD INSIDE DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalLAON SCANNING LAMP DRIVE commandLCDLGHT LCD BACK-LIGHT ON commandLED2CK BLANK EXPOSURE command (CLOCK)LED2DT BLANK EXPOSURE command (DATA)LED2LD BLANK EXPOSURE command (DATA LATCH)LINT CVR PWM signalLXHP LENS X HOME POSITION signalLYHP LENS Y HOME POSITION signalM1H/L MAIN MOTOR SPEED CHANGE commandM2BLK PAPER PICK UP MOTOR BRAKE commandM2H/L PAPER PICK-UP MOTOR SPEED CHANGE commandM3BRK SCANNER MOTOR BRAKE commandM3F/R SCANNER MOTOR FORWARD commandM3FS SCANNER MOTOR SPEED signalM3MD0 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (0) command


M3MD1 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (1) commandM3MD2 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (2) commandM3ON SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE commandM3CL SCANNER MOTOR PLL CONTOL commandM4A LENS X MOTOR (A) commandX-HOLD LENS X MOTOR (HOLD) commandM4B LENS X MOTOR (B) signalM5A LENS Y MOTOR (A) signalY-HOLD LENS Y MOTOR (HOLD) signalM5B LENS Y MOTOR (B) signalM8A HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (A) commandM8B HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (B) commandM8HLD HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (HOLD) commandM9A HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (A) commandM9B HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (B) commandM9HLD HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (HOLD) commandM1FG MAIN MOTOR 1/4 CLOCK PULSE signalM1ON MAIN MOTOR DRIVE commandM10ON HOPPER MOTOR (TONER SUPPLY) DRIVE commandM11ON HOPPER MOTOR (TONER STIRRING) DRIVE commandM2ON PAPER FEED MOTOR DRIVE commandM7ON HOLDING TRAY LAST PAPER DETECT MOTOR DRIVE commandMFDC MULTIFEEDER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalMFPCD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH ROLLER DRIVE commandMFPW MULTI FEEDER PAPER WIDTH signalMFRLSD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP RELAY SOLENOID DRIVE commandMFS MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECT signalMHOND MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECT signalMHRD MAIN HEATER DRIVE commandOPCNTD OPTION COUNTER DRIVE commandOPRST OPERATION PANEL CPU RESET commandPCLHP PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalPCLM PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE commandPEXP PRE-EXPOSURE LED DRIVE commandPOT PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL signal MOTORPOT-S-ON PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL SENSOR POWER ON commandPS14D HOLDING TRAY REGISTRATION PAPER DETECT signalPS15D HOLDING TRAY ENTRANCE PAPER DETECT signalPS17D HOLDING TRAY PAPER DETECT signalPS24D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-0 PAPER DETECT signalPS27D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-3 PAPER DETECT signalPS30D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-4 PAPER DETECT signalPS33D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-1 PAPER DETECT signalPS36D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-2 PAPER DETECT signalPS8D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 1 PAPER DETECT signalPS9D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 2 PAPER DETECT signalPTCLHP PRE-TRANSFER CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalPTRCLM PRE-TRANSFER CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE commandPWOFF POWER SWITCH OFF commandRDEL RIGHT DECK LIFTER LIMIT signalRDEOP RIGHT DECK OPEN DETECT signalRDFEDGE RDF DOCUMENT LEADING EDGE signalRDLMD RIGHT DECK LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE commandRDPD RIGHT DECK PAPER DETECT signalRDPUCD RIGHT DECK PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command

RDPURR RIGHT DECK PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandRGCD REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandRGPD REGISTRATION PAPER DETECT signalRL401D PWU RELAY DRIVE commandRLWDOP RIGHT LOWER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalROED ROLLER ELECTRO BIAS DRIVE commandRUPDOP RIGHT UPPER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalSCDP1 SCANNER DOCUMENT LEADING EDGE 1 signalSCHP SCANNER HOME POSITION signalSHOND SUB HEATER ON DETECT signal (120V)SHRD SUB HEATER DRIVE command (120V)SL10BD MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE commandSL10FD MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE commandSL10D MULTI FEEDER PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE commandSSWON SERVICE SWITCH signalSW1ON POWER SWITCH ON DETECT signalTCNTD TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE commandTEP HOPPER TONER signalTH1 FIXING HEATER THERMISTOR signal 1TH2 FIXING HEATER THERMISTOR signal 2TH DRUM HEATER THERMISTOR signalTSCLHP TRANSFER/SEPARATION CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalTSCLM TRANSFER/SEPARATION CORONA WIRE CLEANER DRIVE commandWTFL WASTE TONER FEEDING SCREW LOCK DETECT signal

2. AbbreviationsAER AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATIONCNTR1 CONTROL ROTATION 1CNTR2 CONTROL ROTATION 2INTR INITIAL ROTATIONLSTR LAST ROTATIONSCFW SCANNER FORWARDSCRV SCANNER REVERSESTBY STANDBYWAIT WAITWMUP WARM UPWMUPR WARM UP ROTATION


C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM


Not available


D. RDF-H1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM


1 2 1 21 2

3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5 6

12 1212

3456

123456123

1

1

2 23

3

456

789123456789

1 2 3 4 252627281 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 1415161718192021222324

5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 141516171819202122232425262728

3 2 1

22

2

12 12 1

11

21 3 2 1

1 2 31 2 3

1 2 31 2 3

3 1 23 1 2

3 1 23 1 2

3 1 23 1 2

3 1 23

331

11

2

22

3 1 23

331

11

2

22

3 1 23

331

11

2

22

1 21 21

12

212

3 41

12

23

34

41234

12

34

56

78

910

1112

43

21

43

21

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12 1

2

12

12

31

23

12

31

23

12

31

23

45

64

56

FG

FG

J1

J2 J3

J8

J13

J5

J6

J7

J11

J12

J4J9

J201

J101

J102

J216

J215

J214

J212

J214J212

J209J208J207

J305J304J303J206

J205J204

SL3

M1

M2

BK1

SL2

SL1

M3

CL

M4

VR

3 1 23 1 2

MS2

S1

S4

S3

S10S9S8S7S6S5LED1 LED3

PGNDP24LGNDL24

PG

ND

P24

LGN

DL2

4

RxGND

RxGND

RxDRxDTxGND

TxGND

TxD

TxD

MS1

(W) (W) (W)

(W)

(BK)

(BK) (BL)

C NO

C NO

+5V

+5V +5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

GY

BL

PU

SP

GN

D

GN

DGN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

PD

P3

PD

P1 P

VP

D

FM

CLK

BM

CLK P

DP

2G

ND

GN

DU

PC

C2

BR W BL

Y YBL

BL

BL BL

BL

BL

BL

BL

BR

BR

BR

BR

BRGY

+5V

LDD

GN

D

OP

CC

1+

24V

+24

VR

FC

CLD

GND

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

DEP1BLW

OROR

STPSLD

WSLD

FMD

DESLD

+5VDMPWGND

11

2

J203

2

V W PK

SB

J213(BL)

(W)

(BK)(W)

BR

BKD+24V

BL

BLBL

BLBLBL

BL

Y

YY

BR

VPK

SB

BR

WBL

YV

GYW

BKR

BKR

Y

BKR

V

R BL

OR

GN

OR

OR

OR

OR

Original width detecting

volume

Re-circulatingmotor

Display PCB

Upper cover switch

RDF switch

RDF controller PCB

Originalsensor

Stopper platesolenoidPaper holding platesolenoid

Brake

Belt motor

Feeding motor

Pick-up motor

Paper deflectingplate solenoid

Clutch

Original traypapersensor

Registrationpapersensor

Pick-uproller sensor

Deliverysensor

Pick-upsensor

Reversalsensor

Feedingmotor

clock sensor

Belt motorclock

sensor

Registrationsensor

Upper coversensor

A

12345678

B

C

D

E

F

G


E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST


APPENDIX

A-9

Tool description

Door switch

Cleaning oil

Mirrorpositioning tool

Potentialsensorcheckingelectrode

Environmentsensorchecking tool

Tool No.

TKN-0093

TKN-0464

FY9-3011

FY9-3012

FY9-3014

ShapeNo.

1

2

3

4

5

Notation

A

A

B

B

B

Remarks

For cleaning thefixing roller (10packs/box)

For adjusting theNo. 1/No. 2mirror position(front/ right as apair)

For checking thepotential sensor

For checking theenvironmentsensor

Frontdoor

Point of use

FFY9-3011

FY9-3011

R

TKN-0464-000

CLEANNING OILHUILE DE NETTOYAGE

CANON INC. JAPAN / JAPON

F. SOLVENTS AND OILS


APPENDIX

A-10

Description

Ethyl alcohol (Etanol)

Isopropylalcohol (Isopropanol)

MEK

Heat-resisting grease

Lubricant oil

Lubricant oil

Lubricant oil

Use

Cleaning:e.g., glass, plastic, rubber parts;external covers

Cleaning:e.g., metal;oil or toner

Lubricating; e.g., fixing drive assemblies

Lubricating:scanner rail;spring clutch

Lubricating:pick-up assemblyroller bushing (FS2-1005-000)

Lubricating:drive and frictionparts

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Description

• Do not bring near openfire.

• Procure localy.• Isopropyl alcohol may

be substituted.

• Do not bring near fire.• Procure locally.

• CK-0427 (500 g/can)

• CK-0451 (100 cc)

• CK-0524 (100 cc)

• CK-0551 (20 g)

Composition

C2H5O(CHZ3)2 CHOH

CH3COC2H5

Lithium soap(mineral oil family)

Moblybdenumbisulfide

Mineral oil(paraffin family)

Mineral oil(paraffin family)

Slicone oil

Prepared byOFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 (OCT. 1996) [33130/18723]REVISION 1 (MAR. 1997) [18723]

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146 Japan

PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) 0397S2.77-2

This publication is printed on 70% reprocessed paper.

Documents

Canon NP6045